Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

8/21/2019 Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/mazak-mazatrol-matrix-control-classroom-maintenance-manual-c740mt0201e 1/419

MAZATROL

MATRIX

CLASS ROOM

MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Mazak

IN

ONE

igital

M§JTUf@PMtOg

Solutions

MATRIX Sale points

..4

'

M

jySgQyyj

~T-

vC

1

1

-

'0?

i

lifiM

...

;

:

n*j|*c»*

.

t4

f*

/:

|e

display

mctions.

I

1

,

s==

-

J1

&2AWOX

i

A

u

g

0 'ÿ3Spic5Sgv';;

1

.;

S313

i

-'-

I.-'-'1'

‘

M

l

J

4;

• ÿ - ÿ • ÿ : =

• ÿ • • ÿ ÿ

»

.

‘-vV> V- -.1

{

•

;/•

lÿ

M

|g||

*

.

•

f

v;1:1:1;1:1:1:1;1.

TTI

j

-l~f

*

*

I

<

f

*

I

*

I

*

J

*fll‘

3

,’

I-I-~I

11

§2

£»

<?«ÿ

1& mMm

a

mi

:~

G3i

lwj

*. It

Iflj

1

f

1

: ' • ' <

a

>ÿÿ'1

-

1

1

1*.

IT

jTBil

I

j

I

M

W

m

[’-T’TT



MATRIX

C

type

INTE-M-INTE-eHU

Variaxis

II

-INTE-eVll

15

TFT

_

(XGA)

_

Pentium

in

_

1,26GHz

6

4

bit RISC

Dual

CPU

No.

of

steps:

128k

process

time: 16.6ns

MDS-DH

series

cycle

time :11

M

S

3000/

4000

r.p.m

(depend

on

motor)

:.S

machine

INTE-DI

•

INTE-e

12. 1

TFT

(SVGA)

Geode

300MHz

6

4

bit

RISC

Single

CPU

No.

of

steps

:64k

process

time:

160ns

MDS-CH

series

cycle

time:

55

MS

display

PC

CPU

NC

CPU

>1

V.'-v.

PLC

capability

Servo

AMP

servo

motor

encoder

capability

2000/3000

r.p.m

16,000,000

ppr

1,000,000

ppr

Windows 2000

(Windows

95)

PC

Windows

XP

OS

type

Ergonomically Designed Control

Pane

1. Large display

(15inch)

n

Hi

1$

1

'1

i I

:

I

LvJ

\i

6.

Key

layout by

function

2.

QWERTY

key

1

e.

i

:

h

:

,*

<

:r

•

,

-

.1

i

1 -VI

•

I

-

i

3,

Acrylic key

top

j

for

easy

click

7. Same

design

for

all

machines

II

4.

Rotary

override

switches

-

dm

A

K

8. Tactile

feel switches

-

allow

an

operator

§

to detect by

feel

*

CM

Y;

i

T

i

1

-‘L

...

:

f

M

5.

Operation

switches in

operator

side

3

I

ril

--

—

~~



The

equipment

of

a

USB

interface as

standard

has

facilitated data upload/download and connection

to

peripheral equipments

that

support IJSB.

In

addition,

large

volumes of

data

can

be

transferred at high

speed

between

networks

with

the 100BASE-TX compliant

LAN and

that

realizes

seamless communications between

an

office

and a machine

in

a

factory.

Interface Connected to

Standard

'Front

/ 3chSB USB1.1

1

100BASE-TX/1

OBASE-T

jPC

Card

Standard

95/97 compliant

(CardBus)

iBack /

2

slots

-PC Card Standard

compliant

(PCMCIA_V2.

1,

JEIDA_4.2

compliant)

j

2

slots

Type

I/U ma

x

2, Type

IE:

1

iBack

/

lch

thernet

|

iPC

card

r

jPC Card

Standard

ATA

compliant memory

card

only

:

1

slot

Type

I/E

(Type

IE

cannot

be

used.)

C

card Front

/

1

slot



[

MATRIX

ÿ#15/#

1

r

use x

1

\ IC

Card x

1 k

i

*ÿ

RSS

r«3

;

U.I-2S6

n

i

1

i

r

*

o

II

7

33

5«

j

T

>

lij

..r

-;‘T:

100BASE-T

1/F

PC

Card

x 2

(Back

Side)

ttrr

ifir

;B;

»&&

wmr§

mMml

9MR:

|

i

mm

i

m

f«IÿS

1 m

m

m

4m l

m

m

'#

MmK

**

i

•:

m

POO

lfÿ

jg|

: i; -

.**

»*;

»;

:.

I

iÿM|||f#i|

USB

x

2

S,

.:/ÿ

m

|»J

i

§

.

»

Rear

s ide of

part

surrounded

with the

yellow

frame

PC

Card

is??

*11111

T

:

‘;

a

safe-

i

i

i

JR

M9ll R|p?4

ML

I

&

Yi

J*

L

«g§

I

1

’

i

Hfl

R

-;ÿ3

Si iHH

Hr

I

[pgwÿ,h

i M

IS®

r

1

H

iT :

mpr*

*

r

imp

r

ii

mm

_

1

f*

7

X

T

..

m

IT

F

01

a

s'

-

*,

,

C;«

..

-•

-

«

|

m- .1

ill.

V'

T:

U

1

UN



Decrease

printed

circuit

boards

of

NO

unit

Reliability

up

because

decreasing

interfeces

between

each boards

WP

M640MP

r

o 13

boards

MATRIX

5

boards

s

sSIg

mm

yp« sfJ

;

m

.

:

,

a

m

i

%

B

MP

1

...

&

1

J

;

;

i

I

i

a';

-

*

I

111

.

Decrease

start-up

time

in cold climates because of

equipment

hard disk

which

is used as car

navigation

V-

£

item

Operation

temperature

|

0°C NC

start-up

time

M640

5-55

°C

About

22 min

utes About

2 minutes

MATRTIX

0-55

°C

$

In

addition

to the

existing

work simulation

for

checking programs,

th e machine

simulation

has

been

added

to

check

the

processing programs including a

machine

interference using fine 3D models of

such

as

the

machine,

a

workpiece

and

a

tool.

1)

Tins function

will

prevent a machine

interference or

collision before

actual

processing.

2)

Both

of

Mazatrol

and EIA/ISO

programs

can perform a

simulation.

*

The

EIA/ISO

program cannot perform a

work

simulation

of

the

5-axis

(4-axis)

simultaneous

machining.

:t:

The EIA/ISO

program cannot

perform a

work

simulation of the mold

machining using

the microsegment program

3)

This

function

simulates

the

machine

real

with

3D models

of

the

machine

and

equipped

tools.

(The

machine will be

delivered

with the 3D models

set.)

4)

A

simulation

can be

run

in

the

background.

Machine simulation

ork simulation

I

SB

*K».

PM

1

1W

*

.

i

:

-W-

j

l

mu.

.«•

f

}

i

;

'

-fi¬

x'- 1

fwifcfc

y

m

•

i

;

I

*.«*:*»

r* .«s*

-I*#*..

MW

-iK.Jt

a.l

I

1.*,l

ii

i

7

S'

flip

**i##,*lli*

34.1.

;

I

tr

4

.

J

Wmm

MVtXXXK

JM1

if;

*

i

i

If

-ÿ.

*

II

C*M

**>. i

j

it'

:

II

n

iktlSPI

»is*

1

1

m

—

.......

i i

*

_

_

*

;;

I

&3<w*«a»ga<iicsBS»i

NHM

MW

MMP

WWBB

I I

W&

i

AO

?>**/»)«

I'

't

WMTSias;

aw#

•

;

; •«

S««V.AT

.

arrcir

iwwrt1

feiffAfSii*

i

Base

«f««

wA«ir

§

til

m#wi

• Bras*;:;

WBJJEfcJAJ,-

MKSW

mmm

**»«

\

K#9 imm



The

intelligent safety

shield function

prevents

an

interference

or

a

collision

due

to

an

operational error

during the

manual

operation.

1)

During

the manual operation, the ganged operation

of

the actural

machine and

the

3D model simulation can

check

the

processing

status and

stop the

machine before an

interference

or a collision

ocurs.

2)

Checking

with 3D

models will

prevent

an

interference on

a

part

where

an operator

cannot

see

directly.

3)

The

integration of

the actual

machine

and 3D

models

simulates

the

machine movement

exactly.

4)

The

machine

can be

set up

quickly

because there is no need

to

worry

about

an interference

or

a

collision.

Actual Machine 3D Models

mm

m

m

i

I

1

f

'

m

*

*-ÿ

X,

I

mm

*

M

m

*

i

5

I;,:-'. ;

i

h

'i

tl fil

IU

\

,..il

M

m

m

IS

1

•

m

•

H

-

-

i .

i

I

fen

'A1,

i

;

i

4

’

LX

:1

>

I«

&

1

:

f

flllllg

i

I

I Iflll

-i

i-,

Sts

111

.

li.;

+

r

1

p

_

?

<r

4-

Tr

r*

i

li

cjMJ

[Intelligent

Thermal

Slueld]

Outline

The traditional thermal

displacement

compensation

function

has

performed the compensation considering that

the thermal

deformation of

the

machine

was proportional

to the

temperature. Using

this

method,

the

thermal

displacement

could

be

compensated

with the high

accuracy in the steady

state.

However,

just

after

the

spindle

speed was

changed, it

could

not

be

compensated properly

because

the

constants did

not

match

between

the

times when the thermal

displacement

and the

measured temperature changed.

The thermal

displacement

compensation software

(MazakTdc)

estimates and

compensates the thermal

deformation

of

the

machine

based

on

the

spindle

speed and the

temperature.

And

it

monitors

the

spindle

speed

and

compensates the

thermal

displacement

according to

the

speed;

therefore,

it can

compensate

it

properly

even

in the

transient

state.

The

MAZAK

voice

adviser

is

the

audio

messages by

MATRIX

itself

with

the

speaker

embedded

in CNC of

MATRIX,

notifying

the

safety

confirmation, the

contents

of

the

operation

during

the set up

of

the

machine and

others. It is

greatly

effective in

preventing

a

mistake due

to

the lack

of

attention

during

every working process.

1)14

languages (As

for

some

old Eastern

European countries,

please

use

English

or

a

neighboring country's

language.)

The

MAZAK

voice adviser has

52 messages

such

as

greetings

and

notifications

at

the machine set-up, when

starting

the

automatic

operation,

during

the

automatic

operation

or

during

the maintenance work.

&

Good

morning. Today

is <dayofweek>

<rnonth>

<day>

. Tins

is

manual

operation

at

10

times the feedrate.

' The

B-axis

is selected.

Pay

attention

for any

turret interference.

|

Tool

length measurement

for a tool has

not been completed.

|

Machine has

stopped

because optional stop is

effective.

|

Add

spindle

lubricant.

and

other messages.

M

:

Internal

speaker

I

:

<****?• vg*T-

S

m

mmm

MI

s

©

m

il i

1 11

r?

*

'MM

...

-j

V.

H

HI

.

i

iii

i

:

m

I

i~~

f -i-nri

*.

—

'w'”'

.

I

»

—

—

&»&&*»***

fBiiipi

mm

mm mm

&

fifed*

mmmmmmmmmmmm mmm

mmm

i

I

8

~m

mmmmmmmmmmm

mmmm

\m

mmmmmmmmmmmmmm mmm

m

a

MR



The

Mazatrol

program

has

made it

possible

to

control

the

upper

turret with the 1s t spindle and

the lower

turret

with the 2nd

spindle

simultaneously.

1st

and 2nd

process

simultaneous

cutting

1 1

rlFs y[i

Hi*]

31

31

ill

31

#

7

1

SfijHS

fjl

31

31

1B5B31

31

31

j]

t][r]

Processing which

used two programs (HEAD

-1,

HEAD -2)

like

Multiplex cannot

be

performed

in INTE

MATRIX

senes.

...

„ ,

Simultaneous cutting at

unrelated

work

pieces

Work

No.1

I

Work

No.10

mm

1,

Alarm

history

1)

A

history

of 10,000

alarms

can

be saved.

(48

alarms

in case

ofM640)

2)

Tire

data

is

saved

in

the

text

format.

Therefore,

it

is

useful

for

gathering

the alarm information.

[C:\MC_sdgWarm\Alarm.bet]

3)

It

is

possible

to

register

48

alarms

that are not

saved

in

the

history

file, such

as

Alarm No.128

OUTSIDE

INTERLOCK

AXIS,

which occurs frequently.

4)

The

alarm

number

has

been increased

4 digits due

t o the addition of new functions.

fXAftm ms

i

:

*• *

»#

It

1A..W

Vr U

*»' .¥

i* la

s* s

mm

I*

sa

s* t

S* *:»

*• , Am ,

i».

*

so

?;*

m&Ktxt

JO:

*

m

*

I#

*

V* V

M

«

TO W

If

*

&<«

if

1

S3

**

%tx*m

if

*.'ÿ

3

-

t* vm*w

if

*

i

»*

S

24 fct tt lS '

a

«

m.tf

zttt

3*8

*• *

i'X*i w« »

»K*

itw

J*N

*##*

Bttf

1*W It** . re*- *.#»t

3*8 4M«

MM

fc*f

Mrs- IfSJStvM MMJ

2SS *5 tOM. IKrf (M|

»**

*ÿ»

»«X«

K«Wi«MMKin<

1*01 ISM

US*

S'MMW'IK* ISMS.

a

OKMKMWf

jHtoNMr:

»**»

tw

ISB

I

9

S3

**

ssÿsssS

I

ass

t

**

*«.

.

t-SIM

,-.

8OTW

;

>

i»»* mm mt*

in i

»

it m'MWM'

a**

HAS

KM

*ÿ**>:

ttfjunftMfc

»»*»<*

******

SUSIMS.

wsmtt;*

CJM*

ur

*«*

SUI&U,

tH&ttl,* ttmwr

318

<88

VK

*

3* i?

»».

'*.ÿ**

S»

t*

o.

ss* s*

*» IOTWI

*ÿ

ai

*» ka erwtase

*.*

SO

*

»• »

»»

tWMB

•»**»»»*.

«.#*ÿ**

*» »«

iJM*

»

>*.

s*

,n

wW'Sentb.

*

t»

»

• >

2*« me MH SU«*i «1#*0*

KW-*

.

a*s *f<x

MM t»A«a*

saw.

3*«

if

r«ra«.b»i.f

:

m

SS

di'lr'

*

+

II

««

?*'

I

**'

sat**;-#:*

ww»-

mmOs

:

tllte

II

I

-I

.

Running Management

Display

,

1)

The running management

data

for

12

months

can be

displayed.

2)

The use status of

spindles

and the

alarm information

can

be

checked

each

day.

Use

status

of spindles (speed

and

load)

Alarm information

e

*wwtw»

£3

*»T W

H

Bsm?

»*»#?««*ÿ

||

tssum'

Li

*>T

**

9kn.£rtm

tx <S

'

m

ÿ>«*.

n iw

wt

sn

**

*

rmi

«8

:

n

«><

t>S»

**

feJfS

«S;*»

3H»

jsiitxa

BeiSa&ai

xt

mm

'ÿuta

ws.nt»»

T».»

»* ><0

-

B9-:

M

-

«*.:#* *?

*»• :

«

'

H«#

*«i

in;

is

** •%*

jtWKJUss*

3 Sr tS M* .* fi£ i’W *

&«**«*

s

s'M?

ammwm

f***

m \

VMMK

*emt *K***«SM:

.{«;*»

• ÿ

Sfrft

<ÿ<)

».»»

ÿ

:

Mtf-J

X

AW*

{.-V

»ÿ*>*ÿ

»*»

K'

:i

Sti

• *«•

ME

*'I- «*

• H fcS I

*

«• » 36:

**

*/

S

H ?<t

¥3

MEM

I

t

«• **«;

i

y

KW 4

:'l

£vrt*>» >

AM.

•

U

*

#ÿ£•«.

S

UM*»

w«a-

1

< • *»

kwaiK

<<:*»•

«

«***•

s

>*«*.»

•*

mm.

% u<m

»:

*»*<*•

xwrnm?

*

«*«*>

1

«»«

S

>

i

JL

V;«x5scsssssxd ssssKSÿsxJssissxsx;

;si

iSSSKSSSSXK

JXXSXSSS

KSSXKSSXSX:



3.

DIAGNOSIS MONITOR

Display

The

data

of

TO

MONITOR

DISP are always

displayed

in

both

SHORT

and LONG.

Also,

one block of

data

for MEMORY MONITOR DISP

and two blocks

of

data fo r

I/O

MONITOR

DISP

have

been

increased.

4. FLC

SIGNAL

Display

The

addresses

of

a

device

corresponding

to each

TITLE

are displayed.

5.

HARDWARE MONITOR

Display

The

contents

of

the

display

will

be

altered

due

to

the

hardware

change.



6.

VERSION Display

The ladder version for the

virtual

machining is

displayed.

UNIT

ITEM

MAIN-21

MAIN-B

LG-ENG

LADDER-F

100

1W5

68-AO 016

LADDER-B

VERSION

1001W000-A*W0

1001W001-A*W0

1001W011-AXW0

10

0

1W568-A00

IB:

LGP

7. SERVO MONITOR & SPINDLE

MONITOR Displays

Tire

servo

data is

displayed

on the

SPINDLE

MONITOR

display,

as

the spindle

has

become

servo

type.

8.

Start

of

Application

Software from

MazatrolMenu

Application

softwares

can

be started from the

Mazatrol

menu

by editing

a text

file

for a

menu,

(e.g.:

C:\MC__s

dg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.

txt)

9,

Standard Installation of

Print Screen

Software

on

NC

A

file

can

be saved

in

either of

the

TNG

and “BMP formats.

IS

Print

Screen

3

:

& SAVE

Active Print Screen &

SAVE

10,

Operation Log

& Operation

Player

Softwares (M740Eye.exe

& M740Player.exe)

In

case

that

a

low

reproducible

trouble

occurs during a

complicated operation,

it

can be replicated by repeating

the

operation

using

the

operation

log

and

operation

player

softwares,

winch have been installed on NC

as

a

standard

specification.



16



17



18



Control

Overview

Control

unit

MI-P12-M2

board

CU7-MA513-22

\

N011

card

HN102

card

HN123

card

HN163

card

HN482

card

HN531card

.«*ÿ

[% ,

MI-P12-M2

HN011

HN102

HN123

HN163

HN482

:

Board

PC

unit

:

Relay

card

:PLC

engine

card

:

Sub-CPU card

: NC base

card

:

Memory

card

(FLROM/SRAIVI)

-.Axis

extension I/F

and

CardBus

slot

N

IK

HN531



Back

Side

of

Matrix

(jBWi

• • • ; ÿV T ** ': C

M

i

ail

P

m

«x-#

M

Wwmm

.

M

s’

i

-

i

i

i

IS85

UK

M$M

:

I

.t?

0

2

Backlights

m

i

ill

jwWMNggg*

.

IU.MIIHW

m

ÿ

SB

wm

.-mm

pl*l*

'MM

.•

—

•

ir

-V

-‘.’l

L..._ÿiÿaaiiiSjÿH

—

~w-

-M

m

:-'

&

Efc

V

it

US

r'-;:

-I

|ÿ#S

(EffiiSiK

r

%..

V

:

y,

:-i

m

‘

'4*

1

'i

RS?

mm m

n

ms

wimmm

3#

w

m

(S

I

“.gÿ—

;;'.

»ÿ

e-

rÿS

iiMMHI

*:r.OT

T;

kjtCi'i:.-:

Right

Side

of

Back

K?

\

mf

:

• • ' :5

Rotary

2

settings

1

=

Pic

Stop

C

=

Initialize

m

-

S

<;ii

Battery

Plug

;

4J1S1

.

2 Usb

1.1 Plugsi

id

lw

§

:

la

Two

Leds

Display

Right

side

is

like

Fusion

Left

will

be

always 1 .

-

—

Rotary

Switch 1

Always

=

0.

*

L:

m:wsl

T J

V

r

Bm

E

•-

i,

3

r

m

w

m

iv.

;

I

i

1

r

I

in

1

A

i

i«S

%

Rotary

Switch 2

Like M640.

§

i

?«

i

r

Pf

-• k

y

si.

H

V3

100

Megabyte

Ethernet

I

PI

s

Hi

|P



Hidden

Compact

Flash

-Drive

D-Used to

backup

the hard-drive

important

files

Top

of Unit

•

• .

WBSBSSBSBSSBSSSmmÿ

'

V

Vt

Top

of

Matrix

2

Backlights,

top

and

bottom

2

large fans

2

Slot

Pcmcia-32

bit

-

pampi

I

m

i

;

%

r-,

fe

.

;ÿ

;.*?

•

ff

XiierlR-ÿ'

vr .

si?'

n

,n»

‘

'

IKS:

»,V:;

Mw

1111

ImAl

V

-V.'-

M

is i

J

Jr-

SaH

m.

-’

J

v

RYJ

F

;

:

is

iw

.-'

y.u

I

«ÿ

s

m

.........

,fc(V1),.lt,il.I.i

~

......

f*

f

f

r

1

™

“ruSSS

KHKEM

y

V

f

5wr-

- ÿ • • • ; ÿ

v>

tail

HSPii

SI

r .

r

II

I

III

I i M

I

gPÿÿi iS 'pBpI

1

?

iv'v;

Mfil

•

'•

vr'

i

IBBHHH

JH

-d

:-. •

V

m

m

:

• - • • ÿ :

• >a

5*«

•

:&

•

*

u

*

-

1

.

vr

*

v»

>ÿ'

m

m

w

+

V:j

$



Bottom

of

unit

...

-

-

j

-;:C;

-

'i

•

;:-

•

T

~

1

raw

,

/

if

IssSslli

.

|:

1

f

fj

(..

:

;

M'S

tmmw

S

:/

:

.

J

j

V

wjjtj

fi:;V;

•

fasm

,

.:; w

W7

iTf f-P

-,-

..-i'*

' . ' . • 'ÿr-*-— ''* ' '*

• ‘ -v '

’'vj

.-W..irm.P»

iiaii

? ;

,1:

9

r-

r'

S

j;

»Mbw

H

f

Sira®

a

hv:

irjk

T

MKT

%i

•

ft

k$

1

i

u

umnTXi.i.

iSM

IS

faPl

Wits

i

vJL'

.T.‘-

'C

_.

'•

ill

,

\

IS

lflpf

JSfiSS

B§«PP S»W§s

S:

i

m f?

t

r

i

l

»

II

M*

>4

11

l

w*»

$ÿ'

4

'

11

v:-

:

-

Sis

Bottom

Backlight

Opt 2,

To

MDS-DH Drives

Opt

1

,

To

MDS-DH

Drives,

1st

Set of 8.



MIP12M2

•

PC

Card.

•

1

.2

giga-hertz

•

256mb

memory

•

XP

Embedded

HN260

USB

Connector

Card

Considered

connection

point

for

the

2

back USB

1.1

devices.

Plugs into the

Pc Board

MIP12M2



A

HN260 card

1-C73-M128 or

M1-P12-M256:

Main

PC

PCB

'G

'j

i

i&.wiiiiiiiii«Mm

iriii:i Ti

1

1':

1#

fSoUol

[2*00-1

91

f]

H

2

-

.5

8

.

-

V

hi

m

1

1

%

.

'i

f3*pri

*

%

LP

jit

in

3

i

G

m

i

i®

S:

-_.

v&sjgmm

s,

'

I

:¥»i

K

I

i

1

i

[Ml

m

M

iff

*»

-

0

/

p

«;u

Gijg.

=mnsi

•

—

n

......

*

VsyM

PC

RAM

DIMM:

256

MB



HN01

1 :

PC to

NC

extender

bus

Also

called

Relay

card

as

relays

signals

between

the

PC

to

NC.

«cÿaa|Fi.

.iJSlS

mmr

f

*118111

I

ftisiSfi

SIS

III

1

m

8S1

*

m

1

Sif

§ssl§

J8P9

ifPIliy

:

KS

f>i

-I

-

IBH

HR

r

*

838

MdP

*

m

...

®

HN163

or

HN154:

NC

main

PCB

'

Jfeg1':

. .'

v->

• A'

tjv

MS

SSESI

6'

I

i

?

n

o

*;

i;l

2

li

Q

MS

ns

ifl

a

«

[

'

'ÿr

*ÿ

ES

a

SS

Sill;

Z

At V

;

o

Jj

SS I

II

m

*

55S

o

ES C

<

a

as®.

£<£HBS

m

(91

8#

H

}'

,;

''KKK

£?<

wmfm

m

gS

«<

<~1

i

i.

.-lfiS®

«CS*30

mavnH

a®,

l

aWfe,

:.:P*-

st-tx1

I

• •

0

iff

s

S

HN163-HN203-HN123

m

m

n

i

m

m

R

m

wii'1]

to

m

&

ns

A

H

[•.

V

Mi

.i

)

Si

HS

-

IE

iU

'i'-

ii

Kl

e

|U

,,

«

HR

a*

fi

Hi

MB

1

I

:

'f:

ssHa

K

.

Li£

38

3

*

5

B

:

BKE

1

II

m

M

i

m

m

m

m

V

&

n

m

r®s

wm

77Pr

M

$

• i

a

\l

m

rU

?ÿ

®

m

T

m

ii

mm

feÿj

H

2Q

23«

SB

s

MS

I

8£

Ml

EKMP

1

B

hm

mm

m

MB

nmmSSinmWm:

-

nyÿav

Sli#

'

m

U ii

MsflJSl

N

'ÿr

Mi

;

i

—

HN

1

02

Bf'

SWs

__

i

-ÿ

m

UTM

mm

• |i

*

?

i

r

*

mm

,

JB

mm

Jill

||M»

a

ss»-

:-

;l

'tllilily

w»

i‘i

'

:-;

TIT

'AT

K

EMEI

tear*

S2

isss

Pic ca r

es

•

&T

fWffiW

pÿftissfcas®

Sale

E

n

a

: i

Vv<

IS

£

'v.

:

i

i

»

m

• An

:

J

jk§

ffS IfE

.ÿ

'.II

• >';>:

Ij

ife

tm,

s

r

3

HN123

ir'-'j

I

S;

9

LAL-nrsr

E5

Vÿr)“’'(Sy-

i

in

Sub-CPU

Ss

'aes

~i

HW

HN102

m

ivVI

L-

g

Tglifs

Jfr&k:-,

iOl

K&%i£'T

iiMaSs

Pic

Engine Card.

Where

the

plc(s)

resides.

•

Stores the pic ladder

and

11-

register

information

•

Also,

Latching

parameter

-

registers.

•

Capacitor

backed

up

for 30

minutes

Si®

;

A

Jÿflr

I

w

i

I

$

>

Sri

m

x

j

,4$?

«iSSEs

IB

I

9

B

F,

n*

If88

• l<

jH

’

I

In

ftpe

;*S-.

Pfgl

mmmm

i

BBSPPKM

apgte.i p

H»S§

ii®

Pl-

c?

fc

tm

.

..

..

;•

•

-ii

;« ,‘j

p;

ByJ

1

);

TrlE

• i

mwm

ai

jU*

32tjT

'W:

fcEWK?

>A

hV

/irrai'

jfc

*1

I

1>-»

»nT7vÿr

5l

X

32

m

wsswa

30

[-1

-i

ti

iin

f

'

.

jLiCli

• <

-|

m

'3

fcMM»

>.,

il

-

• >

a

I

[c:Vjj

n

a

*

§

as

**

11

g

©

i

s

M

li

pifftiWl

&

L

-

i

1

y

il

fl«

m

m

m

m

V.

R

m

.

i

'1 m

.

1

.«£j

;

M

k-

iflfci

a

ajAi£.-zei±£2±

r

Bf

r-

'JUr

m

rÿ

31

;

3

r

V

IS

i

mn

%

-'J*

1

\*p

fc i5-

f’

St

m

:• <

*

- ‘Wr

«

3

-usÿgsyr

si

gnaw

vaftsakasteriÿÿ

<•

.~i

£9

_

S3

'S I

u>

’jO

*

-*-ÿ-

TOttj,

'i

LI

\aM

“*•

*r

1

IfijBS

...-£»

1

r-rec

;

• *T

** • .**

*>XI

MvnrtffHtaÿni

IB

< * # • *

.

“

-~/5 S®

• . ÿi ss

-

W®*

*'

'-

>t_

>>:

~J.'T~

V?v

-.

-

..ÿ

m

»=-,'-

-•

CN

c/o

O

o

a

i-H

O

bS)

a

£

o3

G

T3

G

,-G

a

3

o

O

G

o

£

?-i

O

GH 4h

G

o

G

3

CD

3

5-h

CO

G

>

N



HN482

•

Main

Memory

Card

•

This

is

where the

Sram

data is

stored,

•

Machine

parameters,

Tool

data,

etc.

•

Contains

Main

A,

control

s.n,

and

the

Option

information

•

Capacitor

backup

for 30

minutes



HN482:

NC main memory

PCB,

SRAM

and

FLROM

k

j

R3-N0.40

I

i

73

m

iiljBi

m

3

UBf;

ifiteaiiffl

ftfftfPnMn

I

as®--

‘

This contains Main-

A,

Control

Serial

Number,

Options,

and

SRAM

data(parameters,tool

data,

etc.

Changing

this

requires

control s.n.

and options.

Like

Hrl

13



HN531

:

PCMCIA

slots (2)

and

2nd

servo

interface

(OPT2)

CardBus

l/F

2

Slots

CardBus,

32

bit.

-r

f

»

*“w iS

'i

j

£§

aSfey

'

-

‘

S i

ml

&JJL2

3

[T1

a

i:

s

c

tempi

3

i

55

5US

pfyl

I

it

OK

I

N

ess

JlV:

M1

H

i3

V

i

(

,

(j

P

j

s

s

£0

3

Tf:

.a

IT

*sm

*5

«1

«i

Mil

~t—

d

+

lL

IT:

.n

gpcÿ'l®

SEIa

SH

?ÿ

.Wi-'

0pt2



HN251

•

Similar

to

HR251 on the

M640

•

Includes

the Compact

Flash card

input as

well

as

USB

connection.

•

USB connection

is

1

.1

version,

not

2.0.

•

G291 cable

connects

to

Pc

Card

for

USB

•

G160

cable connects

to HN163

for

compact

flash.



HN251

: Front

slot

PC

card

and

USB

interfaces

/V

K

'‘ÿr-

• :>

>'•

'ÿÿwm,

rv&m>-

V-,

if

'ÿ.

r«*£

ms

%

l

w-iiM

i

m

i

p

m

i

i

1

'• l

r

1

rnirnÿm

irar

i

3

'

I

a

TV

4

a-'*-’

i

r**\



HN271/NH272:

LCD interface

PCB

'

*35’

Sw

v

;/

-y

LW

. ./’>/'*

HH

,

V--

.•

'.

\

J

\

•

a

m

mmR

s

iS

S%-

?P4;

;'SS

S3®

„

P

-

.r-

:i

._

,

.

.

pm

» **

sdllillh

-;s''

,-

j

8

»J

? 1

lisl

§*

254

'

;ji'

’

«

‘

J

f/'r

..........

.'

_ ,1

A

*jmmL

it

v

'ÿ:.

.?r

\

T«SSE

;

.*

-.

;

mm

( y-f'l

2

5'W'

’’

:

mmmm,

S>

\:

-NS

it

i •*,

58

I

|gjgggj|

7:S;ÿ;.,a

B

H

i

rA

'

'

MSSBSSm

r

Si

Kiss—

if

&8fc

mm

LA m

i

T

bfe3$>3

s

?#paH

\:ig

S

I

L«li5

Vi/..

fc>

7

T'i

:-

I

s

H

Si

iVrijuvuiiK-u'iulÿiit

1®

an

i

•:

L'i

£

:iu

jpagps

I,

.'*>

HHSM0

'

Si

APFi

a

L‘*flG_SJ

R

m.

-

e-i;

-

7'

-

mmm

M

x

m

BRMtal0|l

MBmm

£

*2*2

n

iv-y-n;

la

7

SBS



HN353

•

Similar to

HR353 card

•

Except the servos now

go

directly

to

the

NC by

fiber¬

optic cable.

•

Supports

14 Mr-J2

drives

•

Supports

the

Remote

I/O.

Communicates

to

HR371

remote

I/O cards.

38

WMm

ÿ6

: .V

Wi

IIIIB

IPB

pÿSg

ÿ-ÿ•

j ravt..

1

'

”ÿ

wSfJa

i

3U*:

&

J

-*#

rr.

Js

e

.

.

3p

wis

K

M

HMÿiSS

1-M

iTf*

i

p*

*1

6»l

g

fOCESt

-.

A&H

i

to:

#V*Tf

i

I

ij,.;

its

8-1

*

V

*9

.«»

3

jj

• : '- i

ct,

>

-s

4

f:

-ÿf

Uotl

>'V/1

i

isÿ

i

w

.x-

-J3

T3

ft

5.

U

j£

q

i

JUi

=

-SB.

I'M

•

ii

«

,

yp-

*-H

i

M

JIM

-

-

p

t

M;

c3

MI

=*

••

«*“-• “

L-i

liVjF

[

*ri

•

®5fs,

•

=HÿW |

• <-• • ;#

p

HOi

•• •

Mi

..

-J

gSBffj

U

tit

i

«®a--

/

’

X

.*•

• -

c

Iglll

ip

Itf

$sS33i

&

;

P;

c<

j

111

m

I

• 7 ,®

.rv

o

.ÿ.1

S

gH

r

IK1

—

-a

I

ri

ft

ST

,’j

Bÿg

-i-.v

.

£5*1-

• R

iEy

H

:

i

I ISEJM

1

WMJ

11/iP;

3

f

m

S<

m

&

sa

s

HI

il

HE

i

z

I

*A

I

it:

ssi

iv

Sa a

l

1

rail

II

tmn

;E

&2&:|

;.

't

S§I

M

K

m

m.

m

»

IP”W

[rj

m

-M-

W

s

®u

EJ

X

as:

n

essh

1

ILK

if.

Si

5* ÿ

iS

:r:|

Vrffi

33

)

ffl.

-

s

@n

•

'

[-

’

?

I?

n-

i

I

St-;:-5

«K

'lb

'

3Jt*

1

'-A-

0

3S£i

SCÿ:

[W»ÿ

i

£

'v

..Sliill

.

Ill;

i

M

fel



NC

covers:

Top

and

middle

.......

.....

...

i

J

r .&tm:

§§

§&&aQL

:

;

:*«iSb

t

.//

%

mmmm

ÿiii

&

H'”-

V

Ml

,v ÿ

?

'ÿ

'

i>

ill

SSm

?k-

.;,l

M

I

?..vV

I

TTTjTTT

J

T;J

1

v.'V;

Mj

i«i

M

y-j;

v

•

;

mmmÿrn

tiamsL

;

'iv/'FTiy

la

§pifp

Blit

$

-«

M

?

.

r

l

1

3

BmgMm

;*mrn

J

SB

ÿiai

.

MS ’

..

I

IIMI

fcy

> ' • • ÿ - ÿ .

FCA750PY-N01

[.v

•'• 'ÿÿu--’.’.-:-

pS

mm,

K

-7n

v.

5 i

3

i:

MP0e0O70360D0

l

.ÿÿj

i?

-

-

•

• / . -

CXA0385:

backlight

power

supply

for 15” LCD

i

inn

•

Jr'

\-y

mm

if

i

i

.:

?V,

/

A

,«

»

IS ®

SfflS'

t':

y

x

m <

«s

'Q

NC cooling

fan:

Notice the

third wire

for

overheat detection

*“**ÿÿ“*:

V

ml

1

i

i

'ÿV

.

l-ÿv?

1

4

L

<

mm

Bill

llss

lA

JB

(HlOa?

1

|Rf|j

Vi

m

i*

xtfvA.r&f 'i

*

'SJ

i'

MMF

-06D240S

24VPC-

0 .

03

A

TO D 4201 G

1

RP3

fMk

Mt'LCG

irCHN0P(k'C‘0-,LTD.

MADE

I/<

CHINA

\

•

•

( *

k

i

p'r-

;

ji§Sii

<v

,v



PD27

Power

Supply

•

Similar

to

PD25

Power

Supply

for

Fusion

and Mpro.

•

Outputs

24v

after

power

off to

maintain

voltage

to

hard

drive

for

controlled shutdown.

y

i

0

r

::

K*.

ii

:

-

Machine

Keyboard

•

Has

2

fuses

•

If fail,

recommend to

replace

complete

assembly.

i

tan

a

H

;4

SAMPLE.

'

<|

n

f'sl

mpi

Us

rr

P#A?

:r

»»{

H

.

i/.VFwifc

g

E

m

m

-1

V

:.;

S''

’

''

'.•

iy,-

«

SHii

v

l

'

•>

.4

P“

A-

.'ÿ

CJ

-h>

'

H.

jj

Mi

«9

......

S’

,OTV

fl||p

i

M?

i

C-'i

1

3«»E

si

SPf-

*

<;S5fc

-k—

j

MSS*

IVM

Hf

tft

5=

StASlS;

vasar

'5,‘,

fep

.

gv2

?Si

1

:

3

i

»

r.

.......

A.

.

V

F«S

sp-raacKa

i

1

.

<1

p; g

D

..*•

;i

;K1

':':

I.W

T.V-'-

• T»fjg

SBaiilP

fi

• I

1

.

-

iv

;

.

If

i

,r

tfii»9cr

is

*

5

’

m

V

.

.if*,:

«

mi

jipi

:A

• 7

:

L

NpjjK

s:

yia

s;

:ÿ

i

SIS

:

JLi

t

•

85

?'

WM

'

UJw>

:

•

ir-A

u

-

&

11;

-

m

I

*

i

&

&»3

B

ii

1

.-;

j

i

a

Ml

m

Uk-

F

[g

IsS

i

I

m

Wmtm

NiH[i t:yiJOT9T

Ju_.

;L

b

:

EE

i;Vcyj''

m

3

<•

-..

i

• •

:

_

t

„S

J

,LI

a

R,.

Jÿ y

tT*V~ F .

» < • . «.•

v c

-ÿvr

“

:

Ml.;.::

r*

'

*

.

*4_

,

-

t-W

K ii

Hard Drive

•

Embedded

Windows XP software

•

20 Gigabyte

hard drive

•

No

need

for

heater as guarantee

to operate at 0

degree

weather. Similar to

hard

drive used in

car

GPS

systems.

gpfc

,

iwll

f

,

i

*

55

I

l?gl

;.

;

I

mmMm

fTmf

•

lsr.»

::

.a

I

i

e-2J*

«S

' 'a-

V-

«iri

«

y

i

H

;

BlKwriSSjÿ;

m

I

V

g

.waa.

i

*.

%*>»»ÿ

.i

i

r

r

I

X

;

P

MBWII

Ss*

sul

Bw

;<Si

I.

jBpR|pilir

ll

’

'

8

l* £

I

MB

f

k

I'l

3

i.

i

m

p

mu

_

• ft

}

8

FT.

']

n

_



45

An

embedded

system

is

a

special-purpose

system

in

which the

computer

is completely

encapsulated by the

device

it controls. Unlike a general-purpose

computer,

such

as

a

personal

computer, an

embedded system

performs

one or a few

pre-

defined

tasks,

usually

with

verÿ

specific

requirements.

Since

the

system

is

dedicated to

specific tasks,

design

engineers

can

optimize

it,

reducing

the

size and cost of the product. Embedded

systems

are

often

mass-produced,

so

the cost savings

may

be

multiplied

by

millions

of items.

Handheld

computers

or PDAs are generally considered

embedded

devices

because

of

the

nature

of

their

hardware

design,

even

though they

are more

expandable

in

software

terms.

This

line

of

definition

continues

to

blur

as

devices

expand,

Physically, embedded

systems

range from

portable

devices such as

MP3

players,

to

large

stationary

installations

like

traffic

lights

or

factory

controllers.



46

3

..A

Connector

layout

drawing

NC

back

FAN

1

ON/OFF

AN2

CardBus

C ON NE CT IO N D ESC RIPT IO N

L

Fan 1 &

2

Fan connections

S3

z

in

f£TT3T

t

UJUV

UUUp-

BAT

CardBus

PCMCIA

I/F

x 2

OTO

NT

ON/OFF

SW connection

N/OFF

w

USB

7

¥

3

BAT 3.3V

battery

USB2

USB1

&

2 USB

I/F

x 2

I

CRT

External CRT

I/F

(not

used)

Internal

LCD I/FCD

LAN Ethernet I/F

uasassrs

CF25 External

+24V

(not

used)

CRT

Hard

drive

I/F

DD

(MvrVT)

FDD Floppy drive

I/F

LCD

EMG

Emergency

stop

Z3

LAN

Remote

ON/OFF to

PD27F24

CF01

Power

off

detection

+24V

from

DCOIJT

on

KB

C

IN

ZTT

:NV

Backlight inverter

I/F

NV

FRONT

OUT

Front

slot

l/F

o

1

cog

c

F*>

<y

so

cm

i/i

ro

1C

1

Ena

.

:

\

CF24

CiN

CFO

I

EMG FDD

HDD

OF25



Connector

layout drawing

NC

bottom

CF55

0PT1

GI

2 CF10

OPT2

CF50

/

R

7

T

O

E

71

r

T

E

EE

04

|M*J

*5*

TO

J

im

ZJ.

i-1

alii

7/f—

|

=

ri

j

T

X

fei

kf

{Jq

p

|o|

l

g

Pbr

v

t

•

I

Mill

Mil

C ON NE CT IO N D ES CR IP TIO N

CGI

2 Keyboard

l/F

Bus

connection

Base I/O main

I/FF

10

Optical

servo I/FPTI

&

2

2' 1 servo

I/O

I/F

F50

Additional

I/O, servo

I/F

F55

Connector

layout drawing

Keyboard unit

<PD27

t<D\m)

DCOUT CFOI

R21 CR31R2 2 J2

ON/OFF

INV DCINOUSE CGI 2

\

\

x

X

I

CONNECTION

DESCRIPTION

jn

Additional

I/O

I/FR21

&

22

m

i

\

7

Additional I/O I/F

R3

1

0

©

E

Soft

menu

key

I/F

12

<j

o

ON/OFF

SW

connection

N/OFF

E

H

m

o

CG12

KB I/F

r

-7Y2

+12V for

backlight

I/F

NV

m

i

0

DCIN +24

V

from PD27

M3

DCOUT

+24

V

to DCIN on

Main

PCB

Power off detectionFOI

*

CR32

9

©

Terminator

connection

I03

m

0

SIONC

& PC

RS232C

I/F

x

4

(2

CH

ea)

t:

s

PCON/OFF Internal

s/w

ON/OFF

g°

u

0

MPG HPG

I/F

littfr

»

a a

0

DC +24V

from

I/O PS

IMT

0:::v-

N

Sub

op

I/O

J3“IN,

J4+OIJT

13

&

4

©

J

mm

NC KB

I/F

m

NCKEY

1

i

MPKEY

NC

KB I/F

for

MPX

machine

only

TL

X

7

77 7

7

X

/

/

PCON/OFF

3

MPG

SPEAKER

R[03

PKEY

NCKEY J4

DC

SIOPC

SIONC



Rotary

Switch &

Segment

LED

T\fT

T--

4-

'~:Z

i

i

{

ZJ

.ÿnpi

rrja

:

l

u

T=lir:

:

i

is

f

4 irn

I

I

Tit;

Ii

l

ija

I

::

;JI

II?

'• M hi

.

-r::::

:

i:

3

I*

M

'

viw..

(- )

LED1

LED2

•

•i

i

SW1

„

;p

i

J6

0

SW2

'.

.-• SSZZCiSSiSSSXiWSSX.

i;

|

:

i

rtssssstss-

B

:

i

i?

:

I

:

i

,

3

|

j

•.

FT;.

;;F6o

ÿ

-ii

*

V;

7

r

’ • V i

Hi .-.V .

.

—

j.-;



Rotary

Switch

1

Note

osition

CPU

oot

Operation

begins

simultaneously

with

power supply ON.

Flush

ROM

Boot

CF/ATA-Flush

Boot

Network Boot

For development

of OS

reserved for

network)

It starts while

reset, and

operation of

the

reset

release

begins.

2 port Boot

For maintenance

tool

reserved

for 2

port)

6

spare

7 spare

Don’t use

Don’t

use

Don’t use

Don’t

use

For

maintenance tool

peration

begins

simultaneously

with

power supply

ON.

(reserved

for Flush

ROM)

(reserved for

Flush

ROM)

(reserved

for

Flush

ROM)

Reserved

for

equipment

on’t

use



Rotary

Switch

2

2PORT

ROM

osition Operation

Note

c

.

,

•

,

,

Set

value in

product

ormal

erial

Console

Bus

0

p

I

onsole

PLc

STOP

Operate

V

'

'•

1

i A

• „

Start

up

script

“/from/0/1

dsys”

Start

up

script

“/cf/ldsys/”

Start

up

script

Nullification

5

Normal For handy

terminal

6

7

Bus

Serial

Console

8

Console

9

Serial

Console

Bus

A

Console

B

07

SRAM clear

P.

M

os

Normal

E2PR0M FROM

Not

start

2nd

CPU



,}

7

segment

status

M640 only

1

status LED

MX

has 2

status LED

LED

2

is

CPU number:

0

=

CPU

#1,1=

CPU #2.

LED

1

is

CPU

status: Starts

at 8.-> 0

->count

up->

9 for

CPU

#1

then

O.X

count

up->9.

for CPU #2. So

during

normal

operation

you

should

either

see

09.

for

1

CPU

or

19 .

for

2

CPU.

For 2

CPU

system:

or

1

CPU

system:

->

1

8.

1

9.

0

9.

.

End

nd

Start

tart

Good

Bad

ystem start up

counting

M640

|

MX

NONE

0

or

1

ED

2

1

9.

CPU system

-v

0-9

8.-9.

ED

1

1

CPU

system

9. 0

-

V

Anything

except

9.



54



55



56

57

TENTATIVE

CHAPTER

2

CONFIGURATION

2.1

System Configuration

This

system

are

usually

confabulated

of

following

components:

(1)

Control

unit

(2)

Display

unit

(3) Keyboard

unit

(4) I /O

interface unit

(5)

Servo/Spindle

drive unit

:

This unit

has

the

computation

processing

function

for numerical control.

:

Characters and figures are

displayed

on

this

unit.

: This

unit has

the

setting

function.

:

Input

and

output

of machine

signals

are

done

through

this

unit.

:

This

is a

servo/spindle

amplifier

composed of

a conductor

for

obtaining

DC

from

AC and an inverter for

obtaining

AC

from DC.

:

This

drive

motor moves

the

machine.6)

Servo/Spindle

motor

(7 )

Other peripheral

device

: Peripheral

device

such

as

external

memory

and

programming

support.

Installed

by

machine

loot

manufacturer

r

i

C

Card/K

I

—

USB

Devises

G

f

Ethernet

I

m

Printer

[CardBus]

NC

control

unrl

FlopDy

Disk Drive

[FDD

IF] PC

Keyboard

J

fuse]

cy

Display

Unit

PS'?

Mouse

M

j,

|

_

Prep/amina

Tool

_

j

[Optical communication]

Servo

Amp-’Spindlo

drive

urol

1

RS232C]

ezno

Bocal

s

sas

s

m

Keyboard

unit

Ma n

nil

Pulse

Generator

[delicate

IF]

O

LJUL-LJ

ooo

O

oooo

.

300

0101

rio

IF]

Servo

motor /

Spindle

motor

Machine

operation panel

t

70s

Servo

drive

unit

*

iu

E

1'jt-noiatS'

E1E

I

ZJ?

10

interface

I/O

mtciface

box usoinr,

by

Card-

sized

3/0

C

1* 0

interface

boxes

arc

installed

by

machine tool moruifacturc

:

7S

Servo motor

<Note>

The

noise

resistance

of

most

of

PCperipheral

devices

are lower

than

the

CNC

system.

If

such

a

low

noise resistance

devices

are

used

in

the

CNC system,

the noise

resistance

of

the

entire

NC

system

decreases,

and

noise trouble is

caused

occasionally.

Please

follows

notes

in

Chaper

7 when

you

use

PC

peripheral

devises.

58

TENTATIVE

4.4.8

Connection

of

Power

Supply

The

PD27

power

supply is

used

to

protect

the hard disk.

By outputting

+24V tor

300msec

after the

200VAC

is

turned

off,

turning

off

of

the

power

during

writing

to

the

hard

disk can

be

prevented.

(1)

Power

Supply

System

Drawing

R S

1

-

AN

CNC

Unit

lC0

fCU? -MAS

13

ONAD-F

PC

Board

CRT

MOO

Ocuil

breaker

Cf?

5

CMC

Board

FDD

NU

ON

Off

nn

f«an

oul

D

XTXBUS

CflO

D

--

EMG

D

rso

p

F55

P

PT?

I

CardBus

j

.?ch

D

PT

cm

Cf?*

PO?7

IB

DC IN

US8

d

NJOFF

CGI?

:

AT;

-Q

CFO

USB?

CIN

DCOUT

f

110

Crrcuil

breaker

CG12

Keyboard Uni

FCU7-YZ08?

tnm

i7

Let

DCOUT

T-ÿiDClN

L-C3CF01

rno

iNV

[DC

KPG

SK3NC

SIOPC

VIM

|J3

RI03

(2)

Unit

specification

Specification

tem

200VAC

-

480VAC

(-15%.

+10%)

24VDC

8A

1

70mmx

65mm

x

230mm

Input

Output

Size

__

Back

up

time

(Note) The

power

cannot be

turned

ON

immediately

after the

PD25

power

has

been

turned

OFF.

Wait

approx,

two

seconds

before turnning

the

power

ON .

300ms

(3)

Connector

layout

and

pin assignment

ACIN :

200VAC

input

<Cable

side connector

type>

Connetor

Contact

Recommended

maker

1

ACIN

N

O

:

2-1

781

28-3

2

ACIN

H

.....

FG~

CIN

:

1

-1 752

1

8-5

:

AMP

1

ON/OFF

SW

:

Swich ON

(

t

upword)

Swich

OFF

ON/OFF

:

Connect to

the

escutcheon

ONOFF switch

—

24VDC

output

(

i

downword)— 24VDC output OFF

/

/

N

ore

sw

1

NC

<

Cable

side connector

type>

Connetor

Contact

Recommended

maker

0

2 P-OFF

:

1-1 78288-5

1-175218-5

:

AMP

ON.-OFF

3

0V

4

0

V

POWER

: Green

lamp

lights

during-*-24V

output

powf-n

OCOUT

m

DCOUT

:

_

n

n_

B.(V)

j

+24V

j

<

Cable side connector

type>

Connetor

Contact

Recommended

maker

A(X)

ACFAiL :3-1 78128-6

2 :

1

-1

7521

85

:

AMP

OV

OV

3

FG

FG



59

TENTATIVE

CHAPTER

7

NOTIFICATION

OF

USING

PC

PERIPHERAL

DEVICE

This

chapter

describes

the

notification

of

using PC peripheral

devices.

7.1

Noise

measures

of USB and

Ethernet

USB

and

Ethernet

have

been

equipped

normally.

Please

refer to

Connection

of

the

USB equipment

execution

example.

Because

use

under

the

noise

environment is

not assumed

as

fo r a

personal computer

on

the

market such as

Mouse and

Keyboard,

operation

is not

guaranteed

under the

machine

operation

environment.

Please

use the cable

with

the

shield

Connection of Ethernet

for

connection

for the noise inclination.

Additionally, the

noise measures

by

the

ferrite

core like

the

figure

below

are

recommended.

Panel

thernet cable

USB

cable

USB cable

NC

unit

I

i

|

—

[ÿ ]

Mouse

i

ÿ

i

i

3p

Keyboard

ifcT

IU

m

Printer

Jj

i

S3Q

il

/

am

iih)

r

Ethernet

cable

Wraps

cable

around

the

ferrite

core.

i

7.2

Recommended

Devices

List

Introduce

the

recommended

devices that are

met the

Mitsubishi

quality

standard

and

the connectable

devices that

are

confirmed

operation

(although

not

met the Mitsubishi

quality

standard).

7.2.1

Front

Access

IC Cards

Supplier Type

Specification Class

Remarks

SDP3B-48-1

01CANDISK

SDP3B- *-ono

***:

Memory

size

(MB)

nnn:

Manufacturer’s

control number 101 is

standard

48MB

Recommended

SDP3B-96-1 01

Recommended

6MB

SDP3B-128-101

128MB Recommended

SDP3B-192-101 Recommended

92MB

SDP3B-256-1

01

Recommended

56MB

SDP3B-440-101 Recommended

40MB

10-

DATA

PCFCA-16M

Recommended

PCFCA-”‘M

Memory

size

(MB)

16MR

PCFCA-32M

Recommended

2MB

PCFCA-48M

Recommended8MB

PCFCA-96M

Recommended

6MB

PCFCA-1

28M

PCFCA-192M

Recommended28MB

192MB

Recommended

PCFCA-256M Recommended56MB



60

TENTATIVE

7.2.2

CardBus

PC

Cards

Supplier

evice Type

Name

Specification

Bus

Type

Class

FLASH

SANDISK

SDP3B

series

PCMCIA

Recommended

Card

IO-DATA

PCFCA

series

PCMCIA

Recommended

LA N

3Com

Etherlll 10 BASE-T

Ether

PCMCIA

Connectable

Card

Etherll

PCC-T

10

BASE-T

Ether

PCMCIA

Connectable

orega

Fether

PCC-TXF

10/100

BASE-T

Ether PCMCIA

Connectable

Fether CB-TXL

10/100

BASE-T

Ether

Connectable

ardBus

BUFFALO

LPC2-T

PCMCIA

0

BASE-T Ether

Connectable

LPC4-TX

10/100

BASE-T

Ether

PCMCIA

Connectable

Notices

in

use

of

CardBus

type

PC card

(1)

Install

a

driver

software under

the

condition

that

only

the

target

CardBus

type

PC card

is

inserted.

Some

trouble

may

occurs

if

a

driver software

is

installed

under the

condition

that other

PC

card

is

inserted

together.

(2)

For

using

a

CardBus

type

PC

card,

turn on the

power

under

the

condition

that

the

target

PC

card

is

inserted. When the

PC

card

is

inserted

under

the

condition that

the

power

is

turned

on ,

the

PC card is

not

sometimes

recognized

by

the

combination

with

other

PC

cards.



61

TENTATIVE

CHAPTER

8 DAILY

MAINTENANCE

AND

PERIODIC

INSPECTION

AND

MAINTENANCE

8.1 Maintenance

Tools

8.1.1

Measuring

Instruments

The

following measuring

instruments

are

used

to confirm that the

voltage is

being

supplied

correctly

to

the

NC

unit,

to confirm that

the

wiring

to

the

NC unit is

correct,

and

to

carry

ou t

simple troubleshooting.

_

Tool

Condition Application

Tester

To

check that the

wiring

to the NC

unit

is

correct

before

turning

the

power

ON .

C

voltmeter Measure the

AC

Power

voltage.

The

tolerable

error

is

+2%

or

less.

To measures

the

AC

power

voltage

being

supplied to

the

external

24VDC power

supply

unit.

DC

voltmeter

Max.

scale 30V The

tolerable

error

is ±2% or

less.

To

measures the DC

power voltage.

External

power

supply

24V

(control

section,

machine

input/output

interface)

Battery

voltage

DC

output

hase

rotation

meter

To

check

the

connection order of

the

AC 3-phase

input

power

supply.

_

Synchroscope

General

measurement

and

simple troubleshooting.

(Note

t)Currently, a high precision

digital

multi-meter

is

commonly

used as a

tester.

This

digital

multi-meter

can be

used

as

both

an

AC

voltmeter

and

an

DC

voltmeter.

(Note

2)A logic

analyser

(200MHz

or

more)

is required

for

complicated troubleshooting.

8.1.2

Tools

•

Screwdriver

(Large,

Medium,

Small)

Radio

pliers

8.2

Maintenance

Items

Maintenance

is categorized

into

daily

maintenance items

(items

to

be

carried

at

set

intervals) and

periodic

maintenance

(replacement

of

parts

when

life

is

reached).

Some

parts

(HDD,

FDD,

etc.)

will

not

function

in

a

hardware

manner

when

the

life

is

reached,

so

these

should

be

replaced

before the

life

is

reached.

Lifeame fnspection/Replacemeni

Escutcheon

Once/lwo

months

(Accordingly when dirty)

Cleaning of

floppy

disk

drive

(type

built

in

operation box)

Once/two months

Replacement

of

floppy

disk

sheet

(type

built

in operation

box)

_

3x106

passes/track

Replacement

of

floppy

disk drive

(lype

built

in

operation box)

12,000

access

hours

or 5

years

of

FDD

motor

rotation,

whichever

is

sooner

Refer

to left

Replacement of

hard disk

drive

5

years

or 20,000

hours

power

ON

_

5

years

or

20,000 power

ON hours

(specified

with

power

ON

lime where brightness drops

lo

less than

50%

at

25 cC)

Refer lo left

Replacement of LCD

backlight Replace

when

display

dims

Replacement of

batter

Cumulative data hold

time

5

years

When

battery drop

caution

alarm occurs

_

50.000

hours

(specified

with

rotation

time

when rotation

speed

drops

to

less

than

20%

of

initial

speed)

_

ooling

Ian

(control

section)

Refer to left

IQ6

punches

eyboard

Refer

to

left

62

TENTATIVE

8.3

Maintenance

of

Escutcheon and

keyboard

8.3.1

Cleaning

of

Escutcheon

and

keyboard

Wipe

the

escutcheon

(display

unit

and plastic

frame

of

keyboard

unit)

and keyboard

surface

with

a

soft

dry

clean cloth.

If

the

escutcheon

is

heavily

dirtied,

soak

the cloth in a

neutral

detergent,

and

wipe the

display.

Do

not

use

an

alcohol

or

a paint

thinner,

etc.

The

escutcheon and the

keyboard

are

not for

waterproofing.

Be careful that a

liquid

doesn't

go

into inside

of

it.

8-3.2

Replacement

of

NC

Data

Key

The NC

data key

is

the

printed

circuit

board

which the switches

are

mounted

on

it,

and

is

included

into

the

keyboard

unit.

Replace

it

in

accordance with the following

procedure.

(1)

Check

that the

machine

power

is

turned OFF.

(If

the

power

is

not

OFF,

turn it

OFF)

(2)

Remove all the cables connected

at

the

back

of

the NC data

key.

(3)

Remove the

tablet

pointer

flexible

cable

and

keyboard

cable

from

the PCB (HN20x card).

(4)

Remove

six

screws,

and

remove the sheet

metal

adapter

and the

H

R201

card from the

keyboard

unit.

(5)

Remove fourteen

screws,

and

remove the NC data

key

from the

escutcheon

(6)

Install a

new NC

keyboard

with the

process

which

is

contrary

to

®

-

©.

Remove

Keyboard

cable

Remove Glide Pointer

cable

HN20X card

\

-

I:

IzsC'A

:

i

\

<r”

rH*

’

i

H

*\

&

4

A,

ssss??****

O

Remove

8 screws

(:

NC data

key

• <o

$

•

.

L

-o

Remove

18

screws

63

TENTATIVE

8.3.3

Replacement

of

Menu

Key

The

menu

key

is

the

printed

circuit

board which the

switches

are mounted

on

it,

and

is included into the

display unit.

Replace

it in accordance with the

following

procedure.

(1

)

Check

that

the

machine

power

is

turned

OFF.

(If

the

power

is

not

OFF,

turn

it

OFF)

(2)

Remove

the

menu

key

cable

from

the

keyboard

unit. Because

the

menu

key

cable is soldered

on the

menu

key

PCB,

remove

it

at

the

keyboard

unit side.

(3)

Remove

8

screws,

and

remove

the

escutcheon

(4)

Remove

8

screws,

and remove the

menu key

(5)

Install

a

new menu key with

the

process

which

is

contrary

to

(D

-

(3).

<o

\

S

Remove

8 screws

and,

remove

escutcheon

I®

r

7

v«rf

fit

Si/

ri.s

Remove ON/OFF switch

connector

m

IH

1

'O

'O

• o

Remove

Keyboard

card

i

ft.

iPv

it

5

Menu

key

;

ill

r

•

T.V

/J

-'

4

\

iB

«5£s.

Remove

8 screws

and,

remove

menu

key



64

TENTATIVE

8.4

Maintenance of Floppy Disk

Drive

8.4.1

Cleaning

of

Floppy Disk

Drive

(Head

Cleaning

)

When

the

floppy

disk drive is used

for

a

long

time,

magnetic

particles

or

dust

from

the disk

may

adhere onto

the

head surface.

This

can

cause

the

reading

and writing

processes

to be

inhibited. Clean the head

periodically

(

once

every

two

months

)

with

the

following

procedure.

(1)

Recommended

cleaning

disk

:

Japan

Morex

:

Morex

cleaning

floppy

for

double-sided

3.5-inch

: Dry

Maker

Type

Method

(2)

Cleaning

method

©

Insert

the

cleaning

disk into the

floppy

disk

drive

to

be

clearned.

(2)

Start the

cleaning

program,

and

follow the

instructions

given on

the

screen.

(3)

When the

program

is

completed,

eject

the

cleaning

disk.

Handling

of

Floppy Disks

Observe

the

following

items

to ensure

that

the

floppy disk

can be used for

a long

time.

8.4.2

(1)

Precautions

for

use

©

Never

tough the

magnetic

surface

with

hands.

Finger

prints

on

the

magnetic

surface

will inhibit the reading

process.

(2)

Do not

touch the

floppy

disk with hands dirtied with oil

or iron

chips.

M

D

Do

not

place

the

floppy

disk

near

cigarette

smoke.

Do not

apply

solvents

on

the

magnetic

surface.

@

Always

attach

the index

label

to

the

correct

position so that

it

will

not come

off. Do

not

layer

the

index labels.

(5)

Fill in the

index label before

attaching it

to the

floppy

disk.

When writing on

a

label

already

attached

to

the

floppy

disk,

use

a

felttip

pen

,etc.

(6)

Carefully

insert

the

floppy

disk

into

the

drive with

it

facing

the

correct

direction.

Rough handling

during

insertion and

ejection

could

damage the

floppy

disk.

©

When bringing

the

floppy

disk inside from outdoors

where

the

temperature

and

humidity

difference

are

great

from

indoors,

wait

at least 30

minutes before

starting

use.

(2)

Precautions

for

storage

©

Store

floppy disks that

are

not in

use and the

backup

floppy

disks

in plastic cases.

(2)

Do

not

place

the

floppy disk

where

it

will

be

subject

to direct

sunlight or near

heating

appliances.

©

Do

not

place

the

floppy disk

near

magnets

or

items

that

generate strong

magnetic

fields.

Magnetic

rings

and

necklaces could

also

damage

the

data

on

the

floppy

disk,

so avoid

wearing

these items when

handling

floppy

disks.

D

@

Do not

place

heavy

items

on

the

floppy

disk.



65

TENTATIVE

8.4.3

Other

Precautions

for

Use

(1) Floppy

disk

drive

life

The

durability

of

the

floppy

disk drive is

guaranteed

for

five

years

of the

FDD motor rotation

or

12,000

access

hours,

whichever

is sooner.

However,

if

used

in

a

heavily

contaminated

environment,

the

reading

and

writing

processes

could

be

inhibited due

to

the adherence

of dust

or

foreign

matter.

Periodically

clean the head

to

prevent

this

type

of

trouble.

(2)

Recommendation

for

making

backups

Make

copies

of

the

floppy

disks

containing

important

data to

be

used

in

case

of

an accident

such as

damaging of

the

floppy

disk

or

destruction of the

data.

(3)

Operating

conditions

The

floppy

disk drive

and floppy

disks

are

extremely

sensitive

to

changes

in

the

temperature and humidity

and

to

dust,

so

always

observe

the

precautions

that have

been

described.

In

respect

to

the

temperature,

if

the

working

conditions are not

satisfied

(such as if

the

system

is

started

at

below freezing),

the data track

and

head

positions

may

deviate

and

prevent

the

data from

being

read

properly.

In

this

case,

wait

for

the

internal temperature

to

rise.

(4)

Writing

to

floppy

disks

The

temperature

must be

10 to 40

°C

when

writing

to the

floppy

disk.

Always

observe

the

temperature

conditions when

writing

data.

8.4.4

Replacement

of

Floppy Disk

Drive

©

Check

that the

machine

power

is

turned

OFF. (If the

power

i s not

OFF,

turn

it

OFF)

(2)

Remove

the

F1

30 cable

from

the floppy disk

unit.

Unit

for

connection

and

removal

of the F130 cable.

Connection

of

Floppy

Disk

(D

The

floppy

disk drive

is

covered

with

three

sheet metals. And

three

sheet

metals

are

fixed

with

eight

screws.

Remove

those

sheet

metals

referring

to

the figure

8.5.

@

Install

a

new floppy

disk

drive with the

process

which

is

contrary

to

©

~

(3).

NB

T

.*

f'*

A

A



66

TENTATIVE

8.5

Maintenance

of

Hard

Disk

8.5.1

Handling

of

Hard

Disk

(1) Precaution

for

Use

-

Correct

connection

the

cable

-

Do

not

touch

the connector

section

with

hands

or

metal.

- Do not

apply

excessive

force on

the

connector section.

-

Do

not

drop or apply strong

impacts

on

the

drive.

-

Do

not disassemble

the

drive.

(2) Precaution

for

Storage

-

Avoid

strong

the

drive

in

high

temperature,

high

humidity

places.

- Do

not

place

the

drive near magnets

or

items

the

generate

strong

magnetic

fields.

8.5.2

Other

Precaution for

Use

(1) Recommendation

for making backup

The hard disk

is a

durable

device,

so

make a backup

of

the hard disk

to

save

important

data.

8.5.3

Replacement of

Hard Disk

Do not

handle

the

hard

disk without

metal

case

because

the

hard

disk

has

not

much

endurance

against

the

vibration

and

shock in

comparison

with

other electric devises.

Replace

the

hard disk

as the

Hard

Disk

Unit

(with the

metal

case

and

the stabilizing

rubber).

(1)

Check that

the

machine

power

is

turned

OFF.

(If

the

power

is not

OFF,

turn it

OFF)

(2)

Remove the

F140

cable

which is connected

between the

hard

disk

unit and

the

control

unit.

Remove

the

HEATER

cable

and

the

THM

cable

from

the

keyboard

unit.

(3)

Remove two

screws,

and

remove the

hard

disk unit

from

the

keyboard

unit.

(4)

Install

a

new

hard

disk

unit

with

the

process

which

is

contrary

to

©~@.

fgfeTTÿo

IE :'

ara®?-

T)

f|i

W

3

w

HI

O'

|

/j\

CAUTION

/j\

Hard Disk

Drive is

built

in this

product

Do

not

drop

and

do no t give a strong impact

to

the product

because

the hard

disk

drive

is

a

precise device

/\

The

hard disk drive

has

a

useful

life

Please

exchange

the hard disk drive

before

end

ot

the life

/t\

Please

make

a

backup

of the customers

files which

is

saved

in

the hard

disk

driveAt

the

breakdown

of

the

hard disk

drive

although

Mitsubishi

provides

exchange

service

of the

hard

disk

drive,

Mitsubishi

does not

guarantee

a customets files

which is

saved

in the hard disk

drive

And

Mitsubishi

does

not assume the

responsibility

concerning

the

damage caused

by

having damaged

the

hard

disk drive



67

TENTATIVE

8.6 Maintenance of

LCD

8.6.1

Life

of

LCD

Backlight

CCFL

(Cold

Cathode Fluorescent

Lamp)

is used for

the

light

source

(backlight)

of the

LCD

panel.

The

estimated

life

of the

backlight

is

40,000

hours/25°C.

(Time

for

the

brightness

to

drop

to

50%

of the

initial

value).

Life

time

depends

on

temperature.

When the LCD

panel

is used

under

low

temperature

or

high

temperature

continuously,

the

life

time

has a tendency

to become short.

8.6.2

LCD

Characteristics

(1)

Luminance

Luminance

decreases

at

a

low

temperature

by

the

CCFL

characteristic.

And,

the

time

until luminance

meets

rated

value

after

power-on

is

about 10-15

minutes.

(2)

Uniformity,

Luminous

Dot,

Dark

Dot

It

i s not

defect or malfunction

though uniformity,

a small luminous

do t and

a

small

dark

do t

may appear

on

the

LCD

panel.

8.6.3

Replacing

LCD backlights

Before

replacing

LCD

backlight,

remove the

LCD

panel

from

the

escutcheon.

In

addition,

make

sure

that

the

machine’s

power

is

OFF

to

replace

LCD

backlights.

LCD

backlight

type for

replacement:

L502174G01

©

Remove the

cable

from the

backlight

connector connected to

the

LCD

backlight

power supply card.

©

Remove

the

cable

for menu keyboard from the

keyboard

unit.

(D

Remove

the

cable

for

ON/OFF switch

from the

keyboard

unit.

(D

Unscrew

the

M4 screws

(8 screws)

to remove the

escutcheon.

(§)

Press

the nail

during pull ing

the LCD

backlight

out. (Figure

8.8)

(D

Attach the

LCD

backlight for replacement

in

the reverse

order

of

1

) -4).

©

0

\

ill

n

fpBft

m i

H

r\,

:jprr=m

i

ho

I

—

s

8

l

(2)

:

'tT

0



68

TENTATIVE

8.7 Maintenance of

Battery

All

data,

such

as Ihe parameter

and

machining

program

that need

to

be

backup

when the

power

is

turned

OFF,

are saved

by a

battery installed

in the control unit.

It is

easy

to get a

battery

because

a

familiar

mm-

Type

lithium

battery

is

being

used.

Replace

the

battery

as

a

standard

within

one

week

if

the

Battery

oltage

Drop

Caution

Alarm is

appeared.

If

the

battery

isn’t

replaced,

the

Battery

Voltage

Drop

Warning

Alarm is

appeared.

Then,

internal

backup data

could

be

damaged.

Battery

type

name:

CR17335SE-R-CH2

8.7.1

Handling

of

Battery

Double

oxidation

manganese

-

Lithium

battery

contains

inflammable

material

such

as

lithium, organic

solvent.

Erroneous

handling

of

lithium battery

may

result in

such

an

accident

of heat

generation,

explosion

or fire,

possibly

leading

to

personnel

injuries or

machine

malfunction.

CD

Do

not recharge,

disassemble,

apply

pressure,

heat,

directly

solder

or

dispose

in fire the

battery.

©

Insert the

battery

(+)(-)

correctly.

©

Do

not create short

circuit between (+) and (-}.

And do

not

carry

or store

the

battery

with

the

metal

goods

such

as

a necklace.

(3)

When

the

battery

is

stored

or

disposed,

do

not

stack

or

jumble

up

the

batteries

with

other

metal

goods.

Then, put a

insulating

tape

to

the

terminals

of the

batteries

to

prevent

a short circuit.

©

Do not

use

the

batteries

by

mixing

different

types

or

old batteries

together

with new

ones.

8.7.2

Replacement

of

Battery

©

Check that

the

machine

power

is

turned OFF.

(If

the

power

is not

OFF,

turn

it

OFF)

©

Remove

the

battery

cable from the control

unit.

©

Replace the

battery from

the

holder.

@

Install

the

battery

with

the

process

which

is

contrary

to

©~@.

H'

©Remove

the

battery cable

IT'D

©Remove

Ihe

ballery

7©

A

i

i

:-D

IT

:

\

a

Ur'

c

-

|

ACAUTION]

O

If

the

battery

low

warning

is

issued,

save

the

machining

programs

,

tool data

and

parameters

in

the

input

/output

device,

and

then

replace

the

battery

.

/K

Do not

short

circuit,

charge

overheat

, incinerate

or

disassemble

the battery .

/t\

Dispose of

spent

batteries

according

to local

laws

.



69

TENTATIVE

8.8

Maintenance

of Cooling

Fan

Two

cooling

fans are

mounted

in

the control unit.

One cools

down the

NCCPU,

and

the

other

cools down the

PC

CPU.

These

two

fans

are same

part.

Type

Name of

Cooling

Fan

: MMF-06E24DS-RP3

8.8.1

Life of Cooling

Fan

The life

of the cooling

fan depends on

the

grease

life

of

the bearing.

The

rotation time

when 20%

of

the

rotation

speeds

decrease

more

than an

initial rotation

speed

is

defined

as

the

life,

and the

life is

50,000

hours.

8.8.2

Replacement of

Cooling Fan

©

Check that

the

machine

power

is

turned

OFF.

(If

the

power

is

not

OFF,

turn

it

OFF.)

(2 )

Remove

the

fan

cable

from

the

FAN1

connector located around

the

left

top

of

the NC

unit.

(D

Remove the

cover

with

opening

the

lock

latch.

@

Remove the

cooling

fan

©

Install a new

cooling

fan

with the

process

which i s

contrary

to

©

~

d).

©Remove

the

fan cable

©Remove

the cover

y

.

frs.

)/

A

lit

r

>*.

.....

.

sk.-'i

i

•

-sf

i

M

i

Remove

the

cooling

fan

IV

:

i.::

j...

r*

5

i'

i

(



70



71



72



73

1

asic

Operations for Maintenance

1

Basic

Operations

for

Maintenance

Th e

minimum

operations

required for system

maintenance

are

described

in this

chapter.

1-1

Unlocking

the Password Key

Lock

The

functions

and

screens

that

cannot

be

operated

by

the

user

are locked

with

a password

key,

and

normally

cannot

be

used.

Releasing

the

Key-lock

The key-lock

can

be

released

with

the

following

procedures. Once the

key-lock

is

released,

the

key

is

remained

unlocked

until

the

power

is turned OFF

but

is automatically

re-locked

when the

power

is

turned ON

again.

(1 )

Select

the

[DIAGNOS]

1-1-1

[VERSION]

screen.

TPS 0

2005/10/20

Id : 31 :

47

Vv\A

0

.

OOiii/nin

w

50*

Orp*»

POSITION SET UP PROGRAM

C-COND.OOL PARAM DIAGHOS

DATA

I/O

TOOL

DISPLAY

INFO.

DATA

LAYOUT

MAP

MS0*

ITPS 0

2005/10/20

Id :

33:

23

Orpn

‘V'vV>

0 .

OOin/miii

\/\j

50Y

'

SJ.JJI

VERSION

ALARM

ALARM

PLC

MAIHIEN

RUNNING GRAPHIC

DATA

ACCTJMD.

HISTORY CONTROL ERASE

IGNAL

CHECK

MA I NT

B. TIME

EH ®

TPS 0

2005/10/20

14:34:33

|

'\A; 50*

UQ >

VV\A

o ooiii/nii*

rp»

DlivCHOS

DIAGNOS

ERSION

OPTION

SERVO SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR MONITORONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

(2)

Press the

menu

selection

and input

the keys in

the following

order:

3000[

INPUT

Following the

operation

above,

the

Hidden

screen

menu

will appear

when

the

menu selection

key

is pressed

t

t

Screen selection

key

Menu

key

Menu

selection key



74

1

asic Operations

for

Maintenance

1-1-2

Normally

(locked

with

password

key) Prohibited

Operations

Setting

of

forced output

[Normal]:

Menu

on

DIAGNOS screen.

1.

[TPS

0

200S/10/20

;i4:34:38

*

:

so*

iLUJJ

vW*.

O .OOin/jairt

rp«j

DIAGHOS

VERSION

DIAGHOS OPTION SERVO SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

MONITOR

MON

DIOR

MOH1TOR

MONITOR

ONITOR

[Hidden]:

Select DIAGNOS

MONITOR menu.

HH&i

*3

TPS

0

2005/10/20

14:38:20

so *

TTTO

V

V\A

0

.

00

in/»

in

tpa

I/O

IAGNOS VE RSIO N

DIAGHOS OPT IOH

SERVO

SPENDLE

|

HOW ITOK

HARDWARE

LADDER

WRITE

i

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

WRITE

CANCEL

Setting

of

servo parameters

and

spindle

parameters

•

Parameter setting

menu

Servo Parameter

window

Spindle

Parameter window

2.

[Normal]: Menu

on

VERSION

screen.

i

Ell

aa

TPS

0

2005/10/20

14:34:30

i

im

'-A.-

50*

VVY-

0

.

OOiu/min

rpa

DIAGHOS

VERSION

SPINDLE

j

MONITOR

DIAGNOS SERVO HARDWAREPTION LADDEP.

I

ONITOR

MONITOR

MONITORONITOR

[Hidden]:

Select SERVO MONITOR or

SPINDLE MONITOR menu.

ESIloa.

93

JTPS

0

2005/10/20

14:38:51

’V v

SO*

iLjJJi

VV\A

O

.

OOin

/min

z'pn

r,

i

DIAGHOS

VERSION

DIAGHOS

OPTION SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE LADDER P

ARAM.

MONITOR

MONITORONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

i.

When the

PARAM. setting

menu

is

pressed,

the

respective parameter

window

will

appear.



75

1

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

3.

Setting of

system

parameters (SYSTEM

PARAM),

pitch

error

compensation (PITCH

ERROR)

and

display

of

key

history (KEY

HISTORY),

memory scope

(MEMORY SCOPE)

[Normal]:

Menu

on

VERSION

screen.

wm&\

TPS 0

2005/10/20

-14:34:38

:

*

'w

5

XEH?

VWV

0.00

in/miii

rpn

DIAGHOS

VERSION

DIAGHOS

SERVO SPINDLE

HARDWARE

PTION

LADDER

MONITOR

MONITORONITOR

MONITORONITOR

[Hidden]:

VERSION”

menu appears on

the

right

end.

a*j3

TPS

0

2005/10/20

14:39:17

*\f\j

SOY

:5TQ»

]VW

0 .

00in/».in

rp»

VERSION

IAGHOS

DIAGHOS

OPTION

SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

VERSIOH

MONITOR

MONITOR MONITOR

MONITOR

ONITOR

I

TPS >3

0

2005/10/20

14:39:38

;

VWo.OOin/min

VX*

SO1.

Orpn

DIAGHOS SYSTEM

PITCH HEY

MEMORY

PARAM

HISTORY

RROR SCOPE

4.

Setting

of

cutting

parameter

(CUTTING

PARAM)

[Normal]: Menu

on

CUTTING CONDITION screen

TPS

0

2005/10/20

14:48:22

m ji

V\- 5

0

i

• VW

0. 00

in

/rain

lpn

WORK -MAT

C-SP

FR

C-COND. cur

C-OND

ORKMAT

.

TOOL-MAT

PERCENT

.

TURNING

LEARN

=Ll

[Hidden]:

CUTTING

PARAM

menu

appears

on

the

right end

mm*-

*>3

TPS

0

2005/10/20

14:40:13 I

' \A/

50

Y

JZD

VV'A

0

OOiu/mlti

rpn

*3

WORK

HAT

C-SD

FR

WORKMAT

. CUT CC'ND

|

CUTTIIJC

COND.

i

I

DOL-

MAT

LEARNERCENT

.

TURNING PARAM

:

I:

J

303 TPS

0

200S/1O/20

14.41:07

HD >

\;\.'

50*.

V-.V

0

OOin/min

r

p»

i

1

I

CUTTING

*

CUTT TNG

CUTTING

r

•

cmiD

s

(

PARAM

2

PARAM

3

ARAM l

:

76

1

asic Operations

for

Maintenance

1-1-3

Exiting

the

MAZATROL

Screen

The

MAZATROL

screen

can

be

exited with the following

operation.

r

TES 0

:

2

505/10/20

14:42:2a

u

'XA

J

50

V

;VVV-

O

.

t)0in/tti.tt

rpa

DcM

Ax».~*re(

D

I

-i-liir.'i

r<:

9iy

-COND*

PARAM

OSITION

SET UP

PROGRAM

TOOL

DISPLAYOOL

1HFO.

DATA

LAYOUT

MAP

WXm

IPS

0

:

2

1

Debug Functions

Arrange windows

neatly

>

JD .

PARAH

T>%

I

z

When

the

password

key is

unlocked,

bring

the cursor

to

this

space

and click on

the

right mouse

button button

to

display the

window

above.

The

MAZATROL

screen

is exited when

Exit is selected.

1-1

-4

Returning the

Password Key

Lock

Releasing

State

When the NC

is

powered on,

it

is

always

in

the state of

key-loced”.

Select

Debug Functions

from

the

password

key lock

releasing

state

if

you

don't want to

turn

NC

power

supply

on again.

”11

31

Mode

from

the

window

avobe

to r etu rn to

the

normal state

u

ebugWindow

I-

m\

PS

0

2005/JE

cndchkFree

Debug

Menu

Button

r

GL

Functions

PLC

Menu

>

Arrange

windows

neatly

-

uisyiiKi

JT

MA P

Exit

1

77

Basic Operations

for

Maintenance

1-2

Completely

Erasing

the

Memory

The

entire

syslem

memory

(SRAM) area is cleared when

the

card,

provided

with

memory, is

replaced

or

added.

1-2-1

Card

with

Memory

Mounted

HN482

(NC

memory

module board)

y

0

7

-2-2

Clearing

the

Memory

The

procedure for

erasing

the

SRAM

is

described below.

(1

)

Set

C to

NC

rotary

switch 2 [RotSw2].

Rotary

switch

1 [RotSwl] is 0”.

(Refer

to the

right

images.)

RotSw 1

<5



A

R n

1,

F

0

1

E

RotSw2

h

XX'?

2)

Turn

the

NC

power

ON.

r.

n

R

The

7-segment

LED

will change as

shown

below.

The

procedure

is

completed

when

Y

appears.

Changes at

a

high speed

between these

sections.

t

O

D

SRAM

clear

Power ON

(3)

The PC

side

of NC

is

started

while clearing the

memory. So when the

alarm

messages

are

displayed

while

starting

NC

screen,

click

the

OK

to

all

messages.

(Note:

The

operation

in MATRIX.

The

PC

side

is not

started in

M640.)

O

i

(4) After all

alarm

messages

are

cleared,

shutdown

the

PC from

the

Windows start

menu.

78

1

asic

Operations

for

Maintenance

(5) After

the

shutdown is

completed, NC

power

is turn

to

OFF

(6)

Return

the

NC

rotary

switch

2

to

0

(Refer

to

the

right

image

v

CP

cP

A

£

8

1

x»

s?

<j>

SRAM clear

by

RotSw2

C executes the

following operation:

1

.

Memory

test

and

zero

clear

to

all

SRAM

area

2.

Zero clear to

PLC bit

RAM

and

word

RAM

O

9)

6

8



79

1

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

1-4

Backing

Up

and

Restoring

the

SRAM

Data

Of

the

various data

used with

the MAZATROL

MATRIX,

some data is

backed

up

by a

battery

and

saved

in

SRAM

even

if

the

power

has been

turned

OFF.

Flowever,

this

saved

data

will be

erased when the

memory

is

cleared.

Also,

the SRAM

data

might

be

destroyed

when the

card

is

replaced,

etc.

/j\

Always

backup

the

SRAM

data

before carrying ou t

work that

could cause the SRAM

data

to

be

destroyed.

The

some data

(parameter

etc.)

in

SRAM

are registered

in

FLROM,

and

can

be

read when

required.

The

default

parameters

are always

registered

in

the FLROM when

shipped

from

the

Yamazaki factory.

1-4-1

Operation

Method of SRAM

Backing Up

FLROM

SRAM

Common,

local

variables

Common,

local

variables

Too

related tables

SRAM

.Some

data

arameters

Parameters

Jaw

shape

data

Cutting

conditions.

new

cutting conditions

Cutting

conditions.

new

cutting

conditionsaintenance

tool

lllfe'

Periodic

inspection

eriodic

inspection

|~

Extended

coordinate

-r:'

Gantry

control

data

antry

control

data

h.

HD

'-t

%

RA M

All

data

C

:

\ma

inte\s

ra

mbkf

.

dat

80

a

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

1-4-2

Backing

Up and

Restoring the SRAM

SRAM

data is

backed

up

and

restored

using

the

maintenance

tool.

An outline is

shown below.

Start the

maintenance

tools,

and

select

the

BACKUP

screen.

ipZ',

BACKUP

-

FLASK ROM

SSAX

EJCT-I'ATA

UO

C

:

'-x-ai

n

.

tfat

UPDATEJ

MAIHTraAMCsl

BACKUP

[

OPTfOK EKIT

With the backup

function,

the

SRAM

data in

the NC

can

be

saved in

another

medium

Execute

the following

operations

using

the

button

(T)

to

@.

©

SRAIVH>FLROM

A part

of

SRAM

data in the NC

unit

(Note)

is

backed

up

in

FLROM in

the

NC

unit.

©

SRAM<-FLROM

A

part

of

SRAM

data

backed

up

in

FLROM

(Note) is

read

to SRAM.

SRAMÿHDD

The whole SRAM

data in the

NC

unit

(2MB),

as

well

as

the

PLC's BIT-RAM

and

WORD-RAM

area are backed up

in

HDD.

The

Names of backup

files

are

fixed

as

follows.

_

Content

Remarksize

ile

name

Whole

SRAM

C:\mainte\srambkf.dat

2MB

PLC’s

BIT-RAM/WORD-RAM

C:\rn

ainte\plcbkff

1

.

dat_

C:\mainte\plcbkfOf

,dat

1MB F

o

r

MATRIX

Standard

For

MATRIX

NEXUS4KB

@

SRAM<-HDD

The

above

files,

which have been

backed

up in

HDD,

are

read

to

the original

area

in

the NC

unit.

(Note)

A

part

the SRAM

data items

read/written

between

SRAMoFLROM

are

listed below

•

User

parameters

-

Machine

parameters

- R

registers

(R21

00

to

R2527)

•

Cutting

conditions

-

Cutting

conditions

learn

- Maintenance check

-

GL

(gantry)

parameters



81

a

asic Operations

for Maintenance

1-5

Backing Up

the

Saved Data

Of all

the

data

stored

in

SRAM

and

HD ,

the data

indicating the

customer's machine conditions can

be

backed

up by

data

input/output

on

NC screen.

It

is

recommended to

backup

these

data

before

various

maintenance

operations

are worked.

Save

these

data as

the

customer's

current

machine condition

data if

any

troubles

or

fault

occurs.

1-5-1

Types of

the

Saved

Data

Device saved

data

Item

SRAM

HD

Machining

programs

O

Tool

data

O

o

Tool offsets

O

Tool

files

O

Jaw

shape

O

Cutting

conditions

O

Workpiece

offsets

O

User

parameters

O

Machine

parameters

O

Extended

coordinate

O

Macro

variables

O

Periodic

inspection

O

Note: R

registers

of

R2100

to R2527 and

R10500

to R11999

are

included

in

the machine

parameters.

Note: The

tool

data has

the

main

data

in

HD

and the

index

table

in SRAM.

1-5-2 Media

for

Backing

Up

the

Saved

Data

(1)

HD

The

data

of the

item

described

in

1-5-1

can

be backed

up

to

an

arbitrary

HD’s

folder of

NC.

(2)

IC

memory

card

(Using the NC front

slot)

The

data

of

the

item

described in 1-5-1

can

be backed

up

by using

the

IC

memory

card

from

NC

front

slot.

(3)

USB

memory

The data

of the item

described

in 1-5-1

can

be

backed

up by using

the

USB

memory from

NC

front USB

slot

or

USB

slot

on pendant box side

(extended

from

USB slot

on

the back

of NC).

82

1

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

1-5-3

Backing

Up

the Saved

Data

For

example,

the

method

of

backing

up

the saved data

by

the

USB memory

is as

follows.

(1)

Press

the screen

selection key until

the

menu

in

the

figure below

appears,

and

select

DATA I/O from

the

menu

30

osmou

TOOL

PROGRAM

P

ARAM

OIACHOS

DATA

x/o

DISPLAYOOL C-COHD.

LAYOUT

DATA

3Xiur WAT

(2)

Input/output

the

data on

the

screen

below.

MCCRW

T

il

—

T

t

|V:

V=J

T.:.:

E

I

=F

tmUm

ITIIZZIZZZp:

•

i;

T

%

•.

-

\*i.

L

rrr

r

TOT**

CAM

two

n

lAtl DMA

CUO

CCD

:

• n* « *w

s»

(3)

Select

the menu

key USB”.

USB

I/O

menu

is

displayed.

(4)

The

DEVICE

SELECT

screen

is

displayed

when

DEVICE

SELECT

of

the

USB

I/O

menu is

pressed.

The

D

drive is selected

(highlighted)

with

the

[

T

] key,

and click

[OK]

(or

press

the

[INPUT]).

SELECT

DATA

I/O

PAKAH.

MC<-OSD NC->USD DIR.IR.SD

LOAD

SAVE

CONTENT

DELETE SELECT

i'i

»

nr

IA:

\)

I

O

:

\

1

MAZATKOI.

(Effl

(Note)

When two

or more

USB memories are

inserted,

the E drive

or

more

might

be

assigned.

83

0

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

(5)

When

the

menu

DIR. SELECT

is pressed,

the

selected

drive's

folder is displayed in

SELECT DIRECTORY

window. Select

the

folder

to

output

data.

• When

a folder is

newly

created,

input

a

folder name

with

the

keys

directly.

OTB

TT

tn

RECTORY:

»

r

n*>

CMM

PRtOOBAH

r

I

r

&

—

b~

r

r

n

IT

.

4

.

I

'r

[

[irÿV

[

TUC*

DATA

c*

T

T

r

i

ZZTJ

• AV

p.

Q6

i

n/min

RV

vn

LtniT*

OJ.T*

I/O

YiUtW.

MC

•

>oins

llBB

DtiATfcAD

tiltt

CSMCTtW* rcixcs

The

selected

folder

name is

displayed in

«

DIRECTORY

»

on

the

right

side

when

OK

is

clicked

or

<INPUT>

is

pressed.

/

usn <-r

nrr.rcroPT:

ntcxti* »

C

PROGRAM

PROGRAM

£

I

4

~:r

:p:

t

I

1.

-

OTnER DATA

OTHER

DATA

1

ESeSS'Ti

TPE

0

20CS/10/1V

19:43:22

i

/v? so>

UUl VAS

O

00 in

/min

rpa

f

|

Hf '.-USA

K|

nma

x/o

C-

>USB

usn

narvr.

nip

DTA

.

'

DELETE

SELECT

.0

AD

VARAN.AVE

COWTEHT

SELECT

(6) Select

NC—

>USB

SAVE ,

and select

the

data

to

output.

84

1asic

Operations

for

Maintenance

(7) Selecting

the

program

file

Press the menu

SELECT ALL .

When <INPUT>

is

pressed,

all

program

files

are

displayed

in

the

program

area on

the

upper

left.

If

not all

programs

are

displayed

in

the

program

area

at

a

time,

the

programs

can be

confirmed by moving

the

scrollbar

up

and

down.

*-

sfM

*y,

j irntc-roGr:

;<>

PBOCJIJ#*

pytfarJ

-s

i

EEEt

i

T

c

T

WtA

--

her.::::

TOOL,

riix

Ctroor

.TMT

[

ASM

W

_

;

_

__

Twissso; '? ' '

...

—

CTPS|tal

,>i>

JOWlo/ll

I ' H

I*

'ÿy,

:;ÿ>

JP»

>V'v*'

#*S0 in/min

iKtonirtK

cu MCOCOAM WIMBI.'X

»

I

rm

Tttt

roaiAt

nv.um

ST WIT

ki,f-

(8)

Selecting

other

data

Move

the

selected area from PROGRAM to

OTHER

DATA

by

using

TAB

key.

(When

TAB

key is pressed

once again,

the

area

is

moved

from OTHER

DATA

to

PROGRAM”.)

Select

and

highlight

all

items

by

inputting

INPUT”.

*h:

• •

JUKtt-JtHCf;

HAJ'SHV

>>

' • rPOGB-W

PDr*on«4

I

.

;

i

;

i

1

\

—

r;;.:

:

.

:

;

-;;Tssr

• »» *'»

t'HJ

A

,n.T-;

i

1*3 ft

ttwfc

rJL*

r

cun iit.

CUJIP

•

«»r«

rums

i

.....

SSiS?-

.........

IL »O

ViSi

j

Uifl

MAJX 3

EfliSÿ

r> 3 >

rc-Ti/tO/ll

tl:45.ni

j

0,3m TBAVGWIT -.IHVerS'..-

»o

CX*

-

'

S’”

At

J.

r

n»

(9)

When

START

menu

is pressed, the

copy

is started.

The

output

situation

is

displayed sequentially in the selected

directory column on the

right

side.

The

copy

is

completed

when

the

directory

column is the

same

as [NC]

on

the left

side.

85

1

asic

Operations for

Maintenance

1-5-4 Restoring

the Saved

Data

Fo r example,

the

method

of

restoring

the

saved

data

backed

up

by the

USB memory

is

as

follows.

(1)

to

(5)

Set

the

USB memory's folder

name in the same

way

as

previous

section.

(6)

Selecting

the

backup

data

When US B

CONTENT

-*

START

is

pressed

from the

menu,

all

contents

of

selected

folder

is

displayed

on

the

right

side

column.

IH I

msKTiisr

.

HM57

'***

Jt

MUD

w>

253 A*A-‘

II

»rt«T

(7)

Loading

the

selected

data

When

NC<—

USB

LOAD

->

START

is

pressed

from

the

menu,

the

selected data

is

loaded

to

NC. The

output

situation

is

displayed sequentially

in the [NC] column

on

the

left

side.

The

loading

is

completed

when

the

directory

column is

the

same

as

[FID]

on the

right

side.

PtRtlftXBJU

HftT.-'VIIF

>i

Ppr ;i

P”*

.....

un -

i

pi

»»

potto

ft.'B

n,t

j

|.

imv:,’

.Mian

ti-.M.

VJiWy

I

mz<*

.

*;>

I

:

IJZJ



86

a

asic Operations

for

Maintenance

1-5-5

Saving

to

the various

media

The

USB

memory

was

selected

as a medium

for

saving

in

the

above

example.

Hard disk

and

IC

card

(front)

can

be

used

as

a

medium

for

saving.

Select

the device

from

DATA

I/O

menu

in

the

previous

section

(2).

cnuo

lINUl)

usa

CAM

DATA

DJ2K

$AVIC

>

Select

USB

->ÿ

Select hard

disk

>

Select

IC

card (front)

(D

When a hard

disk

is

selected

As

for

the

drive and

the

folder, C:\MC_backup\Other

is

selected as

default.

Select the target

folder

from

under

the

above-mentioned

folder

by the

menu DIR SELECT .

(2)

When

a IC card

is

selected

The

drive

is

fixed on

front

IC

card.

Select

the target

folder

from

under the

ROOT

of

IC

card by the

menu

DIR

SELECT .

Other

operations

when the

hard

disk

and

IC card

are

selected

apply

correspondingly

the

USB

memory

in

the

previous

section.



87

a

asic

Operations for Maintenance

1-6

File

System Configuration

1-6-1 File

System Format

Each

size

of the

MAZATROL MATRIX

file

system

is

decided

by

the

number

of

programs

and

number

of tool

system

parameters. Up

to

960

programs

can

be

set as a multiple

of

16, and

up

to 4000

tools

can

be

se t

Setting

value

arameter

2

2

programs

0100

No. of

programs

16

56

programs

32

12

programs

960

programs

60

Fo r

0100,

set

the

No.

of

programs/16

value.

Note

1:

The

No .

of

tools

is

set

according

to the

machine

specifications.

Note 2: Refer to

section

1-8 Initializing

the

Data

for the

actual

formatting

operations.



88

1asic

Operations

for

Maintenance

Setting

Data

with

Special

Operations

The

following

data cannot be set

easily

by

the user.

Special operations

are

required.

1-7

Setting

the Date

and

Time

Date

and

time of

MAZATROL

MATRIX

is

automatically

set when the

power

is ON

using

the

Windows

internal clock

as the reference.

Thus,

the date

and

time

are

set

with the Windows clock.

(1 )

Double-click

on

the

date

above

the

menu

or

time

area.

1-7-1

I

TPS

1

j

JOOS/1O/10

[l7:4J:J6

[vW'

50s

l

50,

POSITION

I

TOOL PROGRAM

I

LAYOUT

TOOL

DATA

DATA

I/O

DIAGHOS 3D

ARAH

DISPLAY

MAP

C-COND

SETUP

(2)

Date

and Time

Properties”

of

Windows

is

displayed,

se t

the

current date

and time.

The

set

data

is

validated

immediately.

Dale a.jd qhnB

Properties

[Yf

Date &

Time

j Tine Zone

ii

Internet

Tune

j

D«t£

mm®

f

zoos

it

;

.

—

...

-------

-

i

....

, ,

.....

.*

—

.

\

1

2 3

1

5

6

7 8

9 10

1

12

13 H

15

16 17

13

19

20

2i

22

23

21

25

26

27

28

29

|

I

3:04:56PM

:

Z |

Current

tine rone:

Gf'lT

Dayl*gi>t

Time

[

CX Cancel



89

1Basic

Operations for

Maintenance

1-7-2

Setting

the

Accumulated

Time

Five

types

of

accumulated times are displayed.

The

total t ime can

be

changed with

the

following

procedure.

(1)

Release

the password

key

lock.

Refer

to

the

section

1-1-1

Releasing

the

Key-lock .

(2)

Select

the

OPTION PARAM

screen,

and

turn

0106

bitO

ON.

Note: The

total

time cannot

be rewritten

unless

030

bit

6 is

turned ON .

(The

other

data will be

rewritten.)

(3)

Select

DIAGNOSIS

->

ACCUMU. TIME

(highlight),

and

open

the

ACCUMULATED

TIME

window.

~* s

3

14:51:44

'VV 50* jS

T

[]?

V\AA

O.

001n/aia

rpa

VERSIOK MAINTEH

GRAPHIC

MAIHTE.

ALARM

ALARM

PLC ROHNIKG

DATA

S

1GHAL

TIME

OffTROL

ERASE

ISTORY

CHECK

(4)

Using

the cursor

keys,

move

the

cursor

to

TOTAL

TIME”

ACCUMULATED

TIME

-ifitfSl

pa

TX I

£«cl

jfe

-

aiiiSl

j

200o.dd.od:

(5)

Input

the

time

data to be

set,

and

then

press

the

INPUT

key to

complete

the

setting.

Ex.

To set 2000

hours:

INPUT

0

0

0

0 0 0 0

(6)

When

you

input

data

in

above

procedures,

the 0106

bitO

is

automatically

turned

OFF.

Please

select the

SYSTEM

PARAM

screen,

and

confirm that

0106

bitO is OFF.

90

1

asic

Operations

for Maintenance

1-8

Initializing

the

Data

1-8-1 Initializing

the

Data

(1)

Turn

the

NC

power

ON.

(2)

Press

the screen

selection

key

until the following

menu

appears.

Select

[DIAGNOS]

-»

[DATA

ERASE]

from

this

menu.

Trs

0

too

5/10/10

........

T |=—

l

'W

4,

S

POSiriOH

•

TOOL

f

Vl; TOOI.

DISPLAYRRflM

-

I

piRGHOS

|

DATAC-COHD”.

• ÿ in

ROGRAM;

•

LAYOUT

;;;

-

~

;

,

'

DATA

MAP

ETUP

j

j

:

j

ires

o

:2ocs/io/i8 jveiSTS

Fvv

4%

50*

[VV‘A

so*

ACCUMU.PLC

MA32TTEH

HAL

CHECK

YERSIO.H

ALARM

PLC

LARM

RUHHXMG

GRAPHIC

CONTROL

:

MALHTE

,

|

ERASE

;•

MISTORY

SIG

(3) Using the arrow keys

and

INPUT

key,

validate the initialization

of

all data

on

the

displayed

window (highlight

in

blue).

• Z OO t DATA

ADD

WPC

TOOL

P1S-E

TkxsL

Qivv::f,T

i

(TTTT1HC

OOMtL

ALAJtH

HISTORY

ORK

oppytr

MADHtHWCE

ACRO

VAR.

j-.v-.WM

OHPtfrriOPt

<-99»9

lNPnY>

START TWIT

.

(4)

Follow the

message

under

the

data

selection

field,

input -9999

and

press

the

INPUT

key.

The initialization is

completed

when

the

DATA

ERASE

window

display

disappears.

91

a

asic Operations

for Maintenance

1-8-2

Initializing

the

Programs

The

initialization

procedure

of

the area

where the

machining

program

is

stored

is

shown

below.

(1)

Turn the

NC

power

ON.

(2)

Press

the

screen

selection

key

until

the

following

menu

appears.

Select

[PROGRAM]

-»

[PROGRAM

FILE]

from this menu.

J

5o %

I

50 .

3„

ARAM DIAGHOS

DATA

I/O

C-COND.:

OSITION TOOL

LAYOUT

PitOG RAM

TOOL

DISPLAY

MAI?

ATA SETUP

(1,1)

INSERT

S

0

fvv

4ÿ

I

__

IP

so%

DIR.

CHANGE

WORK NO.

PROGRAM

f

FILE

|

SEARCH PROGRAM

EDIT

TOOL

PATH

DISPLAY

CHANGE

2PROGRAM

PROGRAM

;

.j

.

|

j

IrPS

0

i

2005/10/18

jl?

:48:24

KA,

«*

PROGRAM

PROCEAM

REHUIIBER]

BRA9E

PROGRAM

INPUT COPY

PART

SHAPE

NAME PROGRAM DIP.. PROGRAM

TRANSFER

PROGRAM

CHANGE

DIT

-

L

i

(3)

Select (highlight)

[ALL

ERASE]

from

thi s menu .

Using

the

operation

board keys, input

’’-9999

and

then

press

the

INPUT

key.

Initialization

of

the

programs

is

completed

when

the

highlighted

display

of ALL

ERASE

returns

to

the

normal display.

TPS 0

7005/10/ia

|l7;42:47

i:

vU

4*

yw v

so%

A3.L

ERASE

<-9999

INPD7>

7 -9999

V:'r;T;;;

;

y

ERASE

I

DELETE

SELECT

i. PROGRAM

1

PROG.

DELETE

J

r~

i

(4)

When

DIR

CHANGE

is

pressed,

the

following dialog

is

displayed.

The

program

stored

area

can be

changed

by the

buttons.

For the

following

three

areas,

all erase

of

(3)

is operated.

f

>*ÿ*»

DIRFCTORv|ÿC:

Proqra«a«

jj-$

WORK

No

SIZE

J3

PKOT.P.AM KAHF.

(Selected

area)

-ÿ©STANDARD

PROGRAM

C:\MC_MachineProgurams

-E>(2)BACKUP

PROGRAM

C:\MC_Backup\Programs

-------

®HDD

OPERATION

PROGRAM

(Directory

display)

----

K

—

I

iTANDAKI)

PROGRAM

HACK

UP

PROGRAM

HOI)

Ol’EKAT

I(KO<;KAM-

C:\MC_Direct

Mode

Programs



92



93



94



95



96

List

of

data

backed

up

(If

the

folder/file do not

exist,

the

backup

is

unnecessary.)

Data

details Folder

(file)

name

1

Machining

programs

C:\MC_Machine

Programs

2

Machining

programs

for

HD

operation

_

C:\MC_Direct

Mode

Programs

3

Gantry

programs

C:\MC GL

Data

Machining

programs

for

backup

Sampling

data

tool

data

related

4

G:\MC_Backup

C:\MC

sdg

Operation

control

screen

data

C:\RUMMNG

7

Display

data

for

NIC screen C:\nm64mdata

8

Data

for

graphic

maintenance/

alarm

navigation

_

C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

Custom

display

related

module

3D interference

check*Real

simulator*3D

data

for

setup

9

C:\Custom

Display

10

C:\MC_Machine

Database

Real

simulator

IN

I

FILE

1

C:\m6y ymw\M740\Bin\ReleaseVealsimjni

NC

system

software

2

C:\ncbackup

13 J2-CT

parameters

CAI2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat

C:\j2ctbusV***.

prm

14

Maintenance

data

C:\mainte\mnt_j3kup.dat

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No.).opt

C:\mainte\(IMC

serial

No.).

opt.

old

Option

data

5

16

I

SRAM

backup

_

17

I

PLC internal

memory backup


C:\mainteVpfcbkf1

1

,dat

(other

than

NEXUS)

C:\mainte\plcbkf01

.dat

(NEXUS)

_



97

Matrix Data

To

Save

Added note in step

1

for

backup-inch folder(R3)

The data fo r the Matrix

control can

now

be

saved

to an USB Jump drive

which will

allows to

save

complete

folders

easily

. So,

the

data

to

save is

somewhat

revised

from

that

of the M640.

Data

To

Save

on

Installation

Checklist

1)

Through

Data

I/O

save

the machine parameters, user parameters, cutting

conditions.

Save to hard

drive under

Backup-inch folder

if in

inch

mode,

and Backup-mm

for

metric.(R3)

2)

Using

either

Printkey

or Printscreen3

(c:\mainte\printscreen3.exe)

save

the

following

4

pages:

A)

Go to privilege

mode.

(To

access:

Diagnos, Version,

Right

menu key

»,

1131

and Input.)

B) Option page.

C) Version page- (Note:

In

privilege

mode,

the Model number will be

displayed)

D)

O-Parameter page.

E)

Hardware

Monitor page.

3) Copy the

c:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

or

Tplc

folder.

4)

Copy the

C:MC_SDG\ Alarm

folder.

5) Copy the

Nm64mdata\eng

folder.

6)

Copy

*.prm

and

axisinfu.dat

file from the c:\Program

Files\j2ctbus

folder.

7) Save

a

new

mntbkup.dat file using

c:\mainte\mainte.exe maintenance

tool

to hard

drive.

Then copy

the

resulting

mntbkup.dat

and *.opt

file

from the

c:\mainte.exe

folder

to

USB drive.

8)

Save

any

9000 series programs either

by Data I /O or Explorer .

9)

Save

the

Pic

ladder. See Appendix

B

If

have a

Gantry

10)

Save parameter

and

programs

of

robot using Data I/O

on

robot side.

ll)Copy all

of

these into a folder

with S.N. Machine Type and

Customer

Name.

Then

compress

to

a

zipped

file

with

serial

number and

date(YYYYMMDD).

Example

184305_20060512.zip.

For

s.n 184305 and

May

5th,

2006.

12)

Place

this

on the

shared

on

“locutus”(S:) folder of

Address

|Z]

S:\MazdtroHMachineDataFromField\184305_QTN300_IPH

1

Sa|

Type:

“f

iHddfed

I

j

”

3

ft

LJ

i

184305_QTN300_IPNI

Folders

feme

fl843O5_2OO6O504.zip

154

KB

WinZip

File

05/04/06

12:15PM

§

shared

on

tortus'

(S:)

:

lu

GCM

.t

D

(2004-02-03)

Mahle

Update

*

J

O.ClassSyllabus

*

j

O.dassWorkbooks

*

J

OO

MEAU

consignment parts

Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField

by

logging in

using VPN

or

having

someone in

the office placing

it there.

I

This

folder

is

Online.

98

It is

up

to the

regions

how they

wish to

handle the data

as

they

probably wish to

have

their

own backup. See

Appendix

1 for

more

detail.

Data To

Save

on

Service Calls

if

updated

software.

1) Version page.

2) Alarm folder

3)

Pic ladder.

4)

*.LPC

file

if

upgraded.

5)

Machine

and use r parameters.

Appendix

A Saving

the

Mntbkup.dat

file

y

..

v

\

-

.

'

'

Li

2nd

nafA'

-

.

si

I

-M&1MTENAHCE

- NC

IACKUP

-

HC

HODEI

FCA655LHY-HV

CONTROL

UNIT

TYPE

FCU6~NA651~34

HC

SERIAL*

M656 993

03

39

OPTION

DATA

1

b

X

s-

NC

worn

FC&6551HY-NV

CONTROL

UNIT TYPE

FOJC-MAG51-34

NC

5EE1A1#

M6S6993033-9

OPTION DATA

:_il

1

1;

1

i

DE I

.

>j

wne

Vnc_tool

BU5DRV32.DLL

setup,

txt

Dload32.exe

m62yticcd

dl

Fib

Folder

48

KB

Applccticn

Ex

1KB

Text Docurrer

2b KB

Applcation

32

KB

Applcatien

£x

80

KB

Applccficn

24 KB

Applcsfcicn

Ex

Z4 KB

Applcaicn

£X

20

KR

ApplcsBinn

28

KB

Appkctlen

Ex

143KB

Applcation

Ex

368

KB

ApplCctiOn

3

KB

1

KB

DAT

Fib

<M

NC MODEL IHFUT

k

px'pdv<6.s:

a

<r-u

.-nanhrr

;

CONTROL UNIT

TYPE

IHFUT I

yjozl:

a

|

fjMGSysHDNC

M.exe

J

i

p] W6YSV5.DLL

HC

SERIAL#

INPUT

PRODUCT

ID#

—

r

-

3-DEM-

0007007-00000

'1$*-

INPUT

ID*

BACKUP

i

j

gW62VbY3.DLL

—

—

—

-

—

—

—

-4

.....

—

--i

•

j

fÿPrintSrreenJ.eve

BACKUP

=

51873-DEM-0OQ7OO7-OOGOO

IE#

CHANGE

lgm62ytd.ag.cil

-

ha

gj

m62

vtaDi.nl

pMAIWrE.KE

pj

mante.ni

~fWj

mrf._bkup.dot

PC

s/w UPDATE

I

HAIHTENANCE BACKUP OPTION

<-<-

; 3-ÿmainte

:

g|||g||

—

*

i

;

L_ J

Vnc_t;

:

§J

•

M-

P

1

Mcbeckjp?

*)

-Cj

nm64triat

i 1

Program

I

\rÿ.

\

lsti

\i

'

<7

Results

new

mntjokup

jg

Copy

the new

resulting

mntbkup.dat and

*.opt

file to USB

jump drive.

-'.it

i

Appendix

B- Saving of

the ladder.

1)

Press

DIAGNOS.

2)

Press

VERSION.

Select

>RIGHT

MENU>

key

and

enter

1131

and

press

Input.

3)

Press

LADDER

MONITOR

4

)

Select

NC

FILE



99

5)

Press

OPEN.

6)

Select OPEN again.

A)Display

will

say

“Reading from

Pic”

B)

Display

will

say

P ic Onboard Complete

7)

Press

OK.

8)

Press

CLEFT MENUC

key

twice to see

LADDER in

black now.

9)

Select

MONITOR

and display will

actual

values .

10)

If still

not

showing

status,

select

START/

STOP

MONITOR

11)

If No comments then may

be

that

the

comments

aren't

selected to

be shown.

)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC key

till

see the VIEW, select it.

TOOLS

B)

Select

COMMENT

ISPLAY

C)Make

sure

there is

checkmark beside

| |

COMMENT .

D)

Press

SET

when

finished.

Still

No

comment?

This is

probably because

the

comment file

(*.wed)

wasn' t

Loaded

in

with

ladder

in

steps 5

and

6.

A)

Keep pressing CLEFT MENUC key

till

you

see

the

main

Mitsubishi Pic Programming Tools Copyright

screen

.

B)

Select

ENVIRON

.

SETTING

C)

Select

NC

FILE

SETTING

)

E)

Click

on

the STORAGE

PATH Box so it

is

highlighted

or

just press

arrow

down

key

to

highlight it.

F)

The

pathway should be

C:

\m6y_ymw\MPLC

G)

Press

SETTING menu key.

H)

Press the

Left

menu

key

an

select

NC

FILE

Repeat

steps

5 through 10

to

see

the

ladder with comments.

12)

If

ladder and

comments

are shown,

go to

next

step

to

save

ladder

and comment file.

13)

Press CLEFT

MENUC

key

till

see

the Copyright screen,

the

LADDER

must be

shown

as

solid

black.

14)

Press

NC

FILE



100

15)

Press OPEN

16)

Press OPEN

again.

17)

Select

OK.

18)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

key

till

see

Copyright

sc reen aga in .

19)

Select I EXTERNAL

FILE

20)

Press

SAVE

PROJECT

21)

Press

EXTERNAL

SAVE

)

22 )

If

a

USB

jumpdrive is

inserted,

then

make sure

that

the

Drive/Path

is

set

correct ly

to the

drive.

23 )

Select

PROJECT

NAME

24 )

Enter

in

an

appropriate

filename,

normally

ladder

version

.

25)

Press SAVE.

26)

Select

OK.

The

ladder

is now

saved

to

the

USB

Jumpdrive.

Note: When the

project ladder is

saved,

it will be a

folder

that

includes sub-folders

containing

the ladder and

comments. The

lathe, e-machine,

and

mill’s

file

structure are

different.



101

Appendix

1

Connect

to shared

drive,

“Shared

on

Locutus”

by

entering the

Mazak

network

either

from

a

regional

office

or through

VPN.

It

is

best

to

map that

drive

so

you don’t

have

to

do

a

search via

Network Neighborhood.

i—J

Q

Mazatrol

Q

MC

parts

order

ClMCAM_POSTS

Cl

MEAU

WARRANTY

STOCK

Cl

MERGE FILES

Cl

MexicoTransf

erPrice

Cl

Midwest

4

->9

shared

on

'locutus'

(5:)

j

B

D

GCM

a

C

(2004-02-03)

Mahle

Update

i

$0]

0_ClassSyllabus

j

E-iCl

0_ClassWorkbooks

B-Q

00_MEAU

consignment parts

Ifl

Cl

10.0

CAPRMS Documentation

aCl

100

Series

APC

shared

on

'locutus'

(S:)

This

folder is

Online.

Select

an item

to

view

its

description.

fj

pjnn

Once

there,

simply

go to

the

Mazatrol

drive

and

copy

the

customer

information

by

using s.n. ,

machine

type, customer

name

in

folder.

Create

a

folder using this as

your

format.

|Cl

S:\Mazatrol\MachineDataFromField

3

J

x

Name

J

Cl

1

84305_QTN300

JPM

Cl

Mazatrol

:

E

C

MachineDataFromField

|

B

Cl

MATRIX_PRM

VIEWER

±j

.

j

Utilities

MachineDataFromFieli

The

zipped

file

with data

should

be named

by

serial number and date.

Address

|Q

S:

\ lÿza tro l \Mach ineDa :aFromFfeld \

1

84305JÿN300JFÿ1

3

$

Name

l

olders

X

Sj

184305_20060504.zip

ÿ

Cj

Mazatrol

:

E'CI

MachineDataFromField

|

B

-S)

184305

JQTN300

JPM

184305_QTN300_IPM

Once this

is placed

here,

it

will

be

copied

over to the

standard

service drive

for safe-keeping

and

will

be available

by either

intranet

or

through

the

service

web-site,

http://main.mazakcorp.com/service/.



102



103

@

ystem

Maintenance

Work

2

System

Maintenance

Work

2-1

Folder/File

Configuration

and

Device

Information

2-1-1

AT

Side

Module

and

File

List

The AT

side modules

and files

required

for

this

system.

These

contents are

planned to

be described

in

the next

edition.

2-1-2

HDD

Folder Configuration

The

configuration

of this

system's

HD

folders.

These contents

are

planned

to be

described in

the next edition.

2-1-3

Device

Information

The default

setting

information

for the

Windows

system device

manager.

These

contents

are planned

to be

described

in

the next edition.



104

1

ystem Maintenance Work

2-2 Version Upgrading S/W

2-2-1

Preparing the Media

Upgraded

NC system

software

(MAIN-A)

and NC

application

software

(MAIN-B)

are

provided in

the

media

such as

CD-ROM.

In

order to

execute an upgrade,

prepare

for IC

card,

USB

memory,

etc. according to the

following

folder configuration.

(1)

When

IC

card (Front) is

used:

Folder

configuration

©

Create

a

Verup

folder

directly

below

the

device

(root),

and

put

a version-name

folder under the

Verup

folder.

(D

Only one

version-name folder is allowed under

the

Verup

folder.

(D

The configuration

of

the

folders/files under the version-name folder

is

as

shown

below.

@

Create

either/both

Atsys

or/and

Ncsys

for

the

folder(s)

under

the version-name folder.

(root)

The Verup folder

directly

below the device is the

only object

to

be

upgraded.

(The

other folders and

files are

ignored.)

Q

Hi

Verup

D

l

A1

Create

only

one version-name folder

in

the

Verup

folder.

CjJ

LH

Atsys

0

Diski

\-{h

>

Application (MAIN-B) upgrade file

Setup.exe

1

—

{ e

t

c. )

P

Ncsys

i~Q

Bootsys.ncs

NcentJ.ncs

Ncsystem.ncs

r-O

>

NC

system (MAI

N-A) upgraded

file

(2)

When a

medium,

such as

IC

card

(Back),

USB

memory,

etc.,

that

can be accessed as an external

drive of the NC

is used:

Folder configuration

©

The

file

configuration

under

the version-name folder

is as shown

below.

(2)

The

location and

number

of

version-name

folders are arbitrarily

determined.

(D

Create

either/both Atsys or/and Ncsys

for

the

folder(s)

under

the

version-name

folder.

Ck)

Cn

AO

in

AI

The location and

number

of version-name folders are

arbitrarily

determined.

CjD

CH

Atsys

p

Diski

>

Application

(MAIN-B)

upgraded

file

f-Q

Setup.exe

(

e.t.c.

)

1

dp

Ncsys

j-o

Bootsys

ncs

NcentJ.ncs

Ncsystem.ncs

>

NC system

(MAIN-A)

upgraded

file



105

1]

ystem

Maintenance Work

(3)

When the version

backed

up

in

the

HD is

used:

When the

application

and NC

system

are

upgraded by using

the maintenance

tool,

the contents under

the version-name folder are

automatically copied

under the

HD's

C:\ncbackup.

(Note

that the

contents are

copied in

the Atsys

folder

when upgrading the

application, and in

the

Ncsys

folder when upgrading

the

NC system.)

Since

the

versions

previously upgraded

with

this

NC

are

backed up

in

the

HD,

it is

possible

to

retrieve

one

of those

versions

by selecting

an

arbitrary

version

No.

as

required.

(Example)

When

upgrading

the

application

of version

A1

C:

Device

Ncbackup

O

CH

AO

DAI

(root)

O

D

A1

Cj3

D

Atsys

Atsys

P

Lp

Diski

j~L— I

Setup

(

e t

c.

)

Diski

r-o

Setup.exe

(e.t.c.

)

.exe

i

All the

contents

under

the

version-name

folder,

including the file

to be upgraded,

are

copied

in

the

HD's

C:\ncbackup before

upgrading.

Ncsys



106

1

ystem

Maintenance Work

2-2-2

Upgrading

Procedure

By

the

flow chart, the

upgrading procedure is

explained.

This

chart

explains

a

standard

prodecre,

so

please

confirm

the details by “Version upgrade

manual which will

be

offerd

when

every

new NC S/W version

is

released.

START

£

Back

up

the

customer’s current data for

attention.

Back

up

all data according

to

1-5-3

Backing

Up

the

Saved

Data .

Back

up

the

saved

data

ik

Farther, backup

SRAM data

in

the NC unit.

Backup

all

the

SRAM data

and PLC’s

data

area

according

to

®SRAM->HDD

of

1-4-2 Backing

Up

and Restoring

the

SRAM

Backup

of

the SRAM data

Install the

NC

PC

side

system

(MAIN-B).

Refer

to

section

2-2-4

Upgrading

PC

Side

System

(MAIN-B) for details.

Version

upgrade

the

PC

side

system

(MAIN-B)

£

Install

the

NC

system

(MAIN-A).

Refer

to

section

2-2-3

Upgrading

NC

system

(MAIN-A) for details.

Version upgrade

the

NC system

(MAIN-A)

The

saved

data

backed up

is restored.

Refer to

section

1-5-4 Restoring the

Saved

Data

for details.

Restore

the

back

up

data

No

Parameter

Change?

(1)

Add/Change

the parameters

according

to

Version

upgrade manual .

(2)

Back

up

the

parameters

according

to

(T)SRAM

->FLROM

of

1-4-2

Backing

Up

and

Restoring

the

SRAM

after

adding/changing.

(1 )

Add/Change

the

parameters

(2) Back

up

the parameters

after

changing

(1)

Confirm

the version

display

after the

operations

by

the

version

display

screen

from

the

menu

DIAGNOS

->

VERSION .

(2)

Request

the

confirmation

of

the machine

operation

to the customer after

upgrading.

Confirm after upgrading

EN D

(Notice)

Data backed

up

first will

be

used

only

when it

should

be

necessary

to

get

back to former

state

by

any

chance because of

unexpected phenomenon

occurs

after

upgrading the NC

system.



107

2ystem

Maintenance Work

2-2-3

Upgrading

NC system

(MAIN-A)

Procedures for

upgrading

the NC

system

(MAIN-A)

is

given

below.

Start

Explorer

from the Windows

start

menu,

and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe to

open

the

maintenance

tool.

The

operation with the

maintenance tool

is

explained

as

follows.

urns

;

mwm

mm

j-: wrnrn

r

in>

START

|

©

Selection

of

device

Select

a

device

in

which

an

upgrading

file

is

included.

HCJWSTCH

URUTS

ic

wmm

cw

START

& 1X50.1

SWUX'

-

*

ic

WUMB cm

r.w

]

©

Execution

of

NC

system

upgrade

Click

the

[START]

button.

—

—

STAR?

[ ] MHHWKij

BI,B»F

DT

©

Confirmation

of execution

The

following

message

appears.

.-Always push

the

emergency stop

button

when

upgrading with

the actual

machine.

$

IS IT

OK

m

START-

0PDATXS&

K-C SYSTEH S»‘¥?

:

i

R.

Mt&r

eaBferjÿHscjp

st&p

buttgn

$

9

OVERWRITE

BOOT S'K

---

_____

CANCEL

r

—Leave the checkmark for

OVERWRITE BOOT

SA/V

OK

ON.

[OK]

Upgrading

process

is

continued.

—

>

Go to

@.

[CANCEL]

Upgrading

process

is

discontinued.

(4)

Exiting

the

application

When

executing

the maintenance

tool without

exiting

the NC

screen,

the NC screen

is

automatically

exited.

©

Designation

of

installation

file

•

When

IC MEMORY CARD is

selected for the

device,

go

to

©.

•

When HD is

selected for the

device,

a dialog

prompting

a

folder

selection

is

displayed.

Select a

version-name

folder and click

OK .

(By

simply selecting

a version-name

folder,

the

ncsys\Bootsys.ncs file

beneath

it

is

automatically

selected.)

Browse

For

Folder |

?

]fx]

Select

the

Ver.

Folder

c-:

D

nc

backup

Ss

L_j

AJJ3

B

D

B_A8

W

C_J

B_A8B

8

LJ

B_A8T

m

LJ

B_A8TE

&

CJ

B_AC

A-

Selecting a

version-name

folder

:+;

L_J

Atsys

nesys

v

Cancel

K



108

2

ystem Maintenance

Work

©

Copying

of

installation

file

File to

be

installed

is copied under HD's

C:\ncbackup.

When

C:\ncbackup\(version-name

folder)

is specified for

the installation

file,

this

file will

not

be

copied.

When the folder

having

the same version name

already

exists

in C:\ncbackup,

the

folder is

overwritten

and

copied.

INSTALLER

FILES

BACK

UP,

(Message

during

copying)

Now

.

Setup

Files

Back

Up..

©

Execution

of

installation

with

the specified file

Stop

NC

operation

to

execute upgrading

with

the file in

which

system

software

in

the NC unit

(MAIN-A)

is

specified.

Then,

restart

the NC.

SOFTWARE UPDATE

DURING

NC SYS

TEM

RENEWAL

ENVIRONMENT

MAKING.

3S*

fH

(Upgrading

process

is

displayed.)

OVERWRITING

NC SYSTEM S/U

SOFTWARE UPDATE

DURING NC SYSTEM

RE-ACTIVATION

.

r

w

V

NC

SYSTEM

S/W

UPDATE

IS

DONE Vv'ITH SUCCESS.

PLEASE

TURN

ON

THE

POWER

SUPPLY

AGAIN.

OK

When the above

message appears,

press

OK to

complete the NC

system

upgrading

process.



109

s

ystem

Maintenance

Work

2-2-4

Upgrading

PC

Side

System (MAIN-B)

Procedures

for

upgrading the NC

application

(MAIN-B)

is given below.

(1) Release the

password key

lock.

(

Refer to the section

1-1-1

Releasing

the

Key-lock )

(2)

Check

the

Windows

task

bar

in the

bottom

of

the

screen,

and

if

there

exist

any

applicatons

in

running,

close all

of

them.

(3)

Upgrading

procedure

with using the

maintenance

tool

Start

Explorer

from

the Windows

start

menu,

and double-click C:\mainte\mainte.exe

to

open

the

maintenance tool.

The

operation

with

the

maintenance tool

is explained

as

follows.

m

sijiftirf

Y

ipitU?

®

Selection

of

device

Select

a device in which an

upgrading

file

is

included.

mwm

mm-

-T,-—

-

rjmaemaat sorrtttSE

mtmt

&

ic

mam cm?

$rm

r

r

is>

(2)

Execution

of application upgrade

Click the

[START]

button.

—

*S

•

.

i*

ic

am*? a®

r

gp

START

idUttCT

srrup

TOOL

VP&ATS:

«

ic mam cu®

r

up

J

TART

(3)

Confirmation of execution

The

following message appears.

f

C-lt irmTC|

KIISTXKiKCEj

OACKVP OPTICK

EOT

15 IT OK TO START

INSTALLATION

?

[Yes]

Version

upgrading

is

continued.

-*

Goto

@.

[No]

Version

upgrading is

discontinued.

es

No

®

Exiting

the

application

When

the maintenance

tool

is

executed

without

exiting

the

NC

screen,

the

NC

screen is

automatically

exited.

(D

Designation

of installation file

•

When

IC MEMORY

CARD

is

selected

for the

device,

go

to

©.

•

When

HD

is

selected

for the

device,

a

dialog prompting a

folder

selection

is

displayed.

Select a

version-name folder and

click

OK .

(By

simply

selecting a version-name

folder,

the

Atsys\Disk1\Setup.exe file beneath

it

is

automatically

selected.)

m

rowse For Folder

Select

the Ver.Folder

ri

j

nc

backup

+•

LJ

AJJ3

+

:_]

B_AS

+'

_J

6_A8B

+ _J

B_A8T

to

U

B _A8TE

*

_J

B.AC

-

'±

i

_

j

Atsys

:_ j

ricsys

Selecting

a

version-name

folder.

OK

]

|

Cancel ]

110

§

ystem

Maintenance

Work

©

Copying of installation file

A

file

to

be installed

is copied

under

HD's

C:\ncbackup.

When

C:\ncbackup\(version-name

folder)

is

specified

for the

installation

file,

this file

will

not

be copied.

When the

folder having

the

same

version

name already

exists in

C:\ncbackup,

the folder

is

overwritten

and

copied.

warn

(Message when

starting

to

copy)

Now .

Installer Fites

Back

Up

. . .

i

opying—

(Message

during

copying)

m

data2.cab

From

'Diskl'

to ’Diskl'

-

[ Cancel

j

N*

to-

—

;

<•

'

_

25

Seconds

Remaining

(7)

Uninstallation

of

existing

system

Uninstallation of an

existing

system

is

executed.

Go

to

®

when

initially writing

an

application

or when

uninstallation has

already

been executed.

a

(Executing

uninstallation)

o#

Sstfut

k

*

[Cancel]

Upgrading

process

is discontinued

upon

canceling the

uninstallation.

caa

i

(Completed

uninstallation)

p

:v

J

j

[Finish]

->

Goto

®.

111

System Maintenance

Work

<D

Execution of

installation with

the

specified

file

The

installer

automatically

starts and

installation

is carried

out with the specified

file.

sssaaBr****’-

to*

&**aS$**&«VteMl

utsm

Sr'«.y*S>w

fcOMCMto iifck

ffe*4.

'

S

1

[Next]

Upgrading

process

is continued.

[Cancel]

Upgrading

process

is

discontinued

upon

canceling

the

installation.

jH&fcSDtb 'MMMM

c

3

1

......

w~3

(Message

during

installation)

CV.\M74flÿNÿÿwV5igeftN£L0IJL

|p|T

C;

VVV in

dow

s\system

3

2\d ri

vt;

rs \V irtiidldiivai.exe

jx)

Note:

When the

alarm shown

left

appears

immediately before

the

completion

of

installation,

click OK .

MANAGER

not exist

I

3

(Completed

installation)

tniUHVhwW

Wl.'ÿtrf

LTwptHn

P

tbviniifdtiMfiWumK-ii

iÿeRtA

FAT

tikf

FrusSÿj

m&.

f

,

[Finish]

Upgrading process

is

completed

upon

exiting

the

installer.

f

)



112

i

ystem Maintenance

Work

2-3

Adding/Setting

Software Options

2-3-1

Preparing

S/W

Option

The

S/W

option

of

MATRIX

is

officially

sold and provided

in

the Windows

file

form.

The

file is

named (NC

serial No.).opt .

For

example,

if

this

NC's serial No.

is

M7123456789,

the

option

file is provided

under the

file

name

of M71

23456789.

opt.

Copy

the

option

file

officially

provided

onto the USB

memory or

IC

card

(front)

for

the

preparation.

(1)

When USB

memory

is used

(Recommended)

The option

file

installed

is selected with the maintenance tool.

So,

the option file can be

stored on an

arbitrary

folder.

(2)

When

IC

card

(front)

is

used

Store

only

one

option

file

(The

extension

.opt ) to

root

of IC

memory

card. (It

is not

possible

to select the fi le by the maintenance

tool.)

Difference

from

conventional

option

The option

was

provided by

ROM

cassette

until

M640 series. When purchasing an

option fo r

the

second time

or

later, only

difference

information

between

the

previous

time and this time is

written

in

ROM

cassette.

Therefore,

two

or more

ROM

cassettes exist

when

the

S/W option

is

purchased

additionally.

For

example, when

NC

unit is exchanged, all

the

stored ROM

cassettes must

be

installed in

order.

In

MATRIX,

the option

is supplied

by

file

(fixed

file

name is given

for

each

NC

serial

No.).

So,

even

if

the options

are

purchased

two

or

more

times,

all

option

data reflected

fo r

past

purchase

history

i s writ ten to

the

latest option

file. The differences

of

option

handling

between

the

conventional

model

and

MATRIX

are

described

below.

MATRIX

series640 series

Type

Option

file

(Windwos

file)

ption

ROM

cassette

Media

USB

memory,

IC

card,

etc.

edicated ROM cassette

Option

data

Data of

difference

from last

time

The always

latest

option

data

Keeping after

option is installed

All

option

ROM

cassettes

are

attached to

the machine.

The latest option file

is

saved

in

the

following

of NC's

FID.

(automatic

saving

with

maintenance

tool)

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No

).opt



113

i


2-3-2

Adding/Setting

Software Options

The S/W

option

addition and

setup

methods are

explained

as an

example

of using

the USB

memory

use.

(1)

Set the USB

memory

stored option

file

to NC unit.

(2)

Start

Explorer

from

the Windows start

menu,

and double-click

C:\mainte\mainte.exe

to

open

the maintenance

tool.

51

S«J'*i.‘niMANa

ickns

(3) (Only

when

S/W option

is

added)

Select MAINTENANCE

mepu,

and click

[>]

button.

xutnteuHcc

.

JK

?

:

W”

mriFT

BACKUP

“Sail.

IT

wi-

5j itc

aemur

~

*

®123«S«?85

OFTIO * BATA

O5KTK0I,

WIT rm

FCW-WSlSKW

BC

SttUU

xniuttTH

The

current

NC's

option

contents

are written to

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No.).

opt

by

this

operation.

Normally, the file

is

automatically

created

when the

option

is se t

last

time as

described later.

When

the option is set for

the

first

time,

this

operation

is

not required because there

is

no

option

data

in

NC.

OFTIOK

PAT

A

. m mm

ism

I

eoifraji

wit

ww'

iitrer

j

NC

SSSIS.U

MSOT j

a

mtvim

ptat%

:

|

m KFOATE

OFTI

OK

_

li®

pOtS

(4)

Select

the

OPTION

menu, and

display

the Select

a

Option

Files-

screen.

err

i

os

;

SOTUiC

&

.t.o nmm

w

sores

to

(5)

Select

the

[HD]

of

SETTING

menu.

Select

[1C

MEMORY

CARD]

when

option

file

is

prepared

in

front 1C

card.

\

UPDATE

[

«Al i i fENAKOE|

DACRt#

OFT

IOK

EXIT

(6)

Click

the

SETTING

button.

114

@

ystem

Maintenance

Work

A

dialog

prompting

an option file selection

is

displayed.

Specify

drive/path/option

file

name.

(When

the 1C memory

card

is

selected,

this

dialog

is

not

displayed.)

Sitfcil .1

Optkw

Hlrs

|

3

fee};

US*

Cjtxea

SfyBixxs*

13ft

i3

'

:

;

•

-U

0

M?

&$<*#**&

5

3B

m

f

mSem

—

Ftes

r_w~

FfcgiSS

a?

Specify

a

file and click

the

Open button. The

specified

file

is

copied to

C:\mainte\,

and the

contents

of

option

file

is

ready

to

be set

in

the NC

unit.

When the

option

file

having

the

same

file

name

as

that of the

specified

file

already

exists in

C:\mainte\,

confirmation

message

for

overwriting

appears.

[Yes]

The

file is overwritten

and

option setting

is

started.

Note

that

the extension

of

the

original option

file

must

be

changed from

opt

to

opt.old

when

saving.

V

MA Y

I OVERWRITE

?

[No] The

file

is not

overwritten

and

option setting

is

discontinued.

HIIIE:::)]

No

Note that when

specifying

the option

file

in

C:\mainte\,

option

is

set

to the NC

unit

by

the

file

specified

without

copying.

Option setting is completed

when the

display

of the SETTING

button

in

the

option setting

screen

turns

to

normal

from

the grayed

state.

Alarm

message appears

in

the

following

cases,

and

the

option

setting is discontinued.

When C:\mainte\(NC serial

No.).

opt

is a

file

with a

different

serial

No.

from

that of

NC .

2 or

more

option

files

exist

in

C:\mainteV

2

or

more

option files

are created

by

copying

the

specified file

in

to C:\mainteV

(*)

In

other

word,

the

number

of

option

files

(file having the

extension

name

of

.opt )

in

C:\mainte\

has

to

be

only

one and

its file name

has

to have

the

same serial

No. as that

of

NC

unit.

B’-.

y

-Q

OPTION ERROR

(7)

The

maintenance

tool

is

ended.

(8)

Confirm

the

option effective

setting has been updated

on

the

option

screen

after

turning

NC

power

supply

ON

again.



115

i

ystem

Maintenance

Work

2-3-3

Attention for

adding

S/W

option

The state

of option setting

is

changed

from

«A »

to «B»

by adding

an

option.

The

following

indicates the transition of the option setting.

Before

setting

the

option

addition

NC

Option

«A »

HD

C:\mainte

L

(NC

serial

No.).

opt

.

-

-Option

«A »

After

setting

the

option

addition

NC

Option

«B»

HD

Renamed

and seved

USB

memory

(NC

serial

No.)

.opt

Option

«B»

C:\mainte

t;

(NC

serial

No.).

op t

NC

serial

No.).

opt.

old

Option

«B»

Option «A »

The

latest option

file is saved

on HD

as

(NC

serial

No.).

opt ,

and the second last

option

file

is

saved

as

(NC

serial No

).op t

old .

When the option

setting is different

from

the customer

intended

state

by a

wrong

purchase/order

etc. of

the

option,

return to the state

of

option «A»

according to

the

following

procedures, and confirm

the

option

arrangement again.

Method

of return to

the

previous

option state

Rename

the

option

file

under C:\mainte on

Explorer:

(NC

serial

No

).

opt

—

>(NC

serial

No.).new

(NC

serial

No.).opt.old->(NC

serial

No

).

opt

Install the

option

file

C:\mainte\(NC serial

No.).

opt

from

maintenance tool

again.



116

@ystem

Maintenance Work

2-4

Servicing with

the

Maintenance

Tool

(1)

Start

up

Explorer from

Start menu

(right click),

and

then start the

maintenance

tool

(C:\mainte\mainte.exe).

Select MAINTENANCE

menu

to

open

the

MAINTENANCE

screen.

The

NC

model,

serial

No.

and

control

unit

type

can be

input

on

the screen.

Refer

to

the

Maintenance Tools

Instruction

Manual (BNP-B3934-902)

for

details.

3

MAINTENANCE

TOOLS §8®

MAINTENANCE

'

NC

BACKUP

---

NC

MODEL

FCA750PY-N02

CONTROL

UNIT

TYPE

FCU7-MA513-22

NC

SERIAL#

M7123456789

OPTION

DATA

“(C)

(a)

_i l

(b)DEL.

>j

NC

MODEL

FCA750PY-N02

CONTROL

UNIT

TYPE

FCU7-MA513-22

NC

SERIAL#

M7001234567

OPTION

DATA

;

j

(d)

NC MODEL INPUT

A

production

number

note

to

a

service

part

(e)

CONTROL UNIT

TYPE

INPUT

NC

SERIAL# INPUT

(g)

S/W

UPDATE

MAINTENANCE BACKUP EXIT

PTION

The

correspondence

of

each

button

is explained

in

the

following section.

(This is

not

related to

the work

procedures.)

(a) Backing

up

from

FLROM

to

HD

The NC

model,

serial No. control unit

type

and

option

data

registered

in FLROM

are

written to

HD,

C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat

• • •

Maintenance

data

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No.J.opt

• •

-Option

data

ARE YOU

SURE

TO

SAVE

DATA TO BACKUP FILE ?

Yes No

(b)

Deleting

backup

files

The

HD

backup

files

(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat)

are

deleted.

V

?

j

AR E YOU SURE

TO

DELETE

BACKUP

FILE

?

Yes No

(c) Writing

from

HD

to

FLROM

The

NC

model,

serial

No.,

control

unit

type

and

option

data

(

\mainte\(serial No.).opt)

saved

in

the

HD backup

file

(C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat) are

registered

in

the

FLROM

1J

AitF

YOU

Sf SlF

TO

RFSsO

iif

DATA ftACfrt P

FIiF

>

Nr

Yes

f4o

si

ORD

_

|

A

password is

required

to

return

the

product

information

to

the

NC.

Only

Mitsubishi

personnel

can

carry

ou t

this

procedure

-r

CA1ICEL

|

CLEAR

K



117

2ystem Maintenance

Work

(d)

NC mode l

input

The NC

model can

be

selected

from the combo

box

or can

be

directly input.

After

inputting

the NC

model,

click on the OK” button.

The

NC

model

in

the

backup

file


will

be

updated, and the NC

MODEL

in

the display window

of

the

MAINTENANCE

screen

will

be

updated simultaneously.

Press CANCEL

to

cancel

input

of

the NC

model,

and

press

CLEAR

to

clear

the

items input

in

the

combo

box.

J

r

• 3

OK

]

CANCEL

|

CLEAR

(e)

Control

unit type

input

n:n:ir

The

control

unit type

can

be

selected

from the combo

box

or can be

directly input. After inputting

the control

unit

type,

press

on

the

OK

button. The control

unit

type

in

the

BACKUP

display

window of the

MAINTENANCE

screen

will be

updated.

OK

1 CANCEL

j

CLEAR

(f)

NC

serial

No.

input

Input nine

characters after

M7.

After inputting the

serial

No.,

click on the

OK

button.

The

input

will

be

checked.

In

the

input

check,

the

No.

of

input

characters

and

the

validity

of the

characters

will

be

checked.

If

the

input check

is

okay,

the

NC

SERIAL

#

in the

BACKUP

display window of the MAINTENANCE

screen

will

change.

The

backed

up options

will be

cleared

when

the

serial

No. is

changed.

Note

that

the options

will be cleared

when the

password is

input

and

the

NC data

is written

NC SERIAL*

i

M?r

OK CANCEL

CLEAR

in.

FLROM

of

service

part

unitg)

Writing

to

HD

The NC

model,

serial

No. control unit

type

and option

data

written in the

HD

backup file


are

written

to

FLROM

of

the

service

part.

The service

part

is

a special

unit

whose “serial

No.” is

(Two

characters

following M7 are

0.

A&F

YOU

to

aesto&e

DATA

FROM

fc&oarn

F

>

Vet Mu

M700’

Arbitrary characters since the

third

character.)

The

function

is same

as

C,

but

the

password input is

not

required

when writing

in

the service

part.



118

119

2

System Maintenance

Work

2-5

Inputting and

Outputting Ladders

The

ladders

stored

in the NC's

FLROM

can

be

output

to

the external

media

by

ladder

monitor.

Conversely,

the

ladders

stored

on

the external

media

can

be

input to

the

NC's

FLROM/SRAM.

Starting

the ladder

monitor

The

ladder monitor

is

starded

in

1

131mode

EUlsiilP®--

”s

*

'SO«S/i«/*o

*/3

. W

so*

]ia

Orpe

rVV'A

0

.

OOSn/ttir*

DIACWOS

VERSION

SPINDLE

JIPADtJALE

|

LADDER

VERSION

IftGNOS

OPTION

SERVO

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

§

MONITOR

Tw o

ladders

exist because

the ladders

are operated by

two

CPUs

in NC

unit.

The

ladder input/output

must execute

both COS1

and

COS2.

2-5-1

Saving to

External

Media

The

procedure

is

shown

below:

©

Open

the

ladder which

runs

in NC

on onboard

edition area.

©

Save

the

opened

ladder in

external

media.

NC

HN123card

(Vertual:COS2 side)

External

©

7?

Projectÿ/\ÿ

—

Project

Open

NC

HN482card

(SRAM/FROM)

NC

HN163card

(Real:COS1

side)

Save

/

V

*4 .

PC

A

ROM area

side

/

-*

/

ROM

wrile

rea

for

COS1

Save

Temporary

storage

area

Onboard

edition

area

Area

for

COS2

Copy

when

the

power

is

Open

I

\

N

n—

<=

T

Execute

ladder

Edit/Monitor

(a)

Click

ENVIRON. SETTING

-ÿ CONNECT

NC

Setting

to

select

the ladder

of

COS1

side.

I

Ull

r~

‘Vlf

£

r

iLC

1

ill

u©

(b)

Select

M01

from

the

list,

and

press SET .

(The

selected environment

is displayed

on

the

the

lower

right

of

the screen. M01

is

displayed

in

case of

the

COS1

side. M02

is

displayed

in

case of the

COS2 side.)



120

2ystem

Maintenance

Work

CONNECT

Hfr

SETTING .

x

OTjilJeiMiirsa

SET

Warning:

When

connection destination WC is

changed,

the

PL C

data on

onboard

is lost.

i

i

i

aT'

SST

:

i

(c )

Return

to

the

following

screen

pressing

F1

key , and

click

NC

FILE .

i I

M

SC

nir

OTOM/L

rut

Df/IKH.

JITHhC

ill

Wuswi.

(tlP

••

\

:

(d)

Click

‘• OPEN .

i

i

t$i

I

*C

WJ1E BSS?

5§OP

ik

Sflfc

VUUFY

ten

it

riawi

(e)

Click

OPEN

->

OK .

X

-

373»j>:

1

1S

» tt

er

PLC/»«tw*rk

05/10/20 20:50:20

130

532Bvt«

5101

?

05/10/20 20:50:20

33

&

Bv

t e

SELECT

PARAM.

+

PFDC.

SEL.

ALL

/CANCEL

PEN

(0

Return

to the

following

screen

pressing

F1

key

twice,

and

click

EXTERNAL

FILE .

I

»i

i

rs£c c-sr

U

ulABWs. If IF

(M3

L

(g)

Click SAVE

PROJECT

|

M)1

I

r

*35£.

j

r fixicT

s

(h)

Click

EXT

ERNAL

SAVE .



121

2


a

SAVE- PROJECT

a

-J

g] PROCRAM

-0

373HXI19

051017

'.r:

{*3 Parameter

0

parent

SELECT

PARAM.

i

PROC.

EXTERNAL SEL.

ALL

/CANCEL

AVE

(i)

Set

DRIVE ,

Path

and

Project

name .

Click SAVE .

0

XTERNAL SAVE -

ffra

j

RIVE

LIST

PLC

ty

pel

Dale

of

creating

|

Heading

Oi

rectory

Fi le

name

m..

Drive/Polh

_

[D'Vtenp

l«d_O5O0O5|

Title

SAVE

CANCEL

(j)

When the

following

dialog

is

displayed,

the

saving

is

completed.

Click OK .

m

CospIctecJ.

,

-l‘ v

;sv>

m&m

(k) Return to

the

following

screen

pressing

”F1

key

twice.

i

|

toll

I

|

i

;

fill

ta r

eve

CiTXur flWOi.XttF.

j.

(I)

Click

ENVIRON.

SETTING .

(This work is not

necessary

when there is

no

COS2

side.

Jump

to

(o),

and

end

the

ladder monitor.

t

I

Oil

i

uu

LUGKX.

?

“itr

“

j

ar

tiV*.

C«ICt

C* */XG.

CtR

;

(m) Select

M01

from

the list, and

press

SET

on

CONNECT

NC

SETTING .

122

2

ystem

Maintenance

Work

CONNECT NC SETTING

,

-

'

IS

SE T

m

Warning:

When

connection

destination

NC

is

changed,

the

PL C

data

on

onboard

is

lost.

(n)

Operate

(c)

to (k),

and

save the COS2 side

ladder.

(o) End

the

ladder

monitor

clicking

END .

i I

til

t

SOW

|

JU

u

iCYICC

ClJJJQSGS.

JCU1

DC

tWR

?}MA.

2-5-2

Loading from

External

Media

The

procedure

is

shown

below:

©

Clear

the

ladder

which

runs

in temporary

storage

area.

(2)

Open

the

project

saved

in

external

med ia on

the

onboard

edition area.

©

Load

the

opened

ladder

to

the

temporary

storage

area

in

NC .

@

Save the

ladder

in

ROM area.

if the

steps

of

(2)

and

©

are

executed

without

deleting

the

ladder

of

step

©

when the

project

name

between the ladder

executed

in

the temporary

storage

area and

the ladder

saved

in

the

external media differ,

two

ladders

are

registered

(multi-ladder specification).

NC

HN123card

(Vertual

:COS2

side)

External

media

©

Project

/x

SaveZ

r

Project

Open

NC

HN482card

(SRAM/FROM)

NC

HN163card

(Real

:COS1

side)

0

Erase

ladder

©

©

side

ROM

area

ROM

write Save

Area

for

COST

J

Temporary

storage

area

Onboard

edition

area

Area

for

COS2

Copy

when

the

power

is

ON

Open

Execute

Edit/Monitor

(a)

Click

ENVIRON. SETTING

COS1

side

CONNECT

NC

SETTING

to

select

the

ladder

of

i

I

tfil

'

j

SISS

I

'siV-JW-

I

(

il<

*

ME

m tevicr

nr-jn.

iCLP LUi

JitiK



123

2

ystem

Maintenance

Work

(b)

Select

M01

from

the

list,

and

press

SET . (The

selected

environment

is

displayed

on the

the

lower right

of the screen.

M01

is

displayed

in

case

of

the

COS1 side.

M02

is

displayed

in case

of

the COS2

side.)

CONNECT NC

SETTING

x

SI

SE T

i

Warning:

When

connection

destination

NC

is

changed,

the

PLC data

on

onboard

is

lost.

I

arjp

i

CT

i

'

(c)

Return

to

the

following

screen

pressing

”F1

key ,

and click

NC

FILE .

i

| Ml

i

C

rju:

DCDHiU.

rite

Wirot.

;

2T11HC

\

U.

*1P

W)

i

(d)

Click

, ,DELETEM.

t

i

Mi

i

Cftt

fcrawTAYt vtwrr ICXTE

i

(e) Click

SEL.

ALL/CANCEL ,

and all

data

is selected.

X

-

£/\

373»lX

l

13

05101?

•'

Pirsroete/

PLC/M«two/h

05/10/20

?0:50‘20

130S$?0yt«

03/10/20 2 0.5 0: 20 3360vtc

$CLECT

f

sa.

AIL

|

/cwa

ELETE

(0

Click

DELETE .

i

Wl

&Sf

S&

I~I

I

—

(g)

Click YES on

DELETE

CONFIRMATION

screen.

124

2ystem Maintenance

Work

3

It»

aÿcil

iwJ I

He

i®

deleted.

Is

ii

all riiM1?

El

SO

(h)

If the

ladder

is “RUN

state,

STOP

is urged.

Click

YES”.

FtC

»*

»ri

s

ftlW

stile,

J*

&Ieiipn

«>rfc»r®ed

ifl*r

»lgp

Pt,C?

E

f

NO

(i)

When the

following dialog

is

displayed,

the

deleting is

completed. Click

OK .

ftSMsttid

.

»

,-E

P|

—

,

CcfttpJeletJ.

-V»

ft,;

(j)

Return to

the

following

screen

pressing

F1

key

twice,

and click EXTERNAL FILE .

rant

uivu‘

w

text

I

|

Ml

SB ®

j

I

B7a*

c

rSLT

lit

IM?

j.

1

(k) Click

OPEN PROJECT .

*3

iaitr

I

I

tail

i

rgg.

n&<

j

|

ffi

(I)

Set

DRIVE

and

File

name ,

and

click

SELECT1.

0

:$aECI;

PROJECT?

DRIVE

I

PLC

typeFPate

of

tins

[Head i

nr

iilsjsff,

E&..

c

i

ea

Di

rectory

B:

i

|

Dr

i

ve/Pftt

h

jD:

Vlcmp

Project

moie

[ij>d_05030fi

i

SELECT CANCEL

(m )

Click

OPEN .



125

System Maintenance

Work

m

PE N

PROJECT

:

• a

Iÿ.CS0805.,:|

rKUUHAM

Q

373HX1

13

051017

Parameter

£2

param

SaECT

PARAH.

PROG.

SEL.

ALL

/CANCEL

SELECT

PROJECT

P

EH

(n)

When a

message

that prompts

you

to comfirm overwriting is

displayed, click

ALL

YES .

UP--

•-

X

The

program

(373MX119.«P?)

already

exists.

Are

you

sure OK to overwrite?

YES

A LL Y ES NO

(o)

When

the

following

dialog

is

displayed,

the

loading is completed.

Click

OK”.

a

HE.Mwrij -

Cc«»lete«3.

i

sail

(p)

Return to

the

following screen

pressing

F1

key

twice,

and click NC

FILE”.

i i

»>i

ÿ • • • n ' t.

;.5U5.';

H.I*

:

i

S

I

:

rue

il>

HflH

(q)

Click

’'SAVE”

4

t

|

eat)

JSk

ft't

SAVE

VERIFY

tGLU

FCfirUT

(r)

Click

SAVE .



126

2

ystem

Maintenance

Work

x]

-FREE

SPACE VOLLWE

•

LARGEST

CONTIGUOUS

j=

“a

PROGRAM

..£2

373WX

\ 19 051017

3

[arÿ

Par ansttr

Par

am

r

BYTE

TOTAL

FREE

SPACE

r

BYTE

FREE

SPACE

YOLUUE

SELECT

PARAM.

+ PROG.

SEL. ALL

/CANCEL

AVE

(s)

When

the

following

dialog

is

displayed,

the

loading

is

completed.

Click

OK .

;X

Collet

c4;

(1)

Return to the

following

screen

pressing

F1 key ,

and

click ROM

WRITE .

esni; j.ifi'.-fr.

TO

zrp

I

|

;

:

WSl'.*’

eran

i

ra

iCLZK

l

(u)

Click

YES .

PW

wire

• -•

X

•

TStflPiAflV

»H3KY

1J

d.lt

or

CfCAHIC

I'-Alt

t>

CREA1

1»;

IV)

>co

tr

It*

it

In RGB?

(v)

When

a message

that

prompts

you

to

comfirm

overwriting ROM

is

displayed, click

ALL

YES .

wsm

AM

data

in

the

lar

Ihe

program

rersory

get *i 11

be

deleted,

dale

oil

I bs written into ISe

target.

NO

ES

Do

you

lly

*on(

to

execute?

(w) When the

following

dialog

is

displayed,

the

ROM

writing

is

completed.

Click

OK .



127

2ystem

Maintenance

Work

a

C«*ol«leiJ.

$

'

llilll

(x)

Click PLC

RUN/STOP,,.

¥

i

« i

-&>

|

gg

|

M

wire

roi

SAVE VIR1FY

rcfÿi

GITC

I

f

(y) Click

YES

xl

m

TATUS

[SlS

Is

PLC

started?

NO

(2)

Return to the

following

screen

pressing

F1

key

once.

|

SO I

?

i

i

« j

nr

Ltfotn tcvict tar

«wi.

KlAGfCi.

(aa)

Click ENVIRON.

SETTING .

(This

work

is not

necessary

when

there

is no

COS2

side.

Jump

to

(dd),

and

end the

ladder

monitor.)

i I

ai l

fii

«;

fits.

ILE

soviet/iCtT*

rlf-JU.

?|ACME.

• nr

M)

JL

(bb)

Select

MOT'

from the

list,

and

press

SET on CONNECT NC SETTING .

CONNECT

NO SETTING

-

f

\

*

X

'TTTT'f

Tj

SET

iasa«g«8afflHI

Wa

rn

i

ng

:

When connection

destination NC

is

changed,

the

PLC

data

on onboard is

lost.

(cc)

Operate

(c)

to

(z). and

save

the

COS2

side ladder.

(dd)

End

the

ladder

monitor

clicking

END .

1

I

dt

}

“Sr SI'S

j

-w

ILL

:evKt

iff}*.

Dfl

iCCP

C-

IfirtZ.

i



128

System

Maintenance

Work

2-6 Replacing

the

HD

2-6-1

Replacing

the

HD

Preparation

•

HDD

unit for

replacement

(Installed

NC

system

(MAIN-B)

of the same

version

as

customer)

When

MAIN-B

has

not

been

installed in

the HDD unit,

prepare

NC

system

for

upgrading

by

the

USB

memory

etc.

•

USB

memory

for

data backup

The

replacement

procedure

of HD

is

shown below.

Note:

This

method

assumes

that

the

NC

is

running properly.

If Windows does not

start,

this

method

cannot be used.

START

Back

up

the

customer’s

current

data.

Back

up

all

data

according

to

1-5 Backing

Up

the

Saved

Data. .

Backup

of

the saved data

4

Backup

the HDD

internal

data.

Refer

to

section

2-6-2 Backup

data of

HD

for

details.

ackup

of

HDD

internal

data

The

HDD

unit

is

removed,

and

it

is

replaced

by

a

new HDD unit.

At

this

time, replace

a

front

cover

of a new

HDD

unit to

a

front

cover

of former

HDD

unit

(The

name

plate and the

WindowsCOA

seal are

affixed).

Replacement

of

HDD unit

V

Upgrading

of

NC

application

When MAIN-B

has

not

been

installed

to

replaced

HDD

or when the version should be upgraded to

the

latest

version,

install

prepared

MAIN-B

according

to 2-2-4

Upgrading PC

Side

System

(MAIN-B) .

Erase

the

all

program

area

on

PROGRAM

FILE

screen.

Refer to section 1-8-2

Initializing the

Programs

for details.

\7

All erase in program

area

Restore

the

backed

up

data by

following steps.

(T)

Restore

the

backed

up

data

to

HDD

according

to 2-6-3

Restoring

the

Backed

up

Data”.

©

Restore

the

all saved

data

according

to

1-5-4

Restoring

the

Saved

Data

.

Back

up

the

NC

side

data to

new

HDD.

Refer

to

section

2-6-4 Backing

up

the NC Side

Data

to

HD

fo r details.

Restoration of

backup

data

V

Data backup

to

HDD

END



129

System

Maintenance

Work

2-6-2

Backup

data of

HD

Copy

the

specific

files

in

HD

to

an

external

memory of the

USB

memory

etc.

by

the

Explorer.

List

of

data

backed up (If

the

folder/file

do

not

exist,

the

backup is unnecessary.)

Data details

Folder

(file)

name

1

Machining programs

C:\MC_Machine

Programs

2

Machining

programs

for

HD

operation

_

antry programs

_

C:\MC_Direct

Mode

Programs

3

C:\MC

GL

Data

Machining

programs

for

backup

Sampling

data,

tool

data

related

4

C:\MC

Backup

5

C:\MC

.....

dg

Operation

control

screen

data

C:\RUMMNG

Display

data

for

NC

screen

Data

for

graphic

maintenance/

alarm

navigation

_

7

C:\nm64mdata

8

C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

9

Custom

display

related

module

C:\Custom

Display

3D

interference check-Real

simulator-3D data for

setup

10

C:\MC_Machine

Database

11

Real

simulator INIFILE

C:\m6y_ymw\M7401Bin\Release\realsim.ini

NC

system

software

2

C:\ncbackup

J2-CT

parameters

C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat

C:\j2ctbusV“*.prm

13

Maintenance

data

4 C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat_

C:\mainte\(NC serial

No.).

op t

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No.).

opt.

old

Option

data5

16 SRAM

backup

C:\mainte\srambkf.dat_

:\mainte\plcbkf11.dat

(other

than

NEXUS)

C:\mainte\plcbkf01.dat

(NEXUS)

_

LC internal

memory backup7

Note:

For

applications

installed

after

shipment

and the network

settings

made

after

shipment,

check

with

Yamazaki and

backup if

necessary.



130

HI

ystem Maintenance

Work

2-6-3

Restoring

the

Backed

up

Data

The backed

up

data according to

Backup

of

HDD

internal

data

is restored to

replaced

HD.

List of

data

restord

(If the

folders/files

listed

in the table

below

do

not exist

at

backup, it is

unnecessary

to

restore.)

Items

marked

with

•

under [Resore] in

the table below are

restored.

It

is

unnecessary

for the

items with

O

to

restore,

because

these

items are

directly

restored

from

NC

internal

data by the

maintenance tool

in the

next

step.

Data details Folder

(file)

nameestore

Machining

programs

C:\MC_Machine Programs

2 Machining

programs

for

HD

operation

_

C:\MC_Direct

Mode

Programs

Gantry programs

C:\MC

GL

Data

Machining programs

for

backup C:\MC_Backup

5

Sampling

data,

tool

data

related

Operation

control screen

data

C:\MC_sdg

6

C:\RUMMNG

7

Display

data for NC

screen

C:\nm64mdata

Data

for graphic

maintenance/

alarm

navigation

_

8

C:\m6y_ymw\Mplc

9 Custom

display

related module C:\Custom

Display

3D

interference

check-Real

simulator-3D data

for

setup

10

C:\MC_Machine

Database

11

Real simulator INIFILE C:\m6y

ymw\M740\Bin\Release\realsim.ini

NC

system

software

2 C:\ncbackup

13

J2-CT

parameters

C:\j2ctbus\Axisinfu.dat

C:\j2ctbus\***.prm

O4

Maintenance

data

C:\rnainte\mnt

bkup.dat

O

5

Option

data

SRAM

backup

C:\mainte\(NC

serial No.).

opt

C:\mainte\(NC

serial

No.).opt.old

O

6

PLC

internal

memory

backup


O

7

Machining programs C:\mainte\plcbkf1

1.dat

(Other

than

NEXUS)


(NEXUS)

_

Note:

Fo r

applications

installed

after

shipment

and

the

network

settings

made

after shipment,

check with Yamazaki

and

reset if

necessary.

131

2

ystem

Maintenance

Work

2-6-4

Backing

up

the

NC

Side

Data

to

HD

The

data

of

the item with

O

in

the previous

page

is

restored by

backing

up

to

HD

in

which

NC

side data

has been

exchanged.

(1)

SRAM

data

and

PLC

internal

memory backup

Start

Explorer

from

the

Windows

start

menu,

and double-click


to

open

the maintenance

tool.

Select

the

BACKUP

screen

on

MAINTENANCE

TOOLS .

t

'.‘;l

• SACK®?

i

FLASH

KOX

JJ

ECT-DATA

IxO

_id

C

do

t

l

a

-V

BACKUP

L

PTIOK

EXIT

Click the

[>]

button

on

the lower

right.

Backup

the

some all

SRAM data (2MB)

in

NC

and

PLC internal

memory area to

HDD.

Refer

to

the

®

of

1-4-2

Backing

Up

and

Restoring

the

SRAM

for

detail.

(2)

FLROM

maintenance

data (the

NC

model,

serial

No.

and option, etc.)

backup

Select MAINTENANCE

screen

on

MAINTENANCE TOOLS .

/

m

KAIUTTJJAiiCE

r-

/<i

n

a.-irrsoi.

mi

KCU7-MA .

VC

SERIAL*

K?

123*56783

OPTlOIf DATA

KC

MODEL

LXA7SI1P

COKTKDJ.

TJK

t

LUIIV-KASI

KC

CiERI

AL*

X7001234S6?

OPTIOK

DATA

PY-mi;1

-

m?

T TYPE

JT

TYPE

A;

f:i

/

f

1

/

/

i

bJt

KC

KODKI.

ttrpltr

A

production

note to

o

service

ijJoxt

IT

COKTHOL IJIflT

TTKK

IKKITT

1

KC

SESIAL* IHrUT

/

V

I

\

>

C.-»

UPDATE

3

n,M;rTE)iA;Ki||

SJOSIP EXITCTIOK

\

Click

the

[>]

button

on

the

upper

right.

The

NC

model,

serial

No.

and option data

registered in

FLROM

are

backed

up

to

HD.

The

Names

of

backup

files

are fixed as


and

(NC

serial

No).opt .

Refer

to

the

(a)

of

”2-4

Servicing

with

the Maintenance

Tool for details.

132

System Maintenance

Work

2-7

Replacing

Control

Unit

2-7-1

Replacing

Control

Unit

Preparation

•

HDD

unit

for

replacement

(Installed

NC

system

(MAIN-B)

of the same version

as

customer)

When

MAIN-B

has not

been installed

in the

HDD

unit,

prepare

NC

system

for

upgrading

by

the

USB

memory

etc.

•

USB

memory

for

data

backup

The

replacement procedure

of NC

unit is shown below.

CÿSTARTÿ)

Back

up

the

customer's

current

data

Back

up

all data

according

to

1-5 Backing Up

the

Saved Data .

Backup

of

the saved

data

£

Backup

the

NC

unit

internal data.

The

target

data

is

the

following

data.

(D

All

SRAM data and

internal PLC

data

@

The maintenance

data

in FLROM

(including

the

options)

®

The

ladders

in FLROM

Refer

to

section 2-7-2

Backing

up

the NC

Unit

Internal Da1a for

details.

Backup of

the NC

unit

internal

data

V

The

control

unit is

removed,

and

it

is

replaced

by

a

new

control unit.

At

this

time,

replace

a

front cover

of

a

new

control

unit

to

a

front cover

of

former control unit (The

name plate

is

affixed).

Replacement

the

control unit

r

Clear

the data in

the

SRAM mounted

in

the

replaced

control unit's

HR482. Refer to

section

1-2

Completely

Erasing

the Memory

for

details.

Clearing

of

SRAM area

<0

Install the

NC

system

software to

NC unit's

FLROM.

Refer

to

section

2-2-3

Upgrading

NC

system

(MAIN

A)

for

details.

Installation of

NC

system

Restore the backed

up

data

by

following steps.

(D

Restore

the

backed

up

data

according

to

2-7-3

Loading

the

Backup

Data

.

®

Restore

the

all

saved

data according to

1-5-4

Restoring the

Saved Data

.

Set the date

and

time.

Refer to section 1-7-1

Setting

the Date

and

Time

for

details.

Restoration

of

backup

data

Calender

setting

A

Data

backup

fo r emergency

Back

up

a

part

of

the

SRAM

data

like

the

parameter

etc.

to

FLROM in

preparation

for

various data

areas'

breaking

down. Refer to

section

2-7-4

Backing

Up

Data for

Emergency

Purposes

for

deÿis.

END



133

2

ystem Maintenance

Work

2-7-2

Backing

up

the NC

Unit Internal

Data

The

following

NC

unit

internal

data is backed

up.

©

Al l

SRAM

data and internal

PLC

data

(2)

The

maintenance

data

in

FLROM

(Including

the

options)

(3)

The

ladders

in

FLROM

(1)

SRAM

data and

PLC

internal

memory

backup

Start

Explorer

from

the

Windows

start

menu,

and double-click


to

open

the

maintenance tool.

Select

the

BACKUP

screen

on

MAINTENANCE

TOOLS .

/

D

iUEfnH«K£;rqG6.s

-BACXOF

FLASK

ROX

IZLii

/

/

SBAX

EXT-I'ATÿI-0

_LJ

CD

/

C

:

s

t

c' *

51-mLOct

/

/

/

lAHCEj

j

DACJOIP

J|| OfTICH j

ft'iTE

Mill EXIT

Click the

[>]

button on

the lower

right.

Backup the

some

all

SRAM

data

(2MB) in

NC

and PLC

internal

memory

area

to

FIDD.

Refer

to

the

(3)

of

1-4-2

Backing

Up

and

Restoring

the SRAM

for

detail.

(2)

FLROM

maintenance

data

(the

NC

model,

serial

No.

and

option, etc.) backup

Select

MAINTENANCE screen on MAINTENANCE TOOLS”.

/

m

m

H

m

i

AIHTEHMCZ:

JtC

BACK'D?

HC

MODEL

COlfTKOL 1131

IT

TYPE

/

k) KD7-HA

513-3?

/

i-

)rt:

SERIAL/

I f

H7123A5i785

OPT

I

OH

DATA

/

C

KODEi

/TQ

Y-KD2

COXT

KOI

liKIT

TYPfii

PCIIT-XAM:*-??

KC SERIAL/

X/001234567

OPTICS

DATA

J--Y-

im

2

j

KC

XOOKL

ItiPbT

A

product

icA

&ote

to

a

l

COKTROI.

UK

I

T

TVPK

l

jrpirr

|

ort

crv

:co

\

/

/

1

i

S

-V

irTOXTEj

mi;iTEMiMCz||

ornoir

EXIT

,.;l

...

i

Click the

[>]

button

on

the

upper right.

The

NC

model,

serial

No.

and option data

registered

in

FLROM

are

backed

up

to

HD.

The

Names

of

backup

files

are fixed

as C:\mainte\mnt_bkup.dat

and

(NC

serial

No).

opt .

Refer to

the (a)

of 2-4 Servicing

with

the

Maintenance

Tool for

details.



134

System

Maintenance

Work

(3)

FLROM

ladder

backup

Backup

the

ladders on

LADDER

MONITOR screen

of

NC.

Refer to the

section

2-5-1

Saving

to

External

Media of 2-5 Inputting and

Outputting

Ladders

for

details.

Two

ladders

exist because the ladders

are operated

by

two CPUs

in NC unit.

The

ladder must

backup

both

COS1 and

COS2.

(Example)

The

step

( i) of the

drive,

path

and

project name settings

are

as

follows:

Drive/path

C:\mainte\ladder

Project

name

COS1

side—

>cos1

COS2

side—

>cos2

135

2ystem

Maintenance

Work

2-7-3

Loading

the Backup

Data

The

following

backed

up

data

is loaded

to NC unit.

®

All RAM

data

and PLC

internal

data

(D

The maintenance data

in

FLROM

(including

the

options)

(3)

The

ladders

in

FLROM

(1)

Loading

SRAM

data

Stard the

maintenance

tool,

and

select

the BACKUP screen.

J

m

i

05

ST)

BACiCUP

FU5K

J»X

sax

Ti/l/Q

DCT-DA

/

ijax

e*v5TWLb>:

(

.dot:\JW

1

/

JjlAjfrTfflANCEj

|(

OPTION

j

'K

UPDATE

EXIT

ACKUP

Click

the

[<]

button

on the lower left .

C:\mainte\srambkf.dat and


(or

plcbkf01.dat )

in FIDD

are

loaded

to

SRAM

in

NC

unit.

(2 ) Loding

FLROM

maintenance

data (the

NC

model,

serial

No.

and

option,

etc.)

Select

MAINTENANCE

screen

on

MAINTENANCE

TOOLS .

/

fUS

I

i

jJAIlITtKAJICE

KC

SAC

y.vp

/ÿ

•

KC MODEL

KCA7SUE

COKTROS.

KU'/'K

KC

SERIA1*

CTTIOK

DATA

KC MCC'EX.

ECA75U

cojrrKOL

trsix

TYPE

F(,U7-«A5N-7?

KC SERIAL*

H712345(B7B9

OPT

DOM

DATA

PY-KUL’

-

KUJ

UKtT

TYPE

AS

13*-??

/

KC

MODE .

IKFi;r

A

pr<

cote t

oduct ion

o

• » serv

r.uric-sr

1C«*

JWl

\

COIfTROJ. inur

TYPE

IK

PUT

J

\

’

.

>-

.isEgr

,’Z

j

/

/

\

*

j XAIIlTGUilCrjj

OiCSXIl\

I

'V

UPDATE

OPTIOK

EXIT

Click

the

[<]

button on

the

upper

left.


in

FIDD

is loaded

to

FLROM

in

NC

unit.

Refer to

the

(b)

of

2-4

Servicing

with

the

Maintenance

Tool

for

details.



136

2


(3)

Loading

FLROM

ladder

Load the

ladders

on

LADDER

MONITOR screen

of NC.

Refer to

the

section 2-5-2

Loading

from External Media” of 2-5 Inputting and

Outputting

Ladders

for details.

In

the

step

(i)

of

the

drive,

path

and

project

name

settings,

select

the

drive,

path

and

project

name

set

in

(3)

of

2-7-2 Backing

up

the

NC

Unit

Internal

Data ,

and load

both

COS1/COS2

ladders.



137

System Maintenance

Work

2-7-4

Backing

Up

Data

for

Emergency Purposes

Backup

the

parameters,

etc.,

into the FLROM

for

emergency

purposes.

Stard

the maintenance

tool,

and

select

the

BACKUP screen.

L

1

.

Btcxvp

1

FUSS BOX

;

4

/

J?AH

/

DAf l 2x0

XT-

_lj_Lf

c:

.dot

/

LsÿINTfcUMCI

OPT

It'S

|

OPI'ATE

BACKUP

EXIT

/

Click

the

[>]

button

on

the

lower

right.

Backup

the

some SRAM data

in

NC

to

FLROM

in

NC.

138

3

ppendix

3

Appendix

3-1

Using

the

DIAGNOSIS Screen

3-1

-1

DIAGNOSIS

(ALARM

Screen)

This is the main

diagnosis

screen. Detailed information

is

given

fo r

up

to

16

current

alarms.

3-1-2

VERSION

Screen

The

system

software,

spindle

version,

servo

version,

system

model

name

and

serial No. are

displayed.

S3

;

unta

I

s

am

mamnj

umi

txmtm

j

jtatnaar.

mnita 1

HGOti.

»-CA7

50(*Y'K0l

»I*

rC07-MA&13-Xl

iJliJUM.

M7i73*567B9

'

VOttJ

nta

r»i

WUX-JI

MXIJt-B

1-XDUtU-r

t001U3T3’HX119

BHV

LMiDtn-U

IOOIB373-HXL15

SRV

HMTOJTR iiwi

)

JTCS-l

)

J2tT-2

)

.liCT-3

)

,7?£»~4

)

JZC3-S

>

.ItCT-C

)

atcr-i

)

CZCT-B

)

JTct-y

)

J?Ct-10

}

JZCT-11

)

Jtcr-ii

>

JtCT-13

)

.J2CT1*

lOOIVlTOO-

BÿMtl

BUY

’

J

J

1DOJW001-A*V«

fiRV-f

loOJDDU-fcXVfi PRY-iil

MprpR

)

i

<

)

<

)

<

3,

)

<

). <

<

s«-x?

ear-jr?

BRY-C?

BRV-W

8RY-10

BRY-H

flnv-12

H*V-

13

»Mt

lfl

»»V-

J5

BRV-J6

BPM-1

8f»»-3

STM-4

Hy p

-

1

B

PM

-

6

i im-i

nrp-o

ix;y

)

<

)

<

)

<

)

<

<

)

<

)

<

>

<

)

i

)

(

>

<

>

(

)

<

)

)

<

)

<

)

<

>

)

1

)

<

)

<

)

<

)

i

)

4

1

)

4

)

<

4

)

<

)

SI IS1*

TP*

U

yoos/io/n

u.

00:34

TTL&

V-M

O

.

OPIn/adi

r

TL'RJ

JCJM

OPTION

JÿCKOC

SPJMIMJT.

HUM ITO*

liAsJ.DMajti:

WOHUOY.

P

I

AC

NO

3

RT:»TO

HdHlTPIl

MJTMl WOM ITOR

L

No. Display

item

Details

1

UNIT

Control

unit

type

2

SERIAL Serial

No.

3

MODEL

NC

model

4

MAIN-A

NC

software

version

5

MAIN-B

Screen software version

LG-

Currently

selected

language

version

Ladder

(COS1

side)

version

LADDER-F

8

LADDER-B

Ladder

(COS2 side)ÿyersion

Currently selected

PLC language version

Servo

unit

software version

9

LGP

SRV-1 to

16

0

SPN-1

to 8

1

Spindle

unit

software

version

12

J2CT-1

to

14

J2CT unit

software

version

139

3ppendix

3-1-3

HARDWARE

MONITOR

Screen

The

hardware

mounted

on

the control unit and board is

displayed.

MIW;

antrm

-

gtw

mmjrm-

twiwj

wn*

»*r»»x

ion

rt»

•

IW

1

1

**1

1

VLC

|

t

W *

1

tfUlBi

K

54

n

<l .03)

1S4

*

tra

(

*»*

|

11C-

} et»n«

i

x*n»3|

IRIO

?i i*i«

>|

lint ii

(DID ij

IBH>

ti

)iw

tf

B|

X

7

3

kxlA3

Bifrtd

[ETHER]

is

displayed

when

031-Bit4

is

ON .

Display

item

Details

CNC

HN163 The

CNC

card

name

and

sub-version

are

displayed.

The

C

NC card

name

and

sub-version

are

displayed.

N123

PLC

The

PLC

card

name and sub-version

are

displayed.

MEM

HN482 The SRAM/FROM card name and sub-version

are

displayed.

EXT

HN531

The axis

extension

card

name

and

sub-version

are displayed.

IC

USB

HN251

The

front

IC card/USB

l/F

card

name

and sub-version

are

displayed.

THER Only

the item

is

displayed

when there

is

an

Ethernet option.

RIO

RIO

1 RIO 2 RIO

3

RIO

4

RIO

5

RIO

6 RIO 7

RIO 8

1

2

HN203

HN203

4

5

6

I

The

IC

card

name

used

each

part system

or

channel

is

displayed.



140

3

ppendix

3-1

-4

SERVO

MONITOR

Screen

The servo

monitor

is

configured

of the

following

five screens. The status of

the

servo

is

displayed

on

each

screen.

-

SERVO

MONITOR

screen

(Servo

monitor)

1/2

SERVO MONITOR screen

(Servo

monitor)

2/2

•

ABSOLUTE

MONITOR

screen

(Absolute

value

monitor)

•

SERVO

DIAGNOSIS

screen

(Servo

diagnosis)

•

SERVO STATUS screen

(Servo status)

The screens

can be

changed in

the

following

order

with the

page

feed

keys.

SERVO MONITOR

screen

1/2

I

NEXT

key

T

BACK key

SERVO

MONITOR screen

2/2

l

NEXT

key

T

BACK

key

ABSOLUTE

MONITOR

screen

i

NEXT

key

t

BACK

key

SERVO

DIAGNOSIS screen

I

NEXT

key

t

BACK

key

SERVO

STATUS screen

Note: The SPINDLE

STATUS screen

is

displayed

only while

releasing

the key

lock.

141

Appendix

(1)

SERVO MONITOR

(Servo monitor)

The

servo

status

is

displayed on

this screen.

fir • frr iow

WBi*

1

wasurtii

wtn*

»n«

Soxsv

ywtnsrm

i

vcmi

mtMj

B»

SKJIVO

wowrrcuu/?)

li] iX)

m

|A|

0

1C)

M/m)

M*

(>UOOP

SPUKD

FTID

XJVT

£(««/ÿ in)

0

<>

0

*

(1J

0 o

c

9

0

0

9

0

0

a

<»

e

0

0

nrj iRTHT

MAX

CUM

WAX

niR2

MAX

Olh3

0VTR

LOW

OYilH b£C

OPT.

rover.

WAX

nst.pc*ct:

(*>

JWRTtA

WLTIO

{V)

O)

9

0

«*>

0

o

c

D

0

9

0 0

0

9

o

0

«

<AI

9

e

o

o

i

*)

9

9

0 0

<*>

9

6

6

0

0

D

-0

a

0

a

o

*

i

TUT

.

<BJ>)

ATJ.I

<WU*

(dB)

0

9

9

0

0

0

0

O

09

MP PIVP

M-l

UKW

00

0o

0

09 00 00

09

00 00 00

00

00 .00 <H> 00

00

00

00

00

0

00

00

DO

1/

*0

>1

Display

item

o.

Details

The

status

of

the position

loop

gain

is

displayed.

Position

loop

gain

refers

to the

following:

GAIN (1/sec)

Gain

[1/SEC]

Feedrate

(mm/sec,)

Tracking

delay

error

(mm))

The error of the

actual machine

position

to

the

commanded

position

is called

droop.

_

ROOP

(i)

Droop

[Command unit]

SPEED

(1 /min)

Speed

[1/min]

This is

the actual

motor speed.

FEED RATE

(mm/s)

Feed

rate

[mm/s] The

feed

rate

of

machine end is displayed. (Only Vx )

The

motor

current

is

displayed

with a

continuous current

conversion

during

stalling.

__

URRENT

Load

current

%)

[%]

The

current

FB

percentage

in respect to

the

current

limit

is displayed.

The

peak

value

is

constantly

sampled,

and

updated

every

second.

_

MAX

CUR1

(%)

Max.

current

1 (%]

The

currenl

FB

percentage

in

respect

to

the

current

limit

is

displayed.

The

max.

value

of

the

current

FB

peak sampled

after

the

power

is

turned ON

is

displayed.

_

AX CUR2

(%)

Max.

current

2

[%]

The

FB value

of

the

motor current

in

terms

of

continuous

current during

stalling

is

displayed.

An

absolute

value

of the

current

FB

peak

value

sampled

in most

recent

2

seconds

is

displayed.

MAX

CUR3

(%)

Max.

current

3 [%]

OVER LOAD

(%

Overload

1%

1

This data is used for

monitoring

the

motor

overload.

_

This

dala

is

used

for

monitoring

the

resistance

load

state

when

the

power

supply

for resistor regeneration

is

connected.

The

estimated

disturbance

torque

in

terms

of

stall rated

torque

when

the

disturbance

observer

is

valid

is

displayed.

The

estimated

disturbance

torque

in

terms

of

stall

rated

torque

when

the collision

detection function

is

adjusted

is

displayed.

An absolute

value of

the estimated disturbance

torque

peak

value sampled

in

most

recent 2

seconds

is

displayed.

OVER REG

0

Regenerative

load

%)

[%]

Estimated

disturbance torque

ST

FORCE

1

(%)

[%}

MAX

estimated

disturbance

torque

AX

DST FORCE

2 <%)

[%]

The estimated

load

inertia ratio

when

the

collision

detection

function is

adjusted

is

displayed.__

The

present

operation

frequency

of

the

adaptive filter

is

displayed.

___

The

present

filter

depth of the adaptive

filter is

displayed.

INERTIA

RATIO

3

(%)

Load

inertia

ratio

[%]

AFLT

FREQ

4 (Hz)

AFLT

frequency

[Hz]

15

AFLT

GAIN

(dB)

AFLT

gain

IdB]

AMP

DISP

6 Amplifier

display

The

driver's

7-segment

LED

display

is

shown.

_

Alarms

and

warnings other

than the

amplifier

display

are

displayed.

___

_

LARM7

Alarm

142

3ppendix

(2)

SERVO MONITOR

(Servo

monitor)

2/2

The

servo status

is

displayed

on this screen.

W*s; ta«

}

uioctu

>u»s

{'

Bnio i

fERYO

H0*JTGR<2/J?)

y amm

> taa&ta*

*n*rTa»|

xrvt

BiaKTOa

IA)

l<-'1

vj

1=1

0

0

0

rTnr

cwr

CRIP

MATT <**)

twin

*XC

JOK

po d

*ÿ».]

acv* ro

n>«A]a

WfltJK

RO?

|mj

fWMKL

IT

ÿ»>

PS

tr.BO*

ftn*. CW?

CHOI

CWD2

CWD>*

oe »

oai«i

«al

PT*2

trt S3

=73*

ST5S

»TfS*

*P)

0

0

I. *.

<**)

P.

0.

0.

.

(ÿ»)

<5.

0,.

J:

,

©.

.

0.

0.

o’

< • » )

o<

0.

0.

J?

“)

o,

0.

• 3 1 .* -

0.

'*10*»1*.

0,

0.

0,

s>.

0.

1)

0 .

0.

0. 0.

U>

0. 6.

.0,

£>.

.

cw>ooo<»<>ooo<>olJ

OOWWOOOOOWWll

OCWTOOOOOPGOOOll

000000090000001J.

<XKX«O»OOOWOOI

OOOO11«OS>OOO<K><X>

ooooUoooooooooo

OoeolJOOOOOOOCOO

OOOOlJuOOOOOOOQO

oo&ollbcoooooooo

cxX>o

Jr->o<xÿ>c«>

1

r*x>

oooolooooocaJtJofi

o<XH>Jo<>ooo<JolOpo

oot>oiooooooo3

ooo

o©i» o*><*HW>3<>c>o

POOOW®

9PIMW9IV cJCBJOOOOOOOOPOaOCa <JOOOOO*>«0<HX>OCX>0 PC

C<S3<>OOC«OOOC»C><>CK)0

OOOOOOOOOOOCKXXXX

OOOOOOOXVXXKKXtO

OOOOOOOOOOOCOOOP

OCKJOpOPOOOOPPOOP

OOOOOOOOOtXXSOolO

ooooooooooootjolo OUOOOOpOAO&OO&lx)

rximMVKXVXxjobo

1

a

(Xoooooooooocwlo

POOOQOOOPPPPPPOO

001X)pQ<X»0000(X«>

OOOOOOQOOOOpQpOti

#**>«KjOWOWO«W

CÿXXXXHKXXXXXKXIO

OOCQOOWOOOOOOOO

OOOOOCKKKXIOPPOOO

OOOPOpboOOPOOCWJ

(WWOOWOOOOCWOO

D00000cx>0000oc>00

OOOOPoOOOOOPOOOO

OOOOOOOOOoCOOOOO oooooooooooouooa

oooooooooooooooo

i)oo<jcx>cÿk><w3ot3o

iwwcoooooooopofi

ppp»*H?oc>PP«=<><*a*{><>

o**>o<H3«>»c<>oooo<x»

OO<ÿ>OO<X>O<)0CK>O<><J

OOOCPOMWXWOOO

OOOCWÿO<>OPOO<><K>9«>

o,*>4>CH?W>pOO(>«*;wo

u -WOWWWIHW

POOOCkOPOOCOOPOOO

D»V>«>C<><>X>OC>0©<>00

OOOOOOOOOOOOIXKXJ

OOOCOOOOUOOOOOrtO

OOOOOOiVJOOtKWOOO

oooooooooooooooo

f ico

owioooowwwo

*/>*

II

No.

Display

item

Details

The position

pe r

rotation

of

the encoder

delecto r is

displayed.

The

grid

point 's value is used

as

the

0

position

and the

position

per

rotation

is displayed

in

the

range

of

0 to

RNG

(movement unit)

multiplied by 1000.

_

CYC

CNT

(P)

Cycle

counter

[pulse]

The

grid spacing

for reference

point

return

is

displayed.

The

unit

is

[deg]

when

using a

rotary

axis.

_

The

distance from

the dog off to g ri d poi nt when

dog-type

reference

point return has

been

carried

ou t

is displayed.

The

grid

mask

distance

is

not

included.

_

GRID

SPACE

(mm)

Grid

spacing

[mm]

GRID (mm)

Grid

distance [mm]

This is the

position

on

the

NC’s

basic machine coordinate

system.

AC

POS (mm)

Machine position

[mm]

MOTOR

POS Motor

end FB

The feedback

position

of the

speed

detector

is

displayed.

(mm)

[mm]

SCA

FB

(mm)

[mm]

l

The

feedback

position

of

the

position

detector

is

displayed.

achine

end

FB

Remain

command

EMAIN

(mm)

The

remain

command

value

is displayed.

mm]

Current

position

WORK POS

The

current

position is

displayed.

(mm)

[mm]

J2L

Manual

interrupt

amount

mm)

MANUAL IT

The

amount

of

manual

interrupt

is

displayed.

mm]

the

error

of

between

the

motor

end FB and

machine

end

FB is

displayed.

B

ERROR

0

(i)

FB

error

[Command

unit]

The

compensation pulse

amount

for

dual feedback

control

is

displayed.

FB

COMP

1

(0

DFB error

[Command unit]

12

CMP1

Control

input

1

Control

input

2

MP2

3

CMP3

4

Control

input

3

CMP4

5

Control

input

4

CMP5

Control inp

ut

5

Control

output 1

16

17

STS1

STS2

STS3

Control

output

2

0

19

Control

output

3

20 STS4

Control

output 4

21

STS5

Control output

5

143

3

ppendix

(3) ABSOLUTE

MONITOR

Screen

(Absolute

value

monitor)

The servo’s

absolute

position is

displayed

on

this

screen.

i

vtasini

i

tnatmn

»»n*

DTTTW

aw> wann*

Isnjnt*

»t*rrsi

[

Konax

w*m»

|

PXacOLtrtt

MPMITPU

W1 3z\t.

J

[A1

ICJ

A65

sta

t*t>r

voa

row

M>8

KM:

W)B

o.

t.

ÿ**>

#.

o.

0.

0.

ft.

o

i. o.

<ÿ»)

ft.

ft.

t,

0.

ft,



o

a

o

ft

o



o

1)

ft ft ft

ft

p

O

CP)

0

ft ft

ft

fin

(P>

ft

0 ft

si

<p)

n

ft ft

ft

0

Ko



ft ft

ft

0

0

ABSft

ABSn

M5*Q«



O

ft

o

D



0

9

o

ft

<*>

p

t

0 ft

V

7*

*5

\

No .

Display

item

Details

ABS SYS

Detection

system

The

state

of the

absolute

position

detection

system

on the

servo side

is displayed.

ES

:

Semi-closed encoder

EC : Ball

screw

end

encoder

LS

:

Linear

scale

MP

: MP

scale

ESS

: Semi-closed

high-speed

serial

encoder

ECS

:

Ball

screw

end

high-speed

serial

encoder

INC

:

Incremental

2

POP

POS

Power

OFF

position

The

absolute

position

at NC

power

OFF

is

displayed.

mm) [mm]

PON POS

Power

ON

position

[mm]

The

absolute

position

at

NC

power

ON

is

displayed.

This

is created from

the absolute

position

when the NC

power

is turned

ON.

__

mm)

MAC

POS

Current

position

[mm]

The

coordinate

value at

the

NC

basic

machine

coordinate

system

is displayed.

_

mm)

5 RO

6 PO

EO

Rn

Cumulative

number

of

rotation

The cumulative

number

of

the

motor

rotation

is

displayed.

Pn

Phase The position

in

one

rotation

is displayed.

Each

rotation is divided

by

4096,

The

range

is

0

to

4095.

The

absolute

position

basic

point

is displayed.

This

is the

FB position

memorized

during

basic

point

setting.

10

ABS0

Basic

point

ABSn

Current

position

1

The

current

absolute

position

is

displayed.

12

,

MPOS

Scale offset

The

initial

offset distance for

the

MP

scale

is

displayed.

144

3ppendix

(4)

SERVO

DIAGNOSIS

Screen (Servo diagnosis)

The servo mounting

state and

alarm

history

are

displayed

on

this

screen.

r—

vri

rrm-

ratior.

Hiooiii

t«*m«

}

arum

OTTO

»anw|

irn*«

mntn

SJ*»SB»

HSIIW

}

IS

xi

IYJ

[A1 1C)

tin IT r«*£

OMIT Ho.

S/W

VTIVSICHI

comrnoi.

KMCrTYV*

r .wc.

oinjtAj,

m>.

eCiWLE

TYTU

SCA1X 8ZK1KL

Ho ;

MOTOR

WOtOC

7

D«

AJ*f JJf3* I

0

P

0

0

JO-OJ

w)

100}

IPO

I

100)

10QJ

fOP)

)O0)

|O01

00

00

00 00

00

oo

Co

00

p.

0OI

JOOI

100)

1001

1001

(0C)

100)

JO0)

00

CO 0D 00

00

00

00

00

0

IPOJ

|00)

1001

100]

IO0)

100)

fOO)

r«»p)

I»0)

(70

00

00

OO

00

00

00 <70

0

0

100)

0

o

|OOJ

IOC)

rooj

|00|

I00J

)0OJ

100]

OO

OO CO 00

00 00 00 OO

0

0

0

100)

0

0

0

«

100)

o 0

0

0

5

0

00) n 0

0

i 100)

0

0

o

9

7

100)

o

0

0

9

a

100]

0

0 0

0

Ov

oo oo

oo

oa

oo

oo

oo

HAurrE

nisi

HAwrrins

00 00

oo 00o

13/

7°

No .

Display

item

UNIT

TYPE

Details

Amplifier

type

This is the

servo

amplifier type.

2

Amplifier

serial

No.

This is

the

servo

amplifier

serial No.

NIT

No.

Software

version

S/W VERSION. This

is

the

servo

amplifier

software version.

CONTROL

Control

method

SEM1 :

Semi-closed

loop

CLOSED :

Closed

loop

DUAL

:

Dual feedback

ENC

TYPE

Motor

end detector This is the motor end detector

name

ENC

SERIAL

No.

Motor

end

detector

serial No.

6

This

is

the motor

end detector

serial

No.

MC DT

Machine end

detector

This

is

the machine end detector

type.

Only

displayed

when CLOSED

or

DUAL

of

control method.

SCALE

SERIAL

No.

Machine

end

detector

serial

No.

This

is

the machine

end

detector

serial

No.

Only displayed

when

CLOSED

of

control method.

MOTOR

Motor

This is

the motor

type.

WORK

TIME

__

ALM

HIST

1

to 8

10

Work

time T

he

cumulative

ready-ON

time

is

displayed.

Alarm history

The Nos.

of

the

past

servo

alarms are

displayed.

1

12

MAINTE HIST

Maintenance

record

The amplifier’s maintenance history

or

NVRAM

(special memory

in

servo)

status

is

displayed.

_

MAINTE STS

3

Maintenance

status



145

3ppendix

(5)

SERVO

STATUS

(Servo

status)

The

servo

statuses

are

displayed

on

this screen.

He

WnSw

_

_

|

OJHQCSIS

WBUW

;

emm

&>no

HWJUW

wm*

j

IWRWWK

enures

J

SERVO

STATUS

i

IA1

ICJ

X1

m

[00,CO|

[00,001

[00,001

[OO,

00 |

[00,001

[00,001

[00 ,00)

100,

©0}

[00,00|

[00,003

[00,001

[00,001

100,001

coo,00 )

100,00)

100,00}

100,00}

J00,00)

100,00}

CoO,Oo)

100,00)

)00, 00 }

100,00)

100,

00

J

100,00)

|00

j

00 )

100,00)

100,00)

100,00)

100,00)

100,00)

100,00)

[00,00)

100,00)

IDO

,00

J

100,

OOJ

ALARM

CO O

XT

1

too,

OOJ

[00,00)

[00,00)

[00,001

[00,00)

[00,00)

100,00)

[00,00)

[00,00)

too,

00 )

[00,00|

[00,00)

o

|0o,ooj

J00,00)

|00,00)

100,00)

100,00)

100,00)

100,00}

J0o,

oq )

JOO,O0)

100,00)

100,00)

[00, 00)

0

0

0

0

00 0

o

0

0

0

c

0

0

0

0

5

0

0

0 0

0

0

0

°

l

0

y

O

7

0

0

00

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0 0

0

11

0

i

P

s

0

0

IP.

00

0

0000

0

l

0000

I

DA

ADDRESS

1

DA OUTPUT

1

»A

ADPMS99

2

DA

OUTPUT

2

ODDO

0000

OOO

0000

0

o

0

oopo

oopo

000 0000

0

1

c

0

17/

20

£

j

Display

item

o.

Details

ALARM

COUNT

Alarm

No .

The

servo

alarm No .

Count

The

number of

times

of

servo

alarm condition

implemented

after

servo

amplifier power

ON.

_

DA

ADDRESS

DA

output

L

Servo

parameter

svQ61

setting

value

(address)

DA

OUTPUT

Servo

parameter

svQ61

setting

address data

Servo

parameter

sv063

setting

value

(address)

A

ADDRESS

DA OUTPUT

Servo

parameter

sv063

setting

address

data



146

3

ppendix

3-1-5

SPINDLE

MONITOR Screen

The spindle monitor

is

configured

of

the

following five screens.

The status

of the spindle is

displayed

on

each screen.

-

SPINDLE

MONITOR

screen

(Spindle

monitor) 1/2

•

SPINDLE MONITOR screen

(Spindle monitor) 2/2

•

SPINDLE

DIAGNOSIS

screen

(Spindle diagnosis)

•

PS

DIAGNOSIS

screen

(Power supply

diagnosis)

SPINDLE

STATUS

screen

(Spindle status)

The

screens

can be

changed

in

the

following

order with

the

page

feed

keys.

SPINDLE

MONITOR

screen

1/2

I

NEXT

key

T

BACK

key

SPINDLE MONITOR

screen

2/2

I

NEXT key

t

BACK

key

SPINDLE

DIAGNOSIS

screen

1

NEXT

key

t

BACK

key

PS

DIAGNOSIS

screen

I

NEXT

key

t

BACK

key

SPINDLE

STATUS

screen

Note: The

SPINDLE

STATUS

screen is

displayed

only

while

releasing

the

key lock.

147

3ppendix

(1)

SPINDLE

MONITOR

(Spindle

monitor)

The

spindle

status is

displayed on

this screen.

fm

»ViV»

—

»l

n» ;

inis ;

IOW KMJT»

S»J

aana ;

IUOQD

i

SPIXDU2

MOtUTOK

.

U/2>.

151MWDU ?)

IBPinotro

fSD

1*01*5

J

HKIKDIJCI

|

(.1/300)

t>

0

AIB

&nv>O0

fipcna

rtr.D

0 0 0

U)

0 &

p

tv

0

0 0

ÿill-

1) 9 a

©

o

o o

o

LOUD

MM

nm i

MIU

ctmi

MM CUBS

(rtm

tixxt>

OVXR

REK

nrrr

.

roues

MM

Dttr.»x>«ci;

(

*»>

OffiXTM

RATIO

(V)

0

0

0

0

0

<*>

0

0

0 »

<*>

0

0

Q

6

0

0

o

<• 0 0

0

0

0

c*>

0

0

0

C’O

0

0

0

9

0 0

0

0

9 t>9

0

ATX.T

rPLQ.

«*«)

ATLT

CL

3*

iatt)

r*%e>EtuiTtni£

tft>

p

0

0 C

0

0

0

o

0

0 o

o

0

0

D1SP

00

00

000

00

00 00

Oo

00

00

00

t>-0

00

0 co

no oo

00

OR 00

00

00

00

00

00

No.

Display

item Details

GAIN

The

spindle

position

loop gain

(1/s)

is

displayed.

The

value

is

no t

set when

in

control modes other than

position

loop

control.

_

1/msec)

Gain

[1/msec]

DROOP (i)

Droop

The

feedback

tracking

delay

to Ihe

commanded

position

is

displayed.

This is

valid

only during

position loop

control

as

with

item

1.

[Command

unit]

3 SPEED

(1/min)

Speed

[1/min]

This is

the actual motor

speed.

FEED

RATE

(mm/min)

[mm/s]

The

feed rate of

machine

end

is

displayed.

(Only

Vx )

eed

rate

LOAD

(%)

Load

The

motor load

is displayed

with a continuous

current

conversion

during

stalling.

__

%]

MAX

CUR1

(%)

The

current

FB

percentage

in

respect

to

the current

limit

is

displayed.

The

peak

value is

constantly

sampled,

and

updated

every

second.

__

___

_

6

MAX current

1

[%]

MAX

CUR2 (% ) The current

FB

percentage

in

respect

to

the

current

l imit i s

displayed.

The

max. value of

the current

FB

peak sampled

after

the

power

is

turned

ON

is

displayed.

_

%]AX

current

2

MAX

CUR3

The

FB

value

of

the motor

current

in

terms

of

continuous current

during

stalling

is

displayed.

An absolute value

of the current FB

peak

value

sampled in

most

recent

2 seconds is

displayed.

_

3 (%)

l%]

AX

current

3

OVER LOAD

{%)

Overload

(%]

This data

is

used for

monitoring

the

motor overload.

OVER

REG

{% )

0

This data

is used for

monitoring

the resistance load

slate

when

the

power

supply

for

resistor

regeneration

is

connected.

Regenerative

load

[%]

(%)

The estimated

disturbance

torque

in

terms

of stall

rated

lorque when

the disturbance observer

is

valid is

displayed.

_

The

estimated disturbance

torque in

terms

of

stall

rated

torque

when the

collision detection

function

is

adjusted

is

displayed.

An

absolute

value

of the

estimated

disturbance

torque peak

value

sampled

in

most

recent

2

seconds is

displayed.

The

estimated

load inertia ratio when

the

collision

detection

function

is

adjusted

is

displayed.

_

The

present

operation

frequency

of

the

adaptive

filter

is

displayed.

he

present

filter

depth

of

the adaptive

filter

is

displayed.

The spindle

motor

temperatureis displayed.

11

DST. FORCE

Estimated

disturbance

torque

__

[%]

MAX DST

FORCE

2

(%)

MAX

estimated

disturbance

torque

[%]

INER1IA

RATIO

Load

inertia

ratio

13 (%)

(%J

AFLT

FREQ

4 AFLT

frequency

(Hz)

[Hz]

15

AFLT

GAIN

(db)

AFLT

gain

[dB]

TEMPERATURE

Spindle

motor [°C]

temperature

Amplifier

display

16

(X)

AMP

DISP

ALARM”’”

17

The

driver's

7

-segment

LED

display

is

shown

This item is

displayed

when

alarms and

warnings

other

than

the

amplifier

display

is

occurring simultaneously.

18

Alarm

148

3

ppendix

(2)

SPINDLE MONITOR

(Spindle

monitor)

The

spindle

status

is

displayed.

r*m

Wfrij~

St$

IKKU*

;

>IK*TVIS

mini]

arm*-

VKD warm*

PT*U

*** «* jjanwrax

Banna;

SfJHtU.1 MOM

ITOH

<2/7)

j s p iKDt ca j

l«:p*MDur2j

tKt>XMDlX3)

ispixomi

12SPJ#D».E5J

eve

cur

CRIO SPACE

GRID

KXC

VOJf

MOTOR

P03

SCA TV

KEMAXH

WORK

1*08.

MANUAL

IT

ns

riwou

W.'C

COMJ*

:>ct)i

DJD2

CMD3

CHD4

o® $

CHM

Sta l

STS2

ST

S3

ST5 4

STS5

STBS

<»>

oo

0

o

(M >

In)

(M)

<*-)

fwO

<wo

(«*)

|w)

0,

-

o.

9.

0.

0.

0.

0.

. 9.

0.

0,

e.

o,

0.

0.

0.

.

0.

o.

0.

0.

0.

0.

.

0.

0-

0.

9.

.

0.

0.

0.

0. 0.

0. 0.

m

o.

0.

9. 0.

,

<4)

o. 0.

©.

O-

0.

1

0O0OOO0WX3OO000O

ooi>«w>oooooooooo

oooooooooooooooo

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOCOOOOOOOOOOOQ

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO ©OOOOOOOOOOOOOO

O


OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

oooloooooooooooT

*

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO


OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO cocoooooooooocoo



OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

0.


Display

itemo.

Details

This

displays

the

position

within

one

rotation of

the

encoder

detector.

The position is

displayed within

one rotation

in

the

range

of

0 to

RNG

(movement units)

*

1000 using the

grid point

value as

0

_

YC

CNT

(P)

Cycle

counter

[Pulse]

The

grid

space for

the reference

position

return

is

displayed.

When

rotary

axis,

the

unit

is

[degj.

_

RID

SPACE

(mm)

Grid

space

[mm]

This

displays

the

distance

from the

dog-off

point

to

the

grid

point

when

the dog-type

reference

position

return is

displayed. Th e

grid

mask

amount

is

not included

_

RID

(mm)

Grid

[mm]

The

NC

basic

machine coordinate system

position

is

displayed.

__

AC

POS

(mm) Machine

position

[mm]

MOTOR

POS (mm)

Motor

end FB

.mm]

The

feedback value

of

the

speed

detector is displayed.

REMAIN

Remain command

[mm]

Current

posirion

WORK

POS

[mm]

121

Manual

interrupl

amount

ANUAL

IT

[mm]

SCAFB

(mm)

Machine end

FB

The

feedback

value

of

the

position

detector

is

displayed.

mm]

[Command

unit]

_

The

error

of

between

the

motor end

FB

and

machine

end

FB is

displayed.

_

B ERROR

0

(i)

FB error

[Command

unit]

_

The compensation

pulse amount for

dual feedback

control

is

displayed.

FB COMP (i)

DFB

error

1

CMP1

2

Control

input

1

CMP23

Control

input

2

CMP3

4

Control

input

3

15 CMP4

Control

input

4

CMP56

Control

input

5

17

STS1

Control

output

1

STS28

Control

output

2

Control

output

3

9

STS3

STS4

0

Control

output

4

STS51

Control

output 5



149

3ppendix

(3)

SPINDLE

DIAGNOSIS Screen

(Spindle diagnosis)

The

spindle

mounting

state

and alarm

history

are displayed

on

this

screen.

i4e

xwbM

t-kfe

VZKCTOB

}

(M»K

MGWrnat

j

0

mad

j

«RW3

*«CHai

«WT«

KW»CO* WJf lTOBt

tfvxwMje

MACHOS*

I

ISP

lJ*P*-*4)

SpjMZ7|ÿ>]

mrr TYEE

UK IT

Bo .

8/W

YFRSJO*

C6BTK03U

KKC.TYPE

EBC.6ER3WL

Mo.

|81TB

ENC.

IYTE

SUB

EMC.8Ea.Mo.

tOTOft

*010t

TXX*

ALM

HIST 1

I

0

0

0

0

M

00]

[00]

100]

100)

|00)

[00]

too)

ioo)

00

00

00 oo

00

00

00

oo

100)

IOO)

tool

100)

[00

J

[00)

too)

too j

00

00

00 00

00 oo

oo

00

[00]

[001

0

[001

[00J

[001

[00)

[00J

[001

[001

[oOl

00

00

OO 00

00

00

oo

CO

0 0

100]

Si

100]

0

0 0

3

100)

100)

0

0

4

0

100)

0 0

too)

100)

0

0

?

9

100) 0

0

0

o|00 ]

0

0

[00]

[00]

1001

00 00 OO 06

00 oo

00

00

0

M

100]

[00]

00

CO

00 DO

0

0

0 0

0 0

S

rt

-

0

0

0

MAXHTF

BJST

00

00 00

oo

.

oo

I

AXBJfc ft

a

00

CO

00

0

j

Display

item

Detailso.

UNIT

TYPE

Amplifier type

This is the

spindle

amplifier

type.

This is the serial No. of the

spindle

amplifier.

NIT

No. Amplifier

serial No .

S/W

VERSION.

Software

version

This is the version of the spindle side software.

SEM1

:Semi-closed

loop

CLOSED

:

Closed

loop

DUAL

:

Dual

feedback

CONTROL

Control

method

5 ENC.

TYPE

This

is the

motor end

detector name.otor end detector

Motor

end detector serial

ENC

SERIAL

No.

This

is

the

motor end

detector serial

No .

No.

This is

the

machine end

detector

type.

Only

displayed

when

CLOSED

or

DUAL

of

control

method.

UB

ENC TYPE

Machine

end

detector

This is

the

machine

end

detector

serial No.

Only

displayed

when CLOSED of control method.

Machine

end

detector

serial

No.

UB

ENC

SER

No .

This is the

spindle

motor

type.

OTOR

Spindle

motor

The cumulative

ready-ON

time

is displayed.

0

WORK

TIME

Work time

ALM

HIST1

to

8

The

Nos.

of the

past spindle

alarms are

displayed.

larm history

1

MAINTE HIST The

maintenance

history

is

displayed.

2

Maintenance

record

MAINTE

STS

Status

The

NVRAM

(special

memory

in

servo)

status

is

displayed.

3

150

3

ppendix

(4)

PS

DIAGNOSIS

Screen (Power

supply diagnosis)

The

power

supply mounting

state

and

alarm

history

are

displayed

on this screen.

He

Mnicrm

vrasiat

j

Dr»a*sis HOT»T»

j

onwi

j

sjrjjvo

mrrtw

*>»

&X*CHOI;S

[xwxwx

w*orn»|

<1S>

<17>

-uav

<19?

<?o>

1131X1 TYPE

uxrr

no.

s/w

YEBaiox

COM

AxX$

:

IM

VOLT

1

MAX

TOLT X

HIM

VOLT

Z

WAX

VOLT

2

WOttX

1JH8

AIM

JBiKX 1

<V>

0

<v)

O

:

(X)

o

\

1001

0

2

100) 0

3

[001

0

J

tooj

0

5

1001

[001

1001

fool

00

00

OQ

«0

00 oo

00

<J0

0

«

0

7 0

0

o

:HAn*TE

urn

HAXXrrg

*1

rs

0

No.

Display

item

Details

UNIT

TYPE

Amplifier

type

This is the

power

supply

unit

type.

UNIT

No. Amplifier

serial No.

This is the

serial

No.

of the

power

supply

unit.

SA/V

VERSION

Software

version

This

is

the version

of

the

power

supply

side

software.

CON AXIS

The

driver

connected

power

supply

unit

is

displayed.

Connected drive

This

displays

the

minimum

PN

bus

voltage

after

the NC

power

ON.

J

absolute

value)

___

This

displays

the

maximum PN

bus

voltage

after

the NC

power ON .

(absolute value)

_

he

minimum PN

bus

voltage

in

most

recent

2

seconds

is

displayed.

(absolute value)

_

The

maximum

PN

bus

voltage

in

most

recent

2

seconds is

displayed,

(absolute

value)

_

MIN

VOLT

1

MIN voltage 1

MA X

VOLT1 MAX

voltage

1

MIN VOLT2

MIN

voltage

2

MAX

VOLT2 MAX

voltage

2

9

WORK

TIME

Work

time

The

cumulative

ready-ON

time

is displayed.

The

history

of

the

servo

alarm

No.

and

time

generated

in

the

past

ar e

displayed.

_

_

LM HIST1

to 8

0

Alarm history

Maintenance

history

_

MAINTE HIST1

The

maintenance

history

is

displayed.

Maintenance

status

AINTE

STS

2

The

NVRAM

(special

memory in servo)

status is

displayed.

151

3

ppendix

(5)

SPINDLE

STATUS

(Spindle

status)

The

spindle

status is

displayed.

r*»

tmfc

OT3U*fMJ6*nis mon»Jttrrw| tawti

H«n*

ww

|HWM

SPIUDUE

STATUS

K*JTO»

)

JlH>DtDT4:lJ

100,00)

|C6,

00J

100,00

J

100.001

too,

DO)

100,00)

too, 00}

JOO.OOJ

100,

OOJ

loo, 00)

100,00}

too, OO)

ISFIMOUÿ]

100,00)

106,80)

JOO.OOJ

{06.06)

too,

o«)

100,001

[00,

©0 |

[00,00)

[00,60)

100,001

ICP.OOl

loo,

00 )

100,001

[60,00)

100,00)

100,001

too,©*)

100.001

100.MJ

106,00]

(o«,t>0)

|00,00)

<00,00)

|Oo,0D)

[SP*XD1JIS)

too,

00 )

0

160.001

100,00)

100,60)

loo, ©O)

100,60)

loo,oi»i

100,001

[00,00)

[00.001

100.00)

joo.oo)

fsiMjHnii:?)

[00,00}

[60,00}

(00,00)

100,00]

1.00,00).

(60,001

{00.001

1

OD

,0©

1

J06.06)

100,06)

(60,00)

(06,

OP)

KLH&4

COBHT 1

©

0 0

i

0 0

0

0

0

3

0

0

0

0

©

4

© 0

0 0

0

0

0©

0

6

0

o

'1

0

0

o

0

6

0

0 a

DT

?.•

0000

006

0

6

O 0

0

0006

oooo000

<060

0600

o

o

o

0 0

Display item

Details

o.

ALARM COUNT

Alarm

No.

The servo alarm No.

Count

The

number of times of

servo alarm

condition

implemented after

servo

amplifier

power

ON.

_

A

output

L

DA ADDRESS

Spindle parameter

Spindle parameter

setting

value

(address)

DA OUTPUT

setting

address

data

DA

ADDRESS

setting

value

(address)

pindle

parameter

DA OUTPUT

setting

address data

pindle parameter



152



153



154

155

m

|r?

PPSPIAVW

I®

• ' • A :

Fit©

v»V«3or*

HfÿP

i

*

TOOL DATA

2

PROGRAM

[PROGRAM

FIXE

[TOOL

PATH CHECK

[SHAPE

CHECK

[PROCESS

CONTROL

[PROGRAM

XÿAYOUT

[H

A

V

IG

ATION

—

PREDICT

ION

J

:

::

[TKRCe

[E l

A MONITOR

•

[MACH

IIIBIG

:

-

MONITORING

]

A|DRXLL MONITOR

[SPINDLE

%0A£>

GRAPH

XC

;\ilKAVIGATIOH

T

RESULT

.

.

]

[AUTO

MEASURE

]

[TOOL

OFFSET

[TOOL

FILE

1

]

J

]

*

1

[TOOL LAYOUT

)

J

:

]

[

I

DATA

I/O

[DATA

I/O

PARAMETER

WORK:

OFFSET

I

ADDITIONAL

WPC

[MACRO VARIABLE

[MKASXIPF

[STRAIGHTNESS

GRAPH

USER PARAMETER

[MACHINE

PARAMETER

[PLC

PARAMETER

j

3

3

)

1

i

3

3

;

• v

v

i>IAGHOSIS

(USER)

[DIAOWOSIS

(MAKER)

[MAINTENANCE

CHECK

[RUNNING

CONTROL

(GRAPHIC

MAINTENANCE

CUTTING

CONDITION

[

CUTTING

OoNDXXIOH

LEARN

3

1

1

3

)

:

I

i

)

f.

ru\;~oH

.....

—

n>

15

Gain1

NAM

i

mm/min

<CUR

SORXINP

UI>

?

:

i

~

£

:

MAP

j

Operation

Procedure :

Display

selector key

>

DISPLAY

MAP

156

\YY*Y.\\Y»YVA\

\ÿYA'AY\\\W.Vi\NNW.Wk\\\V\\%

YVYWkYVWV.WW

(Y»'»VAYSYI'IY»

urn*

WVYWAY

1

m

%>

I

Ccu./ÿ

*

&rfssft

Vv>V

>'.<ÿÿ

H'->&

I

>

»

*

«Ei

IUFFER

NEXT

COMMAND

WHO-

TRS-CNK

OSITION

5

I

)

X

c

(

) (

.

X

0,

0

0

.

0.

0

UNO. >

i

Zl

0.

.

i

T

0.

I

0(

0)

COUNTER

<W0DAt>

0.

i

%

Cl

0,

NEXT

CtttAXHKD

XOW

X

P.

I

0. M 0

F

0.

»

xz

2

G

S

:

I

i

G

40

G

64

G

1

G

17

G

G 80

G

G 68

G

67 C

69.50

97

G123

.

1G111

G50.2

G113

G 23

G

98 G

21

G53.5

0X23

G

G13.

1

Z2

0.

2 O-

H

\

X

2

2

0.

T

G

-

G

:

W

0 ,

0,

?

i

%

\

\

EMAIN

OFFSET

ACHINE

.

::

©

xi

XX

.

0.

0.

I

0,

.

c

0 .

i

in

100 200

.

0

MIN-1

0

M/MXN

0 MIN'1

0

M/MIN

0

MIN1

C

M/MIM

0.

M.

SPDIi

\

f

B

$

ci

0.

(0 )

.

B

0

. SPDL

|

T.

SPDL

l|

T. 5PDL

Zj

XI-AX|

Y-AX

|

Zl-Rxj

B-RX

I

;

ci

-

0.

T

.

SPDII

(0 )

T

.

SPDI2

<0)

:

X2

X.2

,

0.

0

I

t

2

O..

I

i

©

C2 C2. 0.

I

1

o.

-

w

i

I

l

MM/

MIN

*

/»ln

0 .

FEED

t

6

i>

i

ito. 0

MflGAZNPKNo.

)

(CIR-DR

LOW TNo.

0 .

NO .

0

->->

(

0.

)

;

13

o

l

-AX

|

X2-AX

/a

in

*

/»in

MM/MIH Z2-AX

MM/REV

Cl

0.

I

0

,

<

)

j

C2

j

LOW

WRIT

:

T

-OFFSET

;

:

0

*

0.

S

(

0)

II#

{

0)

X

0 . 0

B

o

2-AX

W-AX

:

0.

0

i

Z

0.

i

t

m

mmmmm

TPs

-

o; .

1

I.

I

_J:*

I

:

W\A

/v

5o%

1

s

i

fl>

-

i

iran/nin

rain

1

i

H

. SPDL

JOG

IPS

?0KK

LIGNT

M.

SPDL

ACHINE

LOCK

REV

L

'.VAVA'WM'.

-

/.V.W/W.VA

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

—

>

POSITION

157

d££fc

‘.YMÿWNWAVn:

• A~faitViWrr»yÿ

aaÿas

l

(

VERSIGMj

DiaCSDSIS

JSKITt®

I

OPriflH

\

SERVO W3HITflR I

5PDE<LE

i«M7W

i

HJ3*mS££;

IfDMTTfiR

j

I

I

>

pxm yyyyyÿyyyyyyyy

wox>eL

ymryyy>ryyyyyy

ERIAL

yyyyyyyyyyyyyy

MOTOR

MACH

THE

ITEM

)

<

)

J2CT-X

vvM

/

• ÿ

>

(

::

:

: ÿ ; ÿÿÿ • > ;

<

V

' • ÿ '• ÿ

ITEM

ERSION

1001WOOO-A*WQ

SRV--X

lQQIMOOl-AÿO

9RV-V

iooim>n~Axwo

SRV-Z

SRV“H

SRV-A

SRV-6

SRV-7

SRV-8

SRV-3

SRV-XO

SRV-11

SRV-12

sRv-13

;

.

S.RV-X9

SRV-15

SRV~16

.

SPH-1

.

SRN-2

SRH-3

SP1I-4

SPH-5

3PM-

6

SPH-7

SPH~8

VERSION

VERSION

TEM

MAIM

-A

MAXH-S

XG-ENG

XADDER-F

1001W568-A0016

£

(

I

>

J2CT-2

>

J2CT-3

•

>

•

I2CT-4

)

«J2CT-5

)

J2CT-6

)

J2CT-7

)

J2CT-8

;

:

<

£

\

<

\

.

I

I V

<

ADDER-

B

LCP

I

I

)

(

i

(

> <

t-

> <

£

>

<

> <

>

J2CT-9

)

J2CT-10

>

J2CT-11

)

J2CT-12

)

J2CT-13

>

J2CT-14

(

*

<

J

>

(

)

(

)

<

>

<

)

<

(

t

f

C

<

1

)

>

(

)

<

(

)

?

> <

>

\

(

>

<

>

)

i

)

<

<

>

(

>

(

>

5

<

)

*

i

(

>

t

i

)

c

l

-

i

IPS

0

2005/10/31

11:

16:03

I

i

I

KrC

WvA

ISOmln'1

c

Own/sln

%

i

i

SERVO

MONITOR

VCRSlOM

lAOHOS

OX

AO NOS

MOHXXOR

OPTION

SRIMDIE

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

LADDER

MONITOR

i

£

>

f ty.WAV/AW»V

Operation

procedure

. Display selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

—

>

VERSION

->

VERSION

158

I

iMlM

\

<

fi*

Wn,tx

Htb

f

|

W3OTM

I

DljtfKOSIS

JfflWITCR

jOFIXIMij

I

KPJJfiOi

BEMITOR

[

H3HDVJCE

lStNITCK

|

EHITO

KDHTTtffi

:

29

GANTRY

ROBOT CONTROL

30

FLASH

TOOL

31

INCH

AM

COM

VEST

32

ROT-AXIS

SHAPE

COMP.

33

CO O

SLOPE CONST.

34

SCALE

FEED

BACK

35

SOB SP

1/1000

DEG

POST.

36 VARIABLE 600 SETS

31

SCALE

F/B

(A )

38

CYLINDER

39

SYNC.

MAIN

SP.

TAPPING

40 SIMULTANEOUS

5

AXIS

41

B

AXIS

CONTROL

42

IC CARD

HUMMING

43 ETA

ULRICA ,

TAP CYCLE

44

EIA PATTERN

CYCLE

45

PROTCOL

B

46

SHAPING

41 2ND

AOX. FUNCTIONS

48

NURBS

IMTERPORATTOH

49

TH.TED

WORKING

PLANE

50

SP/ROT.

PARA.

ADJUST

51

TABLE

UNBALANCE

DETECT

15*

S2 5-AXIS

TOOL COMP.

53

AUTO

PECKING

54

ETHERNET

RUNNING

55

TOOL

CENTER POIHT

CONTROL

56

THREAD

START POINT

COMP.

51

RE-THREAD

58

PROGRAM

MEMORY

EXPANSION

59

LOWER TURRET

MA7.ATROL

60

MILL

TURNING

MAZATROL

61

HIGH SPEED

SYNC.

TAPPING

62

'

63

64

65

66

61

68

69

'

70

12

.

73

74

1

ETA

2

HIGH SMOOTHING

CONTROL

3 SPIRAL

4

EIA

3D COMP.

5 ROTATION

6

GEOMETRIC

t i- T SCALING

8

EXT-DATA

I/O

9

MA2ATROL

3D

10 POLYGON

MACHINING

11

HOB

MACHINING

?

t

»

5

I

12

5

-PLANE

13 HIOH SPEED

14

SHAPE

COMP.

THREAD

16

SOB

C-AXTK CONTROL

11

INVERSE

TIME

18 DYNAMIC COMP.

70

-,To“

R0T-

21

POLAR

COORDINATES

INPUT

22

COMPARISON

STOP

23 HV

CHTR.

•

:•

24

SYNC.

CCHT .

25

EIA CONVERSION

26

SPLINE

21 G54.1

78 SYNC.

MILL

TAPPING

s

}

;

: .

\

1

1

:

1

75

l

76

t

I

77

::

7

8

80

81

t

2

i

1

83

-

d

-r*v

0

:

20

05/10/31

;

IX :

13:*3

?'

i

:

r

lb

1

50min’s

vW*

Ay

o*

OPUB/BIU

VERSION

OIAGHOS

OPTION

MONITOR

LADDER

LACHOS

SPINDLE

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

HARDWARE

ERVO

MONITOR

\

:

I

\

1

Operation Procedure.

:

Display selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

-->

VERSION

->

OPTION

159

mm

:v

r

o'-

77 r

OTÿIT,.;.

To

VV

m

• » ' .- ? '

‘ • »>V« j{>

fU

j ÿ’?

*

E-TO

I

VERSItM

|

DUU2H0SIS

HDNITtJR

|

OJTTCH

SOIVO

WCMITttR [sPQHKJB

WfflttTJK

j

HSRDVSiJE

MUnTtHt

SERVO

MONITOR

(1/2)

(J/soc)

i

(»i_n-l)

FEED

RATE

(wm/win)

i

icx)

X1J

m

JB)

Z1J

I

I

0

AIN

DROOP

SPEED

0 0

0

1)

00

0

<

i

0

0 0

0

t:

0

0

0

0

0 J

-DKRENT

MAX ClfRl

MAX

CUR2

MAX

CUR3

OVER LOAD

OVER REG

DST

.

FORCE

MA X

DEFORCE

<*)

INERTIA RATIO

ih )

(%)

0

0

0

0

<%)

0

0

0

0 0

:

0:

(h )

0

0

0

*)

0

p

0

j

<**>

0

0

0

0

0

*0

0

0

0

<*)

0

0

0

i

0

0

0

I

J

0

0

0 0

0

i

1

(Hz)

(<*B)

o

o

FLT

FREQ,

KFVt

CAXH

O

0

o

0

p

0

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00

00MP DISP

ALARM

00

00 00 00

OO 00

00 00

0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

I

:

i

rrnsrg

\

%

:

1

mmm

TPS

0

j 2005/11/04

1

10

:12

:04

A?Y.

50%

LSLLiD

:\W-

min'1

t

wn/win

I

VERSION

DTAGNOS

MONITOR

DXAGNOS

OPTION

SERVO

MONITOR

SPINDLE

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

LADDER

\

t

ONITOR

>

:

WWAVWA1

‘.v/w/.'.y.w.v.

Operation

Procedure

: Display selector key

-->

DIAGNOS

-->

VERSION

->

SERVO

MONITOR

r

160

{ • i fe y'VjjjTs

KVsp

VERSItBT

|

DlftQfOJwIS

tSBCCTCK

]

OfTItBf

SERVO BUKITHR

j

SPIMDLE

WDnTt»

|

MfiKEWMZE

MMTTCR

j

SERVO

MONITOR<l/2)

(1/

SOC)

i

(min-l)

FEED

RATE

(JftM/jfcii)

)

(XI)

tzi)

CC1-J

BJ

0

0

0

0

0

AIN

DROOP

SPEED

U)

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

0

0 0

0

<*>

0 0

CURRENT

MAX

am i

MAX

CUR2

MAX CUR3

OVER LOAD

OYER

REG

DST-

FORCE

\mx

DSX.FCRC£

<*>

INERTIA

RATIO

<%)

0 0 0

<*>

0

0

0 0

0

0

*)

0

0

0

<%)

0

0

0

0

<%)

0

0

0 0

0

<*>

0

0

0

0

0

*)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

IRFLT

FREQ.

RFLT CAIN

(Hz)

0

0

0

0

0<iN)

Q

0

OO

00

00

0

00

MP

DISP

ALARM

00

00

00

00

oo oo oo

oo

0 00 00

00

0 00 00

00

00 00

00 00

1/

16

-H

0:

200i/n/04

,10:12:04

PS

isW.

VV\A

W

50*5

Owin'1

0»m/»in

s

DXAGN03

OIAGNOS

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

VERSION

OPTION SPINDLE

MONITOR

LADDER

MONITOR

SERVO

MONITOR

Operation

Procedure

: Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

—

>

VERSION

SPINDLE

MONITOR

161

miitm

i

v

'it

1

1

yiwiWM

V,VA\

‘AWAV\YVVYÿ

\Y.\\>YASYiWiV/»

V

WYNWA’AÿWAVYi

I

mmmmMt

i

s

*

it*

Wy*ivft

:K*'s

j

VERSION

|

Diaorosis:

WKITOR

|

OFrrnH

j

SERVO

MBflTCR

|

SPIKDLE

MJKITGS

KWÿDWSIHE

MfflmUR

f

I

I

:

I

:-

%

\

\

X

l

CHC

J

1

HM1(>3

A

(1.03)

2

KK123

A

(

Ptc

)

HW102

B

(

HEM

J

HN402

ft

\

:

I

I

i

EX T

]

KH-531

A

|xq

USB j

HR

251

A

(0 .02)

j

f

|

i

<

(RIO

1)

(RIO

2]

[RIO

31

(RIO 4) (RIO

5]

(RIO

6]

(RIO

7J

(RIO

8]

1

X

i

2

5

H203

KM

2

03

i

4

i

5

:

f

1

f

i

I

> • * • '

—

1

—

msmr

TIPS 0

2005/11/04

j

18

:

I?:

46

;

\

f\Aÿ

50%

iili)

*v

0jwn/«in

min

s

3

* • • / »• • .

I»tl,,lw>.«'i

•

• '

V»’

:

I

I&CH08 VERSION

DIAL*

OS

MONITOR

ORYXOH

SERVO

MONITOR

3

PINOLE

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

LADDER

MONITOR

J

?

AW

»V.v. /.

W.S'AV.

•

/

WA’.’.VW

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

—

>

VERSION

~>

HARDWARE

MONITOR



162

*

MITSUBISHI

ELECTRIC

MITSUBISHI

CNC

PLC

PROGRAMMING

TOOLS

V

COPYRIGHT.

O

20D4

Ml

ISUBIÿSHI

El ECTRIC CORPORATION

RIGHTS RFSFRVFn

.

i

I»

eanm

me

RE

DI/W80S.

iKf

Operation

Procedure : Display

selector

key

—

>

DIAGNOS

—

>

VERSION

->

LADDER

MONITOR

163

“<YÿYAW«iY iY i

ttlftVittiWf

• am

tyrrrtiÿaaw

\\\S\Yl\yAU

I

m

-

-

t;

iS

?

l

fife

WVhfert

t

>

l

iLM3K

1

5LBJW

msrana

|

f\jQ

sionc

[

I

;

5

ALARM MESSAGE

HEAD

DATE

TIME

TYPE

IX.

IS 10:47

OP&RATB

MO .

i

471 .TOC

toon

not

$mm

5

i

I

I

I

I

I

i

I

I

I

I

1

5

5

I

f

i

•i

?

;-

j

i

t

l

l

-ÿ

i

i

wmmm

7

x mo

mm

HOT

F01WB

i

I

I

ov

j

vW*

ioo%

i

i

VERSION ALARM

ALARM

HISTORY

PI

JC

SIGNAL

ACCOM*

.

T-THE

MAXWTtH

CHECK

GRAPH

Xc

DATA

ERASE

RUSHING

CONTROL

1

i

MATNTEo

I

l

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

—

> DIAGPTOS

—

>

ALARM

164

IWmmMm milM

t

i

file

Sotp

Wrtfo*

Hjfc

H.7BW [aLsrai

HiJ.Ttiia

J

pi.c

sum

|

i

I

.

'

A.LIUUI

MESSAGE

DATE

TIME

10.31

10:22

OPERATE

10.31

9:54

OPERATE

10.31

9:43

OPERATE

10-31

9:

38

OPERATE

10.31

9:32

OPERATE

10.31

9:27 OPERATE

10.31

9:17

OPERATE

10.31 9:15

OPERATE

10-31

9:11

OPERATE

10.31

9 :

8

OPERATE

10.31 9: 3 OPERATE

10.31

B;59

OPERATE

10.31

8:59

OPERATE

10.31

8

:S3

OPERATE

10.31

8:49 SYSTEM

10.31

8:49

SYSTEM

10.31

8:46 SYSTEM

10.31 8:45

MG

10.31

8:45 OPERATE

10,31

8:45

OPERATE

10.31

8:45

SYSTEM

10.31 8:45 SYSTEM

10.31

8:44

SYSTEM

10.31

a;

44

SYSTEM

TYPE

1

o.

1

42 DATA

RENEWAL

HOT

ALLOWED

406

MEMORY PROTECT

442

DATA

RENEWAL

HOT SHOWED

.

442

DATA

REHEKM,

HOT ALLOWED

442 DATA

RENEWAL

HOT ALLOWED

442

DATA

RENEWAL

MOT ALLOWED

406

MEMORY

PROTECT

442

DATA

RENEWAL

tfOT

ALLOWED

439

MS2ATROL

PROGRAM CKSlGHATBO

439 MAZATROL

PROGRAM

DESIGNATED

439

MAZATROL

PROGRAM

DESIGNATED

406

MEMORY

PROTECT

439

MAZATROL

PROGRAM DESIGNATED

406 MEMORY PROTECT

dPSW

OOSAOET

8LC

'

-

'

58 DORROTT

RI.C

>

\&0.:CORROTX.S1C

_

130

HO

OPERATION

MODE

468

MAINTENANCE

CHECK

WBRMIHO

642

DATA

RENEWAL

HOT

ALLOWED

-100, )

;;

1,

»I00,

>

1, -100,

1,

-100,

1,

-100,

(

t

)

1

i

:

{ )

\

\£

)

c

.

..

l,

-100,

)

I

1

I

fe

i

,

£

.

I

3)

328,62700,

;

1

.t.SC

i

)

4,

i

'

1

EMERGENCY

STOP

.

(&OOOOFFTE/

§0$

2

)

<

|

U-

j

1/

5

-M

i

TpS

O

I

2005/10/31

10

:

23:37

:

~~D

7 50

min

’

1

VV'A

rv/\>

g*5

OIUIL/JAIR

I

I

AI i

ARM

TEXTPILE

DISPLAY

VERSION

nij 'KM

HISTORY

MA nn

f.n

PU ; wimum;

CONTROL

GRAPHIC

MSIHTS,

pix;

SIGNAL

CHECK

Operation

Procedure

.

Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

—

>

ALARM HISTORY

165

The

Procedure

Of

Reset

Alarm

History

And

Extended

Alarm

History

1.

Go to

DIAGNOSIS

screen and push

DATA ERASE

button.

X

ii+

Ui» mVTmnr ;

N

r

ilfcHal,

{

I

I.XKM

KF..13WC

n.

DATE

TIM

TW B

:

|

:

j

:

1

I

:

IM 0

2(1

06/09/2*

22;

3?

:

2#

vVVS

1

.

TB

W

7*v>

Or[i»

VERSZOK

Al.ARH

IK

wwm*

erase*

RDIDJTHC

OONTBCT,

cpj-.pmc

DATA

CtDW.

HISTORY

Sir.HAf

HAIKI BRBSB

2.

Move

cursor

to

ALARM

HISTORY

and

push INPUT

key.

3.

Move

cursor to COMPLETION

INPUT -9999 and push INPUT

key.

J

TOOL DATA CHUCK JAW

TOOL

DATA

CHUCK JAW

TOOL FILE

TOOL

FILE

TOOL

OFFSET

TOOL OFFSET

CUTTING

COND.

ALARM

HISTORY

CUTTING COND.

ALARM HISTORY

WORK

OFFSET

WORK OFFSET

MAINTENANCE

J

MACRO YAR.

MACRO

VAR.

COMPLETION <-9999

1NPUT>

COMPLETION

<-9999

INPUT>

START

INIT

.

START INIT-

4. Open Explorer

and Delete

C:¥MC_sdg¥Alarm¥Alarm.txt

file.

8SS

88

File

Edit

View

Favorites Tools

Help

7

i:

S

-ft-

J

Back

-

Folders

)Jÿ\

~

earch

W

vi

:

i

MC

_sdg\

Alar

m

V

: » • -

-

X

Name

Sire

olders

Type

Text

Document

Text

Document

mm

89 KB

__)

MC_Gl

Data

+

_

I

M-I

.Machine

Oat

abas

*

_j

MC

.Machine

Program

_=J

E

xcbjdeAlarrri

1

KB

-

_

|

MC.sdg

A

Alarm

_

I

CiistOfnMenij

_

I

cutest

_

)

'. u* morn

_

I

ojties

_l

dbl

_)

tug

_

I

Tocillnf

or

matron

V

<>

>



166



167

m

fwÿ.raS15AI»|p0;:

m

fife

w

.Wipÿ

___

EJSPK

|

sown

MCSTORZ

W-

\

I

I*.

Sts.

Condition

0000

XZ30,X$30,X690,X930

0000

X231,X531,X891,X931

0000 X232

,X532,X89?,X932

0000

X233,XS33, X893,

*933

0000

X234,X534JX094,X934

0000

X238

,

X538

#

X898

,X938

0000 X239,X539,X899,X939

0000

X23C,X53C,X89C,X93C

1000 X1F8,X4F8,X858,XBF8

oooo

xieoÿafio.xBio.xBeo

0000

XlEl,X4El,X84I,X6El

0000

X1E2

,X4E2,X842,X8E2

0000

X1E3,X4E3,X843,X8E3

1000

X1E4,X4E4,X844,X884

““

SS:;S:S5J:ÿ

0000 X1EB,X4EB,X84Q,X8EI)

OOQ0

X1E2 ,X4E2,X842,X8B2

No.Title

19 .

RESET

20 .

MX

AXIS

IHP

21

.

MJ.aXXS

SMTH

22.SYHC-Z

23

.

SYNC

-c

24.SXKC-SP

25.SYHC

26.GOV.

:

27-61

V

ZB.XIIREADXHG

29 . CONST

30. SKIP

31.

OH

ZERO

RTH.

3

2.

FINISH

33.

PRESSURE

34.HAXXHG

35-MFIHX

36.MFXH2

Sts.

Condition

0111

1000

1000

0000

0000

Ho.

Title

1.MF1

.

2.HF2

3.MF3

4,MF4

5.

SF

*\TF1

7.TF2

8

.

HF

9.DEH

10 . JOG

13.

HANDLE

12.

STEP

13.PTP

14 .

ZERO

RJETORH

IS .

MEMORY

’

’

iCjTJVPE

'

17.MDT

IB

.

OPERATION

i

X1C$(X4ES,X845,X8ES

X1F9,

X4F9

,

X859

,

X8F9

XlFA,X4FA,X85A,X8FA

X274 ,X5?4,X8D4 ,X974

X27S,X57S,XBD5,X97

5

0000

X27fc,X57«.,X0D6,X976

0000

X204,X504,X864,X904

0000 X200,X500,X860,X900

0000 X20X,X501,X861,X901

0000

X203

,

X503

,

XB63

,X903

0000 X205

,X505

,

X865,

X90S

0000 X206,X506,X866(X906

0000 X207,X5O7

,XB67

,X9D7

0000

X26O,X5GO,X0CO,X96O

0000

X268,XS68,X8C8,X968

0000

X26C,X56C,X8CC,X96C

'

Y226

,

Y526

,

Y9A6

,

YAA6

0000 Y227,Y527,Y9A7,YAA7

-

i

>

|

1

1

:

0000

1

I

X/

3~±J

i

• inÿj.0]

2005/10/3X

j

10

:

23 ;

43

I

ZJ

7 SO

min’1

VV\A

\T\j

0A

0»m/»in

i

VERSION

ALARM

HISTORY

PIC

SIGNAL

PJ.C

RtUtNXHG

i

CONTROL

MAINlEH

CHECK

ALARM

Operation Procedure

: Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

—

>

PLC

SIGNAL

168

*

w

Fite Vfcteri

susm

JCCSTCBCC

nx:

Slant,

ALARM

MESSAGE

HEAD DATE TIKE

TYPE

11.15

1B;'47

OPERATE

HO.

471

1TC »ATfc HOI

TO

mp

w~v-

:

-

_

•

'Q';VSO:.

••

•

*:•

:.

.*>

*

i

:

*;

il

TOOL. FILE

TOOL OFFSET

• • -

_

_

.

.

..

COHO.

ALARM

HISTORY

lTTTTliG

*ÿ

WORK OFFSET MftIHTE«JUiCB

MACRO

VAR.

.

'•

•

l%0,

.

%ÿVVÿ>5v:J

i£

ADD me

COMPLETIOH

<-9999

XNPUT>.

START

IH

IT,

|

47

l »C

DATA.

MW

FQ1W*>

jVU

100%

[IB:

48;

2:1

kW

100%

}

.

VERSION

ALARM

HISTORY

PIC

RQNHING

CONTROL

ACClJHlI.

TIME

ALARM

MAINTEN

CHECK

GRAPHIC

MAIHTE.

DATA

ERASEIGNAL

Operation

Procedure

: Display

selector key

—

>

DIAGNOS

-->

DATA ERASE

169

rfliV'ii

niRivav‘'-y‘v'v‘ÿ}‘\)‘ÿYi

'~'v-

A.

.w«.ifr'>nvrii

6M .

-

;

<

Fite-

WWSor*

Hrÿ>

SXSJOI

p««oi

j

rrrcif

ITJRIK

j

KEY

MisTtaa

|

fO«w

scan7.

|

:-

l

i

i

i

i

0

019 01111011

3

020

01000111

4

021 10111111

6 022

11101

111

8

023 11101111

4

024

10001110

1

025

10011111

2

026 11111111

2

027 00111110

0

020

10100000

0

029

10010100

0

03 0

11110011

2

031

11100100

1

032

OOOOOOIO

0

033 11001101

O

03 4 . 00010001

4

035

i

10000010

2 036

U

1100

10

037

030

039

;

OOOOOOOO

o40

iooiloioo

041

jOOOOOOOl

042 OlOOOOOO

043 00000000

1000

100

0

250

055

toooooooo

056

057

j

IOOOOOOOO

050

059

j

£00000000

060

j

061

:

£00000000

062

;

06 3

£00000000

064

065

066

067

j

060

j

069

1

07

6

;

071

'

£

00000000

072

UOQOOOOOO

073

00000000

074

iOOQOQlQl

075

j OOOOOOIO

076

jOlOOOOlO

07 7

loOOOlOOO

070

j

10101000

07

9 i

080

:

OOl

002

OB3

j

084

os 5

|

006

|

007

|

08 8

j

08 9

|

096

5

0

091

jllOOOOOl

09Z

loooooooo

09 3

[00000000

094

j

OOOOOOOO

095 ioooooooo

096

10000000

097

098

09

9

0100

0101

0102

0103

0104

0105

•

0106

IOOOOOOOO

0107

-OOOOOOOO

OIQO

Ol

02

0

i

03

<

0

4

i

'

05

06

o

07

0

0

oo

04 4

04 5

04

6

?

047

04 0

049

05

0

051

05 2

053

j

054

0

0

1

09

0

O

oio

oil

012

013

01 4

015

016

:

017

018

0 16

0

0 0

I

:

2000

2000

50 0

0

0

i

f

0

0

0

0

1

0

:

:

5

i

0 0 0

0

0

0

o o

0

0

?

\

\

-

Ij#'?'

rJ

DI

|fg||ftjj2005/ll/15

1

18;

50 :

58

:

i

\

i-

s

Vv

100%

r

• :

j

WA

ioo%

1

I

>

DIACHO#

SYSTEM

PA*Uki

KEY

MEMORYITCH

:

ERROR

MI

STORY

SCOPE



VERSION

->

VERSION

->

SYSTEMP

ARAM

170

rtfUH

rirc»f

zmam

RTT mviwi '

;

msfufn

sn>n;

Ol

«

oi9

020

021

022

023

OS

4

OS5

0? 6

O71

02 0

029

030

oil

03 2

033

034

035

o3 6

03?

039

03 9

08000000

040

00100000

04 1

00000001

04 £

00010009

100

11

043

OOOOOOOO

11111ÿ1

044

001111ÿ0

045

111000019

04 6

11

VJOloA

04?

11

111111

\

048

10000100

\

049

00000010 \

050

01900001

VlSl

0091

oq

01

00000110

01010000

muon

01010111

10110111

11110111

11111111

OS5

£0

0000000

P?3

00000009

00000101

00100011

9IOO0O1O

0O1O10OO

1010000

1

09

1

092

093

094

095

096

097

09 6

09 9

0100

OlBl

010

2

0103

0103

01 0

5

0106

O107

oioa

1

1000001

ooooo

loo

00000000

00000000

00000000

0 10OOO0O

0

02

3 0

056 0

01

4

03 d

057

tOOOOOOOO 07 5

07 6056

05 9

060

061

06 2

063

04

0

05 400000000

077

immMt

6

4

018

07

9

OHO

on

i

08 2

003

08 4

08

f.

086

087

088

08 9

09 0

0

07

1

1,00000000

0

0

08

<>

0

0

0

2

09 ?

0

i.00000000

0

0

OlO

on

0

0

D64 0 0 16

065

066

067

068

069

OlO

071 4OO0OOOOO

O?

2

L

00000000

o

0

O

?

012

0

2000

2000

0

0 0

01.1

0 u 0

Oil

1 0

0 0

015

016

0

0 0 0

8

s

29

00000090

00000090

0

0

0

cfcp

OtU

017

3 0 0

01

Q

• >

O 0 C

\

i

\

\

\

'*£?

®

2006/12/01

09:52:31

>-

v

oiM

y

Hfl

>AAA

1

.

46

tsi/mS

V\*

so

%

\

HIT

\

\

r*r

\

Cursor

to

the

coirect.0 parameter

Press

BIT INPUT- '



171

I

4:M

fejg

;

F$*

'ÿitev*

twp

SYSTEM

rmm

|

nttDt mum

}

I&Y tfusreaa*

)

lasas#

%tmm

J

m%

1100 OGOL

092

G

9000

100

093

j

0

0000

000

0.94

0000

0000

00800000

096 O1OO0OOO

& 00

00

0000

3

033

055

05$

07 3

00000000

074

00000103

075 00100011

076

01000010

077 OO1010OD

078 10100001

079

00 0

08 1

002

00 3

OQ

4

005

086

087

008

009

O90

B

019

XI

111011

020 01

0X011

1

021

10110111

0.22 lillOlll

023

11.

trio

X

9

of

03

3

038

039 00000000

040 00100000

041 00000001

04 2

00010008

043

00000

D

00

8 0

*08009900

057

04 6

058

059

£09000090

06 0

m i

*00000000

062

063

£00080000

cm

065

06$

067

068

069

070

Oil

400000000

072

£00000000

0

OS

0

I

11**1011

6

4

02 4

0

07

0*5

1

001.1m

0

09 7

0

08

026

I

I

nun

027

001X1110

Of0

11100000

029

XI

I

18100

030 llilllll

03 1

10088100

032 OOOOOOiO

033 01000001

034

000X0001

m%

00000110

036

010X0000

mb

099

01.60

:

0X81

0.1 Of

0X83

0104

01.05

0186 00880808

0187

08000000

0180

2

044 8

o 0

2

m

?

045 0

0

OIP

Oil

012

013

014

0X5

016

017

oin

04$

04 7

0

0

1$

0

0 0

0

0 040 2880

2098

0 0

8

2

049

0

8

8

1

050

0

0

i 0

051

0 0

0 0

0

052

053

054

29

0

0

5

0 0

0

8

iwi

2006/12/01

09:52:50

on

:;V/|

lift

VW*‘ .1

,

4

in

/m

in

/V.

50% Orpm

...

1

I-

BIT-

f

J

4

3r-

IHPIST

X

/

EX

Select,

the bit.

you

want,

on

ur

off

... Highlighted

=

1

or

On

Not

Highlighted

= 0 or

Off

172

mu

w«vWftwiWft\YTÿYÿAVTlYlV

A*>

YtYYn

VTYtT.YlYlTtYYYiV/YlY\YiWr>1Yl

T

&£&$&£ T.

'J&

%‘.Zp***r

~

•

'

FI** Hrt>

5

j

KEY JCISTflJOf

|

KQCJHY

SCOfE

|

\

ITCH

EKH£R

SYSTEM

FWtfO*

:

i

#234

-;

#208

102

150

101

#130

70

2G #52

o

>

0

0

0

0

I

XIS

j

<

s

0

0

0

0

0

13

I

j

1000000

0

0

0

:

0

0 0

0

3

2

0

0

0

0

o 0

P3

-1

0

\

0

0

0

0

6

I

j

l

\

0

0

0

0

0

7

:

P5

0

0

0

7 0

0

0

0

0

0

7

'

o

0

0

0

0

13

0

0

0

0

1

\

0

0

0

0

0

•<

10

-1 8

0

o 0

0 o

>

0

0

0 0

0

0

0

\

0

0

0

0

0

\

o

0

i

I

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

0

0

I

\

0

o

:

0

0

0

i

I

0

0

o

;

j

0

0

0

0

:

•:

1

0

0

;

0

0

0

i

i

?

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

i

:

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1/16

jj

0

0

0

0

2

J

.....

an

sar™

1X8:51;

17

5

\

I

c.ÿ*r.v5«cn.‘v.

.*.y

Tl

I

ÿ '

I

—

i

W'ioo*

:

5

;

DMrK

Ko.

SEARCH

MEMORY

EY

HISTORY

SYSTEM

JPXTClt

ERROR

DIACMOS

S

SCOPE

Si

RHBBRBR

TJjJJ.'J

AWWX'.'AWA'AW/AVW

.V.’.V

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

VERSION

- -

>

VERSION

-

-

>

PITCH ERROR

173

F7?

R;T

%

\o

-O

rÿiLLi

SYSTEM rwam

|

men

unm

KEY

msTmor

iwoarior

SCOPE

|

1

2

3

4

5

<5 ? 8

0

10

11

12 13

14

15

16

17

18

10

20

0

MS 5ft

MS

MS Fl MS F3

F3

F4

CR

F4

DS

48

Fl Ml

CR

DS

DS DS

F7

20

Fl

DS

F3 DS

Fl

DS F3

DS FB Ml

CR UD

UR

FS

UR

UR

UD UR

F3

DS

FG

FG F6

F6 FG

FG

FG

F6

FG

MS

DS

FG

F7

DS

F4

F4

UD

UD

WD

UD

UD UD

UD UD UD UD UD

UD

*D

TB

TB

UD

UD

UD

UD

CR

UD

DS

F3 FG

Fl

F2 F2

F2

F2 F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

F2

DS

F7 Fl DS

Ffi

F3 F9

AX

AH

AT AE CR

Fl

DS

Fl

F2

F2

F3

F2

F3

F2

f3

F?

F2

F3

F2

UR UR

UR

40

4

A 41 41

42

43 45

44

42

42

4B

51

40

51

4B

4A 4C

5B

5B

55

55

53

53

56 56

54

54 F2

DS

F3

UD

F4

DS F7 DS

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD UD UD

UD

M0 CR DS

F6

DS MS DS

DS

F7

F2

DS

FG

FA

UD

DS

08 FT

Fl FA 40

F3

UD

UD

HO

CR

DS F7

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

Fl

DS F8

F2

DS

F8

FG F6

FG

MS

DS

Fl

CR DS

FS

Fl

DS

F» F?

DS

Ffi

FS

DS

F6 FA

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

CR

DS

DS

DS

F7

F8

F8

FB

FR

Fl

DS

F l

DS

DS

F4

Fl

DS F3

FA

PD

PD

PD

PD PD PD

PU

FA

F2

H4

H. M3 CR

CL CR

CR CR

CR CR CR CR

PD

PD PU

PU

CR

F2

Fl

CR

CR

CR CR

CR

CR

F l

DS

DS

FG

FA

UD

UD UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

1ID

UD

UD

UD

MO

CR

DS

DS FG

FA

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD UD

UD

Ml

CR

DS

Fl FA

F3

F4 F5

DS

DS

F6

FA UD UD UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD

HO

CR

DS

Fl

Fl

FA

F3

F4

40

FG

FG

FG

60

UD UD

80

UD

Ml

MO

100 F2

F?

120

F2

FA

DS

140 UR

UR 48

160

53

48

180 FG

FA

UD

200

F l

MS

220 CR

DS

240

UD UD

UD

260 UD

UD

UD

280

DS

FS

300 FA

DS

320

UD

UD MO

340

FO

F6

DS

360

UD

UD

Ml

300

DS

Fl

400

F4 F4

420

F l

DS

FO

440

F4

DS

F7

460

F7

DS

DS

400

F l

DS F?

500

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD UD

UD

UD

UD

UD UD

UD

UD

Ml

F4 F5 OS FG FA

UD UD UD UD UD

UD

Pi FA

F3

F4

F5

DS

F6

FA

UD UD

UD

Ml

CR

DS

MS

DS

Fl DS

FB Fl

Fl DS DS

F3

DS

F8 F4

DS

FS

FG DS

FB F7

DS

F8

DS FG

FA

UD

UD

UD

UD

UD UD

UD UD

UD

FO

F2

DS

F8 F3 DS F8 F4 DS FO

F4

DS

UD

UD UD UD

FA

DS F7

FS

PU

PU

PU

PD

DC

CR

40 DS F4

F3

UD

:TPS 0

(2005/11/15 18:51:35

mmmi

EE

E

PXA0H03

BYSTF.W

P

ARAM

PITCH

ERROR

RET MEMORY

SCOPE

ISTORY

Operation

Procedure : Display

selector

key

DIAGPTOS

—

>

VERSION

->

VERSION

->

KEY

HISTORY

174

y

VA*>ViV.

S*VV»%\

VISNNWIV.

VIWT

VV>V.V

A

W,/VAV\

WVS

YftmvWlWWYlWYlVW.W

jMliaF

i

Fite WWwf

Hf r9 f>-

*

serra*

r«a« ) ?XTCM

ERROR

j

KEY

rasrraac

vaxsci scare

i

*

t

l

\

i

TRIGGER

No.

0

IIP

0

X

I.TBS

AMPLING

CYCLE

i

QZGHKL

o.

*

+ÿ

+ -+ +

-

+

*-ÿ

+

4-ÿ

*

+

I

i

$

00000000-0

I

J

I

ooooooo-o

l

00000000-0

i

oooooooo-o

00000000-0

I

I

00000000-0

i

i

<

i

00000000-0

:

7

£

::

i

i

?

oooooooo-o

i

\

1

1

;

\

i

i

l

ioos/ii/is

jiafsi:

sa

t

vV*A

ioo%

W

ioo%

['VIZ

i

YSTEM

pxtm

ERROR

KEY

H.TS20RY

MEMORY

SCOPE

RTRRT

i

i

mu«WÿHWX'IWW.'ÿTO

BB

W

TW

/ .ViV.V.VAW.' .V

Operation

Procedure Display selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

-->

VERSION

->

VERSION

->

MEMORY

SCOPE



Memory

Scope

• Primary

Function

Digital

Recorder

-Ability

to

monitor

8

(eight)

signals

set to

anything

that

is

an

address

• inputs, outputs,

latches,

etc..



Memory

Scope

Cursor

down to

the

desired signal

number

In

this

example,

signal

No.

1

m

DIAGNQSIS(MAKER2)

m

ile

Window.

y

Help

'

Hi

»

i

SYSTEM -P AR'Mr

I

PITCH

EPP.0P.

|

KEY

HISTORY.

>v;KEK0RY

\3rftW

rS:

TRIGGER

Wo.C

.

Wo. SIGNAL

,

+

M

.ly,

1 00000000-0

;

3

M

$

Hi

3

2

.00000000-0

V -:

3

00000000-0

4

00000000-0

* ÿ

ft}.

5

00000000-0

.

V'lllifPSiii

ISW*

6

00000000-0'

,

m

y.

;v

iVfii

£

K

.

7

00000000-0

•*

S

Jslfvfe,

VVVilitl

&

%

8

00000000-0

A:-

«

:

• .

£

m-

m

mm

\

i

HM

aMfimB

vy

•

i

ij'-y.’ /-;;'1

\

«*

vy;-

•

-“-

:

‘-‘i

* v

}'ÿ'

’’ WW

\

\

“:v

-7',l/,‘

V;7

%

v

’

33

EMERGENCY STOP

SiiHiP

iiiiiin

VV

10

0%

[xjj

Orpm

is-:

WA

100

• r,

ss;

j?

VVV--‘

ÿ

Y’

iiiiil

-

'

D

C E

8

.V

V.;

>

i

4

A;

X

-------

S'-VT

• $

Memory Scope

Input

the

desired

address,

example

X140-0

(For X146,

type

X146-0 input)

3

DIAGNDSISIMAKER2)

Rle

Window Help

mrntmmmmmt

r

'>ÿ

.

:

:

;

iiiMiiiMHi

silS

lilgi

SYSTEM

».<£AK|

PITCH

ERROR

|

KEY HISTORY

MEMOR Y 3C

OPE

v-'H’-W

TRIGGER No. 0 DOWN

SAMPLING-

CYCLE

Ho. SIGNAL

1 00000000-0

+

+

--

;

T;

2

00000000-0

3 00000000-0

4 00000000-0

S

00000000-0

6

00000000-0

li

f

.

j

-

r*S€:

$

.7

ooo.ooqoo-o

:

I;;

M

8

00000000-0

Yg,

m

m

ift

&

[

j

~'.:7

]

lÿpgjg ['2000/03/25'

[12:52

3

EMERGENCY

STOP

To

05

.....

xj}

[WvA

100

Vv Orpm

X14D-0

C

.

B

D

E

?



Memory

Scope

Insert

up

to 8 address’s

111

DIAGNOSISJMAKER2)

.......

mmmmummmmmmmm

:

;

mmmmmssmmSBmrnmmsi

File

VÿindoW'

Help

.ICCKORY-

V3TEH PARAH

PITCH ERP.0R KE'2

HISTORY

TRIGGER No. 0

DOWN

No

SIGNAL,

1:

X0140

-0

2

00000000-0

:f;

+ÿ

+

i'm

3 00000000-0

ii

9y

Cy'ti

4

00000000-0

l§g§

fM

00000000-0

•ÿ i;’

'V;

s

-

w

&

>•

00000000-0

7

00000000-0

8 ooodoooo-o

• 0

£1

a

&

m

mk

X

§*#«

2#

wmmm.

f?

-:

Ni

33 EMERGENCY

STOP

;

'.(2,

I'vv’iaos

jxQ]

fvWv

’

Orpm

100

f

§§*

si

B

:.

• •

C

D

mm

m

M

«r



Memory Scope

XI

40-0

through X147-0

m

DIAGNOSISIMAKER2)

__

ile Window

Help

.

3Y3TEK

PAR

AH

|

PITCH

EB P

OR

]

KEY

KISTOP.Y

HEHORY SCOPE:

wimmm

TRIGGER

Mo.

0

DOUN

SAMPLING CYCLE

+

--------

-—

~

+

----

----

X'

I

®1§®M

o.

SIGNAL

1 X0140

~+

-0

3

tie

2

X0140

-1

%

3

X0140 -2

i

ÿ

4 X0140 -3

/

>\\;

;

§

v,m

XX&

X

-

xMWB

.-ÿÿ-•

'

:

>

;

'

.,-

...

.

5

X0140 -4

6

X014D

-5

IV?

7

X0140

-6

m-

-7

X0140

&

aMMHMM

[

v

'

,

2303/03/29

f

12

:57

3ÿEMER(ÿHCY.

7-

P'/v

100%

[Vjjr

100

_£jr

£\

r

pm

_

•

•

X'iv

HEMORYf ;

m

SCOPE

1

*

'START,,,

>

i

IAGHOS ;

SYSTEM

PAPsAM

PITCH

ERROR

KEY.

HISTORY

&

X140=Reset



Memory Scope

Enter the

No.

for

the

desired

trigger signal

i

pi

MAKER2)

File

Window

Help

Tr¬

e.

SYSTEM PAJ..UI

]

PITCH EPROP.

| KEY HISTORY

MEMORY

SCOPE:

Vvv'

W3M

.

.

______

>

.

20

x

7.,1m?

'

‘

RIGGER: Ho.

6

DP SAMPLING CYCLE

----

----

-yw,

—

+

----

r-

+

o.

SIGNAL

.

1X0140

-0

.2X0140

$

iu;

' • ' 5

-1;

3 X0140

~2

H

4 X0140

x3;

Illiii

fSililil;

:ÿ

liii

11

0:M

.5

XOl'lO

6

X0140

-4 .

£5:

M

;B6:

..X0140

$

ws

g®

8

XOi.iO:

-7

I-;

-

r~~~

I

:2P0p/03/2ÿ.rls,;

02

3

EMERGENCY

STOP

fvv

1005

[zSQf

|vw

ioo'rpm

DIAGIJOS

SYSTEM .PITCH

PARAM

ERROR

START,

KEY,

HISTORY

MEMORY

SCOEfel

u

l

?7$

In

this

example,

signal No. 6

will

be used

as the trigger

signal.

(X145)

Memory

Scope

ENTER

0

TO

USE

THE

RISING

EDGE

ENTER 1

TO

USE THE

FALLING

EDGE

U

DIAGN0SIS(MAKER2)

WmsmmF

wmm

wmmmmmmmmm

+

+

l|raHn|

My

File

Window

Help

tip

KEY

HISTORY

MEMORY

SCOPE

1

$

g

;

/ *? *• ;

;;

‘

.

;

;

:

V

TRIGGER No.

5 DO

TO

-:4

-

-

+V

I-

-;+

-

-:+i

SYSTEM

P

ARMI:.|‘

:P

ITCH

ERROP.

w

.

'.

..

/.

>avi

;

;:ÿ-<

mmmm

o.

.

;

SIGNAL.

.V:.

:TUW;

I'

it

1 X0140

.

..-0

;v;,

W

2

X014Q

~i

r|®

.

:

3'

X0140

=rs2

'-..

‘l

- ÿ • ÿ

'.'O’

Jg

lltiSIfllll

i

mt

istsi

W:

m

$

mm

4

X0140

-3

i

I

4

5

\X

0140

6

X0140

5

-A

Vtvy/

7

X0140;

-6

l

3 X0140

-7

lliil®

«a

]

. (

IPlT

0

f

2000/C3/29

[“12:

58

3

EMERGENCY STOP

V

j-W

100%

p®

Orpm

|WA

100

• ;*

M

3*

I

.

-START

-

;

DIAGNOS

SYS

TEH

PITCH

I

PARAH

[

KEY

•

ERROR.

HISTORY

SCORE®

i

'S’

M

THIS EXAMPLE USES THE FALLING

EDGE

Memory

Scope

INSERT

TIME

(20

=

.14

SECONDS)?

[E 3

PIAGNOSIS|MAKEH2)

_

'

|KEVHIST0RV

«wn?co»]

TRIGGER Ho

.

S

DO'JW

SAMPLING

CYCLE

0

7.1ns

.........

i

IP

,7

‘

IS

§

I

‘

\

<•

;

gmxgMmmmmm

p

§i

I

M

w®

I

M

8

1

1

1111

1

File

.Window.

Help

wmmmmBi

SYSTEM

PAR

All

j

PITCH ERROR

No.

SIGNAL

1

XOl'lO

-G

.

2

XOi-4.0

3X0140

-2

Wm

gf|

4 XCI140

-3

5

X0H0

-4

B

is

as

6

X0140

-5

li

;

X014U

-6

Wi

§i®

W:

8

X0140

-.?

US

II

®

w,

M

m

jg

i

jTPS

0

[ 2000/03/29

[T2:S3

P

i

33

EHEBGEMCY

SIOT

:

I?

I

p

|

m

.

s

w

1005

gj

fW A

ioo'

rpin

LTÿÿi

START

IAGNOS

SVSTFW-

I PTTfK

MFWriRV'CFY

PRESS

START



'i

Memory

Scope

The

sampling cycle

begins after

the

desired trigger

occurs.

[$£}

g

DjABN0SIS|MAKER2|

1

y

W

V

,

wmm

File

.

Window

Help

t

]

PITCH

ERROR]

KEY

HISTORY

SCOPE

j

:

.

:v

yw.-y.;.,.

.

y

-

•

-

y

SAPLING.

CYCLE

/ ,

20

.

x

7.1m3

-

'V

j,

;'V

SYSTEM PAPAM

TRIGGER

No. 6

UP

----

----+

o;

SIGNAL

1

XG14G

-0 ;

-+

—

v“

mmmmi

U'

m

:-7:

J

2 X0140

3 X0140

-2

M

1

4

X0140 -3

___

~~

_

_

;

~

:

__

' '

-

7

S

X0140

-4

6

X0140,

5

7

X0140

-6

8

X0140

-7

j

fl

IÿPS

0

[-2000703/39

FÿTof

j33TEHERGENCY

2

,

'

1

:

'

'

-

'

O

'

-

o

•

V.w- y.

|vv'l00% prjjj

Orpin.

jy-M

10

o

••

HEHOEY

|

EH»vraa

ECPE

m

DIAGNOS

SYS

T

Ell

PA

RA H

PITCH

ERROR

KEY

HISTORY

The

result

of

signals will be displayed

after the

sampling

time cycle

expires.



184

Maintenance

Check

.

.....

vMmm®

ÿ

'

J,,

f.

t

Bflgigj[

||||j|P

aJ*

lliflf

witm

m

BE

I

il;

&raf

1

©i

IBB

-

'

.'

FT

3l“fc

mi

J

®2

• '•

'v-

• ÿ ; . *• ÿ

~

5.'.

,

SL

IS

• • ÿ ÿÿ ÿ $

VI

?*

•

*

• .

py-

•

• - . ..

'ÿÿ

%

;#§

;:'4&

itf

m

i

2

1 “65.3.

.10

-0.023

1

Vi

1

.:

(

ÿ

Z1

»

k,

il§S

oc

0.

N

mm

m

n

A

0

*r

:

4W®8#L

•:ÿ

X2

»

22

T13

.

11

-'ÿ;

I*

m

.

:.

PC

f

•

.

5....

.

Si...

1

I

aw

si

.....

:

• - • '

-

. .

.;

i*S

1

M

.

*>

.....

i

&

• »

i

in s

si

SSlSMlt

-i

I

is

»l

>ÿ

A

Uj.

n

-

i;-

xW

o

ll

•

.* •:i

S

8

I

If

0.

**/&/ÿ ’ • • ÿ ' >

u

Molin’

aa

ly'i

111

t.v

o

ilKg

r-t'i

i

1

*:»

r>\

$

vi

-Ill

m

Ai-

HWHI

;>v

•

3ÿ 1

i*V'\

:

Maintenance

r-

r

<

.'I

'

£

V

K

:9*

*%<

Check

.~

...

A?

A-

• * < '

.?

*Y-»

v.

?ÿ'

;

• C --

*

H

,r

V

'.<

mu&zBx

.

:1

12

13

i

V

t

y

'ÿÿÿ-

WfS

u

V

0

I

S

|

T

L

+

>£

•ÿ

•

A

N

If

K.

R F

T/

TV

i

B

• 3TT.

.

v;

u

t

>.o

.

1

i

ii

rXj°

t

i

• - :i

'•

m

A

1

;

*

pi

-

I

8

'• i

Vi

w

i

v

*

|

A

*

V

.«

»W I V

..'

«»

E>

8

1

1T*

t

'.

<*

1

T

1

v

v?;“

:i;;8

TTT

ia««

. 8HR

.



Maintenance

Check

Display

|/*MWNIt;HMiK?E

CHECK

Pil*.' Wrdcw

Hob

mwrnmjci

OTCK

aiti.1o.

(»l

pxmoua

ana;

trot.

lSOp-HJfS'

CHECK .1TOK

1

18

ELI

1593..

6. A

3000

H82LJ

1998.

6.

4

0C0-WS

'

CHECK

.

3TEH2

c

CHECK'GUIDE

’

BAY

tUB-ou-

1

CHICK BHMDiG

LUB-OIL

CHICK

COOldlTI

XZVEL

l

1.18

2L1

1993. C.

A

6;

I382LJ

L953. C. 4

I102L]

.

1593.

C

.

4

3-

0

Function

CHAN

cooi jj r i j i ir zK

.

f

1

1821]

.

.1993,.

C.

4

4\

_o

I192L)

.

1993.

C.

1

CHECK-

aar-

LcvEi

t;;

IH

CHIP

SUCKl’T

•

am.HicHnajioÿRU

f

0

1

18

2L]

L993. C . 4

i

• Periodic check

of

items

Last date of check

that

has

elapsed

since

the

last Check

.

'

ri/~2'±i

:

. [.m

0:i

'l999/p5>3C

.

'34147

fv.-

SOI

|

Z0

Orpa

)*V/

O.OClu/iU)

K

V.-f'-v;;

.

.

if

mOSITION DliGUOS

Lonuiewi

mu

Machine

function

continues,

even

after the

display

of

time

elapsed

exceeds the target time

2

pages,

8

lines

each,

16 items

total

187

i

i

\

t

»k

HC*

I

*•

•

PREVIOUS

CHECK

IME

<H)

JlXHTEHftJWCe

CHECK D AT Ao.

5

1500

:

2005.

10.

31101]

5

QO-fiKS

CHECK

ITEMS

I

f

l

000

V

V

*

000-fcfcS CHECK

ITEMS

2005. 10 .

31

101]

I

5

1500

l

I

1

l

101]

2005. 10 .

31

£

1500

2005. 10. 31

m

.

;*

i

io n

• 0

%

2005.

10.

31

l

101]

:=

0

v

t

1°1]

2005.10.

31

I

0

I

v.;

—

I

1013

2005.

10 .

31

CD I

1.

o

6

1

101]

2005.

10 .

31

I

\

1/

2

-iJ

-

I

j

2005/10/31

-10:23:57

l

M

0

;

Iff

7

5

Owin'1

VW'-

V\/

0’s

07*m/j»in

s

i

:

LOHGTCRW

• ' '.DATA

l’OSXTXOJI

D1A0W0S

-

1

i

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector key

DIAGNOS

—

>

MAINTEN

CHECK



188

;

W

His

File

Hr*.

ISOO-BRS

CHECK

ITEMS

HO

1

II

18

19

20

5

21

22

7

23

8

24

25

10 26

11

27

12 2B

13

29

o

?:

/ÿ

14 30

15 31

16

32

1/

2

1

irs

o'

2005/10/31

;

10:

24;

06

0>»

.

.0?

TSOBIJII 1

VAA

Owm/nin

POSIT.tOH

DtACHOS

PRTA

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

-->

DIAGNOS

-->

MEINTEN

CHECK

->

LONGTERM DATA

'itnn'TR

u

Mazatrol

Fusion

640M

MAINTENANCE

CHECK Dtspl-ay

Function:

•

Pertodls

c

fleet

Herrs. the

lasl

dale

of

sheeting. and

ti e time that

has elapsed

since ine I3&1

dsie or

cPEcv.lr-g

are

displayed.

•

Periodls elect

Items

car

ba

regls'.arec.

£8.173

rtf-S:

Tne

machine

will

net stop even

rT:ne

display

df die.

time wfclsh: has elapsed since

tne

lastdate

oT

checking exc-aecs

'fie

target

lime.

Data

display

1.

Displayed

data

m

P

WMBTCH*JKige

OUECK

FJ«

..*#W=

W

Hflp

Ho,

ILkTfTtllTAJfC CB1CK

UAtA.

.

TOT&lHJj PJvI

71

D

VS

5

HIC

K

WEB

i

i

r

I

;t4i

:

I

%

1 Pd

:

1

it;

I

m

m

a

Si;

1

m

s

ili

%

iÿmm

i

I:

f)

mmm

;

»«»W4V«V>iV4MMm

».

.

Hi

j~

i

jggvff/

jiggfe

L.

EUSHH ESZEEBHH

w

i&et

1

A-,

D725S1CB3S

2.

Display data description

Me.

tem

Ur

It

Data

desedpflon

n

CAficK

number

c-.

HA-IMTUCrvHCE.

3

Hvr#

or

a

e«rti>:l-

cr«3 Rem

CM

to: HAT*

3

Graph

k:a;

repreggnlaton

cf

ire rate

et 1h»

currer,

Brr-e

la

Bre

targe

l.rm e

iM t

• il Targcl

irne

Target

fmt for the

rxf.DO'c chxK

HOT

aur

53

CuTcnUme Hru’ CuTcrTt

BmsfcfUiepenca'c

chscK

Itesa

S3

'V

M.

0

The

art

da%

cf

periodic

cire-rt

Hem

REV30US

OJZCK

PJ<;C

Page

number

3.

Registering

the

data for

regular

check itei

A. Presetting,

the target

time

or the

current

time

f

1

)

Moÿ/e

the

cursor to r.he

data

item

sstiere data

is

to c<=

preset.

(2‘f

Enter

‘me.

Example:

Specify

fc90

and press

ihe

INPUT

icey to

input

90 .

Note:

Entry cf

toe

current

time

updates

the

date of

date item

[5]

(PREVIOUS

CHECKS

Data

display

for Cong-term

check

items (1500

and 3000

hours

check

items)

1. Displayed

data

CHECK

Pi

Fib

H«]p

• ;

1SD0-HJS

CHECK

IJLHS

Kto-

/'ÿ

1

IT.

2

ii'

3

>•

i

CD

S

*5

ti'

VI

S2J

Ilf

123

LO

u

It

ZT

IS

2D

L3

m

U.

$0

£'*31

-

DE¬

LS

V

LG

r;a~d

ftJsTfl f

is3®?B5?as

;

neiia'

i

m

w

lfitil

luu*

|W

07355-1:0692.

2.

Display

data

description

MfifBa.

U.Tit. Data

descrpUon.

£i;

Cfteclc

numa-r

e

.

K

Check terns

-oca

terra ensefc Hsre.-

a;

Fat*

Fags

minber



Maintenance

Check

Display

Display

operations

The display

status

of

cata

item

will

reverse

when- the

oirrent

time reaches

the

target,

time.

After

a:m

per.cn

of checking.

rrÿ

the cursor

to

No.”

using

the cursor key

and

then

press

the INPUT

key. The

display

cf

data item will then return

from the

.reverse status

to Che

rarmac

status.

Entry

of the

check

items to be displayed

The

check items

to

fee

displayed

cannot be entered

directly

on

the MAINTENANCE CHECK

display.

This subsea

cn

cescrbes

the

procedure

for

adding cr deleting

the

check

items

to be

displayed.

1

) Save

the

factory-set data

cf display items

beforehand into

the

file.

21

Execute the

File

Write

function

to

create a file

under

the

specified directory (see Item 2

below).

3) Edit the text

file as

required

l

see

hen

1

betcw).

*5) Execute

the File

Read

function

tc

fetch

the data onto

the

display

(see

Item 2

below).

1

.

Registering

the data of the

check

itemrs

Using a

comnerciavy

aval

able

edrtcr.

open the

text fi©

of

the folcwng

format under the

spec

flee

directory tom 64mdstai

engVnai

rnenan

ce.txt

).

(urcon]

; .n*stf*rof c-en'cai-c

cr,czv.

terns'

.Cc'ur-enr Vn»

i, CHECK

-JUICE V&Y

LUB-OIL

2-4,

n'es*ar

Zff ate

c£

,Tdm

z

rail

IS ]

;

I.CKAHJE

HVDFJtULIC

UNIT

OIL

32.

[TW13-0];

1,

CHECK

HACHItfE

LEVEL

Weakerof

KtC-nrs cnec*.

terns

32 ,

Note: “eng'

in

the directory name

cone

spends

with

the language currently

selected

for

the

display

mate.



Maintenance Check

Display

Entry

of the check

items to be

displayed

A. Dataformat of the

periodic check

items

-

lJp

to

24

items

can

be

registered.

-

Se t

the

description after the serial

number

and

comma.

[urconj

P-ixic-ali-s

ebacÿb

icinto

1,

-TÿE-TT:

ma

WAY

LUP-OTL

24

The

description

can

oonsst of

up

to 4D characters

(a

two-byte

code i s

counted

as

two

characters).

Excess

items

or

characters

will

be

ignored.

Note:

B.

Data

form

at

of

the lo ng-term

ched items

-

Up

to 32

items

cam: be

registered.

-

Set

the

description alter

the serial number

and

comma.

[insllS]

r h*c c

it.ana

l,

• :m> ?

eg

HSHE53JLI£

SSSU.

OIL

22

[BSil-Q]

2,.

CHECK

WACKIKE

LEVEL

SCOO-hr*

c

Ic

22,

Note:

The description can consist

of up to

40

characters

{a two-byte code is

counted

as

two

characters).

Excess

items

or

characters

will

be

ignored.

2*

Read and

Write

of

check items’

text file

A> the

check

items

presented

cn

the

MAINTENANCE

CHECK display

can

be

read

in

from,

and'

written

into,

the

specified

text

file. Use

a commercially

avaBable ed&ar

to

prepare

a

text

file

ccnlainirÿi

the

desired

check

items

to be read

m

and

presented

cn the

display.

A.

File Read

Using

a

commercially

available

edftar<

prepays

a

text file (containing

the

desired

check

items}

and

copy

it

into the

specified

cirecsory.

j&>MAIMTEHAN6E

CHECK

iu7

My,

Film

File ftead

zazcic.z

Filÿhoi

Select

the

option

'File Reac

through

the

item

Tile

cn Ihe

menu

bar to

start

data

loading. The

contents

thus reaa

In

vrill

be

displayed

as

shown betow

upon

completion of loading.

:/«iMiinewawe

cure*

Fib- Vrxlcw

h.fc ssmÿ

'•

-

-

'

smm

_

i

,

'

wamnifle*

DtECj-riiti.

.TIJIl

S2s;’*;-v

].POD.-}i0aÿHi.(;>tv;iTia5;

m

VN*.

rHECXCUIOl-.WTf

UE'rQIL'.

‘

,

CB20t.SPI«l,n

-v-

:

;f

•

S

LOT.-OItÿ::

:

;

•

.

0

:

____

-31’-”

‘ ”7

mmm

,

'

:

;

m

lit

..

..

..----3:

m

Syy.-:

$£Sx).

>&y:

2-

' -t:

;E

-;:b

Vst

B.

Rle Write

Select the

option

Tile

Write

through

the

item

Tile'

on

the

nvsnu

bar

to save

the display

data.

A

text file

containing the

current

display

data

will

be

created

under

the

specified directory.

yfeMAIttfrewroE

CHECK

WrÿsTl-ksIp

• . ÿ •? ÿ

H~d-”v

fisrirar

r

filu,



194

195

AVA\\VA\WAÿYÿWÿÿSWjNSÿÿV

'IY,'-'.

V.'I'I

VI'. Vi‘:V.'\

AMAMM

.NA'.'IW

mMm

SMU£322S.*-..ÿY__

r

y

'

..

_/.....,-

*

||

„ .

F

I

Gs&gggi

L;

-

-

OY

«

Y v

r

» .

•

,j

t

.'

J

:h

Vfafort

IV&

r

i

UtHE/riCE/3D

|

CO

/ISO

ronfT

sen

LIWT

|

S XS TC K< 1I 5U I) T UR KISC

HKMTHE TU S

SCLJD

\

;

I

>

I

D73

D7 4 }

D7 5

I

D25

f

0121

j

D122

I

D123

j

01241

0125

j

0126

D127

D128

0129

0130}

D131J

0132

1

0133

|

0134

|

0135

|

D136

|

D137

j

D13B

0139

D140

j

0X41

D142

j

0143

0144]

5

04 9

D97

00000000

00000000

00000000

OOOOOOOQ

00000000

00000000

00000000

oooooooo

oooooooo

oooooooo

oooooooo

OOOOOOOO

30 0 300

0

1

i

D26 D50

0

2

500

D98 0

:

0

2

>

i

$

D27

D51

0

1000

D99

0

s

3

1

D20

029]

030

052

976

10 0

0

O

DlCO

0101

D102

D103

D104

D105

D106

D107

D108

0109

0110

Dill

D112

D113

D114

Dll

5

0116

0117

DUB

D119

D120

04

j

i

053

50 0

5

0

0

077

i

054

D7B

D7

9

1

3 0

6

0

I

031

055

?

0

20

0

:

::

32

D32

4

5

D33

3 056

0 DBO

200

0

8

5

I

DB1]

DQ2

j

DB3]

5

057

500

0

f)

0

\

I

5

34

0

058

3 0 700

0

IO

t

D35

036

20 059

0 0

0

0

ll

I

-

:

5

100

060

0 0

12

0

984

[

I

OB 5

1

37

100

10

D6113

0

o

0

l

\

062

3B

14

3 2

DBO

1

DB7

DB8

j

D89

j

D90

j

09 1

|

11110001

D92

j

00001111

D93 j

OOOOOOOO

D94

|

OOOOOOOO

D95

j

OOOOOOOO

D96

OOOOOOOO

0

0

0

D3$

D40

5

D63

15

20 0 0

0

0

:

I

I

I

2

D64

16

0

0

0

i

D4110

0

065

0

0

0

17

0

5

066

42

0 0

10

9 0 0

0

::

943

3

944

94 5

I

94

6

|

D47

1

2

19

2

D67

0 0

t

60

0

0

20

960

0

0

1

:

6 10 0

069

21

o

0

:

I I

07 0

22

10 0

O

.

0 0

0

1

:

100

Z3 D7l

0

o

i

i

048

|

24

0

D72 0

o

-

:

I

1

M ,

;i»;

i3:53

]

1

i

sinr

\

Omin WA

\j\j

5Q%

0*u*i/nin

:ÿ

i

EIA/X30

OlH'7

LXH

,

FACE

30

[£

J

son

Z.3MXtriX]

SYSTEM

V

[SU]

TV AM

.me

ITC]

MACH

me

TXM£

SOLID

ISO]

MACH

1

HE

PAFAM.

P tc

PARIIM-

3

<

ID)

m

:

:

>

t

w* m f

mmmemmm JMU.WJ

ÿ.

A'.'.'

;.VW/WWWWW

Operation

Procedure :

Display

selector

key

-->

PAPJy>vl

POINT

196

iVi*yYAV»‘»‘>v‘.y»yr*

®s»

fm .

Vfafcri

.C--:->V.-r

•

:-.

.

SMOTHER

|

SrjHOLE

I

B2KWEREA'asa:

l

CSH.

WKRP

iXH>

VEL.

TDC cmcr-

J3ILE

f.

i

0

yX49

0

#:

K50

o

f;

x5i

0

KS2

00000111

y:)'.KSlÿ]

0

K9B

0 K99

O

A

K100

0

K101

0

#

IC102

o

icio3

0

K104

0

KlOS

£00

< >

K121

*00<

>

K122

0 K25

0

K73

0

I;

K7 4

0 ::

K75

0

K76

O

K77

O

K7$

O

K79

£4l<A>

7;:.

K80

o

l-

Kdi

0 K82

K1

:

I

i

K2

500 K26

0 K27

0

•-

:V

£4

2

K123

£5A<Z>

K124

*5B<X:>

'><125

0

3

:

;

• '\K4

;

9

K20

4 K29

80

K30

0

f

i

:•

A

K53

o

':y-k$4

0

XS5

0

X56

0

X57

0

$:;X58

0

X59

0

X60

K5

0

i

<

K6

Q

0

10

0000

ooooiooo

;KI27

0

i

K7

0

0

K32

0

-:K33.:

0 ;'J :K34

j

0

j;.

¥35

|

0

,

K36

|

30

K37

|

2000

K33

30

K39

2000 K40

25

K4X

50 K42

1000

K43

1000

X44

100 X45

1

...;V-V46

1

K47

0

K48

*8

K9

00

000

000

K128

00000010

XI29

10001000

K130

o

i

0

::

I

K10

K106

0

•:

0

K107 10100000 K131

0

§• :

K132

0

X133

0

K134

0

y

X135

0

K136

0

K138

0

K139

0

*140

0

XI41

0

K142

0

Cviu.43

0

XI

4

4

0

83

ll

0

4

K84

1

KB5

1

Kfi$

0 K108

0

K1Q9

KUO

Kill

kii 2

8ft

K12

0

0

>

;

K13

2000

K61

O

K62

S

14

K15

K1V

K18

0

O

K63

0

K64

120 K65

j

120

-:ÿk66

120

K67

j

120

X6B

12 0

K69

K7

0

0

Kll

0

K72

K87

0

0

;

s

K08

0

:

0

i

i

1

K89

i

:--m&

1

K91

00000000

K92

00000001

K93

00000011 4*94

00000111

K95

00000111

IC96

0

£

10 0

5

K115

0

KllS

2

V/

K1.17

IOO<

>

V;

K118

10001000

K119

10000000

0

19

0

;

0

20

:

0

21

-

;

0

'

v.y.

V;

22

K23

.

.

.

K24

0

0

:

\

0

120

i

HVS

0

2005/11/01

13;

24 :

57

1'.

|/W

100%

i-

ifr

7

SOinin’1

%s.3

Qxn/min

.

* • • * * >

»

.VA

-

If

k*-.'

-

i

l

PAKAM.

SÿXWOXE

|BA]

WACKO USER

2AKAI1-

TABtE

[1ÿ1

PECO

V£L.

JH)

MKA50RC

[KJ

ANOTHER

S

\

m

xi

WBV,-:.

COHSXIMJ

{SA1

i:

.

m

I

;;'iV;V

mm

miiujjxiw

V.VMV.VM’-'-VXV.WAV/.V.W//. ',”

Operation

Procedure

: Display selector

key

-->

PARAM

-->

DLA.

CHINE

PARAM.

IvIEASURE

197

:

I

n?

V

:

\

J

F.S

|

TXH

KB

s

j

KL

{

$

J

0

TXM145

j

0

TXM146

J

0

TIM147

j

0

TIMldd

0

TIM149

0

TH4150

0

TIMlSlj

0

TJM152

o

rmx

53

0

TIM154

0

TTM155

0

T1M156

o

tmisi

P

TIM150

0

TIM1S9

O

TIM160

0

TXM161

0

TJM162

0

TIM163

0 TIH164

O

T1X165

0

T1M166

0 T

1X167

O

TIM168

urn

j

TIM?

TIM3

I

TXH4

j

TIMS

|

TIM6

i

TIM

7

TIM8

TIW9

|

TJMlO

j

TIMll

j

TXMl? }

TXMI3

TIM14

|

TIMlS

TIMI6

nmxi

Tima i

TIM19 j

TIM20

TIM21

TXM22

TIM23

TIM24

30

TXM25

30

TIM26

50

TIM27

2

0

TIM2B

20 TIM2J>

200

TDflO

20 TIM31

100

TIM32

20

TIM33

300 TIM34

150

TH<£35

30

0

T3M36

1.50

XIH37

50 TIH30

1000

T3M39

0

TIM40

0

TXM41

1 TIM42

70 TIM43

100

TIM44

4

TXH45

0

TIM46

0

TIM47

3 T3M4B

0

TIM49

0

TIM50

0

TIM51

0

TXX52

0

TIW53

30

TIM54

30

TIMS

5

30

TIM56

1

30

TXH57

300

TIM50

3600

TTM59j

20 T3M60

1

600

TXM61

10000

TIM62

10

T3M63

1

15 T3M64

10 TXM65

15 TIM66

600

TIM67

1800 T3M68

5

60 0

TXM69

3000

TIM70;

100 TIM71

50

TIM /

2

50

TXM97

0

TIM98

SO

TIM99

50

TIM100

600

T1M10X

30

TIM102

60 TXM103

0

TIM104

P

T1M105

0

TIM106

0

TXM107

0

TXMlOB

0

TXM109

0 TIM110

0

TIM111

0

TIM112

0

TXM113

j

0 TIM114

0

TXM115 j

0

TXMH6

j

0

TTMIX7

|

0

TXM110

0

TIMl l )

0

TIM120

0

0

0

T1M73

0

TIM74

0 TIM75

0

TIM76

0

TIM77

0

TIM78

0

TIM79

0

T2M80

0

T3M81

10

TIM82

10

TIM83

10

T3M84

10

TDW05

70 TIM06

1 0

THI87

0

TXW88

0

TIM89

0

TIM90

0

TIM91

10

T3M92

10

TTM93

0

TXM94

0

TIM95

50

TIM96

0

TXM121

0

TIM122

0

TIK123

0

THH24

0

TIKI

2

5

0

TIM126

0

TIM127

0

TXM12B

0

TIM129

0

TIM130

0

TIM131

0

TIH132

0

T3DMI33

0 TIM134

0

TIM135

0

TIM136

0

TXM137

0

TIM138

0

TIM139

0

TIM140

O

TTK141I

0

TIMll

2

j

0

TIMl43i

0 TIM144

j

:

i

0

i

o

o

;

0

0

:

o

:

i

o

0

0

::

0

J

0

f

:

o

c

0

I

i

j

o

:

0

0

i

0

I

I

;

;

0

:

0

•:

I

0

<

0

t

i

i

:

gmspr

10

;15;

50

i

•:

1

50%

ljS3)

drain*

vwr~

:

Omro/saiit

:

MftCttlitE

SER

[RX.J

TIM]

IRS]

[«»]

:

I

Operation

Procedure

:

Display

selector

key

-->

PARAM

PLC

PARAMETER

->

TIM

198

5

5

T

7.

MS

fi*

\f**

VftVKkr,

H*ÿ>

?

$

HC

«

DIRECTORY:

»

l

r

PROGRAM

—

ROGRAM

I

:

m\

? i

i

f

# |

Ji

*

|

1

i

i

'

:

I

i

:

;

i

I

;

1

AVE

\

l

\

1

:

\

i

i

I

V

\

i

I

I

I

:

I

9

1

Jfi

l

§

T

OTHER DATA

-

OTHER

DATA

>

?

]

I

l

\

T

i

:<

I

\

i

i

I

-T-J.

i

*.-ÿ•.*:•

•

\-L~

Jr-sr.ÿr*

*

IfPS-O

;200S/ja/15

jwYss

I

35

I

1

*

BB3SMB—

/<M

ioo%

i

I

s

ARD

ii$fi

WM)

MSK

FLOPPY

TAPE

CAH DATA

swe

CMT

i

5

5

dJ

5

.«•

-»• ÿ-—

----------

-

»«

------

----

•

—

’-»-—•

--

---

-ÿ

-«»

• -



199



200

y.y;.\-.-.\

...

.vN>.; •ÿW

S>>KSS>

POSITION

PR2J

H*

rite Ym* Settp

Window

Hefc

POSITION

BUFFER

NEXT

COMMAND

WHO

,

US

\

xi

0

.

XI

0

. G ( )

<

)

0. 0.

UNO,

Qj

*,

0

~

0

Y M

21 w4

. 5

21

0. T

0.

ot

0)

.

B

COUNTER

<MODAL

IOW

>

. 0

.

ll NEXT COMMAND

LOW

X2 13.30

15.14567 Z2

6.

0

F 0*

M

0

2

G

S

Z2

0. G

0

G

18 G

G

80

G

G

68

G 67 G

€9.56

97

6123.16111

&5Q

,

2 €1.13

G 23 G 98

65 3

.

5

6123

G

613.

1

G

20

G

40

G 64

M

C2

0.

C’2 0

,

T

G G

0.

0.

w

MACHINE

REMAIN

OFFSET

LOW i

.

i

Q

xx

4

,

S

.

0,

I z

Q

o. 0.

0.

C

;

Q

zi

9

B

0

cl

Q

X2

9

22

0

C2

Q

w

0 .

Zl

0.

0

MXN’1

0

FT

/MIN

M,

iPDIi

o Mor1

0

FT

/MIN

o

Miir1

0

FT

/MIN

100

200

t*. SPDL

0.

0.



0

0.

0.

l

T

.

SPBLl

T.r

SPDL Ij

T

*•

BWBL

2\

Xl-lixj

YrUX |

8

-AX

Cl-ftxj

X2-AX

Z2-AX

C2-AX|

W-AX

|

0

0

.

X2

0.

<1>

0

0

.

22 0.

T

,

SPDL2

0

,

C2

0.

<15

0 . 0.

0

IN

/MIN

Xftf/REY

*

/min

*

/min

*

/min

IN

/MIN

IM/REV

0

*

EED

0

0.

No

,

1B -

(

GENERAL OUT

)

0

MRGAZNPKHo.

12

) (

->->

TNo

.

<

0

*

0

LOW

108

Cl

0 ,

0

<

C2

NIT

:

LOW 0.

0

»

0

w'tr

8

\

«El:Z006/12/13

m

E1

69:44:27

::

o%

m

iVWo.Ot

\J

O.

in

/min

prn

•

tvw W/A'

y-yff

*

• / ? ,

s

POSITION

SET

UP PROGRAM

TOOL

C-COHD. PARAM DIAGNOS DATA

I/O

TOOL

DISPLAY

INFO,

LAYOUT

MAP

ATA

Select

DIAGNOS



/•

DIAGNOSiSjUSW)

''

M

Wm.

FV

pile

View

Setup

WirxizM

Help

.

;aLWi

W*iRM KISTOEOT

i

PLC SIGNAL

HEAD

DATE TIME

TYPE

LARM MESSAGE

o,

:

• V?

,

I

VV\A

0

,

00

in

/min

/Yr

0% 0

rpm

DATA

ERASE

ACCCTMU

,

XIHHIHG GRAPHIC.LC MAINTEN

LARM

ALARMERSION

TIME

ONTROL

MAINTE

.

IGNAL

CHECK

ISTORY

Select VERSION

Jlmmmmm

Wmlm

m

P§||

• <&£l§

Fie

Winejgwi Help

VERSION

;

DIAGNOSIS

iJONITOR

j

OPTION

j

SERVO

MONITOR

|

SPIKDLE MONITOR

j

KiRD-VOlKE

WDHITGR

UNIT FCU7-MA513-22

SERIAL

M7368210761

MODEL

FC&750RY-NQ3

j

ITEM

MAIM -A

MAIN-B

LG

-ENG

LADDER-F 1001W37 4

-

A1310

LADD£R

—

S

LGPENG

VERS

ION

10O1WOO0-B4A

1001W001-BO

1001W011-BO

ITEM

SRV-Xl

SRV-Y

SRV-Zl

SRV-B

SRV-C1

BRV-X2

8RV-Z2

SRV-C2

SRV-W

SRV-10

SRV-11

SRV-12

SRV-13

SRV-14

SUV IS

SRV-16

SPN-1

SPN-2

SPM-3

SPN-4

SFN-5

SPN-6

SPM-7

SPH-B

VERSION

MOTOR

MACHINE

ITEM

J2CT-1

J2CT-2

J2CT-3

J2CT-4

J2CT-5

J2CT-6

J2CT-7

J2CT-8

J2CT-9

J2CT-10

J2CT-11

J2CT-12

J2CT-13

J2CT-14

VERSION

( )

)

<

( )

{

>

)

(

<

)

>

(

<

>

1001W37

4

-

A1310

I001W011-

37

4A1300 2

)

<

>

)

<

( (

)

( )

{

>

(

) (

>

) )

(

(

)

(

)

(

>

(

}

<

) (

>

)

)

(

)

>

(

)

<

>

<

>

{

>

) (

i

}

)

(

)

(

)

<

y

)

<

)

( )

>

)

<

)

<

>

:

TPS

0

2006/12/13

09:44:55

m

ll

s

•»

i ID

:\AM

o . 00

in

/min

-

i

IIh

Or

pm

DIAGHOS VERSION DIAGNOS SERVO

SPINDLE

HARDWARE

LADDER

PTION

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

Select

DIAGNOS MONITOR

gggaa;

File

Window

Help

i

VERSIQH MACHOSIS MBflTOft

j

OPTION SERVO MONITOR

|

SPTtffiLE

MONITOR

j

HARDWARE ICOIIITGE.

t/o

nmttm

ntsp

xm%% wx

SHORT

TOO110

aaloooolaloooaal

2

111

8513

TOO

120

OQDDOOOOODOOOQOD

0000

TOO 130

eoÿOOOO<MWob'OQ l»&

0000

TQ0140 t l rnnt l&QaoomQ

CF00

~t2W

MEMORY

MONITOR

0ISP

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

1

KKOOOOOOOO

oaoooooo 00

KKOOOGODD1 oooooooo 00

KHOOOOO0O2

csaoooooo

DO

I

KK00000003 00000000 00

I/O

MONITOR

I)

ISP

ADR35 FEDCEA98765432I0

HEX

XGQ510

OOOOODOOOOODOOOO

0000

X00520 oooooooooooooooo

0000

X005

3O

ocscicic>e‘DOOQec?CidJCj<3

BOQG

XQ054Q

0000

ODDOOO

DDQOQO

0000

SHORT

LONG

WWG

o

8513

G

-mzomsm

Q

0

XWm

T&VG$MSW?G5*$ZIQ

MX

TOO

3

40

oootsoo0OODOOoid<fO

0000

T003SD OOOOOOOOOGOOCIOOO

0000

TOO

3

60

O«moOOOOMdO i»N»0

oooo

TO O370

OOOOOOCIOÿOOOOOOD

0005

SHORT

tom

DDRESS

76543210 HEX

j

KKOOOOOOOO

OOODOOOO 00

j

KHOOOOODOl

OO&OOOOO

00

KKOOOQ00O2

gooDDCioo

00

KKOOOO0GO3 00000000

00

ARR33

FEDCBA96‘765432

10

HEX

XOOIQO

ooooDO

lo

IO-OOOD1

1

0283

X00110

0000000000000000 D000

X003.2Q

ooooooooooftooood

0000

XOO130

oooooooooooooooo

0000

SHORT

MJWG

Q

43

0

43

0

Q

Q

0

0

IB RSS F

EDGE

A98?

6543310 HEX

TOO0OO

ocNÿooooooloool

11

0047

T0001D

OO*DOOOOOODOOQC)00

0000

wmZQ

OOOO

TOO03

0

aoooooooo-oooocioo 0000

L<MQ

0 -2147463648

SHORT

71

LONG

DDRESS 76543210 HEX

KKOOOOOOOO

OQOOOOOQ

00

j

KHOOOOODOl oaoooooo DO

I

KKOOOOOGD2

00000000

oo

KK00009003

oaoooooo

00

ADR55 FEDCSA98765432I0 HEX

X00140 oooooooooo-oooooo

0000

XD0150

looooooooo

oooooo

6000 -32768

XOO

1

6

D 0000000000000000

DODO

X00170

oooo

C'Oooooo:D

oooo

0000

SHORT

i

71

0

a

o

u

Q

0

0

SHORT

LW3

DDRESS 76543210

HEX

|

KKOOOOOOOO

oaoooooo

GO

KHOOOaOOOl

oaoooooo

00

KH0QQ00D02

00000000

00

HHOOOO00O3 oaoooooo 00

ADRSS

FEDCEA987654321D

HEX

3301040 0000000000000000 DOOO

HO10 56

oooaaoooooaooooQ

DODO

H01072

aoooaaooooaoooaa

oooo

330108©

ooooaoooooaooooo OOOO

SHORT

L-mo

kms%

FEDCHA987654S21P HEX

¥00530

aoooooooDoooQoao

0000

TOOB40

oaaoooooooooooao OOOO

¥00650

0000000000000000 OOOO

¥00860 0000000000000000

GOOD

0

0 M

a o

o a

O

0

0

9

f

I/O

MONITOR

WRITE

ADR38 FEDC

BA987

65432

id HEX SHORT

R02

100 oooaoooooaaooooo

DOOO

P02101 0000000000000000

OOOO

;

MEMORY

MONITOR

If

RITE

AD DRESS

7

6

$4.3

2

10

HEX

KHOOOQOOOO

oooooooo DO

LONG

0

I

Q

:

f

W

0

2006/12/13

09:45:13

DB 1

I

~sTT[o

VV\A

0

.

00 lw

/min

\f \

0%

Or

pm

I

OPT io n SPXHDLE HARDWARE LADDERIAGNG5 VERSION

DIAGNOS

SERVO

HO

HITOR MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

MONITOR

RWMMj

WM

POSITION

[TR2]

wswmttm vmm

fife

Vew

Setup

Window

Hep

WMÿTM

mro,

i

OSITION

BUFFER

NEXT COMMAND

xl

0

.

XI

0 .

<

)

<

)

0.

0.

0

0

“

0

Y

M

21

-

4

.

5 21

0 ,

T

0,

0,

0(

05

8

COUNTER

<MOOflX

LOW

>

.

0

.

l

l

NEXT

COMMAND

LOW

X2 13. 38

15.14567

X2 0.

0 F

0 .

0

S

H

22

22

0.

G

0

G

18

G

G

80

G

G

68 G 67

G123

.

XG1X1

G

23

G 98

G

20

G53.5

G

69.5G 97

G123

G

<350

.«

2

G113 G13.1

G 40

G 64

M

:

:

C2 0.

C2

0.

T

G

0. 0.w

MACHINE REMAIN

OFFSET

LOW

0

xi

4,5

.

XI

0.

z

®

1

Q

Zl

?

B

0

cl

0

X2

0

Z2

0

C2

0

.

0 ,

0,

C

0 .

Zl

0.

0

MXN'1

0

FT/M

IN

Mt RPDL

0 MXJT1

0

FT/MXH

0

MIN

”1

0

FT

/MIN

0

100 200

,

SPDL

0.

0.

<15

0

0.

Cl o.

T

,

SPDLl

Tv

SPDL

Xi

T

*

SJPDL

2]

Y~*«

0

0.

X2

0.

<15

0

0 ,

Z2

O

r

T

.

8PDL2

0

2

,

0

V

<15

0

W

O.

0,

0

IM/MIN

IH/REY

/min

*

/min

*

/min

IN

/MIN

Z2-AX]

IN/REV

0 ,

EED

0

l-

TNo. IB - 0

(GENERAL

OUT

)

0

MAGAZHPKHo*

12

)

<

O.

>->

TNo,

0

~AX

Cl-AX

(

)

*

*

0

LOT

108

o

i

ci

)

C2

0*

T

0

0.

NIT

LOW

O.

0

0 »

C2- 0

0

-AX

r

*BS

0

2006/12/13

09;

44 : 27

nil P

vWo.oo

D

-

in

/min

rpm

POSITION

SET

UP PROGRAM TOOL

C-COKD

,

PARAM

DIAG

NOS

DATA

I/O

TOOL DISPLAY

INFO.

DATA LAYOUT

MAP

In

the

1131

Mode

Select

DIAGNOS



/'

DIAGNQSISflJSER)

Bte

View

Setup

Window

Help

j

iLfcUM

:j

ftLftRM

KISIGHY j

FLC

SIGTOL

j

NO.

ALARM MESSAGE

HEAD

DATE TIME

TYPE

&

’

;

:

:

TPS

0

2006/12/13

09:44:40

m

i

%

MB

VV\A

o . 00

in

/min

rpm

ALARM

RUNNING

ERSION

ALARM PLC MAINTEN GRAPHIC DATA

ACCOMU

*

HISTORY

SIGNAL CONTROL

MAINTE

.

ERASE

TIME

HECK

Select

VERSION

mm

fi

:fl<y

Rl?

Window

Hgfe?

I

VERSION

i

DIAGNOSIS

KOHITQP.

OPTION

i

SERVO MONITOR

f

Syr

WLE

MONITOR I K&HDVaRE

KQHITOR

:

‘

MODEL

FC&7509Y~lf03

ERIAL

M73682I07

61H

IT

fan

-ms

13-22

\

MOTOR MACHINE ITEM

J2CT-1

J2CT-2

J2CT-3

J2CT-4

J2CT-5

J2CT-6

J2CT-7

J2CT-8

J2CT-9

J2CT-10

J2CTr-.ll

J2CT-12

4J2CT-13

J2CT-14

VERSION

TEM

MAIN- A

MAIN-B

LG

-ENG

LABDER-F

10G1W37

4

-

A131Q

LADDER-

B 10011937 4

-

A1310

LORE

NO

VERS

ION

1OO1WOO0-B4A

1001W001-B0

1Q01W0

11-BO

ITEM

SRV-X1

SRV-Y

SRV-Zl

SRV-B

SRV-C1

SEV-X2

8RV-ZZ

SRV-C2

SRV-W

SRV-10

SRV-11

SRV-12

SRV—

13

8RV-14

SRV’-'IS

SRV-16

SPN-1

SPN-2

SPN-3

SFtf-4

SEN-

5

SRN~6

SPN-7

SPN-B

VERSION

<

)

)

)

<

>

( )

c

j

>

(

>

{

>

i

> >

001W011-

374A23QQ

2

0373GM03300

C

)

£

)

( )

£

)

Model

S

)

£

>

£

>

)

;

( )

<

)

£

)

;

)

)

£

£

>

)

)

£

)

)

£

)

)

(

)

>

£

)

>

)

£

)

£

)

<

)

£

)

£

)

£

>

)

£ J

)

£

)

TPS

0

2006/12/13

09:45: 55

m

V#

0.00 ill

/min

Tf(a

\

t

KJ

0% Orpm

v

:-S

J*

LADDER

VERSION

PINDLE

HARDWARE

IAGN0S OPTION

SERVO

IAGNGS

VERSION

MONITOR

MONITOR

MONITOR

ONITOR

ONITOR

(

one

way

you know

you

are IN the 1131 mode)

he other VERSION

will

now appear

Select DIAGNOS MONITOR

-m*

/'DUMTO'UKff''

m

....

Fil-

Window

He|p

I

VERSION

M&SH0SIS MONITOR j

OPTION

I

SERVO

MHJITOR SPINDLE

MHUTOR

1 KSRtrtraRE KOHITOR

’

I/O

KCNITOR DISF

ADR3S

FED€§A9876S4321C

HEX'

XOO-SIO ooaooooooooooooo 0000

X0Q520

0000000000000000

0000

XOQ530 oooaÿDpdOdOooao

0000

HOO540

oa

a

a©

00000000000

0000

I/O

HOWltOR PISF

APRS?

FEW: W£*7$543210

HEX

TOO

10

ooloooololoooool

2111

TOO120 0*0000000000000 OD 0000

TOO

130

3CKrooO$0$toQOOCM»i&

000P

100140

lloolUlaooooQÿD

CFO0.

?

12544

HE

KORY

HON

I

TOR D1SP

ADDRESS

765432

10

HEX

KHOOOOOOOO

oacoQOQQ

00

j

HHD0000B01

O

€5-000000

00

|

KHOOOQODP2

aooooooo

00

I

HHQOO00OO3

oooooooo

00

SHORT

L

arc SHORT

8513

LCW

0

0

8513

:

a

D

0

a

0 -8220835i4

0

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

|

KHOOOOOOOO o3oooooo

00

j

KHOOOOOQOl

OOQOOOOO

00

j

KKOOGGQOG2

00000000 00

}

KHOQOO0QO3

00000000 00

ADR3S EEX'CE

A98765432 10

HEX

XOOlQO

oooooo lo

lo o

ODD11

0283

X00110

oooooooooooooooo

oooa

3CQOUO

ooQQ0>OQ0Od$$QO09

0000

XOO 130 oooooooooooooooo 0000

SHORT

mam

TWQBt smmwzm

HEX SHORT

YQ034Q

OQ

oooooQOooooGioo

OOOO

TOO

3

50

OODOOOOQOOOOOOOO

0000

TQ03

§0

mmmamwomw

QQQQ

TOO370

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD

0000

mm

C

WQ

643 643

0 0

0

0

Q

a

0

0

0

ADDRESS 76543210 HEX

j

KHOOOOOOOO

QOOO00OO

00

|

KHOOOOOQOL

oaoooooo

00

|

KHQOOQQQ02

oa&Poodd

00

I

KHOOOOOOOO

00000000 00

AD

PS

5

EEDCBA987

65432

10

HEX

HO G140

oooooooooooooooo 0000

1500150-

lo oo 0-00000

a

00000 8000 -32768

XD016O

000000000000000a 0000

XOG170


SHORT

w

m

0 -2147483648

ADRSS

F:EPCB&987&54'32 IP HEX

TOODOO

000000000 00 01

1:1

0047

TO0D.1O

0000000000000000 0000

Y00Q20

0000000000000000

GOOD

TO0O9O 00 0

00000a

00000

oo

0000

SHORT

mm

71

71

0

0 0

0

0

0

AD ESS

FEDCBASP76543210

HEX

SHORT

hOm

700830

0000000

000000000

0000

Y00840

00000000*00000000 Oado

T0O850

OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO

OQQO

TQ086O

oooooooooooooooo

0000

ADDRESS

765432

10

HEX

j

KHOOOOOGQO

00000000 00

|

KHOOOOOQOl

OOOOOOOO 00

|

KH000000D2

daooOoOO

00

I

KH00QD00G3

00000000

00

APR3S

FEPC8A9876543210

HEX

HO

10

40 oooooooooooooooo

0000

HO

10

56


HO

IQ

7 2

0000

OPOPOOO00000

0000

HO

108

8

oooooooooooooooo

0000

SHORT

mm

0

0

0

0

a

0

a

0 0

0

:

I/O

KONTTOR

WRITE

ADRSS

r£DCBA9876S43210 HEX SHORT

£02100 oooooooooooooooo 0000

R02

2Q1

OOOOÿOOOOOO-OOOOd

0000

HE

KORY KON

I TOR

WRITE

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

KHOOOOOOOO

00000000

00

LCN&

I

0

Q

I

..

i'>/>W

<»ÿ

rf

v

1

•

v>

•

»

vW'

*

V

flHk

US

2006/12/13

109:46:52

i

I

r

1

i]D

:VW

0

,

0Gin

/min

H

•

Or

pm

:

•

I

I/O

WRITE

DIAGHOS VERSION

BIAGNQS

OPTION SERVO SPINDLE HARDWARE LADDER

WHITE:

MONITOR

MONITOR MONITOR MONITOR CANCELONITOR

Now

the

I/O WRITE

& W RITE

CANCEL

appears

.

9

POSITION

(TR1J

F?le View

Setup-

Window

Help

POSITION

BUFFER

NEXT

COMMAND

WNo*

45.912

I

x i

o.

:

< >



l

0.

cl

0.

NEXT COMMAND LOW

1

X2

13.38

\

15 .

14567

\

22

X2

0 .

M

0

G

23

G 98 G

20 G 40

6

64

G

6

0

F

0.

i

{

22

0 ,

GOG 18

G SO

G

G 66

G

67

G

69 .

5G

97

G123

G

G123

.

1G1

11

G50*2

G113

G13

<

1

H

G

:

C2

2 0.

GS3.S

*

G

G

0.

0.

w

MACHINE

MAIN OFFSET

g

21

1

Q

21

«

1

B

id

ci

o.

0 ,

4.

S

s

0.

0. c

0.

0.

Zl

0,

M*

SPDL

0 MIN

1

0

FT

/MIN M.

0 MIN1

0 FT

/MIN

0

MIN*1

0

FT

/MIN

100

200

0

,

0.

Cl )

oPDL

|

T

,

SPDL

.

T,

SP'DLI

.

Cl

0

X2

0.

X2

0.

Cl)

i

T

,

SPDL 2

1

XL-AX]

Y-AX

|

Zl-Axj

i

1

ci-nxjj

X2~AXl

0

Z2

0.

Z2

0.

T

. SPDL2

I

o

m

c2

0.

C2

0. (1 )

I

I

0

0. w

IN

/MIN

m/&m

°

/min

9

/min

9

/min

IN/MIN

Z2~K&

|

IN/REY

FEED 0.

I

0

TNO .

16 - 0

(GENERAL

OUT

)

~>~>

TN O 0

MAGftZNPKNo.

>

<

12

0.

I

0

<

>

a

0

Cl

0.

I

o

i

LOW

109

Q

*

I

0

<

C2 0.

NIT

:

I

.

OW

0

Vm

2~AX|

1

0

-

1

'

ir

—

i

“

: ».%

;;.v:

vXvÿv.:

y...

P1

$0M

®

2006/11/30

j

II I

01 :

29

#A

0

. 98

10*

SI

[

i'

0

in/min

pm

POSITION SET UP PROGRAM

TOOL' C-COND

. P

ARAM

DIAGNOS DATA

I/O

TOOL

LAYOUT

DISPLAY

INFO,

DATA

MAP

Matrix now goes 5

places

right

of

the decimal.

(Important to

remember when

changing R

parameters)

'

1

pg

tlilArNnCN/MAVFD

......

->

'

v

(§AKEgj::

;

3

¥1

IB

I

Fife

Wm6:m

Hdp

VEBSIQH

DIJU2TOSIS

MONITOR

j

OHIUH

j

SERVO MDKETOR

|

SMMDIJB BOOT TOR

{

HSSDMKE 1MHITOR

?

i/o

ifjcwiTOE

mm

AMS*

FEDCB

A§B7

$S43210 BEST SHOW

YOO1I0

ODOlGQlOO

1.00000

%

12 41

4673

mm#

o

m

ommtmmmmo

QOQO

¥00

13O 0-OG

OO

o

D=c«o

oao-o

ooo

0000

rm

i4Q

i

ioo %

i

xioGQoaooQ

CF

OD

;

-12S44

HEHQP-Y

BGNI70F

DI3P

ADDRESS

76543210

HEX

HHOOOODOOO

GGOOQQOG

00

W1:1000

000

Q1

oooooo

oo

00

HHOOOOOOOa

oooooo-oo

00

KH0OOOODQ3

OOOOOOOO

QQ

I/O

WCNITQsR

BWF

ADRSS

FE0CBA9876S43210

HEX

XQ0

170

OOOOGOOOPODOOCl-QO

0000

XO0180

QO&OOOQgO

1101111

00 6F

XO019O 00000000000000-00 0000

XQQ1A0

Q<WNSDOOO«K>OOQOCK>

0000

i

SHORT

LONG

7274496

LONG

I

4673

0

0

-e22083Se4

;

AH

D RESS 76543210

HEX

HHOOOODDOO

OOOOOQOG

00

HHOOOOOQQl

ODOOOODO

DO

MH00000002

oooooooo

00

MHG00OOOO3

0000000=0

00

ADRSS

FJE&C8*9e?6S43210 HEX

MO O IDO

QooooolQleooooli

0233

X00110

oaÿooO

loaooOoo#© 0200

X00120

oaooooocwj ioooooioo

0000

XO013D

OO©OGOOO0OGOQ0€*G

0000

SHORT

643

512

ham

33555075

S FEDC-BASO?65432

.10

HEX

YOD34Q

©ODOGOOOOOOGOOOO

GOOD

Y003

50

OOOGGÿOOOOOOOGO

0000

TOD3 6.0

OOOOOOOQGOGOOOGO

0000

YD03

7d

0000000800000000

GOOD

SHORT

hatm

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

:

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

HHOOODOOOO

GOOOOQOO

00

MHQQOOOOQ

1

80000080

00

MH00O0OOO2

QoooooDD

00

MHGQ0DOOQ3

0-0000000 00

ADRSS

F

E DCBAS

8

763432

1

0

HEX

XO012D

OOCHQOOOOOOOOOCKK3

0000

£00130 OOOO

£00140

000*0000000000000

OOOO

XD015D

10=0=000000

000000=0

8QO0

-327

SB

SHORT LOWS ADSSS FEDCBAWR?65432

10 HEX

ODOOd

=0=000000000000000

QQ'OD

OOQQQ fcO0oaÿ&oOQ«r$&OQ

0000

00000

0000000000000=000 0000

0000.0 =000000=0=000000000

0000

SHORT ham

o

0

a

0

0

-2

147483

648 0 0

0

ADRSS FE&CBJM7

6543210 HEX

SHORT

YDDDO0

0000000=00

1000111

0047

Y0OOIQ

=0000000000000000 0000

¥00020

0=000000000000000 0000

¥00030 0000000000000000 0000

ADDRESS 76543210

HEX

HHDOODDOOO

OOOOOQOO

00

39H0OOOQOO1

0000000=0 00

HHOOOOOOG2

oooooooo 00

MHOO0DDOO3

000000=00

00

ADRSS

FEIKBA9S76S43210

HEX SHORT

>10011.0

oooooolooooooooo 0200

XQ0120

oooooooo

0=0000000 OOOO

X0013O

o

0=0=0

ooooooooooo-o

0000

XO014O

000000000=000000=0 0000

LOMO

W.

51.2 71 7112

0

0

0

0

0

tCEHORY MONITOR

WRIT

ADDRESS

76543210 HEX

HBOO

OO0OO0

0OOOOO99

00

I/O

BCWITOR

WRITE

ADRSS

FEDCEA937654321D HEX SHORT

R02392 ooomoolleoidlo 1CCA

7370

R02

3

93

ooaooooooo

lo o lo=o 002

4

Lme

36

I

nw«X<t<uW»«AvAvhMvM«<vÿi

jjMgtr

TPS

0

2006/11/30

11:05:09

m

•

•

W\A

0

. 9

8

il l

/min

TIJi

\/\/

10%

Orpm

I

<••

• »<>**ÿ

c *‘*iv

I/O

WRITE

DIAGUGS VERSION DIAGNOS OPTI

SERVO SPXKDLE

HARD1

LADDER

WRITE

amCEL

ONITOR

ONITOR MONITOR MONITOR

MONITOR

Stay

out

of

here unless instructed to.

Monitor

all

addresses

in

this area. X,Y,M,D

etc.



O

AGNOS

S

(MAK£R|

1

F ie Wndaw

Help

I

Mats™

MMKOSIS M3KH0R

[

OfflOM

j

SEKVO HOHTTOR

j

SMHBUB MMHTOR

j

MKSDlfSEE

KHUTOR

|

I/O

JJQNITOE

MSP

mSS FH>CBJ»8?6S432iO

HEX

SB« LC«0

mo

1

10

©OD

lo o

lead

ioootscJt

'

12

41

4673'

TOOtZO' OOOO

TOO130 ooooo€iooodod©ooo

.

'OG0B

TOD

140

1

loo

l l l lOOQOdOOO

CFDO

-

12544

KEHO£Y

MONITOR

DI3P

ADDRESS 76S43210

HEX

j

HHOOQ0DOOO

oooooooo 00

j

J3H0QQQQQQ1

OOOOOOP'Q

QO

|

HHOOODOD02

00000000

00

jj

HB000DD003

OOOOOOOO 00

I/O HONITOF D ISP

ABRSS

FEE>CBjL98?654321fli

HE

I

ZOO

17 0

0008000000000001

0001

zooiio

0000000001

loini

ooer

ZOO190

OQODOOO

oaooooo

oo

0000;

ZOO

1

AO

aa

&

oo

o

o

a O

Do

o

a

a

oo

0000;

LCM&-

7274497

SHORT

:

4673

Q

0

.

-#22083184 I

O

ADDRESS 765432

1.0 HEX

I

HHOOQOOOOO

oooooooo

00

I

HHOOQQQOQl

oooooooo

QO

| HH00000002 00000000

00

I

ZH00000003 OOOOOOOO 00

JLDRSS

F

E D

CB

MS

76$

43

21

0

HEX

ZOO IDO

000800

iQlOOOOOll

0283

ZOO110

OO

0000

lOOOOOOOOO

02

00

ZOO

120 0000000000000000

OOOO

ZOO130

oooooooooooooooo

0000

SHORT

LOMO

33555075

M®m

m i.

700340

OBOOOCWksopOOODOO

OOOO

Y00350

000o4«0ft60e«4000

Q0OQ

TO03

60

.00000000000000.00:

O'QOO

Y00370

000000:000000ÿ0000

0000

SHOT*?

tows'

0 0

43

512

0

0

Q

0

0

0

0

km%s

Tmcmmi6B4mio

HEX

00000

OO

O

Q

O

0=00OO

0

0-00OO

00:00

OOOQQ

wQomÿQQommoQ

'€>000

00000

OOO00CJ0Q0OQ00DQO

00:00

000.00

MDQQQ«0QQOQBO(3

OOOD

ADDRESS 76543210

HE X

HHOOQOOOOO

oooooooo

00

HHOOO

00001

00000000

QO

moomoooz

00000000 00

| HHQ0000003

oooooooo 00

1DRSS

F.E

DCBA987

6543

21

0

HEX

TOQ120

oaooooooooooaooo 0000

X0Q13Q

Q0O0>PO0O0PQ0Qa00

QOQO

ZO O140

ooooooooooooooao 0000

ZOO

ISO

loa DOO

OO0OOOOO0O

8000;

”32768

L.om

HORT

SHORT

wm

o a

o

:

0

0

0

i

-214748364#

0

..MMHSS

FEDCB

A987

6S432

10 MX .

ABORT

YDOOOO

0D0O10'000100011

1. 0547

,'-

WQQm

.

m&ammmmmm

moQ

TO002

0

000000000000ÿ000

0000

T0OO3O

080Q0

0;OO

O

OQ

£S£i>0

Q

O

0000 0

hotm

m is

AX' D RESS

76543

110

HEX

HHOOOODOOO ODOOO0-&O

00

AftftSS FE DCBA9878S43

2

10 HEX

SHORT

ZOO

110

QOOeODlQOOOOQOOO

0200;

ZOO120

OPPdPdOdTOQQOdPd

0000

ZO O

130

o

oo

o

oooaoooooooo 000#

TOO

14.0 0300000000000000 00

QO

wm

/•

• 5 1212

|

HH0Q8QQ001

oooooooo 00

0

:ÿV:iQ.-:|

Hfl00€GQ002

oooooooo

00

I

HHOaOODOOQ

oooooooo

00

0

0 0

0

1

I/O

HONITOR

WITH

JfcDRSS

f

EDCBA.9876543210

HEX

SHORT

£02392

00o.lt lOOtl00 Id

1-0

ICC

A 7170

£02393 oao&oooo&olooloo

0024

tCEHORY

KGHITOR

URITE

ADDRESS 7654.3210

HEX

HHQOCJOODOO

OOOOOOOO

00

kt>m

3 FEDCB

AR876S432

10 HEX

ONG

2$m$m

Ig

38

.

:

P

m

mu.

0

2006/11/30

11:06:56

jr

V#

0 .

9Bin

/Akin

B

0%

Or

pm

irnmmSM

/O

.WRITE

DIAGROS VERSION

BIAGN05

OPTION SERVO

SPXRDLE

MOHITOR

H. JWARE:

HbHIT

OR

LADDER

MONITOR

ONITOR

CmCEL

ONITOR

m

Use

this

area

for

forcing.

You may force

up

to

4 addresses.

XOO

170-1

forces on

Powering off

the

control cancels

all

forces. Use

this

button to

remove forces.

WRITE

CANCEL

then

INPUT.

XOO170-0 forces off

r

h

A

mM

Fie

Window

Help

VERSION

DIAGNOSIS

MOUTIR |

OP

110*1

j

SERVO

MfMTTOR

j

SpntDUi

MlMTfOR

Hmmm

Kfl&WTOJR

|

i/o

MONITOR

vmp

ADRSS

FEJ>CBA9e76S432iQ

HEX

SHORT

YOD13LO

coo

1

J

j

1

c-

o Lcocoo

1

1241

4673

YOG12

Q

<3-6OOOO«QOOOQOC»OO

0000

YOG130

oooooooooooaoooo

0000

TOO

140

noollliooQOODOO

CFOO

-12544

MEMORY

MONITOR

MSP

ADDRESS 76543210

HEX

HH0000000Q

80000000

00

HHQQO0DQQ1

90000000 00

HH00000002

oooooooo 00

MH00000D03

DOGGOOOO

00

i/o

MONITOR \m ?

ADRSS

F

E DCBA98

76S43210

HEX

200170

OGOQOQQOO

OOOOO00 0000:

200180

ogdopood

d

1

1©1

1

11 POST

K00190

0000000000000000 0000

2001

AO

ClQ

GO

OOOOODO OOOOO 0000

SHORT Lorn

7274496

LONG

4673

111

0

0 -822083564

0

O

urnltDRESS 76543210 HEX

HHOQQOO0OO

0-0000000

00

HHOOQOPOOl

o-ooooooo

00

HHOQOOGOQ2

OOOGOOGO 00

HHOOOOOOOl oooooooo

00

ADRSS FE DCBA9876543

2

10

HEX

2001DO

QQOOOOlOlOOOOOll

0233

>700110 ooooooioaoooaaoo 02.00

X00120

000000000.0000000

0000:

200130

0000000008000000

0000

SHORT ADRSS FERCBM8765432

10

HEX

Y0D340

OOOGOOOOOOOOOGOO 0000

YDQ35Q

0000000000000000

0000

Y003

60

0OOOOOOOOOOODOOO

0000

Y00370

0000000000000000

Q0DO

SHORT LONG

33555075

0

43

0

012

0 0 0 0

>

0

0

ADRSS

FEDCBA9876543210

HEX

200120

OODGOOQOO-OOOOO'OO

0000

200130

OOOOPOQO&ODOOO&O

0000

200140

oooooooooÿoooooao

00OO

200150

IGOQOOOCIQ

ooooooo 3000 -32768

SHORT LONG ADRSS

FEDCBA9©?

$543-210

HEX

SHORT

00000

000000-000000=0000 0000

ooooo

mmommzQQmm&o

oo&Q

00000 0000008000000000

0800

OOOOO

C0OOQ080OGGO00OO

0800

LONGDDRESS 76543210

HEX

MHOQQOOOQQ

GOOGOOGG

00

HHOOOOOOOl 00000000

OP

HHQ0000002

oooooooo

00

HHOOOOOOOl

OOOOQOOO

00

o

M.

0

0

0

.

0

0

-2147483648

0

ADDRESS

76543

2 iO HEX

BHOOQODOOa

0GGOGOOO 00

HHOQPOOPPl

000000-00

00

HHOOOOOOOl

OOOOQOOO

00

HHOOOOOOOl OOOOOOOG

00

ADRSS

FEDCB

A9876543

2

10

HEX

SHORT

20011.0 OOOODGlOODDOGGOD

0208 512

200120

aooooaaoa-oooaooo

0008

200130

O0OGOOOO0OOOOODO 0008

200140 0000000008000000

0008

LONG ADRSS FEBCBA98?6543

2

10

HEX

YD 0000 000000800lo o

0

1

11

0047

TOGO

IP

aooaaoooooaaooeo 0000

700020 0000000000008000

0000

YDDO30

800000

8000008000 OGDD

SHORT LONG

512 71 71

Q

0

o

0

0

D 0

MEMORY MONITOR HR2TE

ADDRESS

765432 ID

HEX

HHQQOOOOQd

80000080 00

I/O MONITOR RRITE

ADRSS

FEDCBA93765432

ID

HEX SHORT

ooollloolloololo ICC

A

7370

ooooooooo-oloo lo o 002:4

LONG

.

1

36

'h

\

P

flft,

0

2006/11/30

S3

H

11:02:36

mi

VV'-A

0 . &Bln

/mill

\J \J

10

k

rpm

I?

:v$

.<

:

:H:X

-WVV*.

•:

'

:<, :*•////

vpx

JX;

.:

x

vy,

;;

iDRESS

»>D

X

Y F I* M

ADDRESS

4-

Use this

area

fo r

searching R

parameters.

Force under

I/O

Write.

Use

this area for

changing R parameters.

PIC

PARAMETER

(DATA

TYPE)

ADDRESS

STANDARD

ON.

Ml: NT

M

KM

OK

Y

ACT J Vli

K

2350

H

2830

1

1

2

2

3

• \

• j

4 4

5

3

6

6

7

**«

i

8

8

9

y

Long

type

R

2380 a

2880

I 1

2

3

4

• 1

5

>•

5

b 6

ns

m

/

cn

i

n

T OOL L ENGTH MEASURE SKIP

SPEED

300

8 8

TOOL LENGTH

MEASURE

RAPID

TRAVERSE

OVERPAID

%

17

y

R 2390 R

2890

DISTANCE OF THE

TOW

SENSOR SKIP AND

DEC.

25000

<

)

m

I

I

O

>

2

AXIS

SKIP

POSITION

ni

3 3

4

4

1

AXIS

START POSITION: Of TOOL LENGTH

MEASURE

m

5 o

6

6

V

AXIS

START

POSITION

OF T OO L L EN GT H

MEASURE

m

*7

(

8

8

X AXIS

START POSITION

Of TOOL

LENGTH MEASURE

m

9

y

R

3980

TOOL

BREAK

AGE ALARM

LIMIT

20000

(7874)

1

s.



Long

type

PLC

MIA

dm

TYPE)

PARAMETER RS >\

STANDARD

RL OOMBHf

:o

mm

mmm

AXIS

POSITION of

1s t

AXIS

ELUKE

ATC

BLOCK

l

Si

AXIS

POSITION of 2nd AXISHBO

KB

ATC

BLOCK

l

$2

>

BEFORE ATC

BLOCK I AXIS POSITION of

3rd

AXIS

S3

s

BELL)

V£ ATC

BLOCK

1

AXIS

POSITION

of

1st AXIS 54

BELUKE

AtC BLOCK

2 AXIS POSITION

of 1s t AXIS 55

m

BELOKB

ATC

BLOCK

2

AXIS

POSITION

of

2nd AXIS

BbLURb

AtC BLOCK

2

AXIS

POSITION of

3rd

AXIS

61

7

BBLOKB

ATC

BLOCK

1

AXIS

POSITION of 1s t AXISi

SB

BEL

0K B

A1C

BLOCK

1

AXIS

POSITION

of 2nd AXIS

50

BE

I '0Kb A TC B LO CK

1

AXIS

POSITION

of

3rd

AXIS

0

60

BEL

UK

B

ATC

BLOCK 2

AXIS POSITION of 1s t AXIS

i

61

BEL UKB:

ATC BLOCK

2

AXIS

POSITION of

2nd AXIS

622

BbLUKb

AT C

BLOCK

2

AXIS

POSITION of

3rd

AXIS

3

63

U

64

15

lb

17

Short

type

FIX

BIT PARAMETER <RB1

.....

B8>

KB No.

BIT

PLC DEVICE

OMMENT

0

0

0

mom

i

j

RI

1156 If

1001

Ml 002

.

VALID

INVALID

NABLE E NOR ILL

TOOL MEASURE

3

If1003

4

TYPE

OF

FEEDBACK

X

ABSOLUTE INCREMENTAL 4

Mi

004

TYPE OF

FEEDBACK

V

INCREMENTAL

BSOLUTE

c

D SO

005

6

TYPE OF

FEEDBACK 1

ABSOLUTE

INCREMENTAL

10006

7

TYPE

OF FEEDBACK 4

ABSOLUTE

INCREMENTAL

7

Ml007

0

8

10008

i

MAGAZINE MAX TOOL

NUMBER

<

NOTE

1

111009

*}

Ml010

Ml

OH NG.

MAGAZ

INE

TOOL

DETECTOR

D

1SAVA I'LABLE A

V

A

I TABLE

B in

oi

i

4

c

Ml

01

2

SELECT TEE T CODE

*M06T**

NO T *M06T**T***

5

<N0TE2>

B Mi

013

6

E

MIDI 4

7

AXIS MOVE

AT

ATC

BY

PLC

ONLY PROGRAM

BY PLC

Ml

01

5

2 PALLET

CHENG ER VALID

INVALID

0

Ml

01

6

Rill 57

I Ml

017

n

2 MI018

3

3

Ml

.019

*

AUTO ON

AUTO OFF

OOLANT MENU

AT POWER

ON

4

Ml020

5 ON E

CYCLE

SW .

OF

PALLET

CHANGER

LH

SAVA

1L

ABLE

AVAILABLE

5

Ml

021

G

6

MI

022

TOOL

MES.

EQUIPMENT

AT AT C

ARM

FIX

*T

Ml

023

>

0

8

Ml

024

4

j

9

Ml

025

9

El

A

AT C

METHOD

T

CODE

MO6

A

Ml026

3

MI

027

4

C

Ml

028

D

B1029

i:

AXIS MOVE PATTERN AT AT C

Z-XY XV

z E

Ml030

Y—

X Z

—

V

XIS MOVE

PATTERN

AT

PALL

ETCH

ANGE

F

M

103

1



Short

type

PLC-CMN

PALAMETER TABLE

R El T

COMMENT

I

0

MANUAL MEASURE

VALID

INVALID

2'M.

10

TOOL

11)

VALID

INVALID

VARIABLE

TIMER

VALID

INVALID

VI

00 ONLY

VALID

INVALID

4

Vi

00

ONLY

VALID

INVALID

Vi 00

ONLY

VALID

INVALID

m: CONTROL.

;v

VALID INVALID

FMS PALLET ID

VALID

INVALID

EM C CONTROL

ID

VALID

INVALID

RS232C 1

PORT

TYPE

VALID

INVALID

TOOL

ID

R

RESISTOR LOAM-

VALID

INVALID

B

THERMAL

DISPLACEMENT OFF SET

VALID

INVALID

€

THERMAL

DISPLACEMENT MACRO

VARIABLE

WRITE

VALID

INVALID

D

VI

00

ONLY

VALID INVALID

TOOL ID

SERIAL

TYPE

VALID

INVALID

F

TOOL ID EUCHINER

VALID

INVALID

TOOL

ENGTK TO

LIFE

INDEX

DISPLAY

AT

READ

VALID INVALID

,

3301

TOOL

LENGTH

TO LIFE INDEX DISPLAY

AT

READ

INVALIDALID

.

TOOL LENGTH

AT

WRITE

LIFE

CONTROL

TOOL DATA

COMPENSATION

OO L

LENGTH TO

LIFE INDEX

DISPLAY

AT READ

OFF

SET NO.

TOOL

LENGTH

TO LIFE

INDEX DISPLAY

AT READ OFF SET NO.

COMPENSATION

TOOL

DIAMETER

AT WRITE

LIFE

CONTROL

TOOL

DATA

TIME

TO

LIFE

INDEX DISPLAY

AT READ

VALID

INVALID

LIFE

AT

WRITE

LIFE CONTROL TOOL DATA

FLAG

TO

LIFE

INDEX

DISPLAY

AT

READ

VALID

INVALID

9 FLAG AT WRITE

LIFE

m TOOL TOOL

DATA

ID NO .

AT

WRITE

VALID INVALID

DATA

AT MANUAL

WRITE ONLY

FLAG ALL

DATA

PROTECT SPINDLE

TOOL

AND

NEXT

T OOL N O.

OF

MUTE

VALID

INVALID

READ

AN D

WRITE

TO

LIFE

CONTROL

DISPLAY

)

VALID

INVALID

READ

AN D

WRITE

TO

ID NO.

GROUP

NO,

VALID

INVALID

INVALID

OO L

DIAMETER

READ AND

WRITE TOOL

COM,

TYPE

A VALID

9

9LZ£~ 0009

ItfOHS

OS

T

002

W

\>0

]

.

'

I

/

/

\

/

s

s

/

• v

X

\

\

/

\

\

\

/

i

\

\

i’

i

\

/

9ESS9 ItOICI

mWI

88CKS

9iSm)I

ISUCOI

t’OCt’ilt’80988C8 9Uiii.9I CCM-SSCC

f9880K9

SEitUni

9St’j£*893

I160L89CS

t-C8If'iLC

i.01

8t9(.8t.fi:

DN01

J.80HS X2H

POOO

oooo-oooooooooooo

o>TOOX

I Z t

8

91

Zt

*9

8ZI

9$Z

Z\S

KOI

St-QZ 960ÿ

c6I8

t’8£9I

Q9LZZ

9

9LZ£~

0008

ooooooooooooocc

~

os

T

002

0000

o-ooooooooooooooo

OH

CO X

0000

......

oooooooooooO'irevr'oc

1

002

0000

0-000000

O OOOO0

0

CO

OCT

002

i

mu

£

x JH

o

i O'

$

9

L 9

m

s

;>

1

3

1

s

?;

<

i

Y

0

o

0

S»1



218



219



220



sy

;

;]

K

if

rÿ_

-

J

5T?>

ja

JA

MR-JT-CT

SAVING PARAMETERS



MR-J2-CT

DRIVES

Wm

'

P

§

#4

|

MJUtCt

a1

III

;

i

IfiaSt

I

A

* »W.

f

s

‘ft

is

m*

mlmM

m

I

if

V-ÿ

KPS

*-

'

•

BIS

• MU

w

.f

Kl

t

X.

Hv'ft

f

i

..

•

..

0

••

JNSH

iftÿce

5'i

iiaiisiP

fee

Cl

Mi

S

91

M il

1

A

:ÿÿÿ

1

‘

1

223

PMSMMMMW

wÿyyÿ>ÿyÿÿwsyyyÿÿyyÿÿÿyyÿ%yÿy>ÿ%yÿ>wÿyÿyÿ

MMMIMMMMM

iMMMiiMiiMM

I«1

mMMfMWiWMMMWM0ÿMlWÿMMM

M W W 1 M W W W W M W W 1

W

»SM

&

as

?

mmmmmmmMMMmMMMmmfmmMMmMMtlMM

M

u*

c

\

xt

is-

:<

a

wmt

Xx?K-S

Kg

ss

>

3

sm

i*:-

2fc

X-.

5

SSSB

*

VJ

SS2 iS

3KK

tÿSxS

v

>*X\

-xc

/,TL

K

>X'

s?

§5

3

ssSS

sv

«X><J

*3

&

$3

flfel

J&m

#»P?

Itafe*

mm

|jli

1

\

* Slf£SM

m

SSS

»-J53

>Xr

3SKS&;

Fil

te#

3?

r«i

l#L

»»|S

W'

f:

fil

S

m

m

m

&*

IOTS

>y$

rm

M

M

V

VÿiSlI

HD

L%

»M

B co

at*

-™-ÿr =?,0

;n

MS

%

mmm.

/r

• : Xx ?

>>Xx-

V»ÿ*A*T«J>--*.«*>

n

mmmmmmmmmrnmmmmm

§

S

ig

Desktop

On-Call

for

Masak

tgj Intel

LÿN+Modem

PC

Card

Lg

KEY

HISTORY

ig

Main

g

MAZATROL FUSION

64 0

SR

352

MB

mmmm

m

aK>

K

2SJ

MMMMI

*

s

$1

»ÿ

:

K

«

'

,«:

£ 1

i—

/

Ml

illtlieJ

P

ÿ#

«

gi

MS

§

IS

MR-J2-CT-M6

Setup

S_W

ill

E

ÿ:

g

NetOp

Remote Control

g

Online Services

a

f>.

S|

WinZip

»/S*

»

/«'

ftp/

Hi

'

E

Programs

&

lg

ORiWOCO

g

Printkejj

g

Startup

g

WinZip

Internet

Explorer

-

MS-DOS

Prompt

CS

Outlook

Express

(oQ

Windows

Explorer

/I

tfj

Documents

<

j S

Settings

Q

Pin:

• tills

mi

|

Help

iU

Run...

E

|

l|yil

Shut Down...

Hltari

_

_*i

|>r*M«Mtsp

Iff

I'FjFile (S.)S

efcup

lWlMonitor.

lAJAIarm

Qpiagncsis

B

;

:

i

.i‘,

A'-0~:

<V,

' , ,• • ÿ

I

'

• : -ÿ

:

cplppt CptT

rn

A

vie

Tnh

elect

SetUp-Axis

1

ab

HHBBBHBMHi

UIIAlifUipSAI*ÿ

Siaiii*

s'K

:

;.*

-

,

:ÿ.

iÿj'Aaa

iÿAeUACTUvAy

fvu,;:

IBIBiiS



226

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Softwaie

(Foi

MG)—

MAGAZINE[Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

|

(F)File

(S)Setup

(MlMonitor

(A)Alarm (D)Diagnosis

fPjF'arameter

[T

)T

est-operation

|

(U)SetUp-Axis

(H)Help

MAGAZINEQJ

Axis

Select(C)

Axis

Spec.

(S)

lisffiir

&

a*-

HH

-

M U

a

9

m m

m

mm

n

Si

*

w

»



AMR.J2CT

Setup

Software

1st

Axis*

Liner

Axis

Spec.

(P)Fite

©Setup (ÿMonitor

(A)Alartn

(PPsgnoss

(P)Paramefcer (T)T$$fc-operat:iof«

OUjSettfe-Ms

(HjHefci

L

'

BB

'L.ijj

H

l

S

HHB

MBS

I

w

I

nil

niH

Krh:

:

W

ills

lit

i

SELECT PARAMETER

o'

r.

UTO

,

iPV’.Vd'WfcSf

iÿ tw:

iÿÿX,

sIHjHgsp

1

~

Paÿ.aUe

—

r—

if

llli

Rtename

;

As

TTr:

~

.....

trr

1

1

in#

i

s

sr-ss:

*

i*ui

~*1

N-srmc

uirfee

__

_____

s“

' .m;:

:

:

r

—

—

1

“

‘

SIS

SiSSSKSS®

—

»

:>ÿ

:

::•

.V

> ÿ • • :

:siiPs/:sV::::;-S::::;;

S':

PARAMETERS ARE BROUGHT

OUT

;EROM

THE

MR-12

DRIVE

___

-

_

-

:

S-

S'

_

':

'

_

wmm

SS

'

''ISIS',;

'

:

SS'SS'Sÿ

'ÿ

S

:

i:SS.

.-ÿ

.

'ÿÿS'.

i;

:

::

iMsm

-

—

iss M

I

>*<

0>

<

'M

'*ÿ

,

<

<

h-

,

'

A

Si

\

i

is:

----

r

r~~~

.....

i

SSiSSsii:' SSliS

li i

MNM

.

Chants fed

lÿialSeifl

l

read©

wv*$m.

/f kEfat)

Compareÿl

«'ÿ

.

Erd&l

DS Poietailed):

Press

All

read

Pop up window

will appear....maintenance; All

parameters

will

be read. Is

it

O.K.?

Press

O.K.

Parameters are

brought

out

from

the

MR-J2

Drive



aasa

.

~

..

..*

-

.

I'

l M

ni.

i

:

TTY

(P)Fite ©Setup

('ÿMonitor

fAjAlarm

(Diagnosis (Pparm&t

er

(TiTest-operation

(UJSetiÿWs

(HjHete

,.

sH

ap

rnmm

WtfM

s

• •

• '»-

in

File

f

Parameter

table-

name:

t

•

j

Nurrfce

™ n

ame

Set

value

U

rd

Setting

rang©

'ÿ

[

1

ll

'

-J

I

111:

1

\

Yvi

. . ...

1

i

»/ÿ|

.?

:D:i:?5K:::S::::::sS;-S:::::i:s

iTCTl

i

—

:ÿ

il l

1

3

T%*i\

I:

t\

I ’V

Please turn eft the servo

ampfe

after

seating

the

parameter

vath

the

8,t-“

tg a

'

I

1

r

f

111

iiilili

'

WrrtelWf

Ccrrc‘afe.10

AJl

read©

Mial

Sei||]

ll

wrlÿJ

Change

kill]

I

\\

Detail Inf

(I)

End©)

—

iP

.

I

.

1

,

-

I

-

T

:

'.ÿ

SELECT

File

SELECT

Save



—

1

m

mam

Save

in-

pÿINGSTONfEl

zi

*>

is

O’

in*

:Zd

LADDER

mi

m

\

My

Accent

Docurnesnte

s**™*

'

_

N

j

Desktop

»ji

Z

1

.

~~

~

1

:

3

\

My

Documents

I

_

_

9>

.

_

:

1

:

My

Computer

zJI

«3

$vto

ife

HiSfn«:

Cancel

ave

as

(ypts

*pfl*

y Nelwoik

Races

*

i

s

'

•.

_

.

;

'

-

••

AJ

\ffltfQ

chaw

lastly

hfcidSeSrsteMI

Competed

All

>e4*®

-ÿJ

.

Drtrfw..m

ii«a|fl*(

U:;

MSi

i

Save

in

(Where

you

want

to save)

C:

or

E:

etc.

File

name

(A

name you

will

remember)

Press Save

Parameters should now be

saved.

Use Windows Explorer

to verify.



• ' ' Si

• 5r

A

;»

wis*>

«

Swi

I

$

v

§2S

a'H

1

Cra

I’

V*

-

, '• ;

MR-J2-CT

UPLOADING

PARAMETERS

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

[For

MGJ—

MAGAZIHEfRotary

Axis

Spec.}

-

[Parameter

list}

liiaiPi

(S)Setup

iMJMonitor

'

(AjAlarm

[DJDiagnosis

IPjF’arameter

il)Test-operatiori (J ]S

etU

p-Axis

,

[H)H

elp

-

It?(FJFile

MlltS

*1

-j:

m

i

I

''A''

4.

HE

u.

ave[S]

W

vOi

ir

table

File

name

:

mmm

\<*

s.i

t

intfP)

vj

•

v

nd(Q]

,

;

r«

Set v alu e

Unit

/•

Setting

range

IS

;

II

Select

Open

on

File

Fab

......

.............

.....

“

.

.....

...........

......

—

------

.

I

;•

m

m

I

%

I

I

1

T

il l

I

I

4-

4-

i

t,

\

\

tfi

i

1

I

I

I

I

|1

M

m

>

&

/;Y;’

mmmmmmsmm

.

s

• /

i&n

V

-

M

Please

turn

off

th e

servo

airolifier

after

setting

th e

parameter

with

th e

sign.

.

.

..

•

.

..

:

ppp

•

'v:

>::pp

>)»

V/iM.

II

Hi

V

V-V- ‘.‘.-i

:<• W .

•>)

<

'ii;

V,

I/-1

;<.rj

i,

Parameter value

Ev

.

m:

X;

k

A

y

d;

:iV

/y

:•

I

;Ml

read.P):|

all

writ>I;tKj

|

Change

list,L)g I

taissi

:

Initial

Se t

(E )

*V

Compare

(C )

rite

<W )

rr

M 1#

,

S:

-

End(Q.)

1

8

r

p

*

$$

-

1

I

Ip

1

*

pi

:

i

|

/k)

%

:

V

vl

:

;

'

..

.

'

..

.

-M

v

...

;

iSlssSi-ii

ABS

Pos.

Repair

(A )

etail

In f

.

(I)

m

Vs'l.f

1

i

V

|pfgy

w

.’Lr''.

’

I.

' .

......

.

.....

S.F . .1

£..

(F)Fite

(S)Setup tMQMonibor

IA)Alarrn

(OSQÿnosis

(P)Parafiteter

(T)Te§t-operaUiÿ

(ytSeitÿ-A>S

(H)Heb

dBBhiwm..

_„

-

<*

~> C \*

t

*

S

/

;w

>.

v

*

j

/

,

S;.

aaa

T

i

wsm

BL

.

.......

i

Fib

name

:

tÿSSSf

*

:

Parameter

table

Mi

pÿl

»??F:ci

I

'

i

'*

'

' j

1

S

'

[*

am©

urrtbe

Unit

et

value

S

etting

range

_

i

I

iu

_

iÿ

. ;ÿ:

M

'

WW

'

.:

•

:

I

-

I

_

___

'

mm

:

' : 'WM

Mm

1

l

•

,

i

bdl

S

lil

........

....

—

------

--

----

.....

*?

..........

—

—

-

*—

—

Fie**

turn

©fc

the

servo

«**«

mm

&

Parameter

the

-

sm

rWÿSKKHHSfSBSm

I

H

r-r~

mmmm

•ÿ•

•:

lililiiliililllPÿ

liigliiM

4-Si§t

Mil

initial

$e®

iimao

Compare©

AJI

read©

All

vwtdUS)

ChangeMi)

II

I

MMi

~

<ÿ*

.....

......

.....

*

.....

.

....

:

.

;

:

Detail

W.flJ

End®)

S

M —

:

-

:

':

:

:

S

I::

s

l:>

MM.

m

mm

'

.;

,

jil

:

SELECT

Open

on the File Tab

SB

I

—

1

p.-n

Jli

**

i

a

tit

M*

ocfc in'

'*&

KINGSTON

|£

|

JjLADWA

3

-

m

M n lH

i

MyRflccrt

Documents;

> i

SeÿlirpgT

iwiÿa

3

:

D

GSkkp

:

“Hj

-

Q

OP

m

My

Dcewients

&

il i

My

Computer

Mjp

Network

Races

Opsn

ite

name;

Cancel

ites oHype:

jfcprm

TOelST

TSPSTS'

I

Intel

Ss1(£(

banpe

it&m

mmm

i

irnm

<W

Inf

(il

..

j

mm

';S

WM1

HI

saasifflis mmmm

Look

in

(Where

you

saved it

to)

C:

or E:

etc

File

name

(the

name

you

would

remember)

Press

Open

5>*

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For MS)

- MAGAZINE

(Rotary

AKIS

Spec.)

-

[Parameter

list]

1

1

f£)File (S)Setup (M)Monitor

(A'jAIarm

[jyDiagimg

(P)Parameter (I)Test-operation

(U]SetUp-Axi$

[H]Help

-

lr?(

lectede?

~

Q

Xj

Magazine

Se

Parameter

table Eile name

: ft :

\INDEX.

PRM

IndexJPRM

Numbe

Name

'at Ifni

Setting

range

m

#001

|*MSR

:

Motor series 0000-FEEFh

E

I

#002

*RTY

#003

*PC1

#004

*PC2

#005

*PIT

#006

INP

#007

ftTTf

#008

PG1

#009

#010

EMG

: Regenerative

:

Motor

gear ra

:

Machine gear

:

:Feed pitch

:In-posit ion

0000-FFEFh

:

1

f

1-32767

H

I

I

1

1-32767

1

I

i

f

36. 1-32767

1

I

I

a

deg

1-32767

0000-EFEFh

Verify

-enoi

:

ftuto

tuning

g

ii

&

I

Position lo

4-1000

C

#007 #008 #019 #020 #021 #022

\

m

0-20000

3

EMG-decel t 0-32767

1

K

ShQvhidPjffeijyices

lease

turn

off

th e

servo

ai%

©

001

0000

MSR

:Motor series

ftll

read<P)

|

All

write

<K)

I

Change

list

(L )

I

Initial

Set(E)

rite

<W )

Conpare<C)

I

is .

Repair

(ft)

End<H)

etail In f

.

<I)

0

Press

Compare

mm



236



Go to

SetUp-Axis

and

change

Drive

Select

Compare

Again

1*

MR-J2-CT

Selup

SoHwaie

(For

M6]

- IMDEX

TABLE(Rolary

Axis

Spec

)

-

[Patamelei

fell

HM.igixi

(H)Help

JffJ

'

>

,

|

IS

[SjSetup

[M

)M

onitor

(A'lAlarm [D]Diaqnosis

|'R]Parameter

;jT)Test-operation:;t;|tJjSetli)pÿAxis::::'' '

'

/V

,;v

:;

-:;

v;,,,.

vV;

it1*

If]

File

m

MM

'

Mm

‘

Bile

name

arameter

table

Wmm,

Set

value

¥nit

Setting

rangeumbe Name ;w

i;

#001

*MSR

:Motor series 0000 0000-EEEEh

ft

&

mm

§

;

#002

-RTY

#003

*PC1

#004

*PC2

#005

*PIT

#006

INP

#007

AT¥

#008

PG1

#009

#010

EMG

jOOOO-EFEEh

egenerative

option

type

:Motor

gear

ratio

:

Machine

gear

ratio

deed

pitch

:

In-position

det<

:Auto

tuning

: Posit ion

loop

gii

f

3

0000

111

&

1

-

i

A::

1

1-32767

if

;

i

l

I

I

4-

*

1

;

1-32767

1-32767

flOOOdeg

1-32767

0000-EEEEh

4-1000

a

$

360

deg

|

a

sSSSSe

m

w.rwi

iv*

vw

*17

I

sWI

>

.

t

m

m

Parameter-maintenance

«

§>

I

i

SMMMN

‘• /erifiJ

was

completed.

t

:

II

m

%

m

3ud

/sec

S

i

I

-20000

_

_

ai

„

—

EMG-decel

time

(

0-32767

ec

,

........

' ;|

\ il

1 1

||

’A

§3

mmi

aft

-WMfssOK

~

Please

turn

off

th e servo

auplif

:*

• .Vrf. r '*I’W'

Vt

-

JJ4iV

'

&i

i

WMim

|||

&MA

WM

0000

001

:Motor seriesMSR

m

A

m

>

•ÿ

I

oirpar

e

<

M l write

<K)

1

Change

list

(L

)

I

Initial

Set<E)

:v.-;s

All

read(P)

rite

<W )

A

Press

ALL

Write

j?

Endra)

A-A

:

hBS

Pos .

Repair

(B.)

e

tail

In f

.

(I)

H'

V-

A

|||

MFN2-CT

Setup

Software

(For

MGJ—

IHDEX

TABLE

[Rolary

Axis

Spec.)*'

-

[Parameter,

list]

k.V EJFile

[S'jSetup [M)Monitor

(AjAlarm (D)Diagnosis

i'PIParanieter

OTTest-operation fiJISetUp-Axis [HlHelp

-Ifll'/

*1

m

$3

File

narK

:

A:\iNBEX.PKM

ararneter

table

Ax,

t,

Se t

value

Unit

,

J

X

X

M

<

Nunbe

Najre

m

m

§3

#001

*MSR

:

Motor

series

0000 0000-EEFEh

mm

I

c

II

002

*RTY

#003

*PC1

#004

*PC2

#005

*PIT

#006

INP

#007

ATU

#008

PCI

#009

#010

EMC

:

Regenerative

option

type

: Motor

gear

ratio

:

Machine gear

ratio

:

Feed pit

ch.

: In-positio:

J

:

Auto

tunin

:

Posit io n

1

:

0000 0000-EFEEh

I

I

I

t

I «

1-32767

1-32767

1

I

I

1

l

i it

>

i

_

gj

Cl

60

ideg

1

1-32767

Leg

1-32767

0000-FFEFh

g

.

Ill

«A»fr

bi\4:r

/ r ' / ,A\vVAWVAV\V

MVCIM *'3

tl\t

9

JLV/M

1

arameter-maintenance

I

:

I

• t

&

m

t

&

4-1000

All

parameters

will

be

written. I

sit

OK?

mi k

-

im

*

*

}?'/$<

lliiif

|

X

t

fflrag

0-20000

V

I

iS i

• ÿ X I

m

:

EMG-decel

0-32767

v

1

$$/ii

iim

N;..

it

nit*

.AY-

V:

WiiMmiMi

- .X-

§§§§

th e

g||

sign. .

If

wm x

m

#

Please

turn

off

th e

servo

a*ÿ

m

Wm:

&

T;

iYi

i/::

VIA;

it

001

0000

mS s

/>

m

ini

MSR

Motor series

gx

:M

A

«'Su.

]

I

iSlsll*

Wa

'iWBIliM

1*1

Write

<W)

Compare

(C )

fill

read CP,

)

§

iilill*

S

Pos.

Repair

A

$1

• &2

Detail Inf.

(I)

m

¥i:

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For

M6)-~

INDEX

TABLE[Rot3i)i

Axis

Spec

)“

-

(Parametei

list

.lelxl

fFjFile (SISelup- (M

)M

onitor

(A'lAlarm

|U)Diaqnosis

.fPJF'arameter

©Test-operation

(UlSetUp-Axis

[H

)H

elp

-

Iffl

;:v-

/

g

-;

:.

:

-

•

• •

t

(.\

u«• v/

• ’ « • • £ : . » ;

&*Ai

Vvf/

fcv-.i

'x

'Jci

/ «• :d*»« tl

•

.* •

?

u»,v. - '

:.y

;;

r.t

T»Ny

e.y

say*

v

<<c>.

*>

v/,<

i?

v

.»/.

*

)>$

i

-/: CCA

•?

>

y/?

;

yw

vyr.v.;*iV>*vi*/y;

Parameter

table

•

v

;ÿ

:

Tile-;\::jiame

>:

$

Set

value I

Unit

I Sett

in g

range

111

ill

Numbe

Name

#001

*MSR

n

Motor

series

0000

0000-EEEEh

8

il

i i

i

002

*RTY

#003

*PC1

#004

*PC2

#005

*PIT

#006

INP

#007

MU

#008

PG1

#009

#010

EMG

5

Regenerative option

type

:

Motor gear

ratio

:

Machine gear

ratio

:Feed

pitch

:

In-posit ion

det

:Auto tuning

:

Posit ion

loop g

0000-EFEEh

000

i

EH

m

M

Mm

i

3

i

11-32767

11

.

11-32767

1-32767

r1000deg

1-32767

0000-EEEEh

1

,:

:: fc

1

360 ideg

II

H;

V’Z X

t

*

W&.1

*

•

Ml

il

m

i

I

n

arameter-maintenance

?ÿ:

I

i

F„

rJHWtt9L

vVriting:was-.c.orupleted.

-=-,

uc

I

ft

•

IS

B

i

:

m

m

s

id/sec

4-1000

8

t

;5

I

0

-

2

0 0

0

0

i

0\i\

I

SJ

I

:

EMG-decel

tine

0-32767

S a*IIiifiBi

iisssf

HHHM|

w-vyy:ÿ

*.V:

:ÿ • • ’ ÿ

1

S.

.......

il

'it-

v2ÿi\>.'c.i

i-i'Jc-C'

',

inlet

er

I

11

''sigh

.

lease

turn

off th e

servo

airplit

m

• ' • > , • . ÿ ('/;ÿ.

.\V>

J’wVOÿ.v/.'r.t

/-v-.-r

i',:

• W'l.‘*V.WOl‘

#001

Motor series

0000

MSR

Kv

—

ll

Ml

wite (R>

|

n

. ,

.

I

_

.

_

_

.

,

_,

i

VTrite

(W)

Goirpare(G)

M l

read<P

)

i

—

....

i

PressOK

Detail

Inf.

(I)

UBS

Pos. Repair

(

Bl)

;';v



Sc

v>;

I®

MR-J2-CT

SETTING

ABSOLUTE

HOME



#

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For

MGJ—

MAGAZINEfRotary

AKIS

Spec.)

BBliil

IFjFile ISJSetup

(M)Monitor.

lAWaim

(DjDiagriosis (R]Par

ameter

ITJTest-operation

'

' '

(U)SetUp-Axis

(HJHelp/

r

s

\MAG.AZINEil]

Axis

Select(C)

,

HI-

r

Spec

13

J

NDEX

TABLE(2)

WSmm

EBB

m

m

M

1

1SI111III



Sii

j§R

§jj

I

msP

I

• r i; 1

i

mm

m

m

i|

i4«»0Sia

IS

i

-

mmmi

%

m

sHSSi«J

151

m

mm.

mm

Ills

ISIS

:;V.V,

'

•

ais

i

i:

i

SSlisiililS

mm

m

H

mm

mmm

iM

iS

HIS

m

VV::

ffii

r

>

I

|pf

1

m

ujjeiÿV.I

Joiiuow(w)

dnjasts)

s| d(dJ

»

1

-v'&'r

244

MSM-

1

WMi

3

is

CL

1

Pit

ilfl

I*

BH

p.

| '

l

liSl*

win?

ill

§mm

lilli

v<;V.

3 X

»

H

isp-

f®

w

*;

wm

tpcjl

-rV-1

W*v

A;:

S*-

ui

ii

**

.Kv£

|

'

®

wAQffi

I®

c

111

*

•

s

:s

.

:

i;;

,

rmÿm

s

o

O

'

t

• p

I£f

I*

Sill*

Mv-S

igjU

PStH

tessiS

*

'

*S**

-

*

1

1

Jfl

«

M.

g

mm

$*®m

ifeP®

Si

s

mm

*

i

gill*

S*w

• *:

Hip

•

8

”

piaS

Mr

&

o

1

%

•

-;

o

si'

**J3.

i

i

j

2

:P4

Si

mm

££

JD

:

m

§gp

%

:m

II

S®

4

i-'io-

JS

Vpjilj::/-;;

OJ

4

:

Ir?1

to mvm.

sss

>

%

c

.

I?

”

...

i

>-V*.T'0

,

Vfe=

IS

m

0M

H

m

ms,

SI

§i£

;•

• '*

S

/

.

;;V-:*

Vi

;S

&

~n

***

\

0>

'__v

3-,..

,

?

ro

siss

.o

• u.

ft

QC

;-:i

00t

m

m

$80

1

it

if

is

WM

»D

0

c

DL

-p

LU

• D

o

g

*

-._y

.O

2

ID

o>

S5

CL

CL

O O

m

fe

-I

o

a

o

-p

.22

• H

*»

CD

Q

OJ

*-

<

H

-

CJl

L-l

i§Sm

fflSjH

msm

. 2

Ilf

iU

LJI

o

w

o

w

Q)

g

o

to

ft

3E

to

W

ai

O

u.

CD

«ll

cu

OJ

Tl

Q.

A

Hi

iWiis

P

<J

tr>

H

-i.

.«

vm

• u

m

'U

to

£ 5

: i l

m

’c

• H

P.

,o;

O

P

01

cm

>

o

• fa

mi

«

>

i

*4

m

ul

I*TI

*§I

0.1

ai

4-*»

cm

CL

4J

01

\

i<0*

J-l

3.

H1

I

*iH

111

fPS

ISS

D

CJ

O

p»

*—

I

'

la

O

o

0J

J

P-,

iH

-.I

: . • -

• H

;Z3

ÿ2)

SI

M

sz;

s

01

P

TH

r?

i i

O

i—I

P

11

C

01 M

>

l

• i—

I

(D

as

'

111iij

L.

u

M

H

1

—

I

H

PH

m

Ml

b.1

s«fc



$$MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For M6)- INDEX

TABLE

(Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

-

[Test

operation]

Baa

i;

-

H

JX

wm

1

J

/t

M

S

......

_

—

1 I

.

S t

I

-**S|

I

*- 'iVf.r.ÿP.

P's

s

'

;; CP

.

O

-

-

.....

flPliStf

;

iSHST

[pit;

IMNcriilO;

MIIIBSJ

'0

ypsx

at,

it o.

J'J

de-grfes

Jog

i.

i:

z

l • :

iia*.' i.

fi

L

.

Cii.‘

jlip

::'v

'cunetei:

group

1

:ÿbc

i

V

Vf

;

:

rit

I

i'Lbboiuuo

'

phsit

tori

.

init ' iai

'

set

tl).

I

ivV/,

s;

i

Completion

...J

mu’ll

Isct.

lifee

:

• >:

:

I

tie

g

re

&

It

2

3

•

to

*

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

[For

M6J—

INDEX

TABLE

(Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

-

[Test operation]

IIH

iPjF'arameter

-J

73|

auuui

tV

(F)File

(SjSetup. fM)M

onifcor

[AjlAlarm

Operation

osition

Step

egree

59.648

Ref

.

return

Jog

W?

-

:

:

ij§

:

7

j

Reverse

R°t.(R)J

i

stOB<0)

1

.....

......

sanatiÿM

a-—

I

mBM

Parameter

group

m

Step

Pa

r

ame t

e r

g

r

o u

p

Hanua

kut/

r

4

Origin-

Se t

(S

)|

~

Absolute

position

in i

tit

nr i'

.

:ÿgmm

rnmm

nitial

set

Initial

set

Origin

Set Completion

:

MMH

iPM

Plÿ—

f

Zero

Point

(B)

Machine

edge

.

?

0

.

000

degree

192.744

..

Ufcv

.•

The

test operation

node is

selected.

I:::-.;--'.

'

'

#

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For

M6)—

INDEX

TABLE

(Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

-

[Test operation]

.

1*1x1

tV

(E)File (S

(Setup

(M (Monitor

[A}dlarm

(D (Diagnosis

fPParameter

[THest-operation.;

fU’lSetUp-Axis

'

I'HlHelp

-Iff

.

i

..........

.........

—ÿg~

..

Sl&ill

2< J

.1

m

m

><v

v*v

iiV

*

era

$

P5wi

•V t:

Position

Operation

P.v;<;'

V

; /V.‘:'

<-

mt

m

Mm

vv-

MHi

#NfBS|Ri|L»

i|

1

1

.;-

• ÿÿ

/dif

Step

59

.

648

degree

<0

S® C

t®

K-xy

mg

.-.

-T-ÿ

' • - • • -

W

£?Si

:

Step

2Eiocle:l/f

ee(a||l(

arameter

group

$

s

51

degree

arameter

group

rt

B

181111111

1/

1000

degree

1/100

degree

1/10

degree

:

DS

/

:•

«

S®

:

:

I

Absolute

position

ini.fc

MlPli

-Set

<

S

)

J

m

1

degree

Sill

_

d

_

mBm

«fl MHnHiR

E

aMtfÿlwwwM8ir

RJgfippi

• • • •

degree;-,

lliili

I

v;r

4

1ÿ*™

yv

).v,

;

Iiid>

nitial

.

se t al set

i.

);

Origin

Set

Piet

ion

WMM%

f

i

-rivd

Machine

edge

.

,

d;‘:

:.

•

V

• '

. • • • •

v.

'

• ”.

.• /i-'.--;/.M.'...:i;:v:-/

5) v

Zero Point

(B)

it

'Mr#

ta

V\

j-

i

is

m

/ÿ'

* ' :• • » •

d

InpL

failliti

0

.

000

mip®

egree

192 .

744

P-.

• . < ÿ ÿ • • . * .

iVU'i

l.V

jg

d

v.

A0;:-

1

v

ft

/;

«ÿ

The

moving

destination

station

number

in automatic

operation

is

selected.

If

0

is set.

It

is a special instruction

as

one

station

rotation.

d:

m

m

$&

?<

•I

/

yi

*

.V ••

'A

MX

ft

,

||

v

;

:mL

mm: vu livUi

WSkw

Hr

IffllSwiWM)

r

ii

mm

Wm

&

• •

‘.V/At/

1

;-•

HR

&

•

\;

$$ MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For M6]—

INDEX

TABLE[Rotaiy

Axis

Spec.)

-

[Test

operation]

I'FjFile

(S)Setup (M)Monitor

(AJAIerm

[ÿDiagnosis

[ÿParameter [DTest-operation flJISetUp-Axis

iHIHelp

-

(

fij

1

1

*

wM

p

;iil

I

.

Operation

osit

io n

Step

6

.

648

degree

iNormal

Rot.

(G)

:

.

a

i

I

2

1

t

rm0&

:

Step

inode

feed

arameter group

1

degree

j::l

1

ar

ame t

e

r

gr

o

up

1

?;

.

• ;

2

IPtFerse

Rot

.

<R>

jsj

I

JlfiSSiS

|«

“

.

i.

degree

;

;

—

J

y

>

:

A :

-i

,

lllillilllillll

&

_

”

Absolute

position

initial

set

(A)

v-‘‘R

Origin-Set

<S)

IS'M

stop<0>

lili

nitial se t

nitial

set

• :

V;

'

mar

1

ompletion

rigin

Set

m

Machine

edge

ero

Point

(B)

0

.

000

192

.

744

egree

It

is

possible

to stop

xiith

th e SHIFT key.

:ui>y

/ÿ

-V;.

'

-:V

pti

S'*

MR-JZ-CT

Setup

Software

(Foi

M6J—

INDEX

TABLEfRotaiy

Axis

Spec.]

-

[T

est

opeiation]

kV

(F)File (S]Setup (M)Monitor

(AJAIarm

(D)Diagnosis

fPjP.arameter

fTITest-operatiori

fU IS

etU

p-Axis

'H 1H

elp

—

It?

I

.l]

1

n

,

I

I

,

|

rnmmmM

8iaag»»il»laaiÿ{iii«aaii

-**-£

,

—3

.

Bev™. Eot <»l

i.§-

tfjSpgi

MMi

Position

Operation

degree :

Step

6

.

64ci

Step

arameter group

1zl

1

degree

ar

ame

ter

g

r

o

up

1

Absolute

position

initial

set

(A)

rm

•

Sr

t/VtviCtv:-

Origin-Set

<S)

::

'

-OOP

lilffpjlMI

I

/ÿtop<0,

a

te i

nitial

se t

nitial

set.

m

m

ompletionrigin

Set

___

__

_

__A_

.0,V:'

i

Machine:

edge

OdlPiApP

-

_

•

„

Tp:;'

i

1

Ena(S) |

ero Point

-(B)

m

ililllll

flHMSRRMKM

,,

<•

-

;

;

ffi

7

n;

It is

possible

to

stop

with

th e

SHUT

key.

0

.

000

192

.744

egree

tv

Vi.

‘?Jy

m

i

;

i

ftf?MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

[For

M6)—

1

INDEX

TABLEjRotagy

Axis

Spec.)

-

[T

est

operation]

Bgia

=.

....

-

SWSliiia*

illllllÿÿ

SelectJoa

_

A;

4

,?Sty,

.............

ji

..;

V.

1

1

.

V'

s*ai

iFFlis

(S)S*4> up

;

(MIMqpifcir

;

(AiAlasra

.

Ijipagnodf

'

Up £•

1C

Sr t-

l

ull

• . -..•

.i..

l_i

(

•’.

.J

o

g

degree

I.

Ref

o return

Pter£KS;t;e:feu'gro'up

i

a

;

:arr

\

ete

r

g

r o

u

p

1

>4‘

1113

i

I

v a:

Click

on Box

dr

let

r

ft

.:

.

f

r

,

:

Udldd

mmmvÿ

v'e:

;3 0

tm

k<-

m

omp

let:

ice

;.

,

in

:;1

.......

-V..

-

&§g

is

to

•

Point

ilsohine

I

degree

;ÿ

92

. 744

.

'*

vfKCT -

----

.. ..........

a,

I'l'li.a

best

operation made is selected.

IF

fil

mm

mggmm

it®

>'? s

r

t

,

t-'crtc

<$M<W

>

|

*»•

.'

'Cs'J

'

1

?$MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

[Foi MG]—

INDEX

TABLEfRotary

Axis

Spec.)

-

[Test operation] ||||||||j

;p|

iayi,

;o

:si*

[Pÿracsigeÿ

If

lift

i

-

;

;

*

/«'

.....

...>.,ÿ

__

L

......

.....

.....-.N

;ÿ

Fftt?oKl7''pc=iSn

.....

SSSEtS U£r

.......

;

.

'-

ppear

insi.U-Bm-1

,

i-.,,,,,,..

:

«ÿ»

mm?

-

—

nMMMpfc

_

j

0-

'

-V::

riapHHi

MHtttai

UrJk*

S-'iSÿtup.. . i3bl]Hprtitor;-;-:(&jÿiscÿ/v

.

' • .ÿ•E- :

' • * ' •

.

.>

..

’

: . • ' - *

V

.

• * . .

'

•

•

t

1

-

.

\

j\

.’v

-’

•

i ’?.-

-

.

J

'«

.,*.-•

• - , •

• 4

>•

it

'

m

i.

_J

i f

f f

“

, i

'-

r

ai:

mm

t

e.

r

gr

o-up.‘

•

v./:

:=;

s-i

•

*iC:

u

e

r

gr

o

up

1

up

ii

X

will

a

Origin

set

IfeOlmne

’'ecig;s

Zejro

Po:i

• I , . *

.:

'•

-

'

/*

alii

egree

'1

192

.744

u

I

\rSh.e

is

snanred

in

Jog or Step

mode

a.nd match

to

a

sero

point

of

th e

[machine

.

jSisase

push

<Origin

Sat

<

S

?

>

button,

L

2a

$ÿMR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(Foi

M6)--- INDEX TABLE(Rotaiy

AK'IS

Spec.)

-

[Test

operation]

sin

a

r*i 5

c.

U

l„':

£2

Lip-Op

iM.jMo.4or

l

'DLiÿno-r-;

•

}T

l.ÿÿtnÿi::

;.\;Lb

«:;,;

4

r«u

n

n

Pÿi—

Depress

Origin-Set

I

-2?

r

r~447~i'-

-

'i

.....

:

ii,

MM&MNi

............

niaÿpaSji

1S1SII

mm

m

i

t ion

i

F

a

c

sme

t

e.v

grp

1?

&

F

ar

nme

r.

e r

gr

o

up

1

:

:y.

i

~

y •> /ÿ

v

V-

1

*

-

<

‘

•*

>•«.<

|

<v

F.b

s

Q

1

u

::e

;po

s

i

*1

n

; .ina

i

*.>

•

•

>»

in

•

•

I

;

'

sat,

i

Origin

s

Oar.trine

edga

iv:

-;

itSSlilf

v\m.

$0£

• The

a>d.&

is moved in

Jo g or

Step

usde

and match

to

a -zero

point of

th e

Imscft:

i :ae

,

.• • • • .'ÿ..

please

push

JQrigin

Se t

<

S

)

>

button.

Op*

mmmm

ivi

=J.

“

:'

:

r

:* v’

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

[For

MS)—

INDEX

TABLE[Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

-

[T

est

operation]

Jfllxl

BP~

—

“s*“

“*

-“i

OMI

.

;

.

.

mm

:

Ml

.

_

..

Depress

Norma

Rot.

I

jNownal

(G)J

tV

iDFile

gjSetup

[M

)M

onitor

(A'jAiarm

Operation-

;f

osition

1

zJ

egree

Jog

30

.051

>-ÿ

;

• “

End(a)

I

lpll««p»

_

m

m

yParameter

-group

i:/k

>zi

-..oogpi

i

P

ar aicie t e

r

gr

o

up

$

IK

Absolute

position

initial

set

(A)

V

1

>•

——

I

•

(Si

'ÿ

-•

*• ’ÿ•

»

V

-

.' \ygm

'

gVl

j

•

ilf

L

Origan-

Set

<

S)

m

nitial

sat

1

1

nitial set

f®

Origin

Set-

Origin

set

Zero

Point.

(B)

Machine

edge

<

0

.

000

degree

egree

192.744

>0

; ;.lv-

-

The axis

is moved

in Jo g

or

Step

mode and match to

a zero

point of th e

machine ,

Please

push

<0r±g±n

Set<S)>

button.



Axis

will

Rotate

Will

Stop

at

Z

Phase

This is not new Home

c

r

_kse

At

K

,1

1

66 ’

'//

/'tÿ

Cycle

Power on Machine

wmMiiiiSi

WiUfSMSSiSiit

MillMI

MiMiSMM

P

US

I

ttiist

iim

mmm

[

fKfflSK

m

,

NN

g?

:<s

=li

A

iiiiiii

ÿ

M£i

%

W&m

m

tar

ÿST/

i=‘ÿ'JS%

V'*'

f

>A

s*

»ssg

fyA

%

.M

A

r«

s

a

;1:

iifiiiiii

m,

<5

• 4

H

g?

mimmm

tMimMM

IIIIISI

Bill

2*

Si

g§

50

Sggg

SIBII*

l

.....

.

.

.

•.

. .- .

.

y.

. -. ”

''

/.

.

IS8ii

<3

mmmmm

is

•

A

m

w

<3

ft

w

i

,9

&

Xs\':

a

• X--N>

iÿB

Start

%

w

m

%

g

Accessories

g

Desktop

On-Call

fo r

Mazak

g

Intel

LA,

N+Modem

PC Card

§1§|

g

KEY

HISTORY

Ig

Main

g

MAZATROL

FUSION 640

fg

;<ÿ

*

a

v'.sYV/-.

• *%ÿ ./ /i

‘A'A'y

£4*

S'

':c

»

liitili

jjj

Spls

&

vm.

3»

HH

SwT1

ri™’?

HI

Is

MR-J2-CT-M6

Setup S_W

I

MR-J2-CT-M6

Setup

S_W

I'J

WiriZip

g

NetOp

Remote

Control

_

g

Online

Services

g

ORiNOCO

g

F'rintkey

g

StartUp

g

WinZip

Internet

Explorer

—

MS-DOS

Prompt

C3

Outlook

Express

l§ ) Windows

Explorer

mmm

MMM

§3

I

lÿj

Programs

.

Documents

©

Settings

€• «

m.

*

•

|

,:3

Find

*

0

Help

Run...

V

-

.

|

IÿJ

Shut

Down...

• < ; * ÿ

1113

HI

;r

K.

*ÿ

..........

......

.......

.....

.....

«nfe:

;

®£S®

'SJJ®:®®

;

.....

->n

i l i i lÿdnps

Pÿs

.

:'

;

4-.

,» ’ÿÿ

f

,

3je SP

: :

•:

J

b

•>

:

.

sjsj S; j

.'

hi

§V

' b-

';

?.

i

gffttfHHl

*;®i|lil

'*,'\

i- i

<

i.

.'**''

v.

;<-bV-\~bi:r'i:>

V-v

i

mt

I

i

ISM

IF '

jiii

>M

.



**

MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(Foi M6]-,'MAGAZINE(Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

mum

I'FjFi'e

(S;Setup

(M)Monitof

(AjA'arm

.

(D)Diagnosis (P)Parameter

(IJTest-operation

I

||||M

MAGAZINE

II)

I

_

JEB3E3BHII

Axis

Spec.

(5)

[

iHIHelp,

;

U)SetUp-Axis

Axis

Select(C)

SgfAg'S#

s

mm

a

wgggsis

.

I

'

'

'

I

m

m

t.

T;.;a

%

H

-J

.

|ag«

iwi

i

.

1

.

&

r,

*

;

V,

v

s'rk*

’

r

....... .

.

.ÿ

'rS-

Ji-V.*

i

',M5

Aa

j

i A

#Sn

1’FJFile

(SJSetup

[M]Monitqr

I'Aÿ.larm

fPJPararoeÿrF.r.QÿlTsM'ÿPÿtstipiiÿAlM-lS'e’tid'pjÿKi'C'AFfHOHelp.

;

• V i

;;5?

Si

»wW1

•

><

ij

' /ÿÿ F

gfiSiarc

A

.v.v

##<'

'1

PWR l2£r

situp

Software

(FoijM6)i”MAGÿNElBotary

Axis

Spec

r

a

j

CEFile

[S)Setup (M)Monitor

lAftlarm

[D)Diagnosis

PjPararneter

'.,

.lljTest-operatÿ

WW#

»Tÿflp«a,rph

r-r

3£*

'i

I

v

: :;

*;ÿ

. •ÿSX*J

vtf.

.' ;

sa

1

Position

Operation

ÿ:ÿ

..

i

l

•

...

• '

/

i

I

Vjiv.V :

d

—

i

ftjjv

Jog

egree

1

Normal

Ro

t

.

<

G

)

1

>

ta-

J

>

i

I

W>

'• >

'

.

.

.,.

.

.

*p

MUMP

i

.

.

-

1

*8

I

Parameter

group

;Vr

18

p

d

.pi,,

2

Par

sane te r

group

1

I

I

%

Re1

verse

E)

—

1

t

;

mw

m

:v

$

P

r

I

-

81

:

vi

|

;

3

P

Absolute

®€®

s

posi

H

est-oper

ation

ft

I

Operation

by

the

external

input

signal

becomes

invalid in

the,

test

operation.

Is

it

UK

?

f

'

.

.

_

,11

»ft

fiw:;:

_1

B

1

1

1

mmgmmmsmm

WY3jn

i

H

I

Initial set

I

i

as

',$

Cancel

OK

Pi

smm

MS

Zero

Point

(B)

• t

P

:,;.y;:-.

prltAft#

degree

;

I

£1

degree

a

i

:

j'jt-t

Y-iV*-

Julia

• >

‘r

i

P-tv'

1

':

PS

.’.,

Mi

ossible

i

to s

t

fcV**

b

It

is

I

isppfr

aj

vv.

I

V;

I

:llv;'Vvv.

.:V vV

%i

l.gulu*'

-

vf

• A

’/

1

s

i

I

prrS.iv

• > > >

.-

;

;<-f

• P b,

1 ;

iai8Ills®;i«

)

'lllil

».

;£ÿ

1

J

1

$$MR-J2-CT

Setup

Software

(For

MB]-MINDEX

TABLE

(Rotary

Axis

Spec.)

iia

©File

|S)5etup [MjMoriitor [Aÿlarrn

[D'lDiagnosis

(P)Parameter

iTJTett-operation

IJJ

jS

etU

p-Axis

lHjHelp

\

|

I

m

x

est

operation

A

‘

:

.ÿ

sjp

.

i

?:

Operation

osition

mm

mm

A

EC

Ref.

return

8

.

689

degree

Ti

Normal

**.<£>

n;

%

Refÿ

return

f*

#

m'M

{Parameter

group

Wf$M

....

......

dis®

,

1

’?>V

«I18

ara

tie

te r

group

1

£\\

TMial

fiuitornat

ic

xil

r

se

JUjt;v<E)

.

&

$

8

1

r~

r

Absolute

position

initial

set

(A )

siistsis

mm

rigin-Set

<

S)

lii

8®

jm

mmmmmmmmmmMl

,y

o

\ <

»

Initial

set

'VVM

>ÿ

Initial

set

foXsV

:

v

Vi,/'

..;.;

v,V

i

Completion

rigin

Set

$

mi'.

W-

v

I

:

Ov

End(]l)

y:

*111

laohine

edge

M

Zero

Point

(B)

if.

I

ft

.

1

SS

0

.

000

_

__

egree

.

egree

68 . 950

llwpl®

The

test operation mode

is

selected.

m

m

H

i

ri.;.'......:nÿ;,:,;:ÿ;;2:

IVAA

voo

M

I

s

1

|§fl



Axis

will

home to

new

position



263



264



Servo Drives

•

MDS

DH

•

Black in

color

•

400 volt

•

Quick

disconnect

of motor wiring

•

Has a

replaceable

fuse

for

control line

voltage.

•

New generation

power

module

•

Fiber

optic

linked.



Comparison

DH

to

CH

•

r*'

_____

iWWjjffB#lTi4-iilli.

J*—

mrH

FiberOptic

Eectnca

_____

I

.

y

.

|

Thermistor

sensor

Thermal

swiÿgpl

Anal°g

sl° al

I

—

HC

motor

:

(3,QOOrpm)

mms

Interface

V.-

-

Motor

temperature

measurement

cv

Spindle

Motor

Encoder(

PLG

)

Serial

Interface

1

mm

yz-?:

HF/HP

motor

*

Servo Motor

WM;

(4.000rpm)

41

i

SisIHisalii

16

million

p/r

yj_

_

-i

g

asm

§§

Encoder

pulse/rev

m

ui

ii

.

;

:

m



• i

Features

and

Enhancements

iw

mmmm

High

iTi

i

feTiS

*3|

1

1wii*

r«

ML

l

mi

iffifftlwl*

fiflf

*mW&.

w&w.

?vÿSi

T-V

::

•

M

New

CPC

CNC

unit

and

1

6 million

pulse

encoder

ensure

high

speed,

high

precision

operation in sub-

micron

control,

B

New

servo

system

and

16

million pulse

encoder

with

smooth

interpolation'

improves

roundness

by

38

%.

(VARS,AXfS“500.,R25rnm.F1000mrn/mtn)

H

New offset

method

has

been

developed

to

control

stick-slip

and spikes at

quadrant

changes

in

circular

interpolation.

• ;

A':-

:»V;

X

,

AS,:

;

• •

;

}f

.

srit

f

fSW

iw

MISS

m

li

m

2

1

r

arid

Ihign

Speed Current'

Control

fi

High

efficiency

spindle

motor

and

5

times

higher

frequency

current

control,

amplifier

reduce motor

heat generation

by

12

% .(

high

speed

,

no-

load

operation)

......

;

S;

w



Mr-J2sB-CT4

•

400

volts

available

•

Enhanced and

new

parameters

for

better

performance

•

Auto-Tuning

is

enhanced.

•

New

alarms,

including

overheat.

•

Capabilility

to

upgrade

the

software

of

drive.

•

Easy

disconnect instead

of

terminal

blocks

A

MDS-DH

If

U‘.

JÿmLJwSisl

MM

£lgÿ

:..r

Ti

'

mm

fill

mm

‘• i

if

m

1

.vÿy

11

IIS

iw

K*

issif

:

H

Mil

:

<

• • • ;

ill

t$&W

ffl

&

;i

V

Jl

i

JI

K-VT,:

1

1

j

ill

111

jl

:

I

Mp

ill

a

J

il

A

ES

>

33S

.

iJ?'--

• • J .

:

'

I

-;

-'•ÿ'ÿÿ>

..'.vfr'fr

tea

asm

V:'

f

«

111

i¥

£j

s

v:f-‘

:|

gS

*

p

:

.f*

Wz/ÿ

|fljjf§

t

B

f

L/U

'f-«

f

f;®

I

5

Quick

Disconnect

Motor

Leads

w m

>

Top

of_Drives_

Fiber

optic

connection

I

B

aaaauSSg

mam

|gg3ÿg-

.'-rb-*...

I

IB

1

R|

$JL

I

Ji

A

I

mem

9

.41

ir

. - .• • y 'Mv .

i

4:

i

e

:

r

w.;ÿ.

»*i<y--ÿ.

'>../&.,

-

:::;

rit

ft

IPIifcSSJ:

*1

illil

r

iB

i

.

j,

i

y

'}

£

s

i

.'

W4

i

IfffiSS

‘jSsi;

«ÿ

w

- -i

:

ÿ:

l'.

.

H;

£F

I

ui

I

¥:i|

• : ÿ -

ll gggÿ

V

;i

p,

<

I?

'ÿÿÿ

mm

t

****• ;

TP

:,;

I

i-as

Mm

/

>y

5?

•

IP'vvM

sllimKKS

i

;

n

i

S

i

g?

It

JI?

£

l*jilr

:;.'l$*.,(Ai.

iyg

BoK*M»'

ga

'ÿfrcf

•r

:•

S'J

|i

'

liiHi

«3

m

m

M

I

gg

m

m

lfazj

* :

;

>i~

'

If*

n

mum

•

-£

$.;4

;.V:-.*F

. : • :

u;

I

m

rtÿ

L

.

V -4:

L

#la INIMi

|H;

..«

; |l

p-~i

--

ta |

• ]

UPSi

.

v.. a

r

•

sc

>

li

i

gywjwn

X:

• v;

Jpg

fip

ste

V

I~ T£

c;

J-I

;

i

Sr j

;

J

m

smSSBi

i

o

ri

i

• v

J

i;i,

out

of

drive.

Battery

for

Absolute,

can

be

in

ot



-•

TS

mS-SSS-l

ÿ

/

•

5-tf

t:

ik¥b4

*yj(

i®

S§«

&«gf

£r~

WSBBM

Mm

P*j

-.a

-ÿ.

„-« ;•

*3

&j£

ip

I*

ill

i i

i

w

A

,S

Oil

1

PR

i

:i

M

i

f.

ill

w

&

r.

1

mn

4

f

;

j

.

t>

«ÿ*«

*

3?

—

rrr

f|

;

guLZEÿ

jjLjW;

MU*

'-w|

.__

I

gflflsl

v

m

i

||feÿ J

kfc

mm

»:

j

m

*M A

• TO

ws**Wss'3c

s

Mi

ppppl

KÿiMaBs»ra

i

1

I

»

JilSTjf,

SSMSSMI

li

22MfflniH?Lt

a

st

i

I

i

w

gs®

8

ITH

9H

h

rSva

sgffli

-

•

:i

0

i

pHawi

1

iiii

uoipeuuoo

AO

0}

OAjes

272

’;W~~

f

\

,

,

:-

•

WÿBI§?V,TH

UMIS

;;

'

-pam

I

SUffil

it

M

WMm

:4Wli9|

P

'

. 118111?®

«ÿ“**

i-U

M i

1111

*£>• ' * .

>

aaa«

IfeiaiaPa;.

HR

iii

Mi

:V «

BE

—

“

• : .Yv: '>

.ÿ

o

8®®i

LÿJ

Bltlgs

,

;g2i

x

;ÿÿ • “

•’

rr

»H1

1

1

®

i

.

2

41

rj

i«:,-

,

.

.;..ÿ8S

.;:

.-j

si «

• €’ fm

£$l*5

M

§

«.

M

r

i

p

s

'

;;

v

fÿSm

B

*

*;

• Iv

?

a*:ÿS’f.'>'-:.

is s

su.P

IC2

5

i

; 1

i§l;

'• ÿ

$*

r‘

||

«

g\

f

'

ptefeaÿ.

IS

fix'

1

S\S

• ;:

o

m

V

./;

\

>r Xs Vrv

:ÿN'

IE

.-;

*V:

i

•

.

S

18

33

ft

4|l’«tli

j

'

ilp.-f

lifis

1

'Hri

J

• *• •

-d

X-i

I

31

Ht

cn

-

-

»

I

-v*

-*•»ÿ•

,

*

-

w*

.

*

'. • . • - *.

.*.• - i* r*

•

*

**•.- ,

:V.

;X’.-<V'

-

-•

• « ' '- i ' •

•-ÿ

-

<.a&

IS

'

M®*K

:

ÿ$ÿÿ’

v.

&n

1

v-ÿ

S

ft

f

si?[

»

v

•

;J<'X

-'

:.:

;.

'r.

,i;

x:

*;

;\ '

-H-l-

—

~

-

si

IS

o

:v

as

':ÿ

.:;-'ÿVX;Vr

MS

gigs

• y.

O

I

T*'ÿ

Wi

*y.;Vv

• • :

:

e-

...:'

|-

s’.j-

a

//..;.ÿÿ

g-

il

1

•

-

.v

<?

O

(Xy.v>

:'i

</;

•

.

'

•

till

III

x

-

&§ÿ>

|itx|i;||>|f |v

III

...|I

|

;

p

I

l

l

|i

xi

1

1|

Iff

xf

1

1

1

:

Iiiiteikifeif

CM

[

a '.

&ÿ.

V;

lilSL.

•.

»

I3‘:>vv

ÿ.- > -• '

V

I

ci.VXS

• X*

%

BB

(/)

g

X:>-

[K

CM

p»-

jiXrXM

feiX

:

<•

• -

gr.wr»w»

..

...-

—

—

r.ÿ;

.'ÿ

tX-'X

:

-

•

:.

.

Qdii®-

v-‘

I

'A'*:.'

.....

ÿ•

1

MBHiiiffl

w&sfesaeD

-

1

M

Kwm

‘laÿga

l

*

SA-yuro

y yy:-:y

yyyyÿ-s

ai:

_-

j--..ÿ

|

I

iniiiiiM

{ÿ• ÿa

rr*U.

:ÿal

;lj

$

C

ii

:

JZZ

S

S?

-

Qi'lÿ

wm

h

pi

-

f

f

I#.

'X*S

Tf.

•

>

y

v

::S'V

v

•

'i

'1'

v

*



-9

'

;|

f:.

f.\

MR-J2S-200CT4

,'v

111

SM

-J-Vtÿ:

:

1;

i.

• „ ' ÿ?

-i'l.

; ’; • .

“31.

i:

-

J*

I

Jfe

wim

j;

;i-

400

volts

Larger

than

the

equivalent

MR-J2

Uses 24 Volt for Control

voltage

(MCC)

Has

Quick

Disconnects

CV'.-tt

:V

IIS

i

j

.

Si

?:

;

11

/

&

f

0

11

i

• I

0

'Kith

»wiS

:-

:

«•

:

%

%

1'V

rf ii .

'

*_

_

s

-T4-

i

Quick

Disconnects

{•

la

I

’]

l

L

ih?

ill

I;

:

i

t

:

5

v.

:

'1

-Li

.

L

rfC*

m,

i;

r

0

;

&

Si: -':

:i

if

W

@1

f

libs

tiamaflirf

4

I

;

sa

1

y

i«ipi

r

j.

-

-

is

'

•

fJVinsUBSSHI

—

wBaB

/V''MBiiU|

¥S®

SB*

• *10.aVci<<&::

Mr-J2S-350-CT4

400

volts

Terminal Strip

24 volt

Control

V*

'

v

’ v

A

A'

''

w%m

M

A

m

,,:A-

IS

ffisg

if

,-&iu£

ii

ifA

i

1 I

n

I

?

.

ii

IE

r> :

h

a

s

ri p

|

ft

5?~S

B

A

v

(«»

%

I

s

*

PPL

;

#A

I

|

A

i

P

I

iy

IS

A

<l.

5*y

E.

• AA

m

A

r

HI

:

a

,

i

f

-

PU

*

A

• • • ' ÿ' -

V

if®*.

vy

'

'v

'

E

:Iil

E

‘g

EE

tE ÿ

ft

u

l ;

.

v

'

I

WV

A

{• ;

ET

u

m

t

E

g3»g«;en«

HMW

«**

aatag -

'

liÿPsT

........

:

-

.

jfe

V-V

'IwKatesgigBga

......

tiiifiiiafc

I.

E

m

m

'A:

fiK1,-'

:

EE’

m

i

A':

WMMM

A

a

*

m

2

1111

iS-ÿlS

EE..

J

K<m

A.

-

9,

.

--

4A.;:w

H

?,M'r>..mJ»

1

;;

HJHI

m

I

A

’

/

Jill

BKSSBSBBm

L

<6

3SStfSf*K

rawiifcM

JsÿM

UN

BB



-*

*•

IKraggjg*

&

JP*

si

$£

JE

n

KM

3

;* i

./

K.-;:,v'

i

S||5

p-

jf

;ÿ*

jfV|

f§

y-.

i

PSi

-:v

I

K,.-'

;-

..ÿ5

j

'

mil

• ' ÿ*’

'»

'

• 'ÿ'»

„• ÿ'

-v

.

,..-

-

-1®

-

r

n

sum

I

m

m

BB

9

v;;::.-g:V:

am

a

a

BiSSis

I

'I'

?:• • ÿ

;.

‘

V

Si

.

'

*

»

,J

1

*

SiSllilSIgiil

m

Kill

H-dH

L1



Spindle

PLG

•

Spindle

Pig

TS5690

is

a

serial

type

and

is

used

by

Mazak.

Every

machine

but

Integrex

•

Consists of

a

pig

pickup

and connects

directly to

the

spindle amplifier.

(No PreAmp).

• Waveform

adjustment

is

not

needed.

Only

need

to

set

the

gap

distance

of

.3mm

»

Cannot

view

waveform,

so

Mitsubishi

is

preparing

a

diagnostic

function

in

future

to

determine

whicn

pig

or

drive.

Checks

position

and

speed.



Spindle

Pig

cont.

•

Used on

Igx200

to

400

series

ERM289 plus

APE391

H

(H/H)

Heidenhiem

•

Reason

that

we use

is that

the

Heidenhiem

can

get

to

higher resolution

than

can

be

obtained

from the regular

pig unit.

•

Phase

A

waveform

rides 2.5

v with

peak

to peak

of

1

.0

volt.

Turn

dial

on

pre-amp,

one

is

for

volume,

other

is

for

phase-shiÿ.T

•

Phase

B

has

same adjustment.

•

Adjust

phase

Z

so that is 60

percent

of

Phase

A.



Spindle

Pig

cont.

•

Spindle

Pig

TS5691

is

also

a

serial

type

and is used

by

Mazak

only on

Mpx

or

Igx

machine

for

lower

milling

turret.

Gap

is

.15mm



279

MDS-D/DH-SP series

The

adjustment

manual

for

the

spindle

PLG

TS5691

(Spindle

serial

detector)

Tentative

version

*

The

adjustment

manual contents

of

the

serial detector

TS5691

series

*

1

.Application

P2

2.Type name

P2

----

2

.Serial

detector

TS5691

composition

P3

.

Adjustment

procedure

flow

5.Adjustmet method

P4-P8

280

1.

Application

This book

applies

the adjustment

points

of cereal

detector

TS5691

series

(MDS-D/DH

exclusive

use).

2.Type name

TS5691series

3.

Serial

detector

TS5691

composition

(1)

The

serial detector

TS5691

is composed of

the

sensor,

the

preamp,

and

the

detection

gear.

The entire composition

and the

closeup of

PCB

are shown in Figure

1,

and

the function of each volume is shown

in

Table

1

and

the

function of

each

check

pin is

shown

in

Table

2.

M

Whole

composition

chart

Sensor part

PCB (

refer

to Figure

)

Closeup

Preamp

part

Sensor

holder

9

m

1H3

i

Preamp

connector

(White)

__

,

Sensor

connector

(white)

e

Detection

gear

J

Check

pin

(PO)

|p)inted

wiring

board

closeup

iigurq

Check

pin

(PA.PB,PZ.PC)

PA

PZ

PO

15

5

r

o

I

jTn

PB

PC

• VR2 :

VR4

T

[©]

I.

it

i

L

ilÿVRI

VR 3

VR5

'////

-J

Figure

1.

Closeup

of

PCB and

the

composition

of the

entire detector

Table

I.

Function of volume

Fable 2. Function

of

check

pin

l%i

name

Function Pin

name

Function

olume

Function

A

phase signal

A

PB

B

phase signal

Rl A

phase

ofTset

adjustment

A

phase

gain

adjustment

PZ Z

phase

signal

PC

Middle

point

Voltage

R2

PO

Ground

(0v)

VR3 B

phase

offset

adjustment

VR4 B

phase

gain

adjustment

(Z

phase

width

adjustment)

<ÿ

VR5

Basically, It

is not

necessary.

(2)

In this

detector,

A phase,

B

phase, and

Z

phase

are

output

from

the sensor to

the

preamp

as the

analogue

signal.

It

is

output

from

the

preamp

to

control

amplifier

(MDS-D/DPFSP) as the

serial

signal.

(3) Please

use

the sensor

and the

preamp

by

the

same

serial

number’s

combination.

(4)

Please

note

handling

enough

so

as not

to

apply

the

scar to

each

part.



281

4.Adjustment procedure

flow

The confirmation

and

the

adjustment of

the

output

signal

of

TS5691 are done

according

to

the

following flow.

Start

V

(Step.1)

Sensor

holder

installation

(Gap

adjustment)

Install

the

sensor

holder

on the

motor.

The

gap

is 0.1

5mm

between the

sensor

and

detect

gear.

X

(Step.2)

Preamp PCB

Installation

v

(Step.3)

Connection

of

cables

V

(Step

.4)

Adjustment

of

A/B

phase

signal

Adjust

the

output

amplitude of each

A/B

phase

signals

by

using

the

volume

to

2000mV

±

1

0mV.

V

(Step.4)

Check Z

phase

signal

It

is

not

necessary

to

adjust

it

basically

only

by

a

wavy

confirmation.

V

END



282

5. Adjustment method

«

Step

1

»

Sensor

holder

installation

(Gap adjustment)

M5 screw

Sensor holder

Sensor

Installation surface

Detect

gear

Figure

2.

Installation

of

the

sensor

holder

c

O

S

ensor

holder

_

_j

n

Sensor

&

Gap=0.1

5+0.01

mm

Detect surface

/-\r}

Outer

of

detect

gear

Detect

gear

Figure

3.

Adjustment

of

the

gap



283

« Step

2

»

Installation

of

Preamp

PCB

Screw

Protection

cover

\

Preamp PCB

Don’t insert the insulation

washer

into

these

spaces

]

Stud

Y

Y

Figure

4.

Installation

of

preamp

on stud

«

Step

3

»

Connection of

cables

(1)Connect the sensor cable and Preamp

connector

[TCD

I

I

1

[©]

[©]

To

the

spindle

unite

i

L

I

H

EK BB S

a

T

Preamp

connector

ISensor cable connector(White)

To

the

Sensor

Figure

5.

Connection

of

Preamp

and

Sensor

connector

284

(2)Connect

the

preamp

cable

to

PLG

F/B

cable (CNPE1

).

Preamp

/

a

„

<

Connect to CN2A

E

§

PI

I

J)

I'O)

I PLG

cable

(CNPE1)|

[Preamp

connector

iH

IP‘»n»v*H

Spindle

unit

Figure

6. Connection of

PLG

cable

(3) The chart

of

PLG

cable

connecting wires

Amplifier side

connector

(Japanese

Molex

Inc.)

54593-101

1

(connector

housing)

54594-101

5(plug

cover

A)

54595-1 005(plug

cover

B)

58935-1

000(shell cover)

58934-1

000(shell

body)

58937-0000(cable clamping)

Detector side connector

Pin:

1

70363

-4(AMP)

Housing:

172

169-

1

(AMP)

PLG

cable (CNPE1)

Signal

name

;

0.2mm2

SD

7

X

X

SD*

8

0.2mm2

RQ

3

X

RQ*

4

0.2mm2

MTl

-

H

5

>o<

6

MT2

0.5mm2

7

xzzx

+5.0V

0.2

mm2

0.5mm2

+

2

X

X

5G

0.2mm2

9

FG

Figure

7.

Chart

of PLG cable

connecting

wires

•

Recommended

electric

wire:

Made of

Bandoudensen

BD20288

(The

shield

cable

of

compound

six

pairs specification

No.

-17145)

285

«

Step

4

»

Adjustment

of

A/B

phase

signal

(1)

Setting of

the

open

loop

control

*1)

In case

of

IM

motor (SP017=0xxx

or

2xxx),

Set

bit1=1

ofSP018

parameter,

then turn

off/on the

power

line once.

*2)

In

case

of IPM

motor

(SP0

1

7=1

xxx

or

3xxx),

Set

bit1=1 of

SP01

8

parameter,

and set SP1

13=10 (speed

setting

for

open loop control),

then turn off/on

the

power line

once.

(2)

Turn

on the spindle unit

and

NC,

rotate the

spindle

head

to

CCW

direction

by the

standard

rotation

speed.

PLG gear

type

(p/

rev)

Standard

rotation

speed (r/m

in)

arameter

SP020

8000

10012

6000

384

140

4000

256

200

2000

128

400

*

The

calculation

formula for the

standard rotation speed.

The

standard rotation speed(r/min)=200(r/min)x(256/PLG

gear

teeth

number)

<

Example

>

In

case

of

PLG

gear

teeth

number

is 1

28

p/rev,

200x256/128=400r/min.

(3)

Adjust

A/B

phase

signals

by using

the

volume

to2000mV±10mV.

V(TP

1000mV±5mV

B

phase signal

A

phase

signal

Vdc 0±10mV

VP.p

2000mV±10mV



286

« Step

5

»

Check Z

phase

signal

(1

)

Confirm whether the

Z

phase width

is

60%±5 of

A

phase

signal

at

one

cycle.

A

phase

1

ÿ

100%

Z

phase

60

±5%

Z

phase width

becomes about 0.7ms

at

the

standard rotation

speed

When

the

adjustment ends,

stop

the

motor

rotation

,

and

press

the

emergency stop

button.

And

return “0 to“1” of

bit

1 of SP018 (SP113

is returned

to

0

for IPM).

Finally, turn off

the

power

supply

of NC and

the

spindle

unit

,and turn on

it

.

2 8 7

rt£M

bO

f-T

C\

-JCt

>

*v >

|

;?P

:

a>;

n

<c

a

Q.

&

t,

Y1

S-o

'

i

I

I

r

•

.y.--

Q

IK

f

©i

H

r

\

K

CO

’V

p-

-ÿ 3

©ÿ

.'

1

/

©

\

<0

L

i

©

*

5

i

CJl

?

r

V

©

-

Up

r

\

i

<J)

I

:

\

-I

<&

CO

©s|

1

\

*

<

1

I

i

?•

wt

>

%l

**

I-

n

;

•

m

I

~

—

I

CL

y

*

;°

r

• •

’

5

9

—

-~m

a

I

i

rsÿias

—

*

|g

i

jÿ.

jg

g

|§

Zg.

-

CO

3B

I

m

£-Sr

i

[

JSHHÿP,

sJIXI

0

m

mm

m

®ll

I

I

NJ

m

y

;S'V©':|

1

sa

r

l

i

;

IS

0

gw

i

-'

.

*

-i .

<

,

U

I

m

I

|

f

|_

f

S

’

X

1

V.

:

.

‘

X

.

si*

:

•

Si

StSPiiil

WffsÿpXSSffS?

.

'

m

©

1

• r—

—

-~

.x©’.

MB

8S8®i

ii

-

§©

.

Cjsi

a

:/i

:

m

yyxm

m

X‘

v‘X

*

.

.Ifc;

-

i

,

&

SSiiSSSS



Spindle

Open

Loop/Orient

•

To

place

spindle

in

open

loop,

set

SP018

bit

1

to on.

Parameters

are

different.

•

This

is

now

a

servo

type

spindle,

so

parameters

are

greatly

different.

•

Switches back and

forth

from

speed

command

to

position

command on

CH,

however on

DH,

will be

automatic.

Spindle

control

signal

for

diagnostic display.

See

page

5-

25,26,27,28,29.

•

Spindle Orient

Shift

is

parameter

SA96.

•

If

trouble

with sync. Tapping, change SP

8, 9,

and

1

0.

•

NoAutoTune

Synchronization

New

for

DH

Non-Interpolation.

Spindle

mode-

Speed

& Orient

mode

Interpolation

mode. Same as

CH

C-axis

mode.

Contains

C-

axis

and

Synchronous Tap.

SP003

P001 (new

for

SP002

os.

Gain

DH )

SP5.SP6.SP7

P8.SP9.SP10

P5.SP6.SP7

peed

Gain

1«1

i

.

m

fr

Wmb>J

'

4

“y-

fHif

IP=

mm

gglU*

&

'

->ÿ«

f>

&

4; '

i..*>

&

f

?pr

I

i]

*

a

1

Jp

R«ÿ-

:*

•

fsw%S

tetcv

n”

U

IbL

1

Ills

4

H l

*

-:

lii %\

l

-

TL£

',-

4

*• *

r

:

8HS5B1

44

• *..;-»ÿ4%%

f; V

.-

vn

-.-'

•

• •

•• *

••

; • / • •

:.*

.

TZ***

m

V

JHfLd

wm

m.

>&•

a.

II

i®

a

(ÿ

—

V,

jr

sa

*1£

ns

- • i r ..

IT

tts

8k*

..

*r

jpa%ggg

.f

*#11

(€g)

It

|

-7:i

X

'%ViX

t

«if

\

>;i

I©

eÿfcsi

a*

V>

If

3

j|p

X.

HEP* fi

s$.

I

;

' • r - i

> • • '

'

«&«>«««*£

'-

-JW

:

4:;:-“

Fit

\

i

\

fi

3

aB

Jns,

V

%

m

V

44

• •

-4fl

J

fi

I

tap

V

IS:’

t::

•

' • • • • .

.

<4

\

til|§l

M

''Tj

X'

1

- • ' 4

[/

'

;4

K

KS

Hggi

a

>iV4:

'

fWS

li*l

P8HP*

J

Ift—

h

-i

mm

• :

If

’mlS

8

5S8

't

€5M

KA

..jm

(if.

srM

i’.fM

'-:ÿ

r;:»

•

• >«

m

X

SÿS

m

TJm

HH

jH‘ ;/

£

.

i

C-lVt;

m

ÿ':' .

fs5V;;

II

M

ffli

• •

;

• a -- .

:-

J

$mm

ainpid

6|d

1-96SS1

F-

k



290



291

Technical

Notification

25.

Sep,

2006

Model

$

H

Unit

7)

m

Magnetic

pole

positioning

of

1PM spindle

motor

with MDS-DH spindle

drive unit

1.

Outline

When

the

current

model,

MDS-C1/CH

spindle

drive unit,

is

equipped

to

a machine with an

IPM

spindle

motor,

magnetic

pole

positioning

is

necessary

during

machine's

setup* (Automatic

phase

Z

tuning).

In the

automatic

phase

Z

tuning

function,

the

tuning

result

(magnetic

pole

shift amount)

will be

written

in

the

spindle

drive

unit's

memory

at

the

completion

of tuning,

and

thereafter,

the

result in

the

memory

will

be

used.

Thus, when replacing

the

spindle

d rive uni t

whose automatic

tuning

is

complete, it is

necessary

to perform

automatic

tuning

again

fo r the new drive unit

in order

to

write

the

tuning

result

in

the

memory.

However,

in

the case of

MDS-DH

spindle

drive

unit,

the

tuning

result

mentioned

above can

be

set

in

a

parameter,

so

it

is

unnecessary

to

perform

magnetic

pole

positioning again

at

replacing drive units.

In

addition,

please

refer

to

below

for differences

between

MDS-DH and

the

current

MDS-C1/CH in

magnetic pole positioning

due to

the change

above.

’Magnetic pole

positioning is

to

memorize the

relative

position

of

the

detector's

phase

Z

and motor’s

magnetic

pole

position.

As

IPM spindle

motor

is

permanent

magnet

motor,

it

is necessary

to

constantly

grasp

the

motor's

magnetic

pole

position. Owing

to

magnetic

pole

positioning,

it is

possible

to grasp

the

accurate magnetic

position

by

referring

to

the memorized

magnetic pole position

at

delecting

the

detector's

phase

Z.

2

.Difference

From

Current

Model

Regarding

Magnetic

Pole

Positioning

The

following

table

compares

DH

and C1/CH

regarding

the

major

items

in

magnetic pole

positioning

0

What

is

different from the

current model

ajor item

Current

MDS-C1/CH

MDS-DH

spindle

drive

unit

-Machine

setup

-Motor

exchange

(Including

detection

gears)

-Drive

unit

exchange

_

_

(1) Set the

spindle

parameter

SP205=0->1,

and

turn the

spindle

ON .

(2) Positioning

complete in

up

to

90

seconds.

(3)

Turn

the

NC ON again.

When to

perform the

positioning

-Machine

setup

-Motor

exchange

(Including

detection

gears)

Not necessary

in

replacing

drive

units.

q

(1)

Let the motor

detector's

phase

Z

pass.

(2)

Set

spindle

parameter

SP225/bit4

to

1,

and

turn

the spindle

ON.

(3)

After

10s.

write

down the

value

on

the

spindle

monitor screen.

(4) Turn OFF

the

spindle , and

set

the

value

in

(3)

in

the

spindle

parameter

SP118

Even

though

the procedure

steps

increase,

necessary

time

will

be

reduced.

1

o

Procedure

and

necessary

time

(5)

Turn the

NC

ON

again

The

magnetic

pole

shift amoun t can

be

checked on

the

spindle

monitor

screen

or

by the

setting

value

of the

parameter

SP118.

Result

of

positioning

(magnetic

pole

shift

amount)

cannot

be

checked.

Magnetic pole position

result

can

be

checked.

thers

3.

Details

of Magnetic

Pole Positioning

with

MDS-DH

Spindle

Drive

Unit

To

this

document,

procedure

of

magnetic

pole

positioning

(magnetic

pole

shift

measurement)

is

attached.

When

MDS-DH

spindle drive

unit

is

connected to a

machine

with an

IPM spindle

motor,

please perform

magnetic

pole

positioning

following

this

procedure.

[Machine

s

to

perform

the

positioning (Mx)l

:

INTE200/300I II

upper milling spindle.

MPT/INTE

low

er

milling sp i

n

d

Ie,

QTN250MS

(Y)

sub

spindle

4.

When the Change

Starts to

Apply

0

0

Magnetic

pole

positioning

(magnetic

shift amount

measurement)

by MDS-DH drive unit is

supported

from

the software

version

A4

(high-speed

synchronous

tapping will

be supported

from

A4E).

As

the

version

A3 and

before

doesn’t

suppon

magnetic

pole

positioning,

there will

be 5

seconds

of display time

at the initial

start of

the spindle

every

time

the

power

is

turned

ON.

This

can

be

solved

by

upgrading the

software

to

A4

and after,

and

performing magnetic pole

positioning.

-Added

magnetic

pole

posilioning lo

Outline

066-A

1

0,

Aug.

2005

Issued

by

Authorized

by

Sales

Dept.

Drive

System

Fundamental

Development

Sec.,

Drive

System

Dept.,

Nagoya

Works,

Mitsubishi Electric

Corp.

5-1-14,

Yadaminami,

Higashi-ku,

Nagoya461-8670

JAPAN

TEL

FAX

Sawaki

Sano Tsutsui

Added models to

which

the

change

applies

-Changed

the supported

software

version

-Added

cautions to

procedure

of

magnetic

pole

shift amount

measuring

066-B

31.Oct 2005

0

ft)

25

Sep

2006

25.Sep

2006

25.S(*j>.

2006

O

+81

52

712

2298

+

81

52

712

3960

#

BNP-B8959- 240-*(BNP-B8959-066-B)

292

[Procedure

of

magnetic pole

shift

amount

measurement with MDS-DH

drive

unit]

0

hen

SP142=0,

set

as

follows,

and

turn the

NC ON

again.

INTE200/300

III

upper

milling

spindle:

SP

142=1

333

MPT/INTE

lower

milling

spindle

QTN250MS

(Y)

sub

spindle

SP142=U1

SPI42-1 n

(Note

1)

tart

Set

all

SP125.

126

and

127.

Normally,

set

all

to 0.

1.

Setup

for magnetic

pole

shift amount

SP226/bit5=1

(Pulse

application

magnetic

pole

estimation

valid)

1

Spindle forward

rotation

(About

S60)

<

“CYC CNT

on spindle

monitor is not

0

N

J

2.

Check

if

phase

Z

is

passed

Y

Spindle

stop

(Servo

OFF)

SP225/bit4=1

.(DC

excitation

mode start)

I

Spindle

forward

rotation

(Arbitrary S

setting)

U

3.

Measure

magnetic

pole

shift

amount

Weak excitation

lime

passed.

Normally.

10s

N

<

Y

Write

down the

value

of

'AFLTdB on

spindle

monitor

I

Spindle

stop

(Servo

OFF)

I

Magnetic pole

shift amount

SP118=Value

that

was

written down

I

SP225/bit4=0

(DC

excitation

mode stop)

V

4

Set

magnetic

pole

shift

amount

(Note

2)

r

Turn

the

NC

ON

again

i

Finish

m

[Notes]

1

Perform

magnetic pole

shift amount

measurement without workpieces and

tools

With

workpiece

and

tool,

the measurement

result may

be

incorrect.

2.

When

the measurement

is complete,

make

sure

to perform

DC

excitation

mode

stop

(SP225/bit4=0).

Otherwise,

after

turning

the NC

ON

again,

the initial

parameter

error

alarm 37

will

occur

3. Magnetic pole

shift

amount

is

different

depending

on

each machine.

When importing

the

parameter

from

another machine

(SRAM

data),

make sure

to change

the SP118 value

to

the one

suitable

for

the

machine

293

[Related

parameters]

Parameters

with

an

asterisk

*

in

the

abbreviation

are validated with

the NC power

turned

ON again.

Description

• r e¬

setting

range

(Unit)

Abrv,

Name Details

• i i;

Magnetic

pole

shift

amount

Set

the magnetic pole

shift

amount

of I PM

spindle

motor.

When set

to

0 .

shift

won't

be

performed

When performing

pulse

application magnetic pole

estimation,

setting is necessary.

-18000

to 18000

(Electrical angle

1°/100)

MSFT

P118

When in DC

excitalion

mode

D/A

output

channel

1

data

#

Set the excitation

rate

in

the

weak

excitation

range

in

the

unit

of

motor short

time

ratio %.

P125

DA1NO

-32768 to

32767

When

set

to ‘0 .

it

will

be

20%.

Normally,

set to “0 .

_

W/hen

in

DC

excitation

mode

Set the

excitation rate in

the

weak excitation range

in

the

uni t o f motor short

time

ratio

%.

When set to

“0 .

it will

be

50%.

Normally,

set

to

P .

D/A

output

channel

2

data

#

DA2NO

P126

-32768

to 32767

When in

DC

excitation

mode

Set

the

weak

excitation

time in

the

ms unit.

When

set

to

‘0 ,

it

will

be

10000ms.

Normally,

set to

0

_

D/A

output

channel

1

output

scale

DA1MPY

P127

-32768

to

32767

In

the

case

of

IPM

spindle

motor

Used

in

initial

magnetic

pole

detection

of

IPM

spindle

motor.

Set the

time

and coil

to

apply

pulse,

and

estimated

magnetic

polarity

in

pulse

application

magnetic

pole

estimation.

As

this

setting

is specific

for

motor,

normally

set the

value in

the

spindle

parameter

list.

1

.

Time

to apply pulse:

Set in

the

[ps]

unit.

(0<Application

time<350)

2.

Coil

to

apply pulse:

W/hen selecting low-speed coil,

add

1000

to Ihe

application

time.

3.

Estimated

magnetic polarity:

W/hen

setting the opposite polarity,

set negative

sign

to

the values

of

1.

and

2.

Flux control

ratio

6

F6*

P142

-32768

to

32767

E

g.)

Perform

333ps

of pulse application

magnetic

pole estimation

with low-speed

coil.

Estimated polarity

is

the

opposite

polarity.

SP142

=

-(333+1000)

=

-1333

_

it Name When set

to

0 When

set

to

1

0

1

2

3

ded

Normal

DC excitation

mode start

5

6

Spindle

function

5

P225

SFNC5

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

Overshoot

compensation type

3

Non-sensitive band setting

(Unit

is

2°/1000)

vsn

E

i

F

bit

Name

When

set

to

0 When

set

to

1

0

1

2

3

4

IPM

spindle pulse application

magnetic

pole

estimation

valid

_

Normal

on

Spindle

function

6

6

SP226

SFNC6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

T



294

PROJECT

NAME:

PLG

Adjustment of Matrix

Control

The

new

PLG

TS5690 of

Matrix Control

does

NOT

need to

do PLG

automatic

compensation

function(SP245) like

current

PLG

TS5276

in

order

to

adjust

A and

B-phase sine

wave signal

input

into

spindle

drive.

Also

there

is

NOT

a

PLG PCB, it

is NOT

necessary

to check voltage

of each-phase

sine

wave

signal

on

synchroscope.

M640

CH-SP

liiSi

Bus Line

Analog

CN5

jj-

Pri-Amp

|

PLG

I*

(TS5276)

Si

Thermal

m

’

Spindle

Power

Line

Mx

DH-SP

v

Optical

Cable

Serial

CN2t

I

Thermistor

New

PLG

(TS5690)

Spindle

Power

Line



295

Replacement

of

Unit

Fan

When

an

alarm

and/or

a warning

is

displayed

about

the coolant fan

on

the NC

monitor

screen

and

the

LED

portion of the

unit,

replace

the

unit fan.

Drive

Unit Alarm

r

Alarm

o.

Description

A cooling

fan built in

the

drive unit

stopped,

and the

loads

on

the

unit exceeded

the

specified value.

an stop

5

1

Power

Supply

Alarm

I

No.

/LED

Alarm

Description

Power

supply:

A

cooling fan built

in

the power

supply

unit stopped,

and

Fan

stop

72/

overheat

occurred

in

the

power

module.

[Drive

Unit

Warning

Alarm

Description

A cooling

fan

built

in

the

drive

unit

stopped.

No.

A6

Fan

stop

warning

[Power

Supply Warning

No.

/

LED

|

Alarm

Power

supply:

Fan

stop warning

Description

0

[A

cooling

fan built in

the

power

supply

unit

stopped.

EE/



296

Replacement

parts

Model

Size

fl09P0424H3D

1

3

pMF

-

04C24D

Sÿ-RC

A p40mm

(for

other

than

MDS-D-CV)

{MMF

-

0

6F

24ESÿRM5

p60mm

MlvlJ-

0

9D24TS

-RR15

p90

|MMF-T2D24PSÿM5

Dl20mm

p40mm

(for

MDS-D-CV)

mm

m

i

1

1

. Turn

off

the

breaker

for

the

input

power

and

j

(remove

the

drive

unit

after

the

charge lamp

on

|

the power

supply

unit turns

off

|

|

ft



297

H

V

2.

Unscrew

the

mounting

screws at

4

places

to

remove

the

fan

guard

on the

backside

of the

drive

unit.

BiiP

tv,*

I

V

jj i

#

SalllS

i

5

\3.

Remove

the hooks

(at

4

places

x

2) from

the

jfan

guard

and then

remove the

fan

guard.

in

pS

ir..>

5



298

El

Igp

%

8pgf|l

*

fter

removing

the

fan

guard

SO

11

/

i

sBiSl

4.

Unscrew

2

screws for

mounting the

fan.

I

m

M

11

I:

E

:

i

...



299

Si

Wm

i*

-O

5. Remove

the

rubber

bushing

for

the

fan

power line

and

disconnect

the

connector.

m

:

m

emove

the

connector

and

replace

the

fan.

c

{dire

assembly should be

performed

in

the

reverse order

of

removal.

lit*

fe,

-•

• •

m

B

/

J



300

MATRIX

Maintenance

Modes

Ivlaintenance

modes which

are

added

newly

on

the

MATRIX

machines are the

operation

restriction functions

with various

interlocks

used

at

the

service

and

the

maintenance

To perform

safe

servicing and

maintenance

operations,

the

functions

including

the feedrate

limitations

and

the

axis movement

interlocks

other than

the

equipment

required

the

adjustment are

operated, and

then,

servicing

and

maintenance

can be

provided.

1. Selecting a

maintenance

mode

The

following

selection

conditions

must

be

satisfied:

-The

machine

is

in

a stopped

status.

-Manual

operation

mode

or

MDI mode is

valid.

-The

setup

switch

is

set

to

the

ON

position (1)

with

the

door

open.

(1)

Press

the

DIAGNOS

menu key

in

the

POSITION

screen.

EOS XT

10)1

SET

UP

FROCRJIM

TOOT.

DATA

c-eoiw ormnios

DAT

.A

I/O

TOOL

DISPLAY

ARAM

INFO.

LAYOUT MAP

IN

(2)

Press

the

VERSION menu

key.

VERSION

ALARH ALARM

PLC

MAIHYEH

RUNNING

GRAPHIC

DATA

ACCUMlf

-

HISTORY

SIGNAL

MAIWTE-HECK CONTROL ERASE TIME

IN



301

I

enu

select

key

i

enu

key

8

m

I

I

P

=

r r rn rgÿ iTOTy

§

mtt-iHof

i

lp|liijF0l

ri

JL

|

fejai

—

-

't

kpy

PÿS'i

i

(3)

After

the

DIAGNOS

screen is

displayed,

press the

menu

select

key

—

K*

_

.

Then

enter

password

1131

and

press

the INPUT key.

select

key

i

once.

The

MAINTE.

MENU

menu

item

4)

Press

the

machine

menu

key

and

then

press

the

screen

will be

displayed.

(5)

Press the

MAINTE. MENU

menu key.

MA1HTE.

MENU

302

(6)

The

items

provided

for

maintenance purposes are: ‘MAINTE. MODE

ATC,

MAINTE.

MODE

PC,

MAOSTIE.

MODE

AXIS,

MAINTE.

MODE

SPINDLE,

and MAINTE. MODEDBB. Select die appropnate

item

according

to

particular

needs.

The

selected item

will

have its display

highlighted

on the screen. Select the

menu items

as

required

one

by

one.

|

WS

J

O'

j

200u/0€/Q?

[l3:23;d2

_L

W

50%

(~'3D

Onlti~u

[VW

Onon/ula

MAXrtTE

.

UODB

MC

U&Xin'E.

MODE MODS

AXIS

tlRIMTE.

MODE

SPJHELB

M3LTWTB

.

MODE

PC

DBB

<Display

in

maintenance mode>

The

WAAMITNG;

MAINTE.

MODE

AAA

is

displayed

as an alarm

message.

(AAA:

Selected maintenance

mode).

Then the selected

maintenance

mode

will

have

its

display

highlighted on

the

screen.

When

the maintenance

mode

is

cancelled,

above

display will

be

cancelled.

Cancellation

of the

selected

maintenance

mode>

Tie

selected maintenance

mode

will

be

cancelled:

-When

die door is

closed

-When

the

setup

switch

is

turned

to

the

OFF

position

(O)

-When power

is

turned

of f

-When

the

selected menu key

is

pressed

again

(to

clear

the

highlighting of

the

menu

item).

303

2.

Operation

hi

maintenance

modes

The door

interlock

is

cancelled under

the following

functional

limitations:

(1)

Functional

limitations

on

each

maintenance

mode

<Maintenance

Mode

ATC>

-ATC/

magazine-related

maintenance

menu

key

operations

are

possible.

-Only

ATC-related

M-code

operations

are

possible in

MDI

mode.

(Usable M-c

odes:

M6,

M17,

Ml

8,

M19.M149)

[Ml

5,

M16: M-code for

ATC

cover (Option)]

<Maintenance

Mode

PC>

-Pallet

change-related

maintenance

menu

key

operations

are possible.

-Only pallet

change-related

M-code operations

are

possible

in

MDI mode. (Usable

M-codes:

M70,

M71.M72)

<Maintenance

Mode

Axis Move>

-Movement

at

tlie

maximum

speed is possible

by

pressing

the axis feed

switch

and the

MF1

and

MF2

keys

at.

the

same

time. Releasing

any

keys stops the movement.

-If

neither

the

MF1

nor

MF2

key

is

pressed, the

maximum speed

will

be

limited

to

2

m/min

(if

it

is

rotation

axis,

surface

speed is

limited

to

2

m/min)

-The

maximum

speed

operation

is

also possible

for

axis movement

in

MDI

mode.

304

<Maintenance

Mode Spindle

Rotate

>

-Operation

at

the

maximum

spindle

speed

is possible by

pressing

the

spindle starting

switch

and

the

MF

1

and MF2

keys

at the

same

time.

Releasing any

keys

stops the

rotation.

-If

neither

the

MF1

nor

MF2

key is

pressed,

the

maximum

speed

will

be

limited

lower

(The

maximum

speed

depends

on

the

machine

type.).

-The

maximum

speed

is

also

possible

for

spindle

rotation

starting

in MDI mode.

(Usable

M-codes:

M3, M4,

M5,

M19)

<Maintenance Mode

DBB>

-Automatic

operation

starting

is possible.

-Axes

movements

are permitted

(Usable

M-codes:

MO,

Ml, M2,

M30,

M99)

(2)

Hand

pulse

operation for

axis movement

is

possible,

even

during

maintenance mode.

(3)

The chip

conveyor/

screw conveyor

comes

to a

complete stop.



305



306



Matrix

Special

Menu

•

Allows

customer

to

add their

own

menu

keys

to

call

up special

softwares

•

Example shows

setting for printscreen

functions.

•

Edit

c:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu\CustomMenu.txt



Matrix

Special

Menu

Explanation

X

WO

/Si

fi-ic

iir

/v-m

‘m.-.

*

\c\-:

/ .ÿHUP

u

m

..

Comment

Only

*

|

[Henu-1]

j

Hen

uNain

e=Pr

i

nt:

F1

1

BParil

-c:\jna1 me\pr1

nx:

screen

-exe

Screenl

[Menu-?]

Men

uMaui

e=Pr i

nt

F1

1

QParh-c:\jfla1

me\pr1

rat

screen

2

„

exe

j

[Menu—

3]

|Men uNam

e=Pr

i nt

F1

1

epaxhÿcsVaal

mte\pr1

nt

screen

3

«

Menu Shown

Screen

1

ScreenB

Actual

File

path

and

Executeable

(.exe)

file

i

*

”1

A

Matrix Special

Menu Example

mmmmmmm

File

Window

Help

-veaisna

i

M

Vÿ

\i

i

AT

Actual File

i

?ÿack

’

L

Folder;

j

earch

is

j

0I

C:\MC_sdg\

; »£ • £

So

O*jl

C:-5

CustomMenu

i

fvlane

[i]

CustomMenu.txt

HIJBBI BUSH

j

[Menu-1]

MenuName=Pri nt

screen

Pi

1

ePath=c

:\ma1

nte\Prin

Date

Modified

8/

J

7/2005

2:39

AM

Size

Type

1

KB TextOocument

Folders

G

Cookies

>:

[J

Desktop

• ±i

Favorites

• + . :

I

j

My

Documents

.7;

Q

Start

Menu

Programs

...i

:

-

aaj

i

tscreen. exe

:+

G

All

User?

+'.

G

metpub

Qj

m6y_yrnw

+•

O

ni6yboot

+':

L_J

mainte

• *J

G

MC.Backup

MC

.Direct

Mode

Programs

;£ÿ

G

MC_Gl

Data

:f:

G

MC_Machine

Database

;.t-

D

MC_Machine

Programs

S

iG

MC_sc'g

G

Alarm

G

CustomMenu

D

cutest

D

cutmorj

D

cutres

G

dbl

D

fug

~

I

Toollnformation

it:

G

meloctrl

[Menu-2]

Menu

File

uName=Print

Sc r

Pa t

h=C

:

\mai

nt

e\P

een2

ntscreen2

.

exe

[Menu-3]

HenuName

Fi

1

epat

h

=Print

Screen3

\mai

nte\Pri

nt Screen3

.

exe

c :

(3)

I

Mil

| Full Ptint

Screen

| S.

SAVE

|

Aclive

Piinl

Screen

&

SAVE

|

1/23

14 :

49: 26

<

>

TUTT2s%

Tnr“

Print

Screen2

Print

Screenl

Print

Scresn3

(1)

>

(2)

MENU



310



311



312



313

Matrix:

Howto select multiple

Folders

in

the

Explorer

address

jss

C;\

=olders

x

Date

Modified

12/1/2005

10:10

AM

Name

• -

0CPCU

1

0

Documents and

Settings

I

0

inetpub

i

0m6y_ymw

0m6yboot

I

0||

0MC_Bacdup

j

0MC_Direct

Mode Programs

MC_GL

Data

j

0

MC_Machine

Database

I

0MC_Machine

Programs

Size

;

Type

File

Folder

ÿ1

Desktop

±J

Q

My

Documents

3

Q

My

Computer

3

3’A

Floppy

(A:)

S

S3

MAZATROL

(C:)

L+

0

CPCU

El

0

Documents

and Settii

E

_

]

Administrator

l .~l

.iboconsole

l~~l

Cookies

0

I

Shift

1

+

Ctrl

Press &

Hold

Shift

+

Ctrl

to

Select

Multiple Folders

in Explorer.

/

0

Desktop

S Favorites

©

Q

My

Document

Ei

CD

Start Menu

CDI

1

0melpctrl

j

CCncbackup

0nm64mdata

1

>

_

]pli

tool

:

j

0

Program

Files

Ij

0

RUNMNG

File Folder

File

Folder

File Folder

File Folder

File Folder

File Folder

7T9JZoT,

10/26/2005

6:47

AM

10/26/2005

7:49

AM

9/1/20135

12:00 PM

10/23/2005

6:32 AM

10/25/2005

7:46

AM

S3 [0

Programs

l+i

0

All

Users

i+J

0

inetpub

i+l

0

m6y_ymw

Iddies;

C: \

:olders

Desktop

+3

Q

My

Documents

3

Q

My

Computer

E

3’A

Floppy (A:)

E

0

MAZATROL

(C)

S3

0

CPCU

o

0

Documents

and

Settir

*3

0

Administrator

1

.iboconsole

r~1

Cookies

0

Desktop

V?

Favorites

+:

0

My

Document

0

Start

Menu

+-

1

1

n

LllI

:

|

i?

10

Programs

0nm64mdata

+ÿ

0

All

Users

+.

0

inetpub

+

0

m6y_ymvv

+ÿ

I

iribvhrinr

_

X

Date Modified

12/1/2005

10:10

AM

Name

Size

Type

File Folder

QCPCU

;

0

Documents

and

Settings

|

Cl

inetpub

0

m6y_ymw

I 0m6yboot

|

Cl

mairite

0MCJ3ackup

Shift

rn

Ctrl

Postion

Cursor to Stating

Location.

Press

&

Hold

Shift

+

Ctrl.

Move Cursor

to Ending

Location.

Start

4

IK

ia

:0

,0

;+

File

Folder

File

Folder

File T

older

File Folder-

File

Folder

“ile Folder

10/26/2005

6:47

AM

10/26/2005

7:49

AM

9/1/2005

12:00

PM

10/23/2005

6:32 AM

10/25/2005

7:46

AM

10/26/2005

7:49 AM

End

0

plctool

0

Program

Files

0

RUNMNG

0

Voice



314



315



316

Remote

I/O

.

__

I

'ÿ

“

.

f

k

v? J

<•

_____

__

;--g

6'SV

\si*i

.'4V-

- V

X1

-65.

3

-0.

023

0

2

O

;

):

SI

(Z1

si

HI

I

0[

o]

'

o

C

0.

N

;

y*;

T13-

0[12- 0]

PC 47

C

0)

.

«ÿ

X2

*

Z2

0.

:

0.

si

£

-*

**in»

<%>m.

/ÿj

;

:

J .

izfe

.3

.

r>

£«

,§L

*

. .1#

.

0

a$<r

2

,fc*

•

II* 0

M |h

v2 :

5.

0

“

g

•

zM

:

i—

g;

o

j

J

.

y

¥«

.

. -£•ÿ

•••

:

ym

»i

C i : : . :

'

• V

• wif'sifi

3--

:

:

REMOTE

itO

>

v

_

:

'

i

V

•

i

v

...

TROUBLESHOOTING

v

*'..

*/

_

•

.

~

---*

jmmXtL

*'

.

3

JC'

/

y, *

‘

...

BSP

j*

•

.-Ti

*

'*

X

I

4

V I

T

|

e»ir*v

n

&

,s

1

Wi

H

I

V

cl

2

3

'

fL .

0

T

a

L

11

*

*

i

m

m

<)

I

i

&

I

»>

R r

A

W

il

11

MiSiga

[ÿin-

H

fir

R

Iÿjlrÿ

>

rÿ °

.v':

t

<K?

«

j

i;

gs

'.0®'

r-.

5

•ÿ

:K

I

4

»

I

hi

fulfills)

A

I

Oil

T

m

a

..

.

Mg

I

m

rx

raiwi

rx

\

rr \

r? \

n

XRT

I

_y

LJ\_y

v_y

v.

WAV'1''

ma

*“ÿ

?|as

Si

(ill

x

File View

Setup

Window

Help

/:

;

iiSilil

v

•

m

M#

X-

POSITION

BUFFER NEXT

COMMAND

G

;

UNo.

ijjj

0

X

0.

Sllfe

Y

0.

Y

0.

IT

f

M i

i'' *

2 -40.

2 0

UNex8

,

•-

MACHINE REMAIN

UPC

S 0

F

0.

lit

H

0

o

X

o

Y

o

Z

0.

X

0.

X -100.

U17 G

91

G 23

G 94

G

21 G 40

G 80

G 98

m

ig i

-GX4f

G40.1 G

67

G

69

0.

Y 0.

Y

-100

0.

2 -3U0

G

64

50 G 54

G 97

G

15

.

2

a

G50.1

li

x

if

mi*

fei

Hi

fes

v}V'j

V;

11

11

0 100

0

min 1

0

H/HIN

FEED

0.

MM/MIH

0.

M/REV

200

TNo. 1

->->

TNo.

0

(CTR-DR

)

NAGA2NPKNO

.

1

SPDL

SPBL;

SI

\y\

m

(

(

(i )

i

HI

PALLET N

UNIT :

T-0FFSET

a

-AX:

m

¥

i

Di( 0)

H# ( 0)

0.

I

i

If X

Y-AX:

m

0.

>

W|»«

INDEX 8

a

l

:>

I

-AX: 110

w&

1

TPS 0

2001/01/13

10:29

5 REMOTE

1/0

ERROR (400008000,

r

M Y.WV/'V

A

ZERO RETURN

:

/

mm/min

1

lilW

ifpi

‘

..

:

,

:

:

•

fi

irT I

. :

TPS

55

REMOTE

I/O

ERROR(Mill)

9

REMOTE

I/O ERROR

(Lathe)



nfhF

-11

11 11 I

I

1 1

m

H-N

npÿF

n

n

n

r

A

PI

1024V MALFUNCTION

55

E 0

Note, ,

)

H

III

#1

it

ause

ill

if

III

lease

contact

your

YAMAZAKI

MAZAK

products

service

station.

-

—

This is

a

Hexadecimal

#

If other

than 00,

it has a problem

in that

system.

f||

No.1

system (XG~)

No,

2

system

(X80~)

No,

3

system (X100-)

No.4

system (X280-)

Take Hex

#

and

turn into 8 digit

Binary

7

6 5 4

3

2

10

Note:

&

Q0

C|C

Q1

til

pftl

m

hatlsaivstanP

j

f

VVXV,;

Action

M

mi

nmm\m

m

ti

lim?

Hits

42

1

’

WlatlsastatloiP

0

0

01

0 0 0 0

1

m

tation

Station

1

Station 8

The

above

example

indicates that an

communications error has

occurred

in

station

1 of

the

No. 2

system.

x

\J



nfhR

o

r

m

ru

0

I

Hr

H

M

Red

E09 REMOTE

I/O

ERROR

(

An

error occurred

in data communication

with

the remote

I/O card.

Cause

Please contact

your

MAZAK service

representative.

Action

/To

J

I

'

i

dy

u

inn

H

n

rm

j

\U\U

w

9

REMOTE

I/O ERROR

2(0000,0001)

/ \

N

Station 8

Station

5

Problem

in

system

2

Problem is

with

station

1



r-n

/

—

Jlf

J

r?nrr\

r\

rv)

cm

;-s'

wuup

1S

i

m m

,-n

mm

7i

r\r7\

/ÿNrrÿ

a

::

r

VJ3

\1S

UjV_yuJ

iy

—

• • • • • -• ÿ •

:

_

;

I

;

uu

'

V

za

File

Window

Help

•

-

.•

VERSION

j

DIAGNOSIS

HOW IT

OR

j

OPTION

|

SERVO

MONITOR]

SPINDLE

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

[CMC]

HR113 C

[CPU]

HR122

t

[BUS]

5

Wd

3

-***'

• V.

[RIO]

1

8

u

1

HRS53

2

HRS71

;

HR371

3

RX312

4 HR371

HRS53

m

§t|li

WlmMMSm

HR371

m

pp i

:

HRS71

§

• Vv

M

1

TPS

0

2001/01/12

10:05

5

REMOTE

I/O

ERROR

U0000G7G0,

sss

|W

50%

(z$

V#.

0 .

OOin/min

r

pm

s

a a:

SPIKDLE HARDWARE

LADDER

'

MONITOR

MONITOR MONITOR

DIAGNOS

VERSION

DIAGNOS

MONITOR

OPTION

SERVO

MONITOR

R1

pr

n

o

D

UU

MI

o

,

y-

fVF

C¥\

-iH

m

:

2

Q

O

n

cv

:

I«

x |

sat

File

Window

Help

ERtlTl:

MONITOR]

OPTION]

SERVO

MONITOR]

SPINDLE MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

]

13 I

|

VERSION DIAGNOSIS

smriti i

CPU]

HR122

[CMC]

HR113

C

US ]

&

OD 00 07 00

.

__

TTT

T

RIO]

No.1

system.:

(XG~)

No.2 system

(X80-)

No,

3

system

(X1CO-)

No

A system

(X280-)

i

1

HR353

2 HRS71

3 1X312

4

HRS

71

HRS

5

3

HR371

HR371

HR371

0

7

vnm

765413210

;

4

2

9

2 1

Jiinary

1

-

;

L

Station.

Station

‘ j raW ’J

Station

8

1

2

3

55

REMOTE

I/O

ERROR

t

£00000700

0 r

pm

I

V'A'V

0

. 0

0

i

n

&00000700

-

50%

[zjjl

T T

Sliii

<EIAGNOS

VERSION HARDWARE

MONITOR

LAC'D

ER

MONITOR

-

aaa



n

n

T\

/m

a

a

U

O'

crq

iu

D

Qi

I

i

JWULJL

VJL/

m

mmmmmmmM

>

—

i.

File

Window

Help

DI&0N03I3

MONITOR]

OPTION]

SERVO

MONITOR]

SPINDLE

MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

ERSION

M

m

It

CPU]

CMC]

HR113

C

HR122

'BUS]:

xii1-.

• -*

w« IB

.88

- -

mse-a/SK

Sc

00

00

07

CO

[RIO]

system (XD~jji

4

5

&

-

N

o.2

system £X.80~)

HRS

53

2

HRS

71 HR371

HRS

53

6HR-371

w vr

3

5X312

4 HRS

71

HR371

7

7B54|32tO

B

4

2 1 Binary

2

|

i

i

2

• vM

4

niojJ

5

f £00000700 .

5 REMOTE

I/O

ERROR

i

=2

Or

pm

jV'M

0.

00

in/m

J

w

501

_

D

T

v,'.

.

v

HARDWARE

MONITOR

VERSION

IAGN03

E

LADDER

MONITOR

&00000700

*

0

rn

<ThR

ns

—

ffb,

7a

D

r\

i

o

r

UUU0ii]liJ

3

m

I

71

T

S7\

2

0

n

r

r

uu

i

joy

JW V- /

File

Window

Help

:

in i m

:w:

x\

..jV

:

|

DIAGNOSIS

MONITOR]

OPTION]

SERVO

MONITOR

]

SPINDLE MONITOR

HARDWARE

MONITOR

VERSION

s

STATIONS

i Liu

LG

07

oS

BUS]

C1JC]

Hill3

C

[CPU]

HR122

m

Y

7

[RIO]

NoJ

system

(X0-)

Na2

system

(X80~)

No*3

system {X1Q0~J

No

J

system

(X2S(H

4 5

: ?

£j

1

HR353

2 HRS

71

3 RX312

4 HRS

71

HRS

53

HR371 HR371

®§

-'l-i;-.-

HRS

71

7

7 6

5 4

3

210

1

| Binary

2

10

4

2

fl

*—

Siafion

—

Si

alien

-

STto

f

lohl

—

Stations8

1

2

Mill*

3

55 REMOTE

I/O

ERROR

U0000p700y

r

0

r

pm

|

V#i

0.00

in/mÿ

vv

50*

(3®

I4i

I

LADDER

MONITOR

i

HARDWARE

MONITOR

,E

IAUNOS

VERSION

|R

&00000700

3 2 5

win

1

sm

l

£9

e

Era

O

£3$

OS

a

°

i

i

i

-(

1

5

£3

«

8

»

>

[

C

3

*

0,

is

°

____

CD

$VM

K

*t>

ill

£1

L*l

cr

S

I

:

i

o

a

es

I

:

(=)

-

i 1

$Y2“i

I

<*230>

u>

C<

n

1

Sv2-«J

tx23ii

<ÿ

N.

O

SV2*«-i

03

5V2'M

>•

£o_J

1

,,

EE

m

-

L

9

X

3D

*

© o

o o

«

»

• *

*

t

O

T

*

u

c-i

»V

-

W

o

I

I

C3T0

PS

A

v

2

03

SV3

c=o

8

o:

3

f C

%

oz

r

J

0P)

«

?

3

-

V

o

s

'

IO O

't*-0

r* o

-*«i

..

&

\. ...A

o

OH

rirnr

Li

i-->

i

_

»

x

*

*

»ÿ

<y

m

rz

—

v_r*

S

£

J

>

1

~

£0

w

L:L

CP£)

«

CO

l

:

i

f

11

OH

£9

11

Pi

65

t

;

5

Lj

I

C3

Q

—

i

FH

ueaw

lieaH

£3

>

O;

>

*D

c

|C/>

*

o

—

o

K

X

5

i-o>

u

am

3

IPD

X

£

D

r

—

1

rn

>

rLo

2

UCttH

*v>

>

CP

e

>

IPS

g

CiiH

hj

CJ

o

4J

|M)

opiC)

I

w

(0

0

D

d

n

MAGAZINE

KHRMISMNI

P20

HHRttiMlN]

’(§>

© ®

ss

_T3L

.XL,

fXL

_Q_,

XL,

XL

Sr

o o «s

C. o

)

f

C

tO

• -}

CTj

O

s

s

o

so

2

40

-0 Uf>

SO

to

to so

r>

CSJ

Is-

5

4S

.-r,

g

«*ÿ

*3-

MO

X

X X

X

X X

X X

K X X

X

1

©®©©©©©©®®®i§ }®©@®

lQQ[l;ii

i lilii:

i i

i

|

Statin

#

an

Se«0B=

®76

s

4321

©

JJ s

%

X

n

4024

(¥2601

)

£rz ec tt

]CHI

to

o to

i/3 to

to

n

£

(«

i«

r

—

s

patter?

i

2024

tXT

6

1

)

4i=y

i

|J «|)

t|i ”4|T

5i|j

CHS CHS CN7

CHS CHS CN«

III

7

r

«<ÿ

• *

C1D

I-,,,

pa

3M B

fr

aa i

>

j

a Ti

i«i

o

v

III

n

;

SK

W

5

4(g'|'

'-®'

t

|

I

a

/

/

SET:?

*

X3024

(XT

3

)

JUMPER:1-2



Mazatrol

Fusion

Remote

10

Communication error count

I

j

Spec

Tins

function

is

always

activated

(

Note

In

case

of lathe parameter

088

bit

0

should be on

This function is

that

it. can

output counter value

of

communication

error corresponding

to the

R

register

table below.

Each

count value

accumulated in R

registers

can be

made cleat '

by

R5

1

28

setting

P.5

1

28

bit

0:

Clear Max value

(make

0 for R5000 -Eh 0631

bi t 1

:

Clear accumulated

value

(make

0 for

R5064-R51

27)

*When

this bit

is

set .

start

ot

clear ,and

at

same

time

thus bit will be

off

automatically

looking at

these

registers

is

helpful,

it

is

not.

1

00 %

accurate

as

telling

where

the

problem

is.

There

have

been

cases

where

the

P.-register may

be

higher,

but

problem

was actually

on

another

station

where

R-register

count

was

lower.

While

Station

S tation S tatio n

tation Station Station Station Station

Signal

name

System

1

4

5

6

3

7

8

Max

value 1

R5 000 R5001 R5002 R5003 R5004 R5005 R5

006

R5007

Commnicaiton

sV.A.'.AW.A.V.AW .Aÿ.\W/v

2

R5008 R5

009

R5011

R5012 R5013 R5014 R5015

5010

3 R5017

R5Q18

R5019

R5020

R5021 R5022

R50235016

R5024

R5025

R5026 R5 027 R5029

R5030 R5031

R5028

Max value R5034 R5035 R5037 R5039P.5032

R5033

R5036 R5038

R5040

R5043 R5044

R5045

R5C46

R5047

RC R5041

R5042

3 R5 048

R5 049 R5050

R5051 R5052

R5053 R5054 R5055

4 R5 056 R5057

P.5

058

R5059

R5

060

R5061 R5062 P.5

063

Accumutated P.5064 R5068 R5 069 P.5070 P.5071P.5 065

R5066 R5067

Value

P.5074

P.5072

P.5073

R5075 R5076

R5077 P.5078 R5079

Communication

P.5

080

P.5081 R5082 R5083 R5084 R5085 R5086

P.5

087

4

R5088 R5089 R5090 R5091

R5092 R5093 R5095

5094

Max

value 1

R5096

P.5

097

R5098 P.5099

P.5100

R5101

R5102

R5103

CRC

'V

R5104

R5105

P.5 106

R5107

R5108 R5109 R5110 R5

111

R5112 R5113

P.5114

R5115

P.5116

P.5

1

17 P.5118

R5119

->

4

R5120 R5121 R5122 R5123 P.5

1

24

R5125

R5126 P.5127

Counter

clear

Flag

R5128



REMOTE D

I/O SYSTEM

DISTRIBUTION

FUSION 640

CONTROLS

Mills

Only

The

relationship o f PLC

address

with

remote I/O

systems

and stations:

ROTARY

INPUTS

OUTPUTS USAGE

SW

N/A

tation

1

X000-X00F Y000-Y00F HR337 / HR353

N/A

tation

2 X010-X01F

Y010-Y01F

HR337 /

HR353

N/A

/ 5

tation

3 X020-X02F

Y020-Y02F

HR337

/

HR371

N/A/

4

tation

4

X030-X03F

Y030-Y03F HR337

/

HR371

Bus

System

No.1

3

tation 5

X040-X04F Y040-Y04F

HR371

2

tation 6

Station 7

X050-X05F Y050-Y05F

HR371

1

060-X06F

Y060-Y06F

HR371

0

tation 8

X070-X07F

Y070-Y07F

HR371

7

tation 1

X 080-X08F Y080-Y08F

HR371

6

tation

2

X090-X09F Y090-Y09F

HR371

5

tation 3 X0A0 -X0AF Y 0A 0-Y 0A F

HR371

4

tation 4

X0B0-X0BF

Y0B0-Y0BF HR371

System

No. 2

us

3

tation 5 X 0C 0-X 0C F Y 0C 0-Y 0C F

HR371

2

tation

6

X0D0-X0DF Y0D0-Y0DF

HR371

1

tation

7

XOEQ-XOEF

X0F0-X0FF

Y0E0-Y0EF

HR371

0

tation

8

Y0F0-Y0FF

HR371

Station

1

X100-X10F Y100-Y10F

HR371

Station

1

X110-X11F

Y110-Y11F

HR371

peration

Board

System

No.

3

Station

2 X120-X12F

Y120-Y12F HR371

Station

2

X130-X13F

Y130-Y13F

HR371

7

tation

1

X280-X28F

X290-X29F

Y280-Y28F

HR371

6

tation 2

Y290-Y29F

HR371

5

tation 3 X2A0-X2AF

Y2A0-Y2AF

HR371

System

No.4

(HR337

DOES

NOT

HAVE.)

4

tation 4

X2B0-X2BF Y2B0-Y2BF

HR371

Star

3

tation

5 X2C0-X2CF

Y2C0-Y2CF

HR371

2

tation

6

X2D0-X2DF

Y2D0-Y2DF HR371

1

tation

7 X2E0-X2EF

Y2E0-Y2EF

HR371

0

tation 8

X2F0-X2FF

Y2F0-Y2FF HR371



329



330

There

is

the

ELEMENTARY

DIAGRAM

LIST

on

page 2

that

serves as the

contents

in

the

ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM. As an

example,

look

at

TOOL

EYE

(OPTION)

enclosed

by a

red

frame

in the table

below.

The

figures

32000340362

indicates

a

drawing

number.

EL£.5l:H»Afft DIAGRAM

LIST

SET

3

PP32300030

16

Draw

By

__

ChftcV.od

By

:

MM -

Approved

By:

vx,

jSreCIRCAUCW

TS*

1

S&CtfSKS TVP8

8aT-flW250

m\&

2

1W.CHIKE lb.

« •

*•

I «»•

«i

*«*

«• M

•

*

it

«<*

ii

irf

«

t> (I

i

i

ll

»• l

iu'

«lf

*

Oil

ll

• •

n

•

•

H

I

«

CNC

7YPc fcÿOT

i

il

r*

»

p'm

il

««

<

PIKEUS

Ttips; mU.,i

•

,

• HU

II I k

M»|

11

*

W

IP

i« *I»*P

i

«i

'*

«

11

4I3UI

Ll

«iÿn

‘

*

&:

_5

MILL

$*\m£\

LJ

Hi M i

*ÿ*«

M I

l\1

Ltf

l

ni

m

7 IWK.

1

R>W

Nti

• r cm n

• *

j

itoc %

m

Ux\

[Ctot

i«*ns

Taut

1

ti

wrn

t&x

imr

i

j

XT

»

QXE

1

151/0

___

«UÿJJALA2L

ifoyaittrt

O

NCSCC.U$i

vrD

IjESggjig

*

3

Enlargement

32000340294

*2*0*6

REMOTE

1/0

COMMON

H

CXC

U?l

«)

glKSKM&»«»

+a

a

earr

i.i<vr

<sr

YiSgWmiPISl

43H4

U

OXC

LIST

(£ÿ)

32000340303

*2*5

REMOTE

1/0

COMMON

ai-giooH&ni

*3<n

iqggMCHOltO

*3

H OX€

LrS-T

IT)

JLSaSfiUJSELiJÿ-

_

H

cace

LIST

2000340313,

*2*5

32000340323 *2*5

REMOTE

1/0

COMMON

REMOTE

I/O

COMMON

FAN MOTOR

u

{

asflmfr&a

>;

M

M CX€

LIST

Do)

_

W*

CM

aMWMWffl

IRiQITMf

MACH?* Pgÿam

Mj

CM

2

B

32000340330

D &U0.a2Mi

*L'L_

nc

rwuETw

.mu.

(0

-

si

32000340340

SLIDEWAY

LUBRICAT

32000340351

*1

HEAD

COOLING

PUMP

—

Tiÿr

%'J

.53. smoimM

M4*

SUPPLY

10

D’l/6'

32000340562 *2*/

TOOL

EYE

(OPTION)

ii

tt*QTE

I/O

tiHW

mam

cnoTF

ia )

OIHPQIN

I

ti*m

axosaefti

M

awtwmt PUS

?

32000340370

TOOL

EYE<

OPT

I

ON)

SiiaL

Hft

IfcYtt

JUUL

&3&.30B&.

M

&mtM

ÿKW_

ihvtttirtHtti

.w.»

I«)«ni

32000340380

WORK

LIGHT

iW

#X<lRtfr6

StlDctAY

UJWIWWji

101

<?2A5R03i1t

INC

W

VxTCK

9

32000340391

*5

MAIN

SPINDLE CHUC

r***-

no

yypf-iPTtEffV

• ,7-vrrMfRRy

ill

t-XL

kYS<;

CPI

ICC)

32000340401 *1

TAIL

SLEEVE/BODY

jjM«a«aM».

1

>5

irlfX

LUStfT

&RIK

SPtWLt

SUCK

TURRET

SOLENOID/S

3200034041 1

*2

ir(.)g»CG4C401

«l

Hit

ajEENC/POW

111

3SCWW-1

1

• 2

TigÿgT

s<uiÿrc».ycvs.>R

7

32000340420

PCB

PC I

NPUT TURRl

}?ftS03lC45i3«

S

PC

1

hFUT

TlHYrT

fcÿasLsgaauL,,

J.W.

_____

w

WWML

.....

CWtCIRCUII

m

52SSjSa£45£.

3

1

32000340430

C-AXIS SOLENOID

'Mil

A

drawing

number

is

written

on

the bottom-

right

corner

of

each

drawing,

as

shown

by

a

red

arrow.

Open

a

page related

to the

TOOL

EYE.

rmarma7

?

*

i

J

(

l

ii

if

C

i

gLa-

• A

—

*I.

rj

-Hf

ifrr crm*

J

»

.wo

lJ

—

......

I

W

<

<'K

* A

.....

3y> m.,

:

IU

LU

U>

I 891

(II

rs

<*

i rrc u:if -4ii

.

ns

j

wm

C2

n

.....

**-©

;

iSnsftr

—

*»~

£2

:<*&*-

;<.*

*ÿ•

......

«...,

ns

• >>

.nimwa.

ns

r

;o

iif

&MT'&

}J

LW

ITU,

m

wi

«-»

I

W

WTH-W*'-

ii

I

.0

Ik* fil

1Wft.»6

-igr-

_

J4

rsx

na icrim

TISSS-

;s

SISC

MU

,

rÿi&-

nlargement

M

-M8

r

o

i at i.e»

1TBT

TITLE

—

*ou*

LJu-J

ail CsA <rT t-

i

20

—

---

-

B*

CiW4

}..

TOOL

EYE (OPTION)

21

>

?

ua

D

RWH

H

o

32 CO

03

30362

A

?

arid

Fore

tan

Trade

Law

2*

. 'ÿU

J

iw.’w

HA

• + ' t«n

i /

CIKHMi

*

A

BCPEFGHIJKL

01

JP1

onvpp P)MH

23

IC

X303

R30

'

02

21

1500 6<Jtf

&

n

'i

TYPE:CB120100

12/10

f f

200WV

1

03

04

4

_

10

04

MACHINE SIOE

*4

05

MAIN

SPINDLE

CONNECTION

BOX

m KM

KA5

TOOL EYE

MOTOR

TYPE E2211-444

U.

P. G. ORIENTAL

(OW/O.

9A/50H2

12W0.

&5A/G0HZ

>130*1

K401

;

’»

anoint

o

06

0302M

30213

23

£2§

AH®I

mo

s

r,

M

A ,

PLACE

07

5 H

5 ''4T7

0362 1

4 030213

24

3/\

i<

PUJC

—

E§

8

XjlOl

c<d

ft.

YELLOtf/GRECK

09

»

i

10

MB

tQ1

NC

TERM I

>LAL

BOARD A3

11

[

IN

I

~

KA3

XCF33

fs

1

78

X2

i

niQ

w

¥

iflf

§

701

TOOL EYE ARN HIGH

12

TOT.

M

3

1

0)6101

F

Y4

704

OB

109

13

«r

TOOL EYE

FORWARD

TOR.

K

QlOIBICt

bl

0)630)

Y5

§ÿ

I

SB

1GB

ns

14

TOOL

EYE

REVERSE

TOU.M

010)610)

;

I

036301

15

HACK HE

SIDE

16

POE API

MAIN

SPINDLE

CONNECTION

BOX

NC

TERMINAL

BOARD

A3

17

2L-

1O0L EYE

SENSOR

X

1

54 XII R3

1

18

«r

On

I.OKO

1/4W

Sff

XI 2 3CSKIP

1092

2

54Q8W.

:<2-

£5,0X18

SKIP

(TOOL

EYE

1)

19

—

>

1N

W

IN

1

SKIP

CANNON

20

2L*

/

XI

3 R4

:

21

2»

«3

OT

USE

22

-O

• '»

3

w

24

?.

36

1

APR'

D BY

CHK'

D BY URTIN 0Y

TITLE

\MMsk~7

iVKVKI

VAZM

(Dr.

Ml

A)

IÿV

S

TOOLEYE

(OPTION)

ADD,

KA5.KA4

'

99-3/10

II.

H

ALT

PIN

No.

3«

2

’06-6/10 H.H

DRWN No

32CD

0340302

This

*rPc

I

product

is

subject

to all

the

applicable

Japanese Foreign

Exchange

and

Foreign

Trade Law

1)

KA3,

KA4

and

KA5

are

relay

contactors

and

numeric characters

5

and 8M and ”9

and

12”

under the

contactors indicate

a

relay

terminal number

connected

to

a

relay.

KM

*

M

8

9 -YT2

036213

036214

8

036212

KA5 KA4

036214

036213

036212 ,

036213 and 036214

show

the

area

related to

a

function

of these

relay

contactors.

SOT

TITLE

2)

To

see

036212

of

KA3,

for example,

the

last

four

digits

(0362)

of

the drawing

number

enclosed

by

a

red

frame shows

the

page

number

that

covers

KA3

in its

12th

line.

TOOL

EYE

(OPTION)

D RWN II o

32000340362

md Fore

ii

gin

Trade

Law

M-3

<

sfr 5T

%

ag

k

L

5f t

-t

„

-

-cv

A

•

A

A

if C

y

iv

/> 5 J*

.c

i

Jif*

iV

«

£

:1

U*

W

[{I

—

*iu

a*

*•

'£>

—

*L_

MU

0?

CP—

-Ml

'tifrr~4Pm»*

Ib-

Hj

i raw

—

.

E

---

c1,

—

M-

&

K«I3W*

—

*»-

LU

LU

U>

I

SR.

Sll

B3C4

IKFt

U2IT-MII

L

AL.ÿ

tftQjii

'{M&rl

:<>—*

__ _

ML

-£r~iZri$(r~

\™

Ss—

ilt

*

A))..

—

JMflL...

C/

liSrar

i

&

HE2~

UUL/

—

'to¬

ls

r~

J5

*->ÿ

lJ;

•

.1/

fjH

ftgl

I-

H

it

S5£

IÿT¥

y.

IR*

in

‘ÿi.i

«e>

tf

3) The

area enclosed

by

a

blue

frame that

is

in the

12th

line on page 0362

is

the

portion

related

to

KA3.

iyVK-p

;<llr:

*ÿ

iiL

it

>

tf

f

IH*.

Jill

-MR

—

X liT

BCillCX

------

njl—

»*»—f

-MI8B-

1

JS

iu»w: live

J*

y*

**

$

iwrsf

;

l

u

.Las-Jg

15

-+-~a-

tae-

1

«

-%S

—

I

y~«*i

r

fts

Stfcf t £l

Sri

t-

tf

PI

-

tf-i*

t>

4|<L

Silfc

lÿoiMr

-

i

—

n>

H

2;

O-

*» 8fa

W

La

>

&

&

*

VHH

• i . h TTF

iimn/

’an

tit

>cp<

OH

|

W>

j-LS.yU

TM;'f

;ry T

>i

i

J

I

>»

«

l-t|2L;ii

it

1

pf>r

H

*ÿ

x1 c

-m 3i

’



MACHi

ME

SIDE

MAIM

SPINDLE

CONNECT OH

BOX

)

This section

shows

a

motor

circuit

of

the

tool

eye.

MIO is

a

motor

and

BROWN,

BLACK, BLUE and

YELLOW/GREEN

show

each

color

of

motor

wires.

X40

1

1

BROWN

»

AX401

MIO

2

BLACK

J

»

M

X401

is a

number

of

the

connector,

and

the

numeric

characters

1

to

4 are

pin

numbers

of

the

connector.

A3

BLUE

i

»

X40I

©

YELLOVf/GREEN

NC

TERMINAL

BOARD A3

5)

This section

indicates

a

signal output

and

Y3,

Y4 and

Y5

transfer

confirmation

signals

to the

NC board.

XCF33

Y3

17B

TOF.

Id

TOF.M,

TOR.M

and

TOU.M

are

names

used in

the

ladder.

Y4

16B

0

TOR.

M

XCF33 is

a

name

of

a

connector

and 17B,

16B

and

15B indicate a wiring

place of

the

connector.

Y5

15B

TOU. M



i

6)

KA3, KA4 and KA5

are

relay coils and

numeric

characters

1

and

16

indicate

a

relay

terminal number

connected to

a

relay.

1M

m

1

n

to

TOOL

EYE AR M

HIGH

a

I

036206

b

i

n

is

TOOL

EYE

FORWARD

a/036206 ,

b/036206

and

a/036207

written

under

the names

indicate

the

areas related

to

a

function

of

these

relays.

a

indicates

the place of

contact

a

and

b indicates contact

b respectively.

alMS206

&IOW2Q7

t

16

TOOL

EY E

REVERSE

a\mm

o

mm

TITLE

7)

To

see

a/036206

of

KA3,

fo r

example,

the

last four

digits

(0362)

of the

drawing

number

enclosed by

a red

frame

shows

the

page

number

that

covers

KA3 in its

06th

line.

TOOL

EYE

(OPTION)

D

RWN

N

c

32000340362

arid

Faineipt Tr8ds_Law

,

T?

C fife

W

fe tfe

51? tf a

L

HZ .

j

r>

T-f

IA ti

C

S> £

f

C

J u

p

J

J*

II

w~

Ill

~n.

• Of

VLJH.

w*»

n*

Iffc

ai'

J»IK-

Ifctijl

KiM*

{'

OJ

------

.££.

—

J

<l

-

4«-

£V

M-T*

H

lijC

Ut uv 1SX

Ill K7VN

I

IK

CJill

<11

**£ÿ

$

*

IBM

R

&W.

i

->v~

\»

—

rw—

wm

UT.

«

'iSTBW

i

Xb

ri

..

.....

M..

&

»-

c

.laiVPin.

>;

i

i;

—

i<i

ZAP'S

J

;

• rt

lEl.

»

r»nn

m

8)

The area

enclosed

by

a blue

frame

that is

in

the

06th

line

on

page 0362

is

the

portion

related

to KA3.

a

yj

$

«• . **» n

w

ifrfi-W*

OK. tv rcurvKi

rxx

in

cnim

iA-e-

«**-

-SM

3t>:

f

il2SS

;s

-H*

Btm

gjry

;;

.«.

•

SM

&

-

-i£LZ»

___

u

;s

-a-

%

I.Ufr

l.rt

u*

('tL

m t

p-

r

i*

: i

1C

r

h\

«*-

UXM

r16

H

—

>

1

:s

:-

.V

.

14s-

j

'

*

r/r r

v

v*r- I

[ TTV

W7

• aa

ci*

EBH

|

.Mi

U\

»l

T/-

VH

•*

1

U

hi,

>•

*

-A'lU,

j.{

p»p«*r>

i

k>„i>

VJ

i,1

J -x1 * nr A

,

- r

r

.



•

y*

NC

TERMINAL

BOARD

A3

I

. OK

Q

1/4W

9) This

section indicates

a

signal input

and

X198

transfers

a

confirmation

signal to

the

NC

board.

X198

SKIP

(TOOL

EYE

1)

v,

1M

SKIP COMMON

m

XL

r

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

P-

li

i

tv-

*

International

Electrical Codes

YY

Ft

ZL

L

fcu.

LJffiL..

e

*

B*Jim

us

it*

A

list of

the

I.E.C. and

abbreviations

used

to

write

this manual

can

be

located

in

the

front

section of

the

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams.

i

ip

. .m..

Hil

ife.I-

.......

ass.

i

•

i

V ’,

“ti*

*

’ÿSJJ

Vÿ-'S

—

©

1

v

i

\ \w

r-ÿ-ÿ4

.r“

3 '

WHO

*.-f-

,

_

y

-A

—

X f-

SITS'*

liawrffA'iC-

’

Y

5

—

'£-

—

mrT

,

A„

n

—

—

i

Yv

3

JjP*’'

Abbreviation Comparison

List

•

s®

CTW *.VJSUP.«',» »•*

IBI-SHS*

rew'SPi

33H

i

I

ST

lip.

tir.i

.

,

1

1.

V

Vÿ6ÿ*vV»

ail

f

”

W1

>»U*llltt-S

**

fi-

it

»**•

icrÿr

nm*

wnx>

cT*

il

»W is

uh :n»ki

&

*

I

W

tvÿ-awa

1

i

r,ftr

tMT*x

#11

<*til

«u*.>

]

f*l*>

f

li

i

j

a**.

j

st-ki

|

Uil

lilllJU

?*-*-

M1**tl*

o-n-.'J *i

Cÿ8

GTi<

Cl

4.

'St

*>*1*#i

Lit*

ilitt*

i J

ai-u

ex -

I

I

i

Sr,

1

to*

*«o

tit

u«»

«4»<

J’tl

Via

Ct-#»-

l

is*

«ÿ

«<«>

»«CT Hrn

MlfCX

tu

ks*u

Ins-'ia HI

511

R.n

V-*»

fe j

14##

p

:;:.V

¥

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

pi

s

_

:-.

te

-t=j

i

itis

**tc»r>

i

<by;|'-.;;.

: a

TTOfirj

IJ

Breaker

Abbreviation

f.s

• *&mV VrtM*

;

i

1

_iUKu_-i.t-.i.ÿI

>.' a

ww«

t

1*

i

'.t

;

ill-

>-

J

- - .- • v - -

......

• 'ÿ

.....

i ;

_j-

—

JTI

—

'i>t

—

L_

;

j jrmÿ j

:

1

&$v

i

u

;t

«

®L

w*\«

i.xfc»rwt'.

i

,)ÿ

‘L-

T

T3ff

ITflM

¥:

i

.

«•

- 1pJW*c

lk.

1

r

»

.

,

V’

----

...

;

Mi

1

v

>~*mu

HiiJjSuwat

n

+TU. 1*1 ft

j

,

J

&

v-<

T*

I /mv*f

----

-

au.

'

:-p

,:T>4

—

-----

j--

......

JWSH

ji

—

Irfni

-

1

Entire area

dotted

is

optional

.,i*J

aoaant;

_

i

i

• 4 -11

<t)W

?<*

i;*j

9

y,. .4. . . .Q,

|

Is

n

j

JT3BS-+-

I

’ÿ

*»

«* n

•

**>*'*',

y;

I

11

sw.

KUtft

31

*

-

--

S.-v

•

uacSi

t

|

‘

1ÿ1*

BL

«*

M

i

Vt

w

m

a

“JS—.

Vr*

im.

‘j

1*

fc

,

mm

<•

<

'Jrl-r

j

S'

HI

I

J

tt

f

7

l1

TV

-JSA,

i

a

r

war“V

w i

T

Yamazaki

Mazak

Europe

will

not

apply

to

U.S.

i*|.

r.\

tf.

w:»

i

r‘1

Metric Wire

Size

&

Color

*i

n

rm-M,

m-c

SI

c

m

IS

7

I

-Iv

m

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

te,

i

«&*.

I

fe

53*2ÿ3*

Sfe

fe-.<

• The

60 Hz

machines

manufactured

in

the

U.S. are

designed

for

230V

+

10%

(thus

a

I'ange

of 207~253VAC).

V

,

r

$ÿ

fel;

• The

25

3VAC

upper limit is

to

be

considered

an

important

factor and

every

effort

to

avoid

exceeding

this

limit

should

be

made.

The

best continuos

voltage

range for machine

operation

is

208~230VAC.

V

Ui

**

'

m

mi

l Ifcs

pr

• Normal

acceleration

&

deceleration of spindles generate

3.5%

~

7.0% regenerative line voltage.

m,

i

w*

• W hen

using

a transformer,

the

210VAC

secondary

is

the

appropriate

target

for machine operation,

selecting a

supply

voltage

on the

low

range allows

for

positive variances without

adversely

affecting

the

machine.

it

i

:

t;

J

|

m

1



Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

I

• W hen

a

problem

develops on a

machine, more

than

likely

the

problem

will

be on

the hardwired

side,

;

»

&#

•

• Before

assuming

that

the

problem

is definitely

on

the

machine

side,

trace

the

problem

back to the

PLC

input

or output.

He

|

ll

• A fter

identifying

PLC address,

view

the

state

of

the

address

on the

Diagnosis

Monitor Screen.

I

p*-



Electrical Circuit

Diagrams

fe

How to

locate the PLC

address.

Example:

The

coolant pump

motor

is

not

turning

on *

’'Tii

Jr-

Step

1*

With

the

Elementary Diagram

List search for the

drawing numbers

with

the

(4

series) included. Once

the

4 series is

located,

read through

the title

column

for a related item

and

then

view

the

drawing.

t

m

Examples:

|

146

|

35400840220,0

|

AUX.

MOTORS

~

167

|

35400840550,0

|

POWER

PANEL

CONTACTORS

1

|

222

|

35400841140,0

|

AC-PCBPC OUTPUT

RELAY

1

|

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

-* x -r

-

V

'

”1

1

SJ£~

I

*m<w*

*am

s*

4

Series,

Page

22,AdditionalPage

B

H

• i

l

..

seen

r

I

This

drawing

has

the coolant

pumps

3

phase

motor.

]*

f

y

j

—

y

-

{

SÿT

m

m

i

I

i

”L

,<•

I

,

»

y

j tfÿf

......

-

1

*

ssraw

ij

i'H

v:

:

Xvjm,

I

j**

»*

y

f

r

P

“

A:

*h£

Now

for

step 2

locate

the

coil

that

will

engage

the contactor.

n-

~

T

r

h

H

c

I

ÿ:*''*fc;S:.

:E532lB3iiii5S5B?a3

—

---

,.

.

......

.....

w

ÿ

p

y

'—jmgm

l

j-

s.**£

1

M&'m

*'•

8

Electrical Circuit

Diagrams

S”

fife: |

H

5.%-.

V

USS*

t

.

;

#»

*•

S

—

, j

-

w&m

ft

rnm

*m

i* 3.9ms

1

I

mm# *.

4

Series,Page

22,

AdditionalPage

§

PM#

-au.

i:

Thermal

Relay

f1

l*U|

Wire#

1-

ii

\~T

V1.W~-

.....

....V»

i

,W,«|A

**

**ÿ»

333jB

i

ES

iQDl

jrtj

gtisg

4

I

It

?**

sura

3

_

rn ..

i>*

—

ijE l

I

-

*15

15

*

FU • S SO

.tL..

UIS

<4

221

s;

MIS

-—

-V

-

cosLmt

PUMP Hero?

*

3-

hvf—

;

i

ontactor

Pin

#

i.

i

OBUi

5

MÿmaiwasBit

,c

2$

/r

71

1

ivFTTT

IS+m

?**

VgLLCW:/tiHfEM

26

l\

;

I'I

|

/; ;

ki

Itazasd

La-

Tutu

R*

2

3

f

&

,

i*k

t *PMH

&2&JLLJJ

SM;

T7v

13

ISSE

ISÿSEsÿri.

:r:::aTtA

B

|

*

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

' . • • ÿ '

'

'

-

. v-

-~-'v

~

<

This

drawing

has

the coolant

|

pumps

motor

starter coil.

**€»

n»€t

ft«8

p

2

1

I

I

ftfti

4

F11

MYIJRRJ.IC

ry*e

wjrw

n

iift-

*

>4

AJBUWI

il

6

211

5

wct«

rtlJ Fit

t*lj

m

m**

-

lit

B

M

-I W

I

4

—

\

>

'§1

U

-

-• .

mi

• 5 1 1

MI

COCLANT

P'X’

K)TC«

-S

........

_

for

step

3

locate the

relay

14

.<l L

S-1

Me

i 12

U

2si

0b,

l M

coil

that

will

-ft r.marm

IS

hft—

M

'drt)\’ntri~

engage

the

relay

contact.

IS

1

Hi

?

m\\

it

i*

I

Series,

Page

55,

AdditionalPage

0

Li

ft-

'



r

Ip

i

Electrical Circuit

Diagrams

&

m

,

I

m

Wil

i

m

Tn7v I

1

1

iTn

1

TJTIFT#

i

i

i

s

n

rt

:

TTTTK

4

FI

>*

wrtjRxa.li

'OR

1

5

AJMBWT*

Pin#

WC H

X5J1

FI

30

mi

IT W

HDTOR

tt.

*4ÿ6

m

r”i

IA

I--*

—

t

ll

feV;

(CIM/Ml

IS

m

:

i

J

_

Wiie#

%

Cross

Reference

To

Coil

Location

Connector#

j

H

i

T

I

CHIP

CCW

K

Cross Reference To

NormallyClosed

Contacts

H

n*

TOW

F

jTTT

ft

ITEISIffla?

7

tor

H

«TM”

lb:

i

I

]*

f;|

Series,

Page

55,

Additional

Page

0

.

;

*1

Electrical

Circuit

Diagrams

Vi

SB

K'.

j'

lÿyv*'

m

i

m:

This

drawing

has

the coolant

pumps

PLC

output

address.

it

aum

w

V*E* umx%

CHXX

CPEH

£hr@—

Cf“

'*

—

*

j

H<5

--

moi MW>

—

Vifcn

H<5-

?0

}—

W

31

#

22

dOJSu

tt*ui

TJ:

CHUCX ac*£

sHILH

fi

»

I*XI

ft

2*

P

25

C3U

J 1 1 50**1

734

734

<fii

L2»

«-*

»

K.SKJ

fSKM 9%*)

&JMr

’

fc-0

6

Now

for

step

4

locate the

PLC

address

on the

Diagnosis

Monitor

Screen.

27

cw

W57

tan

SLHre

a-®

YCfe

a

L«

n

rx*o?cojj-.i «:WAI

?«o

)V.

tail SLCEvt

ft£vt*S£

vtfe

H4—

%

l

m

S?

Shown

S

NexM

5

i/lPD*

QJJW

W

-4

C

COLON

T

2V-@

*

|

M-a

—

fÿ

:

tacu/ii I

I

35

.

;

'

’w':

‘

V

'

'ÿ

•

'ÿ»*.'

”'.vi «•

i'.’

S,**iv

I

Senes,Page 114,

Additional

Page0

I

m

1

1

V

IP

Electrical Circuit

Diagrams

£g

<6?

• ÿ • - • - - v -

.....

v

.

mmmmimmwm rnmmmm

MB

l*

mrsi

*• %

*mxxPCN

/M.

DUO.

(Pf*

Ml

X

D

J

ITTSril

51

a

4}

i

DU

rr

LLJ

|%

»»ye»

CMJCK

aosf

jcj—

CIMMUI

£

r

>i«*

Cross

Reference To

Normally Open

Contacts

K

FTW.I

I

gTlniiÿx-

$1

Vi

mull

H

2T

pm

*w

*i

*XW

L 3U*lt

W-WO

•

J

5

:

/

fvÿMl

i.JTTBTS

5

XCH44

L

CCU

$1

I

741

cÿ-

COOLANT

*i

s

YOi

?T

V

CH-K

rawsi i

FuÿT

«ÿ

35

r

J

HB

Wire#

/

X

>-A

;

'$£

V

<

v

.

>

,

i#

ft

Li

Mg

[y

HIM

4.l :A»i

Vi.

L

sJlllMMK

EmTTmi

l

Strips,

Page

114,

Additional

Page

0

I

|L

*»

|l|



351

This

is a

newer

example

of

the

Electric

Circuit Diagrams

?

I

4

5

h.

2

3

m

LIfC

l

(40040/23)

6

Li SL2 6L3

A

2

KMLG FRIO

>110

6.0A

£L1 LLLL

HYDRAULIC RUHR

MOTOR 2.2KV

'

H

\

V3V

A

7

?

Vli

PC

61.3

Vli

4

200V 50Hz

7.6A

60Hz 6.8A

<40300/12)

\

/

Z10

6

B

HZ5

T2

C

DOLING

FAN

MOTOR

100

V

60Hz

0,15

A

35

7

zL

+ÿ

*

—

oc

i

*

/

B

A

c

ft

PI

4PC

T

J

J

10

POWER

PANEL

/0

UNTT

1M

15

li

KM10

B19y

N

N

2300

7

A

X1030

HYDRAULIC PUMP

MOTOR STARTER

40300/03

.

FRiO

Q1

1

AinA2

00

a

S42

M3

—

o

12

<403CG/12>

fee

\

Hrn.H

VEl

I

13

4-0

300/12

16

14

X

1030

16

15

S

\

E

16

17

2L+

RE F

*

9

(4D330/11)

FRIO

19

c

1349

REF

*

8 9?

(40370/05)

JH.

0

21

NACHM

mz

ppi

BASE

I/O

LIMIT

JJ

c

G

SP I

23

;<526

X55

'98

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

DOWN

19y.:

500

//A 9

XII

“*•

£4

?

/

\

HYDPS

2L+

26

I

5

H

2b

27

£8

£9

30

31

32

J

33

TITLE

should say

Hydraulic System

34

35

k

A

CHK-'L

BY

DRWN

BY TITLE

HEAD

LUBE

PUMP

MET

DR

DRVH

M3

A

V

/7 10' 27-98

10-27'

9B

A

A

CfWilD OVERLOAD

HEATER

SCTTCHG

FHCM 9*70 60A 2/32/99 J&

M.HDTTA

J,

BRYANT

YNV&m

MAZ AK

CORPQPfflOH

557K01403002

CHAM5ED

rm KCTCP

FROM

2SO

VA C TU

JQOVftC

1/23/99 JS

This

product

is

subject

to

all

applicable

export

control

laws

and regulations by Japanese

Governnent



354



355



356



Its

important

to

understand

the

difference

between

how Electrical

Ladder and PLC

Ladder

function.

Electrical

Ladder

it

based

on

physical

closing

and

opening

of

contacts.

PLC

Ladder

is

based

on

logical

status

of

contacts.

Instead

of

close

or

open,

PLC

contacts

are 1

or

0.



To

better

understand PLC

Ladder

we need to review

a

few

basic

electronic

logic

circuits.



•

Digital signals

have

only

two

values,

• Ml

and

“0 ,

•

“High

and

“Low ,

or

•

“On and

“Off ,

or

• “True

and

“False .

High

On

Off

Low



Logic:

Switches

in

Series

(AND)

*

SI S2

Lit

0 0

0 1

1

0

1 1

0

0

0

1

SI S2

•

The

bulb

will

light

only

under certain

conditions: what?

•

The

bulb

will

turn

on

only

when

switches

SI

AND

S2

are

closed,

for

all other

combinations

the bulb is

off.



1

Logic:

Switches

in

Parallel

(OR)

6

Lit

I

S2

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

/

1

1

SI

1

/

S2

•

The

bulb

will

light under certain conditions:

what?

•

The

bulb

will

turn

on

when

switches

SI OR S2

are

closed,

for

all other combinations

the bulb

is

off.



Logic:

Opposites (NOT)

Lit

S

0

1

1

0

•

The

bulb will

light

under certain conditions:

what?

•

The

bulb

will

turn on

when

switch

S

is

OFF,

and

turn

off

when

switch

S

is ON.

•

This

circuit

is

for

illustration

only

•

If

this

was

a real

circuit,

what would

happen

to

the

battery

when switch 5

was

dosed?

Logic

Gates}

AND

mm

mm

I

n> ;

bacasmi

s

»

;

'

I

mm

\

'

'

'

:

:r

y-'

f

i

m

'msemSBm

B

|

Q

I

ii

1

1

;

,•

.

I

m

mmmm

m

immm

o

NtaS

fa

si

Frmn+

Am&rte

wo-Ii

Pill

.

mm

|i

IIRHS&I

-

m

i

:-<:

I

;r

H

The

output

of

an

AND

gate

is

1

only

when

all

inputs

are

1.

Only

when

Input

A

/\N0

Input

B

are

1.

the

output

is

1.



Logic

Sates:

OR

OR

W'l

......

Truth

Table

[I

A

B

Q

0

0

0 1

1

0

1 1

0

Two-Input

OR

Sate

1

1

1

The

output

of

an

OR gate

is

1

when

any

input

is 1.

When

Input

A

R

Input

B

is

1,

the

output is 1.



Logic

Gates:

NOT

NOT

Truth

Table

fm

r

Q

l

NOT Sate

1

0

Note that NOT

gates

have

only one

input.

The

output

of

a

NOT

gate is the

opposite

of

the

input.

When

Input

A

s

0,

the output

is

1.

When Input

A

is

1,

the

output

is 0



Summary

of

Logic

Sates

and

Truth

Tables

•

Logic

gates may

have

one

or

more

inputs.

AND

Gate

OR Gate

NOT

Gate

A

B Q

A

B

Q

A

Q

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1 1

0

0 1

0

1

1

0

0 1

1

1

1

isi

m

88H



Basic

PL

C

ontacts

In

PLC Ladder

the

NO

contact is

representing

the

value

of

1

.

In

PLC

Ladder

the

NC contact

is

representing

the

value of

0.



Basic

PL

C

ontacts

If

this

NO

contact

which

represents

a

logic

1

is

not

highlighted

then its not

true

and must be a

0.

If

this

NO

contact

which

represents

a

logic

1 is

highlighted

then

its

true

and must

be

a

1

.



Basic

PL

C

ontacts

If this NC

contact

which

represents

a

logic

0

is

not

highlighted

then

its

not

true

and

must

be

a

1

.

If

this

NC

contact

which

represents

a

logic

0

is

highlighted

then its

true

and must

be a

0.

IV

mm



Electrical

Ladder

vs

PL

Lodder

(AND)

3

1

S2

II—

( )

XI

X2

yi

Lets

compare

a

electrical circuit

to

an

PLC

circuit.



Electrical

Ladder vs

PL Ladder

MNC))

*

SI

S2

Jli

ii—

( )

XI

yi

2

S1

physically closes and

X1

highlights

to

show

you

that

the logic

1

is

True.

PLC contacts

won’t

change

from NO

to

NC

on

the PLC

monitor because

they

are

logical

not

physical.



Electrical Ladder vs

PL

Ladder

MND)

SI S2

_

II

II

XI

X2

yi

Now S1 and

S2

are

physically

closed

and

X1

and

X2 are both

highlighted

to show

you

that the

logic

1

is

True

for

both. Both

outputs

will

now

be 1

.



List

of

Commonly

Used

Abbreviations

for Mazatrol

PLC

Devices

PRS

=

Proximity

Switch

*(xxx)

=

*denotes

active low

SS

=

Select

Switch

RS

=

Reed Switch

SW

=

Switch

PB

=

Push

Button

.M

=

Machine

Side

PS

=

Pressure

Switch

LS

=

Limit Switch

CD

=

Command

INT

=

Interlock

.B

=

Button (typically

on

operation

panel)

.N

=

Signal

to or

from

the

NC

,L

=

Lamp

(indicator lamps on

operation

panel)

.P

=

Parameter

related

CL

=

Clamped or

Closed

UCL

=

Unclamped

OP

=

Open

EXT

=

Extend

RET

=

Retract S

=

Solenoid

ST

-

Start T

=

Timer

FIN

=

Finish

R

=

Relay



374

Assume

that Alarm 250:

SPINDLE

START MISOPERATION has

occurred. The

following explains

a

procedure

to investigate

a cause

of the

alarm

using

the

ladder

circuit.

(The

INTEGREX series

is

used

here

as

an example

and

the

trace

procedure for

other models is

basically

the

same.)

P250

Ml

209

HI

{TOR

R7000

H2000

R700o}

Ml 209

{WAND

R7000 HDFFF

R7000}

P251

M200

{iNC R2130}

1

F252

M200

200

15

4

M200

Hf

{PLS

Ml

2

28}

Ml

2

28

XI

11

HMf

{SET M5003}

1

XI11

M5003}

RST

M200

R7000}

WOR

R7000 HI

8

M200

XI

56

K4

*

{MOV

HFFFF

Y310

}

3

R7000=

641 R2130= -14887

JW<

jHeiaory

(

10775

/

3Z718

Step)

Mode

JMONITOR

)

III

II

RUN/

HI

>00

L

END

EAD

STOP

..

When the

MONIT

OR menu key above

is

pressed,

the

following screen

will be

displayed

Next ,

Press

the -< >-

Menu

Key

P2

50

Ml

209

R7000}

HI

[TOR

R7000

H2000

Ml209

R7000}WAM)

R7000

HDFFF

P251

M200

[INC

R2130}

M200

i

11

P

252

M200

15

M200

[PLS Ml

2

28}

Hf

Ml

2

28

XI11

M5003}

SET

HI-iHf

1

XI

11

[RST

M5003}

M200

R7000}

TO R

R7000

HI

8

M200 XI

56

K4

[MOV HFFFF

Y310

}

*

3

R2130= 238917000=

641

Mode

f

jyy

'

Ti

\

Memory

<

1077S

/

32718

St-ep)

HI- HP—

HH

H

>-

>[

Y-

TRIGGER

RE0IST.

HEX

8



Enter F50

using

the numeric keypad,

so the

F50

ladder

circuit

will

be displayed on the screen.

T4S

M3433

M3110

F50

1ST92

4

F50 is

“ON”.

F50 was turned

On

by :

1. T45

2.

M3430

3. M3417

113430

M3454

-

1

\

M3417 F9S

-

1 \

F97

—

I

H

There is no reason to look for

the

(3)

three

signals.

Instead , you

should

focus on

why

M3433

is a

“0” it

should

be a

“1”.

“Reset

will

get rid

of the alarm

but,

it

will reappear as

soon as

you

try to

start

the spindle

again.

M3433 must

be

brought to

a

“1”

before you can run the

spindle.

Ml

50

3

M2Q2

M3111

HI-

H

Ml

50

4

KEY SIGNALS

M3

110 (S-MODE)

Spindle Mode

M3433 (ENBST)

Spindle Start Enable

T45

(SJOG.T)

Spindle

Jog

Timer

M3430

(SPST)

Spindle Start

M3417 (SPRNM) Spindle

Run

Memory

M3454

(ENBRUN) Spindle

Run

Enable

Ml 9

HI-

MIS

_

|

j

_

Ml?

RESET

PB

Ml6

“

I

\—

Nl/

F50

X140

F50

II

32718 Step

)

Mode

jttOHITOR

|

riemory

(

1077 S

/

-[

]-

TRIGGER REGIST.

—

II

--

t—

HH

4F

j

HEX

Enter M3433

using

the numeric keypad,

so

the M3433

ladder circuit will be displayed on the

screen.

M3501 M4053

Y4E0

M5135 M5133

M3432

M3705 M3433

< >

lil

lil

III

6768

M5128 M2601 M5326

Hf-Hl

M6948

HI

I

MISS I

IS

32718

Step

) Mode

(HOKITGI*.

.....

>-

M3433

(Memory

<

107

7

S

/

j|

If

I

_

1 1

_

I

1

i

H

:

L

I

Enter

M3501 using

the

numeric keypad, so

the M3

501

ladder circuit

will

be

displayed

on the screen.

X444

X445

M3501

-

<

>

T80 D40

5725

M5375 M3498

M3498

>

X444

is PC

input

signal from

TOOL

EYE

forward

end

confirmation sensor

and

X445

is

PC input signal

from

TOOL EYE

reverse

end confirmation

sensor .

M3501 has a

function to rotate the

spindle that

is

enabled

only when

the X445

is

on .

The

alarm

occurred

because

X445 was

not

on .

If the TOOL EYE

is

retracted,

the

TOOL EYE

reverse

confirmation

sensor

must

be

malfunctioning.

ISO

=

20

rso

=

o

D40 20

-

M3

501

Step;

Mode

{ttOHITOR

EÿC

Memory

1077S

/

32718

jfl.

—

i

—

j|

—

i

i,

j-f

i

I

JSSE5

—

C

]

—

TRIGGER

REGIST.

mmm

HEX

DIAGNOSIS

(MAKER)

-

LADDER MONITOR

Display

2. Display

data

description

No.

Unit

Data

description

tem

This

key is used

to

exit

the

ladder display,

xit

Th

is

key is

used

to

return to

the

previous

menu

on the display,

This

key

is

used to search

by

Iad5erstep

numbers?

This key is used to

search

nocvrestricted

by

device

number.

2

Previous

3 StepNo.

Dev.No.

This key is used

to

search

normally'open

contacts,

This

key

is

used

to

search

normally

closed

contacts.

5

-I

-

6

-

/

-

This

key

is

used

to search

for

coils,

-< >-

This key

is

used

to

search

for

instructions.

A t

This

key is

used

to change

the

displayed

data

to decirraL

This

key

is

used

to change

the

displayed

data to

hexadecimal

This

key

is used

to

freeze the screen when

a

monitored

device

changes

state.

_

_

_

_

_ __

This

key

is

used to

display a

device

status

of

either

ON

or

OFF at

the

bottom

of the

screen.

9

Dec

Hex

0

11 Trigger

12

Regist.

This

key

is

used

to

RUN

or

STOP

the PLC.

This

key

is

used

to

transfer

date

from

IC-Card

to

NC.

This

key

is

used

to transfer

data

from

NC

to

IC-Card.

Run/Stop

3

NC<-IC

4

NC->IC

5

This

key

Is used

to

transfer

data from

Hard

Drive to

NC,

This

key

is

used to

transfer data from

NC

to

Hard

Drive

This key

is

used

to

transfer

dab

between FLASH

ROW

and

RAM.

_

_____

_

___

This key

is used

to

transfer data between

FLASH ROW

and

LANGUAGE

FILE

16

NC<-HD

NO>HD

7

ROMCOPY

8

19

PLCLANG

381

Instruction Function

WAND

’AND’

Instruction

(16 Bits)

DAND

• AND*

Instruction (32

Bits)

WOR

’OR’

Instruction

(16

Bits)

DOR

‘DOR* instruction

(32

Bits)

’MOVE*

instruction

(16

Bits)

OV

DMOV

MOVE*

Instruction

(32

Bits)

FMOV

• FORCE

MOVE1

Instruction

BMOV

• BIT MOVE Instruction

SET

ADDRESS

SET

Instruction

RST

ADDRESS

RESET

Instruction

(Resets

a

noted

address

that

has been

set)

COMPARE Instruction

(168Ey

COMPARE

instruction

(32 Bits)

>,<

D>,CK

EQUAL

TO

Instruction

(16 Bits)

D=

EQUAL

TO

instruction

(32 Bits)

BCD BINARY

TO

BCD

Conversion

]

BIN ‘BCD

TO

BINARY*

Conversion

BINARY

ADDITION*

Instruction

E

‘BINARY

SUBTRACTION Instruction

DIVISION’

instruction

L

'• #

BINARY

MULTIPLICATION’ Instruction

PLS

’PULSE

ON

Instruction

(Each

Scan)

PLF PULSE

OPPHnstrudion

(Each Scan)

CALL

SUB-PROGRAM CALL’ Instruction

i

CONDITIONAL

JUMP

Instruction

J

RET

’RETURN*

To Main

Sequence

Proyam

INC

INCREMENT

ADD

1

instruction

DEC

DECREMENT

Subtract 1

instruction

XCH

‘EXCHANGE

Data

Instrudion

BIT

ON*

Instruction

IT

Bll

BIT

OFF’

Instruction

WXOR

OR* Exclusive

Instruction

(16

Bis)

SFL

SHIFT

LEFT

By

Binary

of

K

value

SHIFT

RIGHT

By Binary

of

K

value

FR

HEX

Value

-

CONSTANT



382



383

G;

TiaOR

R7000

H2000 R700ol

CBÿ

P250

H1209

0

M1209

*

[ M AUD

R7000

HDFFF

R700o}

PZ51

H200

t

{iNC

R2130}

H200

ZS2

H200

t

S

A

M2 00

[f'LS

H122GJ-

E;

1228

Xlll

21Hhr4f

[SET

H500ÿ-

4

lll

f

HS003J

ST

H200

f

R7000}

MOR

R7000

HI

6

200 X156

K4

¥

-[HOV

n

Fypy

Y3io

R7000=

641

R2130= 22639

R7000

=

DECIMAL

641,HEX

0281

or

BINARY

0000

0010 1000 0001

BINARY

0010 0000 0000 0000

BINARY

0010

0010 1000

0001

The result

of

the

WOR

INSTRUCTION

is

now stored in R7000.

WOR

When

WOR

with

HEX

2000

The

result will be

HEX

2281

WAND

R7000

=

DECIMAL

641, HEX

0281

or BINARY

0000 0010 1000 0001

When

WAND

with

HEX

DFFF

The

result

will

be

HEX

0281

BINARY

1101 1111

1111

1111

BINARY 0000

0010 1000 0001

The result

of

the

WAND

INSTRUCTION

is now

stored in R7000.

The

contacts of

M5003 will now

be

true.

The

contacts

of

M50O3 will

now

be false.

SET

RST

HEX

VALUE

The

HEX

VALUE

to

be

used

in

the

instruction.

If the

K is

to

the

outside

of

the

instruction,

it

states

a

limited

amount

of

BITs

to

use.

If

the

K

is

to

the

inside of

the

instruction, it

states

a

decimal

value

to use.

Constant BIT values

K3

=

12 BITS

K7

=

28

BITS

5

6

CONSTANT

K1

=4

BITS

K5

=

20

BITS

K2

= 8

BITS

K6

=

24

BITS

K4 =

16 BITS

K\

=

32

BITS

3

384

1

200

t

}

498

D170

2170

K10

P28

2

454

U

}

57 9

7

D23

K2

D24

}

23 D25

H470

{=

}

—

IF

D25

62 1

KO D29 D29

}>•

-[CALL

P89

869

H5

D89

HO D89

4

5

R2170

=

2000

D170

=

20000

D23

=

22

D2S

24

=

0

=

O

BINARY

MULTIPLICATION

R2170

=

DECIMAL

(2000)

MULTIPLICED

by

CONSTANT

10

The

result

will

be

(20000)

and

stored

in

D

1

70 .

1

/ BINARY

DIVISION

D23

=

DECIMAL (22)

DIVIDED

by

CONSTANT (2)

The result

will

be

(if)

and stored

in

D24.

~~

EQUAL

TO

If

D29 EQUALS

CONSTANT

0,

then

instruction is

true.

GREATER

THAN

If

HEX

5

is

GREATER

THAN the data

in

D89, then

the

instruction is

true.

3

4

>

LESS

THAN

If

HEX

0

is

LESS

THAN the data in

D89,

then

the instruction

is true.

5

<



385

dk

230

H23S

H230

}

—

Ih

M

{HOV

R20

73 4

D617

}

ll

}

CALL

P16

2

H230

}

618

20

K900

[CALL

P12

}

}

CALL

P19

3

H200

}

t

040

+

D23

K1

D7S

£>23

=

22

D7S

=

23

>617

=

0

=

o

D618

=

O

MOVEOV

Move the data from R20 to

D617.

BINARY

SUBTRACTION

Subtract

the CONSTANT

(900) from

the

data

in R20

(0).

The

result

will

be

(0)

and stored

in

D618.

-MNARYkDDlTlON

ADD

the

CONSTANT

(1)

to

the

data in

D23

(22).

The

result will

be

(23)

and stored in

D75.

+



386

H12Z8

Xlll

\hr~M-

{sBT

HEOOÿ-

Xlll

t

{RST

MS003}

MZOO

t

{HOV

}

62

R1937

D80

1

}

8

FR

D80

2

H491

H512

u

{

1

-

[{BIT

R2109 K6

J

R1994]-

853

XCH

R1999

4480

HH

RZ109 K6

}

{HOV

HI

}

89

3

R1937= O

D80

=

0

R1999=

3

Z109=

0

R1994= 0

SFR

SHIFT

RIGHT

The

16

BIT

BINARY value

in

D80

will

shift

8

places to the

right,

filling

the

vacant

places

with 0’s.

Example:

If D80

=

24755 or Binary

0110

0000

1011 0011

_

0000 0000

0110 0000

1011

BIT

INVERSE (OFF)

The

instruction is

true

when

R2109

BIT

6

is

0.

BII

Will

be

Deleted

IT

BIT

ON

The

instruction

is true

when R2109

BIT

6

is

1.

XCH

EXCHANGE

The

value

in

R1999

(3)

and

R1994 (0) will exchange.

The

result being R1999 (0) and

R1994

(3).



387

Clk

203

MZ7S

t

[DHC

D4

{

51 3

2

2014

M540

\br*r

R199?}

76 9

H201S

—

I

H

{=

R1997J R1997J-

HOV

KO

774

K13

XI

50

X109

3

Ih-H

}

404

PLF

M744

M5003

nsoo3

J-HH

{BIT

R7005

K6

]ÿ

[PLS }

42 4

H378

R1997=

1

4 =3

R7

0 05

=

640

DEC

DECREMENT

(SUBTRACT

1)

i

Subtract

(1)

from the data

in

D4

(3).

The

result will

be

D4

=

(2).

INCREMENT

(ADD

1)

NC

Add

(1) to the

data

in

R1997

(1).

The

result will

be

R

1997 =

(2).

PLF

PULSE

OFF

Address

M744 will

be OFF for one

scan of the

PLC.

3

PLS

PULSE ON

Address M378

will

be

ON for one

scan

of

the PLC

388

MZOO

XI

56

K4

JHOV

}

3

HFFFF

Y310

G\

23C

I

I

}

BCD

R44

43 3 D93

}

/

D94

44 K5

H594

4

}

<

>

O

D95

2

H1199

}

[FMOV

KO

887

R1S8

K4

H229

if

}

FHOV

KO K20

S4

H378

w

}

BHOU

R2782

481

D1006 K14

R44

=

0

D93

=

0

R1S8

=

0

9S

=

0

94

=

0

BINARY

TO BCD

The

BINARY

DATA in R44

will be changed to BINARY

CODED

DECIMAL and

moved

to

D93.

Example:

If R44

=

1

3

5 or

BINARY

0000 0000

1000

0111

The BCD

stored

in D93 would

=

0000

0001

0011

0101

BCD

FMOV

FORCED

MOVE

BATCH

TRANSFER

OF

MULTIPLE 16

BIT DATA BLOCKS .

A

(0)

will

be

moved into

R158

~

R161.

BMOV

BIT

MOVE

16

BIT

DATA

BLOCK

TRANSFER

The

first 14

BITS

beginning

with

BIT

0

from R2782

will

be moved

to

D1006.



389

1

220{BIT

R414

}

|

[CALL

PI

1S

H200

t

PI

XI5B

-\\

}

93 9

iPLS

M852

2

}

957

RET

H200

t

P10

}

34 0

PXO

H200

f

{DHOV

HI

}

52 3

D100

]ÿ

65 3

R414

=

22672

D100

=

1

I

1

CALL

SUB

-PROGRAM

CALL,

Call

SUB-PROGRAM

PI

REtURU TO

MAIO-PROGRTM

ET

RETURN

back

to

the

LdcRr

sequence

where

sub-program

was

called



390



391

Matrix Ladder

Troubleshooting

Introduction

Troubleshooting

with

the

Matrix

Ladder

software

takes

a bit more effort

than

using

the previous control’s ladder tools. However

the advantage of

having

comments displayed while

viewing

ladder symbols will make up fo r

the

added

keystrokes.

First, you must load

the ladder into the

on-board

area.

Follow

the

instructions, Matrix

Ladder Monitor

-

Appendix

A

Simple

troubleshooting.

Once

the ladder monitor

is

displayed

along

with

comments,

the

next step

is

to do

a

search

for the

contact

or coil that

is

causing

the problem. In

most

cases it

is

to

search

for

the

alarm generated

on

the

screen.

See

the

ladder’s

element

or

comment

list

for the most complete

listing

of alarms.

An

example

is

alarm 217.

Alarms

200 to

399

which are

generated

by

the

machine itself, simply

subtract

200

and

do

a

search.

In

this

example,

this

would

be FI

7.

Now,

the Matrix deviates from the M640/Mpro.

Alarms

1200 to

1399

are searched

by

subtracting

1000.

Example:Alarm

1208

is

searched

by

F208.

Alarms

200 to

399

on

Head

2 of

a

multiplex

will

add

200.

Example:

Alarm

250

on Head

2

will be

searched

by F450.

Alarms

1200

to

1399

on Head

2

of

a

multiplex

will

Su

6

7

R

ftcT

Example:

Alarm/301

will

be

alann

searched by F701

.

Alarms

200 to

399

on

Robot of multiplex

will

need

addffifrfl.

LJO0

Example:

Alarm

202

on

the

GL

will

be

searched

by

F602.

Assuming

that you now have

the ladder displayed

with comments, press

the

left

menu

key

till

you

see

the

menu

key

Monitor

Pressing

Monitor, you will

see contacts

highlighted in

blue

when

on .

If

there

isn’t anything

highlighted,

ensure that

the

top

display doesn’t

say

monitor

stop.

If

it

does,

select the

Start/Stop

to

toggle

it on.

Monitor

Another display

at

the

top

to pay

attention

to is

the

ladder file

that

it

being

viewed.

When

searching

fo r

a

contact

or

coil,

the

current

ladder

will be

searched.

At

the end of the ladder, it will state:



392

m

LC Onboard

The

find

target

could

not

be:

found. Find another

program.

B

NO

Enter yes, and

will

to

another

ladder file within

the

M01 area. Remember

there

are multiple

ladder

files.

Pic Run

Or Stopped

Which

Ladder

file

Being

viewed

T

Til

X

Monitor

Mode

«**

»*«

XMC

Or

1*

-a***?*

i

T

•

l£*t

Monitor Stop

1385

{

urn

*1/08 mi

t

S3

??*;

if

LnJ

j

r

IF

;

:E

I

s

CI-iSÿCE

MDNlTm

i€Dto:

I?

Searching

for a

contact or coil.

1 )

If

yourf

screen

looks

similar

to the one above,

press

the left menu

key

till

you

see

FIND

REPLACE

2) After selecting this

menu

key

will

allow you

to select

FIND

CONTACT

OR

COIL

393

3)

Enter

in FI

7

for

alarm

217.

and

it

will

stop

at

the first

contact

or

coil

of

FI

7

it

finds.

4)

Pressing

the

TARGET menu key

will

toggle between contact

and coil.

H3h-Th

N971B

k

F17

8775

-tf-

OM.T

irf

X7

M9720

h-

0

NTE

Itl

H

TARGET

PROGRAM

3

)MAIN374

3

F17ÿ

H8010

N6011

TARGET

|

CONTACT

h:;M

RE

M

s'

I

RIP

W .

<9718ÿ

FIND

HV

JT432ÿ

F18

8787

D

|

M01

$10

PROGRAM

CHANGE

: TARGET

PROGRAM

ARGET

FIND

EVICE

Example

above shows the search

for

F17

and

the

target

selected for

coil.

When

you

are

finished searching,

then

keep

pressing

the

left menu

key

until

display

shows

the

copyright screen.

Select

END

and

will

exit.

You

will

probably

see the

following menu

display.

Ignore its

warning

and

say YES

to exit.

There

is

date

not

preserved

efter

it

edits

Aili

'»

.

Mi

»V”'

d

in

the

onboard

edit area.

The

content

o

,

-

____

he edit is

lost

when

ending

as

it

Is.

COPYRIGHT©

2004

• i

EH

NO

—I

L

RIGHTS

RESERVED

1

|

MO

YES NO

394

Appendix-A

Matrix

Ladder Mon ito r

1)

Press

DIAGNOS.

2)

Press

VERSION.

3)

Press

LADDER

MONITOR

4

)

Selec t

NC

FILE

5)

Press

OPEN.

6)

Select OPEN

again.

A)

Display will

say

Reading from Pic

B)

Display

will

say

Pic Onboard

Complete

7)

Press

OK.

8)

Press

<LEFT

MENU<

key twice to

see LADDER in black

now.

9)

Select MONITOR

and display w ill ac tu al values .

10)

If

still

not showing status,

select

START/

STOP

MONITOR

11)

If

No

comments

then may

be

that

the comments

aren't

selected

to be shown.

)

Press CLEFT

MENUC key

till see

th e

VIEW,

select it.

TOOLS

B)

Select

COMMENT

DISPLAY

C)Make

sure

there

is checkmark

beside

|

|

COMMENT .

D)

Press

SET

when

finished.

Still No

comment?

This is

probably

because th e

comment

file

(*.

wed)

wasn' t

Loaded

in

with

ladder

in

steps

5

and 6.

A)

Keep

pressing

CLEFT

MENUC

key

till you see th e

main

Mitsubishi

Pic

Programming

Tools

Copyright

screen .

B)

Select ENVIRON .

SETTING

C)

Select NC FILE

SETTING

)

E)

Click on

th e STORAGE

PATH Box

so

it

is

highlighted

or

just

press

arrow

down

key

to

highlight

it.

F)

The

pathway

should be

C:

\m6y_ymw\MPLC

G)

Press

SETTING

menu key.

H)

Press

the

Left

menu

key

an select

NC

FILE

I)

Repeat

steps

5 through

11

to

see

th e lad der with

comments

.



395

Matrix

Ladder Save Procedure.

Ensure both

ladder and

comments are saved.

1)

Press

DIAGNOS.

2)

Press

VERSION.

Select >RIGHT

MENU> key

and

enter 1131

and

press

Input.

3)

Press

LADDER

MONITOR

4

)

Select

NC

FILE

5

)

Press

OPEN .

6)

Select

OPEN

again.

A)Display

will

say

“Reading from

Pic”

B)

Display

will say

Pic

Onboard

Complete

7

)

Press

OK.

8)

Press

CLEFT MENUC

key twice

to see

LADDER

in black now.

9)

Select

MONITOR

and

display

w ill ac tu al

values

.

10)

If

still

not

showing status,

select

START/

STOP

MONITOR

11)

If

No

comments

then

may

be

that

the comments

aren't

selected

to be

shown.

)

Press

CLEFT MENUC

key

till

see

the

VIEW,

select

it.

TOOLS

B)

Select COMMENT

DISPLAY

C)Make

sure there is

checkmark

beside

| |

COMMENT

.

D)

Press

SET

when

f inished.

Still No

comment?

This is

probably

because

the

comment

file

(*.

wed)

wasn' t

Loaded

in

with

ladder in

steps

5 and

6.

A)

Keep

pressing

CLEFT MENUC

key till

you

see the

main

Mitsubishi

Pic

Programming

Tools

Copyright

screen .

B)

Selec t

ENVIRON

.

SETTING

C)

Select

NC

FILE

SETTING

)

E)

Click

on

th e

STORAGE

PATH Box

so

it is highlighted

or just

press

arrow

down

key to

highlight

it.

F)

The

pathway should

be C:

\m6y_ymw\MPLC

G)

Press

SETTING

menu

key.

H)

Press

the Left

menu

key

an

select

NC

FILE

Repeat steps

5

through

10

to

see the ladder with comments.



396

12)

If

ladder

and

comments are shown,

go

to

next

step

to

save ladder

and

comment

file.

13)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

key

till

see

the

Copyright

screen,

th e

LADDER

must

be shown

as

solid

black.

14)

Press

NC

FILE

15)

Press OPEN

16)

Press

OPEN

again.

17)

Select

OK.

18)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

key

till

see

Copyright

screen again.

19)

Select

I EXTERNAL

FILE

20)

Press

SAVE

PROJECT

21)

Press

EXTERNAL

SAVE

22)

If

a

USB jumpdrive

is

inserted,

then

make

sure

that

the

Drive/Path

is set correctly

to

th e

drive.

23)

Select

PROJECT

NAME

24)

Enter

in

an

appropria te

fi lename,

normally

ladder

version .

25 )

Press SAVE.

26)

Select

OK.

The ladder is

now

saved

to

th e

USB

Jumpdrive.

Note: The

LPC

file is

not

saved

with

the

ladder.

It

must be

copied from

the

c:\m6y

ymw\mplc

or

tplc folder.

27)

Save the

*

.

lpc

and

*.alm

and

*.bmp

files

from th e

c:\m6y_ymw\mplc

or tplc

folders using Windows

Explorer.

Note: N ote:

When

the

project

ladder

is

saved

,

it

will

be

a

folder that inc ludes

sub-

folders containing the

ladder

and

comments

.

The

lathe,

e-machine,

and

mill's

file

structure

are

different.

Following

example

shows for Integrex Mark

IV .



397

S~€3

373MX11B

j

B-Q

Resource

• l __ J

Others

JC*U~

B-y

Pou

_

I

_

Size

|

Type

>«*

_

ame

>

LJ

HM

SV'fe

U

Resource

&)Gppw.gpj

_

Project.inf

Select

an item

to

view

its

description.

ProjectDB.mdb

File Folder

1 KB

GX

Developer

Project

3 KB

GX

Developer Project

1

KB

Setup

Information

78

KB

Microsoft Access

Da.

..

373MX11B

l_J

Body

The

Gppw

.

*

, Pro ject

.

in f

, and ProjectDB.mdb

are

structure

files

for

pic.

Do

not

change/remove any

of

these

from the

project's ladder

fi lename.

Under Resource

folder

is addit ional folders,

Others,

Pou,

and

the

file

param.wpa.

Do

not

change/al

ter/remove

any.

I

I

‘JOII1C

[_]

Others

,*7.7*

L-JPOU

11

esource

param.wpa

Name

Size j

Type

317

KB

WCD File

LT:N---

j

wwanwifllt

if]

373MX1

lB.wcd

fe-

Others

The

Others folder

contains

the

comments for

the

ladder

which

is

used for

ladder

display.

Under

the

Pou

folder is a

folder called Body

which contains

the

actual l adder

file

.

Name

/

bize

Type

Li

LIWIWIJ

*]

373MX1

A8 .

wpg

207 KB

WPG

File

Body

As

stated

earlier,

E -mach in e and

Mills

file/folder

structure

may be

different for

the

pic

ladder.



398



399

M atrix

Pic

Ladder Update

Procedure R4 .

Added

saving of

ladder to hard

drive

c:\ladder(step

1

and

13

revised(R4))

1)

Backup the

existing

ladder if not

done

already

and

copy

in the

new

ladder from

portable

device,

probably USB

drive

to

C

:

\Ladder

(R4

)

.

This

ensures that

the ladder

will

be

backed

up

properly

in

future

using the

backup

softwares

.

Note:

Power

off

and

on

between

backup

of ladder so that

the

Ladder Onboard

Sram

doesn ' t

have existing

ladder

in

it

.

First

part

will be to

load

into the

Ladder-F

(M01

area)

,

2nd part

is

to

load into Ladder-B

(M02

area)

.

The

M01

area

controls

actual

machine

and M02

controls

simulation.

These

ladders

are

identical

so

only

need

backup M01 area.

2)

Press

DIAGNOS.

3)

Press VERSION.

Select >RIGHT

MENU>

key

and enter

1131

and

press Input.

4

)

Press

LADDER

MONITOR

5)

Select

NC

FILE

6)

Select

PLC

Run/

Stop

7)

Select YES to

stop

the

pic. Status before

yes

is RUN.

Question

box will

disappear.

Note that doesn' t

say

PLC STOP

like M640.

8)

Press

DELETE

.

again

and

select

)

Press Then

YES

EL. ALL

/CANCEL

DELETE

10)

Press OK.

In

red,

you'll see

WRITE

LADDER

TO ROM.

11)

Press left

menu key twice Select

EXTERNAL

FILE



400

12)

Select OPEN

PROJECT

13)

Highlight

the file

folder

containing

new

pic.

This

should

be

d irec ted to new file

that

was

copied

to

c:\ladder

folder

is

step

1.

(R4)

14)

Press th e

SELECT

button.

15)

Select

OPEN

16)

Press

OK.

17)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

till

see

copyright screen.

18

)

Select

NC

FILE

19)

Press

SAVE.

20)

Press

SAVE

again(2nd time).

If

it

asks

if

you

wish to

overwrite, say ALL YES.

21)

Press

OK.

22)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

key.

23)

Press

RO M

WRITE

This

will clear

out

the

ladder from

SRAM

area.

24 )

Select

YES.

25 )

Select

YES

again

(2nd

t ime)

when it

asks

you if

you

really

want

to

execute.

If the

pic

is

somehow

running,

th e

following wil l

be

as

ked

.

A)

Select

YES

again

(3rd

t ime)

It wil l

ask you again, PLC is

in

Run

state,

Is a ROM write

performed,

after stop PLC?



401

Translation:

Pic

is

now running, the

p ic

will

automatically

stop

and

do

a

ROM write .

Is this okay?

B)

Select

YES

(4th

t ime)

when

message

will

say

PLC

is in

a

STOP STATE.

Is

PLC

changed into a

RUN

state?

26)

Press

OK.

27)

Select

PLC

Run/

Stop

28)

Select

YES

if

the

status

window says:

STATUS:

STOP.

If

says STATUS: Start,

then

proceed

to

step

29 to

update

the

second

ladder

Ladder-B

(M02)

29)

Press

CLEFT

MENUC

key

till

see

menu

ENVIRON

SETTING

30)

Select

CONNECT

NC

SETTING

31 )

Press the

Down

Arrow key or

click

on

drop

down

menu

so

that

is displays

M02

in

box.

and M02 wil l be displayed in

Orange

M022)

Press

SET

color

at

the lower

r ight

hand side

of

display.

33)

At this

point

repeat

steps

5

through

28

to load

in

th e

pic

to

the

Ladder-B side

(M02)

34 )

Before

exiting

go

back to

ENVIRON.

SETTING,

CONNECT

NC

SETTING,

and

press

Down Arrow key to

reselect

M01

.

35)

If

the

lpc

file is to be

updated,

delete

or

rename

the

current lpc file in

the

c:\M6y_ymw\M_plc

or

T_plc

folder.

The

copy

the new file into that

directory.

36)

Power

off

and

on

and

update

is

complete.

Verify by

looking

at

the

version screen.



402

403

1 Outline

This

document

describes the maintenance

of

the

thermal

displacement

compensation

software

(MazakTdc).

The traditional

thermal

displacement compensation

function

has

performed

the

compensation

considering

that

the

thermal

deformation

of

the machine was

proportional to the

temperature. Using

this

method,

the thermal

displacement

could

be compensated

with

high

accuracy

in the

steady

state.

However, just

after

the

spindle speed

was

changed,

it

could

not

be

compensated

properly

because

the

time

constants

for the

temperature

change

are

significantly

different between the thermal

displacement

and

the measured

temperature.

The thermal

displacement

compensation

software

(MazakTdc)

estimates

and

compensates

the

thermal

deformation

of

the

machine based

on

the

spindle

speed

and

the

temperature.

It

monitors

the

spindle

speed

and

compensates

the thermal

displacement according

to

the

speed.

Therefore,

it can

compensate

it properly

even

in the

transient

state.

2

Installation

of

the

MazakTdc software

2.1

Function

setting on

Matrix

The

software

has been

pre-installed

in the

hardware

on Matrix.

To

validate the software

function,

set the

parameter

as

follows:

Step

1

Set

the parameter

042 bit4

to

1.

That

will allow

“MazakTdc.exe” to

be

started

when

the

power is

turned on.

2.2

Individual installation

The following

describes

the

procedure

for the

individual

installation

of the

MazakTdc”

software.

Step

1

Create a

new

folder

named C:¥Mazaktdc.”

Step

2

Copy the

“MazakTdc.exe file from a media such

as

a

USB

memory

or

a

floppy disk to the

created

folder “C:¥Mazaktdc.

If

you already

have

a

parameters

file,

copy it to

the same

folder

as the

EXE

file.

f-lnlxl

lWESiTB

'

“

Mazaktdc

?

yJWQ

Sim®

77Tiioiir

-

M

7-f

X/tV9

£3

3.5

CA

•

8

<C

)

_)

Act

obat Reader

_J

Cpcu

_

J

Custom

Display

JSctbus

Ladder

Ladder3

L_J

Ladder

4

:_J LADDERWTNB

;+•

i I

m6y_vmvv

It

Cj

mtyboot

:

1

Mainte

At

/; ; :

MazakTdc.exe

FD

(A.)

fij] Parameler.txt

60KB

4KB

747ÿ#

J

JIDSB

_J MC.Backup

_J

MC'.Dir.ct

_J

MC .

Machine

P'2jÿ

iL ZJ

(ZSmim

:;a=i



404

3 Version upgrade

of the

MazakTdc software

3.1

Version

upgrade

on

MATRIX

The version

upgrade

of

“MazakTdc.exe” will be automatically

performed

when

upgrading

the

version

of the NC software.

The

operations

described in

”3.2

Full version

upgrade

of the MazakTdc

software”

might be

required

due

to

a

modification

to

“MazakTdc.exe.”

In

that

case,

that

will be

informed

in the

NC

software

release

notice.

3.2

Full

version

upgrade of the MazakTdc

software

When

upgrading

the version

of

the

“MazakTdc”

software after

its

data

structure is

changed,

the

parameters

used in the previous

version

might

possibly

be

applied after

the

version

upgrade

is

completed,

resulting

in a malfunction.

Therefore,

perform

the

following procedure to

prevent

the

previous

parameters

from

being

applied

after the

version upgrade:

Step

1

Before

starting

the NC

version upgrade,

open

the

“MazakTdc”

window and

save

the

current

parameters

in

the

folder

“C:¥Mazaktdc.”

•

As

for how

to

open

the

“MazakTdc”

window,

refer

to

“5

Opening

the

window.”

•

As

fo r how to

save

a parameters file,

refer

to

“8

Controlling

the

parameters.”

•

If

no

change

was made

to the

parameters on

a

customer’s

machine,

it is not

needed to

save

the

parameters

because

the

file

of

the

default

parameters

at delivery

already

exists in the

folder

“C:¥Mazaktdc.”

Clicking on

the

Sr

button will

open

the

dialog

of

''Coefficient2 Setting..,

shown on

the right.

Step

2

H

*J

Coefficient2

Setting.

X Y Z

Cl

|

o'oOOOOE+00

92

I

0.000Q0E+Q0

d

|

......

nnr-nn

c2

|

0.00000E+00

cl

j

9.88000E-01

c2|

790oioOE-03

There

are

12

parameters

to

be

set,

e1 to e4,

for

X,

Y

and

Z

in

the

lower

part

of the

dialog

cii;

j

o.oooooE+00

d2

j

0

OOOOOE+OO

d1

|

8.823S3E-01

d1 j

O.OOOOOE+00

c)2

]

O.OOOOOE+OO

2 3.2941

0E-02

Set

all

the values

of

these

parameters to

“0.”

0.00 ei 0.00

el

J

0.00

e2

2

0.00

e2

0.00

0.00

e’3 0.00 e3

0.00

0.00 0.00

Then,

click the “OK” button

after changing

the

parameters

to

close

the

dialog.

e4

0.00

4

e4

L

_

«

CANCEL

Step

3

Exit

the running

“MazakTdc” software.

Refer

to

“4.2 Exiting

the software.”

Step

4

Perform

the

NC

version upgrade

Step

5

Restart

the

NC unit.

Confirm

that

the

“MazakTdc” software was

started.

The icon will

appear

in

the

task

tray.

Step

6

Stop

the

thermal

displacement

compensation.

Click

the

M button

to

stop

the compensation.

405

Step

7 Import

the

parameters

file.

Open

the

window, referring

to “5

Opening

the

window.”

Import

the

new parameters

file, referring

“8

Controlling the

parameters.”

Step

8 Check

the

parameters.

Confirm

that

the

parameters

set to

0

in

Step

2

returned

to

1.

Step

9 Restart

Exit the

“MazakTdc”

software

and

restart

the NC unit.

3.3

Individual

version

upgrade

of

the

MazakTdc

software

The

following

describes

the procedure

for the individual

version

upgrade

of the “MazakTdc

software,

which is not

involved

in

the version

upgrade

of

the

NC software.

Step 1 Open

the MazakTdc” window

and save the current

parameters

as

a

file

in the

folder

“C:¥Mazaktdc.”

•

As

for

how

to

open

the

“MazakTdc”

window,

refer to

“5

Opening

the

window.”

•

As for how to

save

the

parameters file, refer

to

“8

Controlling

Parameter.”

•

If no

change

was made

to

the

parameters for

a

customer’s

machine,

it

is

not

needed

to

save

a

parameters

file

because

the

file of

the

default

parameters

at

delivery

already

exists

in the folder

“C:¥Mazaktdc.”

i::

I

m

*

tep

2

Clicking on the

&

button

will

open

the

dialog

of

“Coefficient2

Setting..,”

shown on

the right.

Coefficient

Setting;.

X

v

z

C1

j

OOOOOOE+OO

:

C1

|

O.OOOOOE+OO

C1

'ÿ]

9.88000E

01

e2 j

0.00000E+00

c2|

O.OirULE-IO

c2

j

7.90C€ObTT

There

are 12

parameters

to

be

set,

e1 to

e4,

for

X,

Y

and

Z

in

the

lower

part of

the

dialog

Set all the values

of

these

parameters

to

d1

j

O.OOOOOE+OO

02

j

O.OOOOOE+OO

dl

j

8.82353E 01

02

|

3 2941

OE-02

d1 j

0.00000E+00

d2

|

O.OOOOOE+OO

“0.”

0.00

0.00

e i

o.oo

1

e2

0

00

e3

j

0.00

64

0.00

64

0.00 0.00

4

Then, click

the

“OK”

button after

changing

the

parameters

to

close

the

dialog.

lr~:g<

J

CANCEL

Step

3 Exit

the

running

MazakTdc” software

Refer to “4.2

Exiting

the software.”

Step

4

Open the folder

”C:¥Mazaktdc”

through

the

Explorer

and

change

the name of the

“MazakTdc.exe file

by

adding

the

version

number

that

is currently

installed

in

order

to

prevent

the file

from

being

overwritten.

(For example, the

name

of

the

old

version

file

was

changed

to

“MazakTdc62.exe”

in

the

figure

on

the

next page.)



406

Step 5

Copy

the

“MazakTdc.exe”

file from a

media

such as

a USB

memory

or

a floppy

disk to the folder.

HSBj

lj

Iÿtl-7

-

CÿMazakTdo

U7XfcP

-------

...._

-----

..

5

El

ritd

jtMg

*> | y|g| »,|

3

MazakTdc

Ml

1X03*1*8

]

i

d)

Hsf

A

]-

10]

J2ctbus

i

Q

Kev

£0-0]

Ladder

53'

0D

lan_card_driver_pcislot_c||i

3

d)

m6y_ymw

lil-dl

m6yboot

E3 ‘

Lfl

mainte

;

03

MazakTdc

\B

03

MC_Backup

)•

i.,1

MC_Direct

Mode

Prograr||l

i

d)

MC_Machine Programs

|||

h

d) MC_Machine Programs

'0

360KB

7V.

K

MazakTdc.exe

MazakTdc62.exe

Parameter txt

|

360KB

77*

3KB

74;

3KB

74;:

1

Para meter0505

1

7#

1

.txt

il

I

[725KB

.3tGB)

\i

mcofiVift

s'1-

/t

x

Step

6

Double

click

on

“MazakTdc.exe.’’

Confirm

that

the

“MazakTdc”

software

was

started.

The

icon

will

appear

in

the task

tray.

Step

7 Check

the

version of

the “MazakTdc” software.

As

for

the

check

procedure,

refer

to

“4 Basic function

operations.”

Step

8 Import a

parameters

file.

Open

the window,

referring

to

“4

Basic

function

operations.”

Read

a

new

parameters

file

in,

referring to

“8

Controlling

the

parameters.”

Step 9

Check the

parameters.

Check

that

the

parameter

value

changed

to

0

in Step

2 returned

to

1

.

Check

the

value

of

each

parameter,

referring

to “7

Functions in the

window.”

Step 10 Restart

Exit

the

“MazakTdc”

software

and restart

the NC unit.



407

4

Basic

function

operations

4.1

Manual start of the

software

Step

1

To

manually

start

the

software,

double

click

on

“MazakTdc.exe.”

—

The icon

will

appear

in the

task

tray.

__

:1

?

The

thermal

displacement

compensation

will

begin just

after

the software is started.

4.2

Exiting

the

software

Step

1

Move

the mouse

pointer over the

icon

in

the task

tray.

jMazakTdc‘|

m

,a49

Step

2 Right

click

on

the

icon.

-*ÿ

The

“Exit” menu

will

appear.

f

U

1

j?;58

About MasakTcb...

Exit

Step

3 Left click on the

“Exit”

menu.

-»

The software will be exited.

When the software

is exited,

the thermal

displacement

compensation

will

stop.

4.3 How

to

check the software version

Step

1

Move

the

mouse pointer over the

icon in

the

task

tray.

[l£ 19:49

Step

2 Right

click

on the icon.

—

>•

The

“About MazakTdc...”

menu will

appear.

Exit

|P'~

II

About MazakTdc...

S

20:00

Step

3

Left click on the

“About MazakTdc...”

menu.

—

1

•

The

dialog

with the version

information

will

appear.

a

bout

Ma2akTDC

3

azakTdc Version

Beta

6.6

OK

Copyright

(C) 2005

Yamazaki Mazak

Corp.



408

5

Opening the window

Opening the

window

will

allow you to

set,

change,

save and

import

the

parameters.

To

open

the

window,

it

is

required

to

enter

the

password.

5.1

Entering

the password

Step

1

Move

the

mouse

pointer

over

the

icon

in the

task

tray.

I

fMazakTdc’l

19:49

Step

2

Double click

on

the icon.

-*

The

“Password”

dialog will

appear.

Password

rÿr~i CANCEL

Step

3

Enter the

password

”1131”

and

then

press

the

“OK”

button

[3

assword

II

r

]

CANCEL

h

The

“Mazak

Thermal

Displacement Compensation”

window

will

appear.

HE

Simulation Mode-

Mazak

Thermal Deformation

Compensation

issiti

ile

Edit

Compensation:

Setting..

View Help

:

jjH

:

JJfe

m

ffi

foj

ab

Cd

;

§

f

j

I

j

’

[HUM

j

:ÿ

;

Ready



409

6 Contents shown

in the

window

The

window provides

the

software

processing

information, the

measured

temperatures,

the

spindle

speed, the

spindle

load

and

the

offset

amounts.

The

following

shows

the

state

of

the window just after the

compensation

begins.

Mode-

Mazak

Thermal Deformation

Compensation

-in|xi

File Edit

Compensation

Setting.

View

Help

B

ab

ced

#

fj

3

Loading

DataCom OK .

.NCTable

is attached

correctly

;Data

Initialize

OK .

;Fin>t

Temperature : 20.80

;Start

thermal deformation

compensation

;ye

a

r/d ate/time

T1

05/06/27

19:46:09;

20.85

20.75

21.98

20.52

0.00

Processing

information

T2

T3

mSp

mLd

4

T5

cmp.X

cmp.Y

cmp.Z

6.000

-6.000

16.0004

Iv

V

V.

V. J

V

NUM

-

Offset

amount

-

X,

Y

&

Z

...4.

.

jf||

Compensation

time

—

ear/Month/Day

Hours:Minutes:Seconds

r-r

Measured

temperature

ch1,

2,

3, 4

& 5

Spindle

Info.

Speed

& load

|

After

the

compensation

begins,

only

the

compensation information

is

displayed in

the

windows as

the

time passes.

The measured temperatures

will

be

shown

in

the

order of

ch1, ch2, ch3,

ch4

and

ch5

immediately

after the

“time” column.

-

~|xj

Simulation

Mode-

Mazak

Thermal

Deformation

Compensation

File

Edit

Compensation

Setting..

View

Help

i

H

|

&

m

[

m

m

ab

%«

TToil

'20.47

Food

22.07

|

j

20

52

1

I 0.00

20.47

|

I

0.00

20.47 |

|

0.00

20.47

I

I

0.00

22.03 20.47

]

|

0.00

21.98

I

20.47

I

I

0.00

05/06/27

19:48:03:

20.95

05/06/27 19:43:13;

20.95

05/06/27 19:48:23

;

20.95

05/06/27 19:43:33

;

20.95

05/06/27

19:43:43

;

20.98

05/06/27

19:43:53;

20.95

05/06/27

19:4903;

20 95

j

20.75]

20.70

20.75

20.75

20.75

20.75

|

20.75

|

t.

000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

-6.500

12.500

-6.500 12.500

-6.500

12.500

-6.500

12.500

-6.500 12.500

-6.500

12.500

-6.500 12.500

7

22.03

22.12

22.03

7

7

7'

[

.........

NUM

eady

§§

ch1

ch2 ch3

ch4 ch5



410

7

Functions

in

the

window

7.1

Functions

Menu

Bar Title

Icon

The

description

of the function

File

Save

Overwrite

save the text in the window to the specified

file in

the

Text

format.

Save

As..

Save

the

text

in

the

window as

a

new

file

in

the

Text

format.

Import

Parameter

Import

the

parameters

file (extension: *.txt). However,

it

cannot

be

imported

while

performing

the

thermal

displacement compensation.

If

you try

to import the

file

during

the

compensation,

the alarm

“Please Stop

Compensating

will

appear.

_

xport

and

save

the

parameters

to a file (extension: *.txt)

xport

Parameter

Exit

Exit

the

software.

Edit

Undo

Undo

the

previous

editing

operation.

Cut

Cut

the

selected

text

in

the

window.

&

Copy

Copy

the

selected

text

in the

window.

fli

Paste

Paste the copied

or

cut

text to

the

window.

Select All

Select

all

the

texts

in

the

window.

Compensation

Start

Start

the thermal displacement

compensation.

ffi

Stop

Stop

the

thermal

displacement

compensation.

Setting..

Inter Face Open

the

Inter Face

parameters

setting dialog.

Coefficient Open

the Coefficient

parameters

setting

dialog.

ab

Coefficient2 Open

the Coefficient2

parameters

setting

dialog.

View

Toolbar

Show

or

hide

the tool bar.

Status

Bar

Show

or

hide

the

status bar.

Hide

Window

Hide the

“Mazak

Thermal Displacement Compensation”

window.

(To show

the

window

again,

double click

the

icon in

the

task

tray.)

elp

About

Mazak Tdc..

Show

the version

dialog.

f

7.2

Setting

the

interface

parameters.

Clicking the

button on

the

tool

bar

will

open

the

“Inter

Face Setting” dialog. The following

table

provides

the description

of

each parameter.

a

Inter

Face

Setting..

j—

NC

Type

-

|

C

M640T,MT,TE,MT-5X,T

Nexus

;

C

M64DM,

M-5X, M

Nexus

j C

M640M

Pro

j

r

M640MT Pro

i

f?

MATRIX

Interval

(sec)

0

ollow

up

(hour)

Time

Constant

10emp filter

20

register

IJF

Compensation

Load filter

Temperature

RT1

|

2234

)001

mm

ound Unit

RX

2501

|

2230

Y

(2500

RT2

i

RZ 2226

RT3

]

2232

RT4

fo

RT5

[

0

r

Restore Log File

Rsts

j

0

iLlgilJl

CANCEL

jo.uOOQI

mm

|

nit



411

Parameter

Default

Set

Range

I/O

Object*

Description

NO

Type

Select

Select

the

type

of

the

NC

unit for the machine.

If

no NC

type

is

selected

(which is

the

default

state),

the

compensation

will not

begin.

_

N/A

Interval

(sec)

10 0 to

3599

The

interval

that the

thermal

displacement

compensation is

performed.

If

the

set value

is

0,

the compensation

will be

automatically

performed

at

the

interval

of 10

seconds,

which

is

default.

O

Follow

up

(hour)

3

Oto

24

Follow-up

time. If the

se t value is

0,

the

follow-up

will

not

be

performed.

_

O

Time

Constant

0 Oto 30

Width

of the dead

zone

Temp

filter

0

Oto 30

Number

of

the

moving

average

filters

to be

input

for the

temperature

data

_

Load

filter 0

0

to 30

Number

of

the moving

average

filters

to be

input

for the

load data

_

Round

Unit 0.0005mm

Rounding

unit.

Basically apply

the same unit as

that

of

the

NC

interpolation.

_

RX

0 0 to

20000 R

Register No.

which the

X-axis thermal

displacement

offset

amount is written

to.

If

the

set

value is

0,

the

offset amount

will not be

written.

O

RY

0

0

to

20000

R Register

No. which the

Y-axis

thermal

displacement

offset amount

is written

to.

If

the

set

value

is

0,

the offset

amount will

not

be

written.

O

RZ

0

0

to

20000

R Register

No. which

the

Z-axis

thermal

displacement

offset

amount

is

written to.

If

the

set

value

is

0,

the

offset

amount will not

be

written.

O

Rsts

Read

the

state of

the machine

in.

RT1 0

0

to

20000

R

Register No.

from

which the

NC

value of the

temperature

sensor

1

is read

in.

If

the

set

value

is

0,

the

NC

value of

the

temperature

sensor

will not be read

in.

(The

value

will

be

0.)

_

O

RT2

0

0 to 20000

R Register

No. from which the NC

value

of

the

temperature

sensor

2

is

read in

If

the

set

value

is

0,

the

NC value

of

the

temperature

sensor

will not

be read

in .

(The

value

will

be

0.)

_

O

RT3

0

0

to 20000

R

Register

No. from which

the

NC value

of

the

temperature

sensor

3

is read

in.

If

the

set

value

is

0,

the NC

value of the

temperature

sensor

will

not be read

in.

(The

value

will

be

0.)

_

O

RT4

0 0

to

20000 R

Register

No. from which

the NC

value

of

the

temperature

sensor

4

is read in . If the

set

value

is

0,

the

NC

value

of

the

temperature

sensor

will

not be

read in.

(The

value will

be

0.)

_

O

RT5

0

0

to

20000

Number

of R

register

f rom which the

NC

value

of

the

temperature

sensor 5 is

read

in.

If the

set value

is

0,

the

NC

value

of the

temperature

sensor

will not be

read in .

(The

value

will

be 0.)

O

Unit

0.0001mm

Unit of

offset

amount

Restore

Log

File

Check

Checking

this

check

box

will

automatically

save

the

thermal

displacement

compensation history

to

the “C:¥MazakTdcLog.txt”

file. This function

is valid

at debugging.

However,

if

debugging

with this

parameter

checked,

the

file

size

will

gradually

increase,

running

out

free

space

on

the hard

drive.

Therefore,

this

parameter

is not

checked

every

time

when

starting

the software

as default.

X

N/A

NOTE: The mark

“O”

indicates

a

parameter

that is

subject

to

and the

mark

“x

indicates

a

parameter

that is

not subject to

the

Import

Parameter

or

the

Export

Parameter

function.

412

7.3

Setting

the

parameters

(coefficients

a & b).

Clicking the

button on

the tool

ba r

will

open

the

following

“Coefficientl setting..” dialog.

The

description of

each

parameter

is

provided

in

the

table

below.

ill

oefficientl Sett

ing..

_

9

X

Y

b

—

z

9.9S552E-01

b1

j

O.OOOOOE+OO

b1

j

9

96222E

01

b2

|

-1 09026E-05

b2

|

UOOOOOE+OO

b2

1

-8.54373E-06

b3

mSSFEg' '

b3

|

0

OOOOOE+00

b3

jTo6663E-10

9

2UnB(ir-14

b4

|

0 ODOOOE+OO

b4

j

-4 07307E-1

3

z X

Y

:

M(1

1

|

-7.33

1

-1

.23

a1

-5

98

a2

j

2

24

o2

179

a2

9

76

a3

j

-3.92

a3|

6

91

a3[~278

j

04

1

3.05

o4

|

-1

.56

a4

I

1.73

i

t*r

j

b5 }*

1

12160E 07

b5

I

0

00000E+00

b5

I

-1

68425E-06

5|

0

00 as

j

o

no

as

j

0.00

a6

j

-23

.16

a6

j

-27.70

j

b6

I

-7

79079E-04

b6

|

0

OODOOE+OO

b7

|

-2 58678E-04

b7

|

0 00C0CIE+00

b7

j

5.91

733E-03

0

OODOOE+OO

b8|

O.OOOOoifoO

b8 j

0

OOCOOE+OO

|

b9

1

0.000C0E+00 b9

j

O.OOOOOE+OO

b9

j

0

00C00E+G0

0.00000E+00

b10

j

-5.00000E+01

b6

j

-1

892S2E-036|-291

'

.

j

j

bs l

Wm

V

-

I

b10

j

-2

S000UE+01

b10j

BBSs

Ik

S3

j

y

CANCEL

Parameter

Default Set Range

I/O

Description

Object*

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

1 0

Coefficient of the

temperature

term

for

the structure

thermal displacement

compensation

_

-3.0e38 to

+3.0e38

2 0

Coefficient of

the

temperature

term

for the structure


compensation

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

3 0

Coefficient of

the

temperature

term

for

the

structure


compensation

Coefficient

of

the

temperature

term

for

the

structure

thermal displacement compensation

_

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

4

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

5 0

Coefficient of

the

temperature

term

for the structure

thermal

displacement

compensation

Constant

of

the

structure

thermal

displacement

compensation

O

-3.0e38

to

+3.0e38

6 0

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

1 0

Coefficient of the

displacement

term

for the

spindle

response

surface

O

-3.0e38

to

+3.0e38

2 0

Coefficient of

the speed term

for

the

spindle response

surface

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

3 0

Coefficient of

the

speed squared

term for the

spindle

response

surface

-3.0e38

to

+3.0e3r4

0

Coefficient of

the speed

cubic

term

for

the

spindle

response

surface

O

-3.0e38

to

+3.06ÿ

5 0

Coefficient

of the (speed

x

displacement) term

for

the

spindle

response

surface

O

-3.0e38

to +3.0e38

6

0

Speed

ON/OFF for

the

spindle response

surface

-3.0e38 to

+3.0e38

7

0

Speed

UP/DOWN

for the

spindle response

surface

-3.0e38

to

+3.0e35'

8

0

Squared nominal

load

coefficient

for

the

spindle

response

surface

O

-3.0e38 to +3.0e38

9

0

Not used

-3.0e38 to

+3.0e38

10

0

Determine the

limit

(the range

of

the

offset

displacement).

The

offset

amount

by

the

spindle

response

surface

is limited to

the

range

of b10

to

0

if

b10

<

0;

and 0

to b10

if

b10

>

0.

(If

b10

=

0,

no

limit.)

O

NOTE: The mark

“O”

indicates

a

parameter

that is

subject

to

and the

mark

“

x

’’

indicates

a

parameter

that

is

not

subject to

the

Import

Parameter or

the Export

Parameter

function.



413

7.4

Setting

the

parameters

(coefficients

c,

d

& e).

Clicking the button on

the

tool bar will open

the

following

“Coefficientl setting..” dialog. The

description of each parameter

is provided

in

the

table

below.

*J

1

X Y

2

d

r

f

1

|

0.00000E+00

C2

f

n

OOOOOE+OO

c2

j

O.OOOOOE+00

0

00000E+00 9 88000E-01

c2

7.90000E-03

m

d1

|

0.00000E+00

eft

]

852353F

-01

d2

faoooooF+00

e1

1

di

O.OOOOOE+OO

d2 [

d2

f

.2941

0E-02

0 OOOOOE+OO

e1

1.00

1.00

1

00

82

1

e3

e3

(

e2

I

1

00

00

2

0.00

e3

10000

j—

e4T

oc 1 00

e4

0

00

4

iniMzm

CANCEL

l

Parameter

Default

Set Range I/O

Object*

Description

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

1 0

Displacement compensation

coefficient 1

in

natural

cooling

at

the

spindle stop.

_

O

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

2 0

Displacement

compensation

coefficient

2 in

natural

cooling

at

the spindle

stop.

_

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

1

0

Distortion

compensation

coefficient

1

in natural

cooling

at

the

spindle

stop.

_

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

2

0

Distortion

compensation

coefficient

2 in

natural

cooling

at

the spindle

stop.

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

1

0

Structure

thermal

displacement

compensation

is

valid

O

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

2 0

Spindle

thermal displacement compensation with

the spindle

response

surface

i s va lid

_

O

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

3

0

Displacement

compensation

in

natural

cooling

at

the

spindle

stop

is

valid

_

-3.0e38~+3.0e38

4

0

Distortion

compensation in

natural

cooling

at the

spindle

stop

i s val id

_

414

8 Controlling the

parameters

8.1

Saving the

parameters

to

a

file

Save

the current

setting

to

a parameters

file

(*.txt).

Step

1 Click

“File”

and

then

“Export

Parameter.”

The

following

dialog

will

appear.

Coirc-n.

jturv

g

Save

Import

Parameter

Save

Export

Parameter

&it

Step

2

Set the

file name

and

click the

“Save” button.

Save

In:

|

.jj

t,ta».w«io

Parartveter.txt

IBBHH-

]

ilename:

Save

astute

fiTI

Save

Cancel

]

FilesOMxO

8.2

Importing

the

parameters

from the

file

Import

the

parameters

file (*.txt). It

is

required

to

save the

parameters

file in

the

“Mazaktdc”

folder.

(However,

the parameters

cannot

be

imported during

the

thermal

displacement

compensation.)

Step

1

Click “File”

and

then

“Import

Parameter.”

The following

dialog will

appear.

Edit

.Compensation

Save

.

CtrKS

Save As.

:

Export

Parameter

Exit;

Step

2

Select the

parameters

file

to

be

used

from

the

“Mazaktdc”

folder

and then click the

“Open”

button.

H

aJdjl=Tj

ave;|n:

j

Mazaktdc

ll)

Farameter.txt

Save

]

ilename:

..

Save

as

type:

j

T*

:< t

Files

(ÿ

txO

Cancel



415

Step 3

Exit the

“Mazaktdc” software

once

and restart it.

(As for

how

to exit

or start

the

software,

refer to “3

Basic function

operations.”)

By

performing

the above

steps,

the

parameter

will be

saved

in

the

registry.

8.3

Name of the

parameters

file

Define

and

identify

the

name

of

the

parameters file

as

follows:

Machine standard

parameter

tdcOOOAAAAA.txt

Identifies

that

it is

the

thermal

displacement

parameters

file.

Machine code

A

A

A

A A

:

Identifies

the

added

number,

the

machine specification or the

parameter

version.

Determine

the

string

and

the

digit

number

for

every machine

tdc

OOO

EX)

tdc

372A0000.txt

(in

case of

INT100)

tdc

OOODHBAA.txt

O: Machine

code

Version

identification

A:

Special-ordered

A:

Revision to the

special-ordered one

9 Work

involved

in

the

hard-disk

replacement

When

replacing

the

hard

disk,

perform

the

following

procedure

to the

MazakTdc” software.

Item

necessary

to

be

prepared:

Media such as

a

USB

memory

Step

1

Save

(export)

the

parameters.

Save

the

parameters in

the

M azaktdc”

folder,

referring

to

“8.

Controlling

the parameters.

Note:

If

no

change

was made to the

parameters

on a

customer’s

machine,

it

is not

needed

to

save

the parameters

because

the file

of

the

default

parameters

at delivery

already

exists in the folder

C:¥Mazaktdc.”

Step

2

Save

the

“*.txt files under the

“C:¥Mazaktdc”

folder to

the

media.

Step

3

Replace

the

hard

disk.

Step 4

Turn

on

the

power

and

copy

the

*.txt”

file

in

the

media

to

the

“C:¥Mazaktdc”

folder.

Step

5

Import

the

parameters,

referring to

“4

Basic function

operations,” “5

Opening

the

window

and

“8

Controlling the

parameters.”

Step

6

Turn

off

and

then

turn

on

the

power

to check that

the

MazakTdc”

software

is started

up.

416

10

Recovering

the wire

breaking on a

thermistor

The alarm

“THERMAL

DISPLACEMENT OFFSET

ERROR”

will

arise

when

the wire

breaking occurs

on

a

thermistor.

The

CH

temperature

value will change

for a

thermistor

with the

wire

breaking

and

the

offset amount

will considerably change

in

the

“Mazaktdc”

window, as

shown

in

the

figure

below.

-

a)x|

Simulation

Mode-

Mazak

Thermal Deformation

Compensation

File

Edit

Compensation

Setting..

View

Help

ab

%< l

:

®c

v

3V

ffi

Z

20.521

goo

ill

5/06/27

19:48:03;

20.95

05/06/27

19:48:13;

20.95

05/06/27

19:48:23;

20.95

05/06/27

19:48:33;

20.95

05/06/27

19:43:43; 20.98

05/08/27

19:43:53;

20.95

05/06/27

19.49:03;

20 95

20.75

20.70

20.75

20.75

20.75

20.75

2075

21.98

22.07

22.03

22.12

22.03

22.03

21.93

6.500 12.50l>

6.500

12.500

6.500 12.500

6.500 12.500

6.500

12.500

6.500 12.500

6.500

12.500,

0.00

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

7

1

0.00 7 4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

4.500

Normal

state

0.47

0.00

20.47

0.00

20.47

0.00

20.47

/

0.00

£0.4/

0.00

7

7

J

7

7

jo o

1

Jll:

rÿm

r™

4

eady

Considerably

change

Simulation

Mode-

Mazak

Thermal

Deformatio|i

Cot

warn

in|x|

File

Edit

Compensation

Setting.

View

Help

H

'

*>

BV

ff i

tefr

ab

Cfl

) ffjfe

r

.3

5/08/27

19:58:03;

20.95

05/06/27

19:53:13;

20.95

05/08/27

19:58:23;

20.95

05/06/27

19:58:33;

20.95

05/06/27

19:58:43;

20.98

05/06/27

19:58:53;

20.95

05/06/27

19:59:03;

20.95

20.75

20.70

20.75

20.75

20.75

20.75

20.75

21.98

22.07

22.03

22.12

22.03

22.03

21.98

\-44.1i

£44.1

a 0.00

-44.16\

0.00

-44.16 1

0.00

-44.16

j

0.00

-44.16

I

0.00

-44.161

0.00

7

#7?)

.500

-49.500 -36.500*

76.500 -53.500

-41.000

82.500

-57 .500 -45 .500

88.500 -61.500 -50.000

98.500 -65.500

-54.500

100.000

-69.500 -59.000

'WO

.000

-73.500

-63.500

State at the

wire

breaking

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

3000

7

7

7

|

7

-J

7

0.00 7

d

il

[RUM

f

eady

i

-Simulation

Mode-

Mazak

Thermal

Deformatioij

Compent ,IOjxj

Recovered

ile

Edit

Compensate

Setting..

View

a

m

ui

ffi

--

.b

w

@

?

V

i

~j

Will

not recover

Il

i

soon

after action

I

State

that the

wire

breaking

was

recovered

3

5/06/27

20:03:03;

20.95

05/06/27 20

:03

:

1

3;

20

.95

05/O6/27

20:03:23;

20.95

05/06/27

20:03:33;

20.95

05/06/27

20:03:43;

20.98

05/06/27

20:03:53; 20

95

05/06/27 20:03:03;

20.95

20.75

21.98

20.70 22.07

20.75

22.03

20.75

22.12

20.75

22.03

20.75 22.03

20.75

21.98

-44

16

0.00

-44 16

0.00

0.00

0.00

20.47\

0.00

20.47

0.00

20.47/

0.00

-80.500

• 85 000

• 8 9.500

«yÿv000

'SfoO.OOO

-81.500

-89.5(315%

-100.000 -77 500 -85.000

-100.000

-73.500

-S0[5G0ÿ

.500

• 8#0

3000

3000

3000

3000

7

-1Q|

7

7

7

d

Ready

;NUM

l

A

After finding

the wire

breaking on

a thermistor,

recover

it

according

to

the procedure

below.

Step

1

Open

the

MazakTdc”

window and

check

the

temperature

values

and the

offset

amounts

of

the thermistor

channels (CH

1

to

5)

for

wire

breaking.

Step

2 Press

the “Emergency”

button on the machine.

Step

3

Recover

the wire breaking

of

a

thermistor.

Step

4 Confirm

that

the

temperature

value

of

a

channel

with the

wire

breaking

was recovered

on

the

“MazakTdc” window.

(It

will take a

longer

time

for the

offset

amount

to return to

the

normal state due

to the

filders.)

Step

5 Restart the

“MazakTdc”

software.

(As

fo r how to exit and

start

the

“MazakTdc”

software

refer to “4

Basic

function operations.”

Step

6

Confirm

that

the temperature

value

and

the

offset

amount

were

recovered.

11

Handling

procedure

after turning the production

machine

ON

It

is

required

to

import

the

parameters

after

turning

the

production

machine

ON .

The

following

provides

the

procedure.

Step 1

Copy

the

specified

parameters

file

“*.txt” to

the

“C:¥Mazaktdc” folder.

[ W.tj'grl

- n|x|

azaktdc

PS.-OTP

:. SrSW

:

MW*

S

X* j| I

iÿNiMasakTde.exe

jgj

Parameter

trt

rx)frr

M

71

3>t>S

S)

35<>f

FD

(A;)

B-®

<Ci

i

B

d

AcrobatReader

Cl

C >~

(_J

Custom

Display

:

J2ctbus

O

Ladder

gj

Ladders

Cj

Ladder4

£j

LADDERWTNB

;

©DmSv.ymw

SI

m6yboot

g)

Mamte

dEHHSS

&

d

MC.Backee

J

60KB

TfWÿWj

4KB

747K£#

-

Cj

MC.Direct

Mode P

n[

1

MC_Machme

Pfogrÿl

I

JLL

J

di

2

10©*?%'*.:

Step

2 Start

“MazakTdc.exe”

manually.

Refer

to

“4

Basic

function operations.”

Step 3 Open

the

window.

Refer to

“5

Opening

the window.”

Step

4

Import

the

parameters.

Refer

to

“8

Controlling

the parameters.”

Step

5

Click the

button

to close the

window.

Step

6

Exit “MazakTdc.exe.” Refer to

“4.2 Exiting

the software.”

Step 7

Set the

parameter

for the

software

functions

on Matrix so

that

the

“MazakTdc” software

Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E

Documents

Transcript of Mazak Mazatrol Matrix Control Classroom Maintenance Manual C740MT0201E